texlive[44985] Master/texmf-dist/doc: latex2e-help-texinfo (8aug17)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Tue Aug 8 22:38:59 CEST 2017
Revision: 44985
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=44985
Author: karl
Date: 2017-08-08 22:38:58 +0200 (Tue, 08 Aug 2017)
Log Message:
-----------
latex2e-help-texinfo (8aug17)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ltx-help.el
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.0 from
+This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.1 from
latex2e.texi.
This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document
-preparation system, version of October 2015.
+preparation system, version of August 2017.
This manual was originally translated from 'LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D.
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@
and C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users Group as 'TeXniques'
number 10), as reference material (no text was directly copied).
- Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015 Karl
-Berry.
+ Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016,
+2017 Karl Berry.
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
@@ -42,8 +42,8 @@
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
***************************************
-This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of October
-2015) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of August 2017)
+for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
* Menu:
@@ -86,13 +86,13 @@
This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting
program (*note Overview::). This document's home page is
-<http://home.gna.org/latexrefman>. That page has links to the current
-output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and
-subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
+<http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/>. That page has links
+to the current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives
+and subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than
-'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was retired many
-years ago.
+'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
+ago.
LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
(<http://latex-project.org>). The official documentation written by the
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX
maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this
document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
-<latexrefman-discuss at gna.org>.
+<latexrefman at tug.org>.
This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
of information about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a few
@@ -113,8 +113,9 @@
Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
<http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide>
- The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX;
- there are plenty of others available elsewhere.
+ The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX.
+ Many other guides by many other people are also available,
+ independent of LaTeX itself; one such is the next item:
<http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort>
A short introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
@@ -206,7 +207,7 @@
'.pdf' file with 'dvipdfmx'. The contents of the file can be
dumped in human-readable form with 'dvitype'. A vast array of
other DVI utility programs are available
- (<http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware>).
+ (<http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware>).
'.pdf'
If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'pdflatex', among other
@@ -331,14 +332,18 @@
* Environment:: Area of the source with distinct behavior.
* Declaration:: Change the value or meaning of a command.
+* \makeatletter and \makeatother:: Change the status of the at-sign character.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Environment, Next: Declaration, Up: LaTeX command syntax
+2.4.1 Environments
+------------------
+
Synopsis:
\begin{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
- ..
+ ...
\end{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct
@@ -346,10 +351,12 @@
'\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.
\begin{verse}
- There once was a man from Nantucket \\
- ..
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
\end{verse}
+ See *note Environments:: for a list of environments.
+
The ENVIRONMENT NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
end. This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT NAME ends in a
star ('*'); both the '\begin' and '\end' texts must include the star.
@@ -360,17 +367,135 @@
required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
\begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
- .. rows of table ..
+ ... rows of table ...
\end{tabular}
-File: latex2e.info, Node: Declaration, Prev: Environment, Up: LaTeX command syntax
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Declaration, Next: \makeatletter and \makeatother, Prev: Environment, Up: LaTeX command syntax
+2.4.2 Command declarations
+--------------------------
+
A command that changes the value, or changes the meaning, of some other
command or parameter. For instance, the '\mainmatter' command changes
the setting of page numbers from roman numerals to arabic.
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \makeatletter and \makeatother, Prev: Declaration, Up: LaTeX command syntax
+
+2.4.3 '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'
+----------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @ in their name ..
+ \makeatother
+
+ Used to redefine internal LaTeX commands. '\makeatletter' makes the
+at-sign character '@' have the category code of a letter, 11.
+'\makeatother' sets the category code of '@' to 12, its original value.
+
+ As each character is read by TeX for LaTeX, it is assigned a
+character category code, or "catcode" for short. For instance, the
+backslash '\' is assigned the catcode 0, for characters that start a
+command. These two commands alter the catcode assigned to '@'.
+
+ The alteration is needed because many of LaTeX's commands use '@' in
+their name, to prevent users from accidentally defining a command that
+replaces one of LaTeX's own. Command names consist of a category 0
+character, ordinarily backslash, followed by letters, category 11
+characters (except that a command name can also consist of a category 0
+character followed by a single non-letter symbol). So under the default
+category codes, user-defined commands cannot contain an '@'. But
+'\makeatletter' and '\makeatother' allow users to define or redefine
+commands named with '@'.
+
+ Use these two commands inside a '.tex' file, in the preamble, when
+defining or redefining a command with '@' in its name. Don't use them
+inside '.sty' or '.cls' files since the '\usepackage' and
+'\documentclass' commands set the at sign to have the character code of
+a letter.
+
+ For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e>. These macros are mainly intended to
+package or class authors.
+
+ The example below is typical. In the user's class file is a command
+'\thesis at universityname'. The user wants to change the definition.
+These three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+'\begin{document}'.
+
+ \makeatletter
+ \renewcommand{\thesis at universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
+ \makeatother
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \@ifstar:: Define your own commands with *-variants.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \@ifstar, Up: \makeatletter and \makeatother
+
+2.4.3.1 '\@ifstar'
+..................
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd at star}{\mycmd at nostar}}
+ \newcommand{\mycmd at nostar}[NON-STARRED COMMAND NUMBER OF ARGS]{BODY OF NON-STARRED COMMAND}
+ \newcommand{\mycmd at star}[STARRED COMMAND NUMBER OF ARGS]{BODY OF STARRED COMMAND}
+
+ Many standard LaTeX environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character '*', an asterisk. Examples
+are the 'table' and 'table*' environments and the '\section' and
+'\section*' commands.
+
+ When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because '\newenvironment' and '\renewenvironment' allow the environment
+name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more complex. As
+in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, given above
+as '\mycmd', which peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For
+instance, LaTeX does not really have a '\section*' command; instead, the
+'\section' command peeks ahead. This command does not accept arguments
+but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept arguments. In
+the synopsis these two are '\mycmd at nostar' and '\mycmd at star'. They
+could take the same number of arguments or a different number, or no
+arguments at all. As always, in a LaTeX document a command using
+at-sign '@' must be enclosed inside a '\makeatletter ... \makeatother'
+block (*note \makeatletter and \makeatother::).
+
+ This example of '\@ifstar' defines the command '\ciel' and a variant
+'\ciel*'. Both have one required argument. A call to '\ciel{night}'
+will return "starry night sky" while '\ciel*{blue}' will return "starry
+not blue sky".
+
+ \newcommand*{\ciel at unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
+ \newcommand*{\ciel at starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+ \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel at starred}{\ciel at unstarred}}
+
+ In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than does the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent
+007's '``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.'''
+is equivalent to '``My name is \textsc{Bond}, \textit{James}
+textsc{Bond}.'''
+
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret at unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret at starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret}{\@ifstar{\agentsecret at starred}{\agentsecret at unstarred}}
+
+ There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work
+of '\@ifstar'. The 'suffix' package allows the construct
+'\newcommand\mycommand{UNSTARRED VERSION}' followed by
+'\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{STARRED VERSION}'. And LaTeX3 has
+the 'xparse' package that allows this code.
+
+ \NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
+ {STARRED VERSION}%
+ {UNSTARRED VERSION}%
+ }
+
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Document classes, Next: Fonts, Prev: Overview, Up: Top
3 Document classes
@@ -410,9 +535,11 @@
* Menu:
* Document class options:: Global options.
+* Additional packages:: Bring in packages.
+* Class and package construction:: Create new classes and packages.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: Document class options, Up: Document classes
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Document class options, Next: Additional packages, Up: Document classes
3.1 Document class options
==========================
@@ -434,10 +561,13 @@
paper size (these show height by width):
'a4paper'
- 210 by 297 mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+ 210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+'a5paper'
+ 148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
+
'b5paper'
- 176 by 250 mm (about 7 by 9.875 inches)
+ 176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
'executivepaper'
7.25 by 10.5 inches
@@ -477,8 +607,10 @@
'titlepage'
'notitlepage'
- Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on
- the class.
+ Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title
+ information and for the abstract also, if there is one. The
+ default for the 'report' class is 'titlepage', for the other
+ classes it is 'notitlepage'.
The following options are not available with the 'slides' class.
@@ -506,19 +638,440 @@
The 'slides' class offers the option 'clock' for printing the time at
the bottom of each note.
- Additional packages are loaded like this:
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Additional packages, Next: Class and package construction, Prev: Document class options, Up: Document classes
- \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}
+3.2 Additional packages
+=======================
- To specify more than one package, you can separate them with a comma,
+Load a package PKG, with the package options given in the
+comma-separated list OPTIONS, as here.
+
+ \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}.
+
+ To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
as in '\usepackage{PKG1,PKG2,...}', or use multiple '\usepackage'
commands.
- Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown by
+ Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown to
the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
'\usepackage'.
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Class and package construction, Prev: Additional packages, Up: Document classes
+
+3.3 Class and package construction
+==================================
+
+You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a standard
+header for each page, then you could create a new class 'smcmemo.cls'
+and begin your documents with '\documentclass{smcmemo}'.
+
+ What separates a package from a document class is that the commands
+in a package are useful across classes while those in a document class
+are specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for
+a package while a command to make the page headers say 'Memo from the
+SMC Math Department' is for a class.
+
+ Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign '@' as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'. *Note
+\makeatletter and \makeatother::. This allow you to create commands
+that users will not accidentally redefine. Another technique is to
+preface class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent
+your class or package from interfering with others. For instance, the
+class 'smcmemo' might have commands '\smc at tolist', '\smc at fromlist', etc.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Class and package structure:: Layout of the file.
+* Class and package commands:: List of commands.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Class and package structure, Next: Class and package commands, Up: Class and package construction
+
+3.3.1 Class and package structure
+---------------------------------
+
+A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+ In the "identification part", the file says that it is a LaTeX
+ package or class and describes itself, using the '\NeedsTeXFormat'
+ and '\ProvidesClass' or '\ProvidesPackage' commands.
+ 1. The "preliminary declarations part" declares some commands and can
+ also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+ for the code used in the next part. For example, an 'smcmemo'
+ class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list
+ of people for the to-head, as '\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}',
+ and therefore needs to define a command
+ '\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}' used in that file.
+ 2. In the "handle options part" the class or package declares and
+ processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+ document as '\documentclass[OPTION LIST]{CLASS NAME}', to modify
+ the behavior of the class. An example is when you declare
+ '\documentclass[11pt]{article}' to set the default document font
+ size.
+ 3. Finally, in the "more declarations part" the class or package
+ usually does most of its work: declaring new variables, commands
+ and fonts, and loading other files.
+
+ Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as 'stub.cls'
+where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the '.tex'
+file.
+
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesClass{stub}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+ \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+ \LoadClass{article}
+
+ It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the 'article' class, and then loads the 'article'
+class to provide the basis for this class's code.
+
+ For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+<http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf> (much of
+the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+<https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf>.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Class and package commands, Prev: Class and package structure, Up: Class and package construction
+
+3.3.2 Class and package commands
+--------------------------------
+
+These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+
+'\AtBeginDvi{specials}'
+ Save in a box register things that are written to the '.dvi' file
+ at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+
+'\AtEndOfClass{CODE}'
+'\AtEndOfPackage{CODE}'
+ Hook to insert CODE to be executed when LaTeX finishes processing
+ the current class or package. You can use these hooks multiple
+ times; the 'code' will be executed in the order that you called it.
+ See also *note \AtBeginDocument::.
+
+'\CheckCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+'\CheckCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+ Like '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::) but does
+ not define CMD; instead it checks that the current definition of
+ CMD is exactly as given by DEFINITION and is or is not "long" as
+ expected. A long command is a command that accepts '\par' within
+ an argument. The CMD command is expected to be long with the
+ unstarred version of '\CheckCommand'. Raises an error when the
+ check fails. This allows you to check before you start redefining
+ 'cmd' yourself that no other package has already redefined this
+ command.
+
+'\ClassError{CLASS NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
+'\PackageError{PACKAGE NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
+'\ClassWarning{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\PackageWarning{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\ClassWarningNoLine{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\PackageWarningNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\ClassInfo{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\PackageInfo{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\ClassInfoNoLine{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\PackageInfoNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+ Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+
+ For '\ClassError' and '\PackageError' the message is ERROR TEXT,
+ followed by TeX's '?' error prompt. If the user then asks for help
+ by typing 'h', they see the HELP TEXT.
+
+ The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+ WARNING TEXT on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+ commands write INFO TEXT only in the transcript file. The 'NoLine'
+ versions do not show the number of the line generating the message,
+ while the other versions do show that number.
+
+ To format the messages, including the HELP TEXT: use '\protect' to
+ stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+ '\MessageBreak', and get a space with '\space' when a space
+ character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that LaTeX
+ appends a period to the messages.
+
+'\CurrentOption'
+ Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can
+ only be used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
+ '\DeclareOption*'.
+
+'\DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}'
+'\DeclareOption*{CODE}'
+ Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their
+ '\documentclass' command. For example, the 'smcmemo' class could
+ have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the
+ first page with '\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}'. The class file
+ must contain '\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}' (and later,
+ '\ProcessOptions').
+
+ If you request an option that has not been declared, by default
+ this will produce a warning like 'Unused global option(s):
+ [badoption].' Change this behaviour with the starred version
+ '\DeclareOption*{CODE}'. For example, many classes extend an
+ existing class, using a declaration such as '\LoadClass{article}',
+ and for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such
+ as this.
+
+ \DeclareOption*{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+ }
+
+ Another example is that the class 'smcmemo' may allow users to keep
+ lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could
+ invoke '\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}' and it will read the file
+ 'math.memo'. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+ passes the option to the 'article' class.
+
+ \DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
+
+'\DeclareRobustCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+'\DeclareRobustCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+ Like '\newcommand' and '\newcommand*' (*note \newcommand &
+ \renewcommand::) but these declare a robust command, even if some
+ code within the DEFINITION is fragile. (For a discussion of robust
+ and fragile commands *note \protect::.) Use this command to define
+ new robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+ robust. Unlike '\newcommand' these do not give an error if macro
+ CMD already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+ transcript file if a command is redefined.
+
+ Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those
+ defined using '\newcommand' so unless the command's data is fragile
+ and the command is used within a moving argument, use
+ '\newcommand'.
+
+ The 'etoolbox' package offers commands '\newrobustcmd',
+ '\newrobustcmd*', '\renewrobustcmd', '\renewrobustcmd*',
+ '\providerobustcmd', and '\providerobustcmd*' which are similar to
+ '\newcommand', '\newcommand*', '\renewcommand', '\renewcommand*',
+ '\providecommand', and '\providecommand*', but define a robust CMD
+ with two advantages as compared to '\DeclareRobustCommand':
+ 1. They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than
+ the higher level LaTeX '\protect' mechanism, so they do not
+ incur the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+ 2. They make the same distinction between '\new...', '\renew...',
+ and '\provide...', as the standard commands, so they do not
+ just make a log message when you redefine CMD that already
+ exists, in that case you need to use either '\renew...' or
+ '\provide...' or you get an error.
+
+'\IfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
+'\InputIfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
+ Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX can find the file 'FILE NAME' and FALSE
+ CODE otherwise. In the second case it inputs the file immediately
+ after executing TRUE CODE. Thus
+ '\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{WARNING:
+ img.pdf not found}}' will include the graphic 'img.pdf' if it is
+ found but otherwise just give a warning.
+
+ This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX
+ uses, not only in the current directory. To look only in the
+ current directory do something like '\IfFileExists{./filename}{TRUE
+ CODE}{FALSE CODE}'. If you ask for a filename without a '.tex'
+ extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by appending the
+ '.tex'; for more on how LaTeX handles file extensions see *note
+ \input::.
+
+'\LoadClass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\LoadClassWithOptions{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Load a class, as with '\documentclass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS
+ NAME}[RELEASE INFO]'. An example is
+ '\LoadClass[twoside]{article}'.
+
+ The OPTIONS LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+ RELEASE DATE is optional. If present it must have the form
+ YYYY/MM/DD.
+
+ If you request a RELEASE DATE and the date of the package installed
+ on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the screen and
+ in the log like 'You have requested, on input line 4, version
+ `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version
+ `2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available.'
+
+ The command version '\LoadClassWithOptions' uses the list of
+ options for the current class. This means it ignores any options
+ passed to it via '\PassOptionsToClass'. This is a convenience
+ command that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the
+ standard 'article' class, without having to track which options
+ were passed.
+
+'\ExecuteOptions{OPTIONS-LIST}'
+ For each option OPTION in the OPTIONS-LIST, in order, this command
+ executes the command '\ds at OPTION'. If this command is not defined
+ then that option is silently ignored.
+
+ It can be used to provide a default option list before
+ '\ProcessOptions'. For example, if in a class file you want the
+ default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+ '\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax'.
+
+'\NeedsTeXFormat{FORMAT}[FORMAT DATE]'
+ Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often
+ issued as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+ '\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}'. When a document using that class is
+ processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+ actually being run (including that the FORMAT string is case
+ sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an
+ error like 'This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.'
+
+ To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+ features, include the optional FORMAT DATE on which those features
+ were implemented. If present it must be in the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'.
+ If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+ FORMAT DATE then you get a warning like 'You have requested release
+ `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is available.'
+
+'\OptionNotUsed'
+ Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be
+ used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
+ '\DeclareOption*'.
+
+'\PassOptionsToClass{OPTION LIST}{CLASS NAME}'
+'\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTION LIST}{PACKAGE NAME}'
+ Adds the options in the comma-separated list OPTION LIST to the
+ options used by any future '\RequirePackage' or '\usepackage'
+ command for package PACKAGE NAME or the class CLASS NAME.
+
+ The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number
+ of times with no options but if you want options then you may only
+ supply them when you first load the package. Loading a package
+ with options more than once will get you an error like 'Option
+ clash for package foo.' (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no
+ conflict between the options.)
+
+ If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can
+ collapse that to once, for example replacing the two
+ '\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}'
+ with the single '\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}'.
+ But if you are loading a package that in turn loads another package
+ then you need to queue up the options you desire for this other
+ package. For instance, suppose the package 'foo' loads the package
+ 'geometry'. Instead of
+ '\RequirePackage{foo}\RequirePackage[draft]{graphics}' you must
+ write '\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics}
+ \RequirePackage{foo}'. (If 'foo.sty' loads an option in conflict
+ with what you want then you may have to look into altering its
+ source.)
+
+ These commands are useful for general users as well as class and
+ package writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the
+ 'graphicx' package with the option 'draft' and also wants to use a
+ class 'foo' that loads the 'graphicx' package, but without that
+ option. The user could start their LaTeX file with
+ '\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}'.
+
+'\ProcessOptions'
+'\ProcessOptions*\@OPTIONS'
+ Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked.
+ Include it in the class file as '\ProcessOptions\relax' (because of
+ the existence of the starred command).
+
+ Options come in two types. "Local options" have been specified for
+ this particular package in the OPTIONS argument of
+ '\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTIONS}', '\usepackage[OPTIONS]', or
+ '\RequirePackage[OPTIONS]'. "Global options" are those given by
+ the class user in '\documentclass[OPTIONS]' (If an option is
+ specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+
+ When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a package 'pkg.sty', the
+ following happens:
+ 1. For each option OPTION so far declared with '\DeclareOption',
+ it looks to see if that option is either a global or a local
+ option for 'pkg'. If so then it executes the declared code.
+ This is done in the order in which these options were given in
+ 'pkg.sty'.
+ 2. For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+ '\ds@'OPTION if it has been defined somewhere (other than by a
+ '\DeclareOption'); otherwise, it executes the default option
+ code given in '\DeclareOption*'. If no default option code
+ has been declared then it gives an error message. This is
+ done in the order in which these options were specified.
+
+ When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a class it works in the same
+ way except that all options are local, and the default CODE for
+ '\DeclareOption*' is '\OptionNotUsed' rather than an error.
+
+ The starred version '\ProcessOptions*' executes the options in the
+ order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order
+ of declaration in the class or package. For a package this means
+ that the global options are processed first.
+
+'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen
+ and the log file.
+
+ When a user writes '\documentclass{smcmemo}' then LaTeX loads the
+ file 'smcmemo.cls'. Similarly, a user writing '\usepackage{test}'
+ prompts LaTeX to load the file 'test.sty'. If the name of the file
+ does not match the declared class or package name then you get a
+ warning. Thus, if you invoke '\documentclass{smcmemo}', and the
+ file 'smcmemo.cls' has the statement '\ProvidesClass{xxx}' then you
+ get a warning like 'You have requested document class `smcmemo',
+ but the document class provides 'xxx'.' This warning does not
+ prevent LaTeX from processing the rest of the class file normally.
+
+ If you include the optional argument, then you must include the
+ date, before the first space if any, and it must have the form
+ 'YYYY/MM/DD'. The rest of the optional argument is free-form,
+ although it traditionally identifies the class, and is written to
+ the screen during compilation and to the log file. Thus, if your
+ file 'smcmemo.cls' contains the line
+ '\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]' and your
+ document's first line is '\documentclass{smcmemo}' then you will
+ see 'Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class'.
+
+ The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to
+ ask to be warned if the version of the class or package installed
+ on their system is earlier than RELEASE DATE, by using the optional
+ arguments such as '\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]' or
+ '\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]'. (Note that package users only
+ rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+
+'\ProvidesFile{FILE NAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+ Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+ configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in
+ that file and you get in the log a string like 'File: test.config
+ 2017/10/12 config file for test.cls' for FILE NAME equal to
+ 'test.config' and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION equal to '2017/10/12
+ config file for test.cls'.
+
+'\RequirePackage[OPTION LIST]{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\RequirePackageWithOptions{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Load a package, like the document author command '\usepackage'.
+ *Note Additional packages::. An example is
+ '\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}'. Note that the
+ LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of these commands
+ over Plain TeX's '\input'; see the Class Guide.
+
+ The OPTION LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+ RELEASE DATE, if present, must have the form YYYY/MM/DD. If the
+ release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+ than RELEASE DATE then you get a warning like 'You have requested,
+ on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but only
+ version `2000/01/01' is available'.
+
+ The '\RequirePackageWithOptions' version uses the list of options
+ for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to
+ it via '\PassOptionsToClass'. This is a convenience command to
+ allow easily building classes on existing ones without having to
+ track which options were passed.
+
+ The difference between '\usepackage' and '\RequirePackage' is
+ small. The '\usepackage' command is intended for the document file
+ while '\RequirePackage' is intended for package and class files.
+ Thus, using '\usepackage' before the '\documentclass' command
+ causes LaTeX to give error like '\usepackage before
+ \documentclass', but you can use '\RequirePackage' there.
+
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Fonts, Next: Layout, Prev: Document classes, Up: Top
4 Fonts
@@ -871,10 +1424,9 @@
5.1 '\onecolumn'
================
-The '\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output. If the document is given the class option
-'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior (*note Document class
-options::).
+Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
+given the class option 'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior
+(*note Document class options::).
This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
@@ -884,13 +1436,14 @@
5.2 '\twocolumn'
================
-Synopsis:
+Synopses:
+ \twocolumn
\twocolumn[PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT]
- The '\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the document is given the class option
-'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note Document class options::).
+ Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is
+given the class option 'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note
+Document class options::).
If the optional PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT argument is present, it is
typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
@@ -929,7 +1482,7 @@
occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning
that the height of a 'table*' or 'figure*' environment must not
exceed '0.7\textheight' . If the height of your starred float
- environment exceeeds this then you can take one of the following
+ environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following
actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the
document:
@@ -969,24 +1522,24 @@
maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
default is '2'.
- This example shows the use of the optional argument of '\twocolumn'
-to create a title that spans the two-column article:
+ This example uses '\twocolumn''s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
\newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\begin{document}
\twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
- \centering
- \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
- \large Author One\authormark{1},
- Author Two\authormark{2},
- Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
- \normalsize
- \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
- \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
- School one &School two
- \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
- }]
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
Two column text here.
@@ -996,21 +1549,23 @@
5.3 '\flushbottom'
==================
-The '\flushbottom' command can go at any point in the document body. It
-makes all later pages the same height, stretching the vertical space
-where necessary to fill out the page.
+Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
then you get a message like 'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
-occurred while \output is active'. You can change to '\raggedbottom'
-(see below). Alternatively, you can try to adjust the 'textheight' to
-be compatible, or you can add some vertical stretch glue between lines
-or between paragraphs, as in '\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}'. In
-a final editing stage you can adjust the height of individual pages
-(*note \enlargethispage::).
+occurred while \output is active'. If you get that, one option is to
+change to '\raggedbottom' (*note \raggedbottom::). Alternatively, you
+can adjust the 'textheight' to make compatible pages, or you can add
+some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs, as in
+'\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}'. Your last option is to, in a
+final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages (*note
+\enlargethispage::).
- This is the default only if you select the 'twoside' document class
-option (*note Document class options::).
+ The '\flushbottom' state is the default only if you select the
+'twoside' document class option (*note Document class options::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Page layout parameters, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout
@@ -1018,11 +1573,10 @@
5.4 '\raggedbottom'
===================
-The '\raggedbottom' command can go at any point in the document body.
-It makes all later pages the natural height of the material on that
-page; no rubber lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
-document the facing pages may be different heights. See also
-'\flushbottom' above.
+Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See *note \flushbottom::.
This is the default unless you select the 'twoside' document class
option (*note Document class options::).
@@ -1185,13 +1739,13 @@
The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
-bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued up that the limits prevent
-them all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and defers
-the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may be typset far from
-their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big can
-migrate to the end of the document. But then because all floats in a
-class must appear in sequential order, every subsequent float in that
-class also appears at the end.
+bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent them
+all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and defers the
+rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up being typeset far
+from their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big may
+migrate to the end of the document. In which event, because all floats
+in a class must appear in sequential order, every following float in
+that class also appears at the end.
In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
@@ -1246,7 +1800,7 @@
LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
(although on the same output page) if there is a 't' specifier in the
-PLACEMENT paramater. If this is not desired, and deleting the 't' is
+PLACEMENT parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting the 't' is
not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the
next page, then you can prevent it by either using the 'flafter' package
or using the command '\suppressfloats[t]', which causes floats for the
@@ -1310,10 +1864,10 @@
The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats> contains
suggestions for relaxing LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the
-problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explaination of the
-float placement algorithm is Frank Mittelbach's article "How to infuence
-the position of float environments like figure and table in LaTeX?"
-<http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf>.
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach's article "How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+LaTeX?" (<http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf>).
File: latex2e.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Cross references, Prev: Layout, Up: Top
@@ -1370,15 +1924,219 @@
suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where 'chapter' is
level zero. (*Note \setcounter::.)
+* Menu:
+
+* \@startsection:: Redefine layout of start of sections, subsections, etc.
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \@startsection, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.1 '\@startsection'
+====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}
+
+ Redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning divisions
+such as '\section' or '\subsection'.
+
+ Note that the 'titlesec' package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with '\@startsection', some cannot. For instance, in the
+standard LaTeX 'book' and 'report' classes the commands '\chapter' and
+'\report' are not constructed in this way. To make such a command you
+may want to use the '\secdef' command.
+
+ Technically, this command has the form:
+ \@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}
+ *[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}
+so that issuing:
+ \renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}%
+ {BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}}
+redefine '\section' while keeping its standard calling form
+'\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}'. *Note Sectioning:: and the examples
+below.
+
+NAME
+ Name of the counter (which must be defined separately) used to
+ number for the sectioning header. Most commonly either 'section',
+ 'subsection', or 'paragraph'. Although in those three cases the
+ name of the counter is also the name of the sectioning command
+ itself, using the same name is not required.
+
+ Then '\the'NAME displays the title number and '\'NAME'mark' is for
+ the page headers.
+
+LEVEL
+ An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command: 0 for
+ 'chapter' (only applies to the standard 'book' and 'report'
+ classes), 1 for 'section', 2 for 'subsection', 3 for
+ 'subsubsection', 4 for 'paragraph', and 5 for 'subparagraph'. In
+ the 'book' and 'report' classes 'part' has level -1, while in the
+ 'article' class 'part' has level 0.
+
+ If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of 'secnumdepth' then
+ the titles for this sectioning command will be numbered. For
+ instance, in an 'article', if 'secnumdepth' is 1 then a
+ '\section{Introduction}' command will produce output like '1
+ Introduction' while '\subsection{History}' will produce output like
+ 'History', without the number prefix. *Note
+ Sectioning/secnumdepth::.
+
+ If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of TOCDEPTH then the
+ table of contents will have an entrie for this sectioning unit.
+ For instance, in an 'article', if TOCDEPTH is 1 then the table of
+ contents will list sections but not subsections.
+
+INDENT
+ A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with
+ respect to the left margin. To have the title flush with the
+ margin use '0pt'. A negative indentation such as '-1em' will move
+ the title into the left margin.
+
+BEFORESKIP
+ The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space
+ that is inserted before this sectioning unit's title. This space
+ will be discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the
+ top of a fresh page. If this number is negative then the first
+ paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
+ non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the
+ negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus -2pt minus
+ -3pt'.)
+
+ For example, if BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex' then
+ to start the new sectioning unit, LaTeX will add about 3.5 times
+ the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph
+ in the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+ 'plus' and 'minus', is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
+ flexibility in making up the page.
+
+ The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of
+ the line prior to this sectioning unit's header and the baseline of
+ the header is that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the text
+ font, the '\baselineskip' of the title font, and the absolute value
+ of the BEFORESKIP. This space is typically rubber so it may
+ stretch or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page
+ so that the vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the
+ header text will be where LaTeX would put the baseline of the first
+ text line on that page.)
+
+AFTERSKIP
+ This is a length. If AFTERSKIP is non-negative then this is the
+ vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit's title header.
+ If it is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so
+ that it becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the
+ absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space between the
+ end of the title and the beginning of the following paragraph.
+ (Note that the negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus
+ -2pt minus -3pt'.)
+
+ As with BEFORESKIP, using a rubber length with 'plus' and 'minus'
+ components is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
+ flexibility in putting the page together.
+
+ If 'afterskip' is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+ vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit's header
+ and the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is
+ that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the title font, the
+ '\baselineskip' of the text font, and the value of AFTER. That
+ space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+ because the sign of 'afterskip' changes the sectioning unit
+ header's from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+ 'afterskip' to cancel part of the '\parskip'.)
+
+STYLE
+ Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below.
+ Typical commands to use here are '\centering', '\raggedright',
+ '\normalfont', '\hrule', or '\newpage'. The last command in STYLE
+ may be one such as '\MakeUppercase' or '\fbox' that takes one
+ argument. The section title will be supplied as the argument to
+ this command. For instance, setting STYLE to
+ '\bfseries\MakeUppercase' would produce titles that are bold and
+ upper case.
+
+ Here are examples. To use them, either put them in a package or
+class file, or put them in the preamble of a LaTeX document between a
+'\makeatletter' command and a '\makeatother'. (Probably the error
+message 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode.' means that you
+forgot this.) *Note \makeatletter and \makeatother::.
+
+ This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered.
+
+ \renewcommand\section{%
+ \@startsection{section}% *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
+ {1}% *note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.
+ {0pt}% *note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.
+ {-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% *note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}% *note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.
+ {\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
+ }
+
+ This will put 'subsection' titles in small caps type, inline with the
+paragraph.
+
+ \renewcommand\subsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsection}% *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
+ {2}% *note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.
+ {0em}% *note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.
+ {-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex}% *note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.
+ {-1em plus 0.2em}% *note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.
+ {\scshape}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
+ }
+
+ The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
+
+ \setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down
+ \newcounter{subsubparagraph}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+ \renewcommand{\thesubsubparagraph}% how to display
+ {\thesubparagraph.\@arabic\c at subsubparagraph}% numbering
+ \newcommand{\subsubparagraph}{\@startsection
+ {subsubparagraph}%
+ {6}%
+ {0em}%
+ {\baselineskip}%
+ {0.5\baselineskip}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize}}
+ \newcommand*\l at subsubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{6}{10em}{5em}}% for toc
+ \newcommand{\subsubparagraphmark}[1]{}% for page headers
+
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Cross references, Next: Environments, Prev: Sectioning, Up: Top
7 Cross references
******************
-One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
-the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details."
+One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to
+refer the reader to them, as in "See Figure~3 for more details."
+ Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if
+that number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to
+update this reference by hand. Instead, LaTeX has you write a "label"
+like '\label{eq:GreensThm}' and refer to it with 'See
+equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}'.
+
+ LaTeX writes the information from the labels to a file with the same
+name as the file containing the '\label{...}' but with an '.aux'
+extension. (The information has the format
+'\newlabel{LABEL}{{CURRENTLABEL}{PAGENUMBER}}' where CURRENTLABEL is the
+current value of the macro '\@currentlabel' that is usually updated
+whenever you call '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'.)
+
+ The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your
+document has a "forward reference", a '\ref{KEY}' that appears earlier
+than the associated '\label{KEY}'; see the example in the
+'\pageref{...}' description. LaTeX gets the information for references
+from the '.aux' file. If this is the first time you are compiling the
+document then you will get a message 'LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
+changed. Rerun to get cross references right.' and in the output the
+reference will appear as two question marks '??', in boldface. Or, if
+you change some things so the references change then you get the same
+warning and the output contains the old reference information. The
+solution in either case is just to compile the document a second time.
+
* Menu:
* \label:: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
@@ -1395,33 +2153,20 @@
\label{KEY}
- A '\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the
-number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered
-environment assigns that number to KEY. The assigned number can be
-retrieved with the '\ref{KEY}' command (*note \ref::).
+ Assign a reference number to KEY. In ordinary text '\label{KEY}'
+assigns to KEY the number of the current sectional unit. Inside an
+environment with numbering, such as a 'table' or 'theorem' environment,
+'\label{KEY}' assigns to KEY the number of that environment. Retrieve
+the assigned number with the '\ref{KEY}' command (*note \ref::).
- Thus, in the example below the key 'sec:test' holds the number of the
-current section and the key 'fig:test' that of the figure.
-(Incidentally, labels must appear after captions in figures and tables.)
-
- \section{section name}
- \label{sec:test}
- This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
- \begin{figure}
- ...
- \caption{caption text}
- \label{fig:test}
- \end{figure}
- See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
-
A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished,
as usual.
- Although the name can be more or less anything, a common convention
-is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
-colon or period. This helps to avoid accidentally creating two labels
-with the same name. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+ A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a
+suffix separated by a colon or period. This helps to avoid accidentally
+creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more
+readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
'ch'
for chapters
@@ -1434,8 +2179,24 @@
'eq'
for equations
- Thus, a label for a figure would look like 'fig:test' or 'fig.test'.
+ Thus, '\label{fig:Euler}' is a label for a figure with a portrait of
+the great man.
+ In this example below the key 'sec:test' will get the number of the
+current section and the key 'fig:test' will get the number of the
+figure. (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and
+tables.)
+
+ \section{section name}
+ \label{sec:test}
+ This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+ \begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+ \end{figure}
+ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross references
@@ -1446,9 +2207,20 @@
\pageref{KEY}
- The '\pageref'{KEY} command produces the page number of the place in
-the text where the corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.
+ Produce the page number of the place in the text where the
+corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.
+ In this example the '\label{eq:main}' is used both for the formula
+number and for the page number. (Note that the two references are
+forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice to
+resolve those.)
+
+ The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
+ ...
+ \begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
+ \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
+ \end{equation}
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \ref, Prev: \pageref, Up: Cross references
@@ -1459,11 +2231,21 @@
\ref{KEY}
- The '\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit,
-equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command
-(*note \label::). It does not produce any text, such as the word
-'Section' or 'Figure', just the bare number itself.
+ Produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote,
+figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command (*note \label::). It
+does not produce any text, such as the word 'Section' or 'Figure', just
+the bare number itself.
+ In this example, the '\ref{popular}' produces '2'. Note that it is a
+forward reference since it comes before '\label{popular}'.
+
+ The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Plain \TeX
+ \item \label{popular} \LaTeX
+ \item Con\TeX t
+ \end{enumerate}
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Environments, Next: Line breaking, Prev: Cross references, Up: Top
@@ -1470,13 +2252,20 @@
8 Environments
**************
-LaTeX provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each
-environment begins and ends in the same manner:
+LaTeX provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior. An
+environment begins with '\begin' and ends with '\end', like this:
- \begin{ENVNAME}
- ...
- \end{ENVNAME}
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
+ The ENVIRONMENT-NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
+end. For instance, the input '\begin{table*}...\end{table}' will cause
+an error like: '! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
+\end{table}.'
+
+ Environments are executed within a group.
+
* Menu:
* abstract:: Produce an abstract.
@@ -1520,9 +2309,43 @@
...
\end{abstract}
- Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple
-paragraphs.
+ Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This
+environment is only defined in the 'article' and 'report' document
+classes (*note Document classes::).
+ Using the example below in the 'article' class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option 'titlepage' causes the abstract to be
+on a separate page (*note Document class options::); this is the default
+only in the 'report' class.
+
+ \begin{abstract}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+ \end{abstract}
+
+ The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column
+document (for a more flexible solution, use the package 'abstract').
+
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ ...
+ \begin{document}
+ \title{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach}
+ \author{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks{Railroad tracking grant.}}
+ \twocolumn[
+ \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin{abstract}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end{abstract}
+ \end{@twocolumnfalse}
+ ]
+ { % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \footnotetext[1]{Thanks for all the fish.}
+ }
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: abstract, Up: Environments
@@ -1532,15 +2355,15 @@
Synopsis:
\begin{array}{COLS}
- COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
- ...
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
\end{array}
or
\begin{array}[POS]{COLS}
- COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
- ...
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
\end{array}
Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in
@@ -1547,7 +2370,7 @@
math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics
environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::). Column entries are
separated by an ampersand ('&'). Rows are terminated with
-double-backslashes ('\\') (*note \\::).
+double-backslashes (*note \\::).
The required argument COLS describes the number of columns, their
alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. See *note
@@ -1555,20 +2378,20 @@
features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.
There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'. The first
-is that 'array' entries are typeset in mathematics mode, in textstyle
-(except if the COLS definition specifies the column with '@p{..}', which
-causes the entry to be typeset in text mode). The second is that,
-instead of 'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's intercolumn space
-in an array is governed by '\arraycolsep' which gives half the width
+is that 'array' entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (except
+if the COLS definition specifies the column with 'p{...}', which causes
+the entry to be typeset in text mode). The second is that, instead of
+'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's intercolumn space in an
+'array' is governed by '\arraycolsep', which gives half the width
between columns. The default for this is '5pt'.
To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the 'amsmath'
package. It comes with environments 'pmatrix' for an array surrounded
-by parentheses '(..)', 'bmatrix' for an array surrounded by square
-brackets '[..]', 'Bmatrix' for an array surrounded by curly
-braces '{..}', 'vmatrix' for an array surrounded by vertical
-bars '|..|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
-bars '||..||', along with a number of other array constructs.
+by parentheses '(...)', 'bmatrix' for an array surrounded by square
+brackets '[...]', 'Bmatrix' for an array surrounded by curly
+braces '{...}', 'vmatrix' for an array surrounded by vertical
+bars '|...|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars '||...||', along with a number of other array constructs.
Here is an example of an array:
@@ -1579,6 +2402,15 @@
\end{array}
\end{equation}
+ The next example works if '\usepackage{amsmath}' is in the preamble:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \begin{vmatrix}{cc}
+ a &b \\
+ c &d
+ \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
+ \end{equation}
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments
@@ -1588,23 +2420,33 @@
Synopsis:
\begin{center}
- .. text ..
+ ... text ...
\end{center}
- Environment to create a sequence of lines that are centered within
-the left and right margins on the current page. If the text in the
-environment body is too long to fit on a line, LaTeX will insert line
-breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
-interword space. To force a line break at a particular spot use
-double-backslash '\\' (*note \\::).
+ Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Use
+double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (*note \\::).
+If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, LaTeX will
+insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or
+shrinking any interword space.
This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
*note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a 'figure'
environment.
- In this example, depending on the line width, LaTeX may choose a
-break for the part before the double backslash, will center the line or
-two, then will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+ \end{center}
+
+ In this example, depending on the page's line width, LaTeX may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then LaTeX will break at the double backslash, and will center the
ending.
\begin{center}
@@ -1625,7 +2467,7 @@
8.3.1 '\centering'
------------------
-Declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
+A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
most often used inside an environment such as 'figure', or in a
'parbox'.
@@ -1673,17 +2515,18 @@
paragraphs. Although the labels on the items are optional there is no
sensible default, so all items should have labels.
- The list consists of at least one item; see *note \item:: (having no
-items causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
-\item'). Each item is produced with an '\item' command.
+ The list consists of at least one item, created with the '\item'
+command (*note \item::). Having no items causes the LaTeX error
+'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item').
Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a
font change given in argument style (see *note Font styles::) then it
will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for
typewriter with '\item[\texttt{label text}]' then it will appear in bold
-typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bolded
-typewriter is to use declaritive style '\item[{\tt label text}]'.
-Similarly, get normal text use '\item[{\rm label text}]'.
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bold
+typewriter is to use declarative style: '\item[{\tt label text}]'.
+Similarly, to get the standard roman font, use '\item[{\rm label
+text}]'.
For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see *note itemize::
and *note enumerate::. For information about customizing list layout,
@@ -1706,7 +2549,7 @@
Synopsis:
\begin{displaymath}
- .. math text ..
+ MATH TEXT
\end{displaymath}
Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display
@@ -1713,25 +2556,24 @@
style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global
option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.
- LaTeX will not break the math text across lines.
-
In the 'displaymath' environment no equation number is added to the
math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the 'equation'
environment (*note equation::).
- Note that the 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
-facilities. Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
-new documents. For example, there are a number of options in that
-package for having math text broken across lines.
+ LaTeX will not break the MATH TEXT across lines.
- The construct '\[..math text..\]' is essentially a synonym for
-'\begin{displaymath}..math text..\end{displaymath}' but the latter is
-easier to work with in the source file; for instance, searching for a
-square bracket may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will
-likely be unique. (The construct '$$..math text..$$' from Plain TeX is
-sometimes mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'. It is not a
-synonym, because the 'displaymath' environment checks that it isn't
-started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+ Note that the 'amsmath' package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways
+in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+
+ The construct '\[MATH TEXT\]' is essentially a synonym for
+'\begin{displaymath}MATH TEXT\end{displaymath}' but the latter is easier
+to work with in the source file; for instance, searching for a square
+bracket may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will likely
+be unique. (The construct '$$MATH TEXT$$' from Plain TeX is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'. It is not a synonym,
+because the 'displaymath' environment checks that it isn't started in
+math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
environment start, because the 'displaymath' environment has different
vertical spacing, and because the 'displaymath' environment honors the
'fleqn' option.)
@@ -1971,7 +2813,7 @@
The figure body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
it can contain text, commands, etc.
- The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (*note Cross
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
for the figure. By default it is numbered. If LOFTITLE is present, it
is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
@@ -2129,7 +2971,7 @@
\end{itemize}
The 'itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list.
-Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
+Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::).
@@ -2262,6 +3104,9 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \item, Up: list
+8.16.1 '\item': An entry in a list.
+-----------------------------------
+
Synopsis:
\item text of item
@@ -2362,6 +3207,11 @@
'\setlength' command, outside of a 'picture' environment. The default
value is '1pt'.
+ The 'picture' package redefine the 'picture' environment so that
+everywhere a number is used in a PICTURE COMMANDS to specify a
+coordinate, one can use alternatively a length. Be aware however that
+this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing '\unitlength'.
+
A "position" is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying
the point with x-coordinate '2.4' and y-coordinate '-5'. Coordinates
are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
@@ -2703,7 +3553,7 @@
\begin{quotation}
\it Four score and seven years ago
- .. shall not perish from the earth.
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
\hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
\end{quotation}
@@ -2826,7 +3676,7 @@
The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
it can contain text, commands, etc.
- The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (*note Cross
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
for the table. By default it is numbered. If LOTTITLE is present, it
is used in the list of tables instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
@@ -2892,7 +3742,7 @@
should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
- ..' warning.
+ ...' warning.
POS
Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is
@@ -2927,15 +3777,15 @@
TEXT OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode. This text is
fragile (*note \protect::).
- This specifier is optional: unless you put in your own
- @-expression then LaTeX's book, article, and report classes
- will put on either side of each column a space of length
- '\tabcolsep', which by default is '6pt'. That is, by default
- adjacent columns are separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is
- misleadingly-named since it is not the separation between
- tabular columns). Also by default a space of 6pt comes before
- the first column as well as after the final column, unless you
- put a '@{..}' or '|' there.
+ This specifier is optional: with no @-expression, LaTeX's
+ 'book', 'article', and 'report' classes will put on either
+ side of each column a space of length '\tabcolsep', which by
+ default is '6pt'. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+ separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is misleadingly-named since
+ it is not the separation between tabular columns). By
+ implication, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column
+ and after the final column, unless you put a '@{...}' or '|'
+ there.
If you override the default and use an @-expression then you
must insert any desired space yourself, as in
@@ -2947,7 +3797,7 @@
\begin{flushleft}
\begin{tabular}{@{}l}
- ..
+ ...
\end{tabular}
\end{flushleft}
@@ -2997,7 +3847,7 @@
integer and COLS is a list of specifiers. Thus
'\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to
'\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}'. Note that COLS may contain
- another '*-expression'.
+ another '*'-expression.
Parameters that control formatting:
@@ -3053,7 +3903,7 @@
\begin{tabular}{lccl}
\textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one
978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\ % row two
- ..
+ ...
\end{tabular}
What counts as a column is: the column format specifier for the
@@ -3065,7 +3915,7 @@
The COLS argument overrides the 'array' or 'tabular' environment's
intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn entry. To affect
that area, this argument can contain vertical bars '|' indicating the
-placement of vertical rules, and '@{..}' expressions. Thus if COLS is
+placement of vertical rules, and '@{...}' expressions. Thus if COLS is
'|c|' then this multicolumn entry will be centered and a vertical rule
will come in the intercolumn area before it and after it. This table
details the exact behavior.
@@ -3076,6 +3926,7 @@
&\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y} % entry three
&z % entry four
\end{tabular}
+
Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule
because the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial
vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical
@@ -3123,9 +3974,9 @@
Draw a vertical line in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment extending the
full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be used in an
@-expression, although its synonym vertical bar '|' is more common.
-This command is rarely used; typically a table's vertical lines are
-specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overriden as needed with
-'\multicolumn'.
+This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table's
+vertical lines are specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overridden
+as needed with '\multicolumn'.
This example illustrates some pitfalls. In the first line's second
entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the cell. But
@@ -3235,14 +4086,15 @@
The '\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the
LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the
-'enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers, and
-punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
+'enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is a "citation key" consisting in any
+sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a
+comma.
This command writes an entry to the '.aux' file containing the item's
-CITE_KEY and label. When the '.aux' file is read by the
-'\begin{document}' command, the item's 'label' is associated with
-'cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a '\cite' command (see
-next section) to produce the associated label.
+CITE_KEY and LABEL. When the '.aux' file is read by the
+'\begin{document}' command, the item's LABEL is associated with
+'cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a '\cite' command (*note
+\cite::) to produce the associated LABEL.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography
@@ -3254,9 +4106,10 @@
\cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS}
- The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated
-by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references
-associated with KEYS by entries in the '.aux' file.
+ The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys (*note
+\bibitem::), separated by commas. This command generates an in-text
+citation to the references associated with KEYS by entries in the '.aux'
+file.
The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the citation.
For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'.
@@ -3267,8 +4120,10 @@
8.24.3 '\nocite'
----------------
-'\nocite{KEYS}'
+Synopsis:
+ \nocite{KEYS}
+
The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes KEYS, which is a
list of one or more citation keys, to the '.aux' file.
@@ -3289,7 +4144,7 @@
The '\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its
own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be
produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE'.bst', which defines how
-your citations will look. The standard STYLE names distributed with
+your citations will look. The standard BIBSTYLE names distributed with
BibTeX are:
'alpha'
@@ -3308,9 +4163,9 @@
The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
bibliography. The argument to '\bibliography' refers to files named
-'BIBFILE.bib', which should contain your database in BibTeX format.
-Only the entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite' will be listed in
-the bibliography.
+'BIBFILE1.bib', 'BIBFILE2.bib', ..., which should contain your database
+in BibTeX format. Only the entries referred to via '\cite' and
+'\nocite' will be listed in the bibliography.
File: latex2e.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments
@@ -3337,17 +4192,39 @@
Synopsis:
\begin{titlepage}
- TEXT
+ ... text and spacing ...
\end{titlepage}
- The 'titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with
-no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to
-be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The
-'\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::).
+ Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading.
+The following page will be numbered page one.
- You can use the '\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce
-a standard title page without a 'titlepage' environment.
+ To instead produce a standard title page without a 'titlepage'
+environment you can use '\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::).
+ Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical
+spacing, is left to the author.
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ \vspace*{\stretch{1}}
+ \begin{center}
+ {\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title} \\[6.5ex]
+ {\large\bfseries Author name} \\
+ \vspace{4ex}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit{University name} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc{\Large Doctor of Philosophy} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc{\large Mathematics} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+ \end{center}
+ \vspace{\stretch{2}}
+ \end{titlepage}
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments
@@ -3434,6 +4311,7 @@
* \obeycr & \restorecr:: Make each input line start a new output line.
* \newline:: Break the line
* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation.
+* \discretionary:: Insert explicit hyphenation with control of hyphen character.
* \fussy:: Be fussy about line breaking.
* \sloppy:: Be sloppy about line breaking.
* \hyphenation:: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
@@ -3463,7 +4341,7 @@
command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in a
'tabular' or 'array' environment.
- Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a 'p{..}' column in a
+ Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a 'p{...}' column in a
'tabular' environment) the '\newline' command is a synonym for '\\'
(*note \newline::).
@@ -3496,7 +4374,7 @@
breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, in a column with a
-specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically 'p{..}', '\newline'
+specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically 'p{...}', '\newline'
will insert a line break inside of the column, that is, it does not
break the entire row. To break the entire row use '\\' or its
equivalent '\tabularnewline'.
@@ -3511,7 +4389,7 @@
The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \fussy, Prev: \newline, Up: Line breaking
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \discretionary, Prev: \newline, Up: Line breaking
9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
===============================
@@ -3526,9 +4404,19 @@
LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \fussy, Next: \sloppy, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \discretionary, Next: \fussy, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking
-9.5 '\fussy'
+9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
+====================================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \discretionary{PRE-BREAK-TEXT}{POST-BREAK-TEXT}{NO-BREAK-TEXT}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \fussy, Next: \sloppy, Prev: \discretionary, Up: Line breaking
+
+9.6 '\fussy'
============
The declaration '\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about
@@ -3536,12 +4424,12 @@
cost of an occasional overfull box.
This command cancels the effect of a previous '\sloppy' command
-(*note \sloppy::.
+(*note \sloppy::).
File: latex2e.info, Node: \sloppy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \fussy, Up: Line breaking
-9.6 '\sloppy'
+9.7 '\sloppy'
=============
The declaration '\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
@@ -3552,7 +4440,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \sloppy, Up: Line breaking
-9.7 '\hyphenation'
+9.8 '\hyphenation'
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -3571,7 +4459,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking
-9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
+9.9 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
=================================
Synopses:
@@ -3816,7 +4704,8 @@
\textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\
\textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
- \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with
+ HMS Surprise.}
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
@@ -3825,7 +4714,7 @@
\begin{center}
\begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
- .. tabular material ..
+ ... tabular material ...
\end{minipage}
\end{center}
@@ -3853,23 +4742,24 @@
11.5 Footnotes in section headings
==================================
-Putting a footnote in a section heading
+Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
- \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+ \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
- causes the footnote to appear both at the bottom of the page where
-the section starts and at the bottom of the table of contents page. To
-have it not appear on the table of contents use the package 'footmisc'
-with the 'stable' option.
+causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. To have it not appear
+on the table of contents use the package 'footmisc' with the 'stable'
+option.
\usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
- ..
+ ...
\begin{document}
- ..
- \section{Full sets\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+ ...
+ \section{Full sets\footnote{This material due to ...}}
- Note that the '\protect' is gone; putting it in causes the footnote
-to reappear on the table of contents.
+ Note that the '\protect' is gone; including it would cause the
+footnote to reappear on the table of contents.
File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes of footnotes, Next: Multiple reference to footnotes, Prev: Footnotes in section headings, Up: Footnotes
@@ -3885,12 +4775,12 @@
\usepackage{bigfoot}
\DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
\DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
- ..
+ ...
\begin{document}
- ..
+ ...
The third theorem is a partial converse of the
second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
- ..
+ ...
File: latex2e.info, Node: Multiple reference to footnotes, Next: Footnote parameters, Prev: Footnotes of footnotes, Up: Footnotes
@@ -3903,13 +4793,13 @@
\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % this version of package or later
\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
- ..
+ ...
\begin{document}
- ..
+ ...
The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
- ..
+ ...
This solution will work with the package 'hyperref'. See *note
\footnotemark:: for a simpler solution in the common case of multiple
@@ -3963,70 +4853,74 @@
'\newcommand' and '\renewcommand' define and redefine a command,
respectively. Synopses:
- \newcommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- \newcommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- \renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- \renewcommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- The '*'-form of these two commands requires that the arguments not
-contain multiple paragraphs of text (not '\long', in plain TeX terms).
+ The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments
+not contain multiple paragraphs of text (not '\long', in plain TeX
+terms).
CMD
- Required; the command name. It must begin with '\'. For
- '\newcommand', it must not be already defined and must not begin
- with '\end'. For '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
+ Required; '\CMD' is the command name. For '\newcommand', it must
+ not be already defined and must not begin with '\end'. For
+ '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
NARGS
Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of
- arguments that the command will take. If this argument is not
- present, the default is for the command to have no arguments. When
- redefining a command, the new version can have a different number
- of arguments than the old version.
+ arguments that the command can take, including any optional
+ argument. If this argument is not present, the default is for the
+ command to have no arguments. When redefining a command, the new
+ version can have a different number of arguments than the old
+ version.
OPTARGDEFAULT
Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
- defined command \CMD is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT
- (which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present
- then \CMD does not take an optional argument.
+ defined command '\CMD' is optional, with default value
+ OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string). If this argument is
+ not present then '\CMD' does not take an optional argument.
- That is, if \CMD is used with square brackets following, as in
- '\CMD[MYVAL]', then within DEFN '#1' expands MYVAL. While if \CMD
- is called without square brackets following, then within DEFN the
- '#1' expands to the default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any
- required arguments will be referred to starting with '#2'.
+ That is, if '\CMD' is used with square brackets following, as in
+ '\CMD[MYVAL]', then within DEFN the first "positional parameter"
+ '#1' expands MYVAL. On the other hand, if '\CMD' is called without
+ square brackets following, then within DEFN the positional
+ parameter '#1' expands to the default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either
+ case, any required arguments will be referred to starting with
+ '#2'.
- Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different from having the square
+ Omitting '[MYVAL]' in a call is different from having the square
brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
the empty string.
DEFN
- The text to be substituted for every occurrence of 'cmd'; a
- construct of the form '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
+ The text to be substituted for every occurrence of '\CMD'; the
+ positional parameter '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
Nth argument.
- A command with no arguments that is followed in the source by a space
-will swallow that space. The solution is to type '{}' after the command
-and before the space.
+ TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in '\cmd '. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} '; another solution
+is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').
- A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\JH}{Jim
-Hef{}feron}' causes the abbreviation '\JH' to be replaced by the longer
-text.
+ A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\RS}{Robin
+Smith}' results in '\RS' being replaced by the longer text.
- Redefining a command is basically the same:
+ Redefining an existing command is similar:
'\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}'.
- Here's a command definition that uses arguments:
+ Here's a command definition with one required argument:
- \newcommand{\defreference}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+ \newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
-Then, '\defreference{def:basis}' will expand to something like
-'Definition~3.14'.
+Then, '\defref{def:basis}' expands to 'Definition~\ref{def:basis}',
+which will ultimately expand to something like 'Definition~3.14'.
- An example with two arguments:
-'\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{#1\!\times\!#2}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
+ An example with two required arguments: '\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1
+\times #2$}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
- An example with optional arguments:
+ An example with an optional argument:
\newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
@@ -4033,14 +4927,16 @@
Then, '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
gives 'Dear John:'. And '\salutation[]' gives 'Dear :'.
- The braces around DEFN do not delimit the scope of the result of
-expanding DEFN. So '\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}' is wrong since
-in the sentence
+ The braces around DEFN do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding DEFN. So
+'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}' is problematic; in this sentence,
- The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Virginia}.
+ The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
-the words 'met the' will incorrectly be in italics. An extra pair of
-braces '\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}' fixes it.
+the words 'met the' would incorrectly be in italics. Another pair of
+braces in the definition is needed, like this:
+'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}'. Those braces are part of the
+definition and thus do define a group.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \providecommand, Next: \newcounter, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions
@@ -4066,21 +4962,24 @@
12.3 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
========================================
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
+ \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}
\newcounter{COUNTERNAME}[SUPERCOUNTER]
- The '\newcounter' command globally defines a new counter named
-COUNTERNAME. The name consists of letters only and does not begin with
-a backslash ('\'). The name must not already be used by another
-counter. The new counter is initialized to zero.
+ Globally defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME and initialize the
+new counter to zero.
- If the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' appears, then COUNTERNAME
+ The name COUNTERNAME must consists of letters only, and does not
+begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+
+ When you use the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' then COUNTERNAME
will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the existing counter
SUPERCOUNTER. For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within
-'section'. Any time SUPERCOUNTER is incremented with '\stepcounter'
-(*note \stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note \refstepcounter::)
-then COUNTERNAME is reset to zero.
+'section' so that any time SUPERCOUNTER is incremented with
+'\stepcounter' (*note \stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note
+\refstepcounter::) then COUNTERNAME is reset to zero.
*Note Counters::, for more information about counters.
@@ -4127,32 +5026,34 @@
============================================
These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
-'\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'. Synopses:
+'\begin{ENV} BODY \end{ENV}'. Synopses:
- \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
\newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
- \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
\renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
- Unlike '\newcommand' and '\renewcommand', the '*'-forms
-'\newenvironment*' and '\renewcommand*' have the same effect as the
-forms with no '*'.
+ The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. The body of these environments can
+still contain multiple paragraphs.
ENV
- Required; the environment name. It does not begin with backslash
- ('\'). It must not begin with the string 'end'. For
- '\newenvironment', the name ENV must not be the name of an already
- existing environment, and also the command '\ENV' must be
- undefined. For '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an
- existing environment.
+ Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+ '*' character, and thus does not begin with backslash ('\'). It
+ must not begin with the string 'end'. For '\newenvironment', the
+ name ENV must not be the name of an already existing environment,
+ and also the command '\ENV' must be undefined. For
+ '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an existing
+ environment.
NARGS
Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments
- of that the environment will take. These arguments appear after
- the '\begin', as in '\begin{ENV}{ARG1}...{ARGN}'. If this argument
- is not present then the default is for the environment to have no
- arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can
- have a different number of arguments than the old version.
+ of that the environment will take. When the environment is used
+ these arguments appear after the '\begin', as in
+ '\begin{ENV}{ARG1}...{ARGN}'. If this argument is not present then
+ the default is for the environment to have no arguments. When
+ redefining an environment, the new version can have a different
+ number of arguments than the old version.
OPTARGDEFAULT
Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
@@ -4163,11 +5064,12 @@
That is, when '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is present in the environment
definition, if '\begin{ENV}' is used with square brackets
- following, as in '\begin{ENV}[MYVAL]', then within the environment
- '#1' expands MYVAL. If '\begin{ENV}' is called without square
- brackets following, then within the environment the '#1' expands to
- the default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any required arguments
- will be referred to starting with '#2'.
+ following, as in '\begin{ENV}[MYVAL]', then, within BEGDEFN, the
+ positional parameter '#1' expands to MYVAL. If '\begin{ENV}' is
+ called without square brackets following, then, within within
+ BEGDEFN, the positional parameter '#1' expands to the default
+ OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any required arguments will be
+ referred to starting with '#2'.
Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different from having the square
brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
@@ -4175,22 +5077,22 @@
the empty string.
BEGDEFN
- Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'; a
- construct of the form '#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the
- Nth argument.
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'.
+ Within BEGDEF, the Nth positional parameter (i.e., '#N') is
+ replaced by the text of the Nth argument.
ENDDEFN
Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'.
- Note that it may not contain any argument parameters, so '#N'
- cannot be used here.
+ This may not contain any positional parameters, so '#N' cannot be
+ used here (but see the final example below).
- The environment ENV delimits the scope of the result of expanding
-BEGDEFN and ENDDEFN. Thus, in the first example below, the effect of
-the '\small' is limited to the quote and does not extend to material
-following the environment.
+ All environments, that is to say the BEGDEFN code, the environment
+body and the ENDDEFN code, are processed within a group. Thus, in the
+first example below, the effect of the '\small' is limited to the quote
+and does not extend to material following the environment.
This example gives an environment like LaTeX's 'quotation' except
-that it will be set in smaller type.
+that it will be set in smaller type:
\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
\small\begin{quotation}
@@ -4198,8 +5100,8 @@
\end{quotation}
}
- This shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
-that cites the author.
+ This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
+that cites the author:
\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
\begin{quotation}
@@ -4208,15 +5110,15 @@
\end{quotation}
}
-The author's name is optional, and defaults to Shakespeare. In the
-document, use the environment as here:
+The author's name is optional, and defaults to 'Shakespeare'. In the
+document, use the environment like this:
\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
- ..
+ ...
\end{citequote}
The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use
-in ENDDEFN.
+in ENDDEFN, in this case in a box (*note \sbox::):
\newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
@@ -4233,33 +5135,33 @@
12.7 '\newtheorem'
==================
-Define a new "theorem-like environment". Synopses:
+Define a new theorem-like environment. Synopses:
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}
\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
\newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
- Both create a theorem-like environment NAME. Using the first form,
+ Using the first form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}' creates an
+environment that will be labelled with TITLE. See the first example
+below.
- \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
-
-with the optional argument after the second required argument, creates
+ The second form '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]' creates
an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing counter
-NUMBERED_WITHIN: it will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is reset).
+NUMBERED_WITHIN (its counter will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is
+reset).
- Using the second form,
+ The third form '\newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}', with
+optional argument between the two required arguments, will create an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+NUMBERED_LIKE.
- \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
-
-with the optional argument between the two required arguments, will
-create an environment whose counter will share the previously defined
-counter NUMBERED_LIKE.
-
You can specify one of NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither,
but not both.
This command creates a counter named NAME. In addition, unless the
-optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, the current '\ref' value will
-be that of '\theNUMBERED_WITHIN' (*note \ref::).
+optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, inside of the theorem-like
+environment the current '\ref' value will be that of
+'\theNUMBERED_WITHIN' (*note \ref::).
This declaration is global. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
@@ -4289,7 +5191,7 @@
NUMBERED_LIKE.
Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
-sequentially. This example has a declaration in the preamble that
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
results in 'Definition 1' and 'Definition 2' in the output.
\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
@@ -4304,9 +5206,9 @@
Second def
\end{defn}
- Because this example specifies the optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN
-to '\newtheorem' as 'section', the example, with the same document body,
-gives 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
+ Because the next example specifies the optional argument
+NUMBERED_WITHIN to '\newtheorem' as 'section', the example, with the
+same document body, gives 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
\begin{document}
@@ -4320,7 +5222,7 @@
Second def
\end{defn}
- In this example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+ In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
second of which calls for the new 'thm' environment to use the same
counter as 'defn'. It gives 'Definition 1.1', followed by 'Theorem 2.1'
and 'Definition 2.2'.
@@ -4376,7 +5278,7 @@
characters in each:
\newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
- \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 11pt}
+ \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
\testfontat abc
\testfontscaled abc
@@ -4386,11 +5288,14 @@
12.9 '\protect'
===============
-All LaTeX commands are either "fragile" or "robust". Footnotes, line
-breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more, are
-fragile. A fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to
-certain commands. To prevent such commands from breaking they must be
-preceded by the command '\protect'.
+All LaTeX commands are either "fragile" or "robust". A fragile command
+can break when it is used in the argument to certain other commands.
+Commands that contain data that LaTeX writes to an auxiliary file and
+re-reads later are fragile. This includes material that goes into a
+table of contents, list of figures, list of tables, etc. Fragile
+commands also include line breaks, any command that has an optional
+argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from breaking, one
+solution is to preceded them with the command '\protect'.
For example, when LaTeX runs the '\section{SECTION NAME}' command it
writes the SECTION NAME text to the '.aux' auxiliary file, moving it
@@ -4399,7 +5304,7 @@
typesetting it directly is referred to as a "moving argument". A
command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX
code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the
-'\caption{..}' command (*note figure::), in the '\thanks{..}' command
+'\caption{...}' command (*note figure::), in the '\thanks{...}' command
(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the 'tabular' and 'array'
environments (*note tabular::).
@@ -4412,12 +5317,12 @@
a '\protect' command be used in the argument to '\addtocounter' or
'\setcounter' command.
- In this example the 'caption' command gives a mysterious error about
+ In this example the '\caption' command gives a mysterious error about
an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each '\raisebox'
command with '\protect'.
\begin{figure}
- ..
+ ...
\caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
\end{figure}
@@ -4428,9 +5333,9 @@
\begin{document}
\tableofcontents
- ..
+ ...
\section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
- ..
+ ...
File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: Top
@@ -4440,11 +5345,13 @@
Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
name of the counter is often the same as the name of the environment or
-command associated with the number, except with no backslash ('\').
-Thus the '\chapter' command starts a chapter and the 'chapter' counter
-keeps track of the chapter number. Below is a list of the counters used
-in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
+command associated with the number, except that the counter's name has
+no backslash '\'. Thus, associated with the '\chapter' command is the
+'chapter' counter that keeps track of the chapter number.
+ Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+
part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
section page footnote enumiii
@@ -4452,23 +5359,22 @@
subsubsection
The 'mpfootnote' counter is used by the '\footnote' command inside of
-a minipage (*note minipage::).
+a minipage (*note minipage::). The counters 'enumi' through 'enumiv'
+are used in the 'enumerate' environment, for up to four levels of
+nesting (*note enumerate::).
- The 'enumi' through 'enumiv' counters are used in the 'enumerate'
-environment, for up to four nested levels (*note enumerate::).
-
New counters are created with '\newcounter'. *Note \newcounter::.
* Menu:
-* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter.
-* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
-* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
-* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter.
-* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter.
-* \refstepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-* \stepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-* \day \month \year:: Numeric date values.
+* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter.
+* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter.
+* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter.
+* \refstepcounter:: Add to a counter.
+* \stepcounter:: Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+* \day \month \year:: Numeric date values.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Next: \usecounter, Up: Counters
@@ -4476,35 +5382,49 @@
13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
=====================================================================
-All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
+Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter COUNTER has the value 1 then a '\alph{COUNTER}' in your
+source will result in a lower case letter a appearing in the output.
+
+ All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
instance, '\alph{enumi}'. Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.
-'\alph'
- prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ...
+'\alph{COUNTER}'
+ Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ...
-'\Alph'
- uses uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ...
+'\Alph{COUNTER}'
+ Print in uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ...
-'\arabic'
- uses Arabic numbers: '1', '2', ...
+'\arabic{COUNTER}'
+ Print in Arabic numbers: '1', '2', ...
-'\roman'
- uses lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ...
+'\roman{COUNTER}'
+ Print in lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ...
-'\Roman'
- uses uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ...
+'\Roman{COUNTER}'
+ Print in uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ...
-'\fnsymbol'
- prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols
+'\fnsymbol{COUNTER}'
+ Prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols
(conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of COUNTER
must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
- Here are the symbols (as Unicode code points in ASCII output):
+ Here are the symbols:
- asterisk(*) dagger(U+2021) ddagger(U+2021)
- section-sign(U+00A7) paragraph-sign(U+00B6) parallel(U+2225)
- double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(U+2020U+2020) double-ddagger(U+2021U+2021)
+ Name Command Equivalent Unicode
+ symbol and/or numeric
+ code point
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ asterisk '\ast' *
+ dagger '\dagger' U+2020
+ ddagger '\ddagger' U+2021
+ section-sign '\S' U+00A7
+ paragraph-sign '\P' U+00B6
+ double-vert '\parallel' U+2016
+ double-asterisk '\ast\ast' **
+ double-dagger '\dagger\dagger' U+2020U+2020
+ double-ddagger '\ddagger\ddagger' U+2021U+2021
File: latex2e.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters
@@ -4581,6 +5501,11 @@
VALUE argument. Note that the counter name does not start with a
backslash.
+ In this example the section value appears as 'V'.
+
+ \setcounter{section}{5}
+ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters
@@ -4590,6 +5515,12 @@
The '\addtocounter' command globally increments COUNTER by the amount
specified by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.
+ In this example the section value appears as 'VII'.
+
+ \setcounter{section}{5}
+ \addtocounter{section}{2}
+ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters
@@ -4727,20 +5658,29 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Prev: Units of length, Up: Lengths
-14.2 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
-==============================
+14.2 '\setlength'
+=================
-The '\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can
-be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches ('in'),
-millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big points ('bp', etc.
+Synopsis:
+ \setlength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
+
+ The '\setlength' sets the value of "length command" '\LEN' to the
+VALUE argument which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX
+understands, i.e., inches ('in'), millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big
+points ('bp'), etc.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths
-14.3 '\addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}'
-=================================
+14.3 '\addtolength'
+===================
-The '\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
+
+ The '\addtolength' command increments a length command '\LEN' by the
amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.
@@ -4749,11 +5689,13 @@
14.4 '\settodepth'
==================
-'\settodepth{\gnat}{text}'
+Synopsis:
- The '\settodepth' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal
-to the depth of the 'text' argument.
+ \settodepth{\LEN}{TEXT}
+ The '\settodepth' command sets the value of a length command '\LEN'
+equal to the depth of the TEXT argument.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths
@@ -4760,11 +5702,13 @@
14.5 '\settoheight'
===================
-'\settoheight{\gnat}{text}'
+Synopsis:
- The '\settoheight' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal
-to the height of the 'text' argument.
+ \settoheight{\LEN}{text}
+ The '\settoheight' command sets the value of a length command '\LEN'
+equal to the height of the 'text' argument.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths
@@ -4771,7 +5715,11 @@
14.6 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
==============================
-The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
+Synopsis:
+
+ \settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}
+
+ The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
width of the TEXT argument.
@@ -4794,7 +5742,7 @@
'\depth'. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
size, e.g., say
- '\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}'
+ \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
File: latex2e.info, Node: Making paragraphs, Next: Math formulas, Prev: Lengths, Up: Top
@@ -4837,7 +5785,7 @@
When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any
paragraph indentation, as in this example.
- .. end of the prior paragraph.
+ ... end of the prior paragraph.
\noindent This paragraph is not indented.
@@ -4964,8 +5912,8 @@
==============================
In math mode, use the caret character '^' to make the EXP appear as a
-superscript, ie. type '^{EXP}'. Similarly, in math mode,
-underscore '_{EXP}' makes a subscript out of EXP.
+superscript: '^{EXP}'. Similarly, in math mode, underscore '_{EXP}'
+makes a subscript out of EXP.
In this example the '0' and '1' appear as subscripts while the '2' is
a superscript.
@@ -5006,9 +5954,12 @@
Below is a list of commonly-available symbols. It is by no means an
exhaustive list. Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
-parenthesis. The commands for these symbols can be used only in math
-mode.
+parenthesis. Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
+be used only in math mode.
+ To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
+mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
+
'\|'
U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\parallel'.
@@ -5036,7 +5987,7 @@
reserved for cross-correlation.
'\asymp'
- U+224D Asymptomatically equivalent (relation).
+ U+224D Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
'\backslash'
\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus '\setminus', and
@@ -5088,8 +6039,8 @@
U+22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
'\bot'
- U+22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a poset, or a
- contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
+ U+22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set,
+ or a contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
'\bowtie'
U+22C8 Natural join of two relations (relation).
@@ -5096,7 +6047,7 @@
'\Box'
U+25A1 Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary).
- This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
'amssymb' package.
'\bullet'
@@ -5121,8 +6072,8 @@
'\complement'
U+2201 Set complement, used as a superscript as in
- '$S^\complement$' (ordinary). This is not available in Plain TeX.
- In LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. Also used:
+ '$S^\complement$' (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In
+ LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. Also used:
'$S^{\mathsf{c}}$' or '$\bar{S}$'.
'\cong'
@@ -5152,8 +6103,8 @@
U+03B4 Greek lower case delta (ordinary).
'\Diamond'
- U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary). This is not available in
- Plain TeX. In LaTeX you must load the 'amssymb' package.
+ U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain
+ TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
'\diamond'
U+22C4 Diamond operator, or diamond bullet (binary). Similar:
@@ -5181,13 +6132,14 @@
U+2113 Lower-case cursive letter l (ordinary).
'\emptyset'
- U+2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary). Similar: reversed empty
- set '\varnothing'.
+ U+2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varnothing'.
'\epsilon'
- U+03F5 Lower case Greek-text letter (ordinary). More widely used
- in mathematics is the curly epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5. Related:
- the set membership relation '\in' U+2208.
+ U+03F5 Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text
+ letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter
+ epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5. Related: the set membership relation
+ '\in' U+2208.
'\equiv'
U+2261 Equivalence (relation).
@@ -5248,8 +6200,9 @@
U+2111 Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part '\Re'.
'\in'
- U+2208 Set element (relation). See also: lower case Greek letter
- epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and rounded small epsilon '\varepsilon'.
+ U+2208 Set element (relation). See also: lower case lunate
+ epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and small letter script
+ epsilon '\varepsilon'.
'\infty'
U+221E Infinity (ordinary).
@@ -5298,9 +6251,9 @@
for '\leq'.
'\leadsto'
- U+21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). This is not available in
- Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. To get
- this symbol outside of math mode you can put
+ U+21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain
+ TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. To get this
+ symbol outside of math mode you can put
'\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}' in the preamble and
then use '\Leadsto' instead.
@@ -5331,14 +6284,14 @@
for '\le'.
'\lfloor'
- U+230A Left floor bracket (opening).
+ U+230A Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: '\floor'.
'\lhd'
- U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). This
- is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
- 'amssymb' package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
- 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
- gives better spacing).
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). Not
+ available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
+ package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb'
+ and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
'\ll'
U+226A Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
@@ -5372,7 +6325,7 @@
'\mho'
U+2127 Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
- This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
'amssymb' package.
'\mid'
@@ -5494,21 +6447,20 @@
U+00B1 Plus or minus (binary).
'\prec'
- U+227A Preceeds (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
+ U+227A Precedes (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
'\preceq'
- U+2AAF Preceeds or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+ U+2AAF Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
equals '\leq'.
'\prime'
U+2032 Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
- used as a superscript '$A^\prime$'. Note that '$f^\prime$' and
- '$f'$' produce the same result. An advantage of the second is that
- '$f'''$' produces the the desired symbol, that is, the same result
- as '$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses somewhat less typing. Note
- that you can only use '\prime' in math mode but you can type right
- single quote ''' in text mode also, although it resuts in a
- different look than in math mode.
+ used as a superscript: '$f^\prime$'; '$f^\prime$' and '$f'$'
+ produce the same result. An advantage of the second is that
+ '$f'''$' produces the desired symbol, that is, the same result as
+ '$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses rather less typing. You can
+ only use '\prime' in math mode. Using the right single quote '''
+ in text mode produces a different character (apostrophe).
'\prod'
U+220F Product (operator).
@@ -5523,7 +6475,7 @@
U+03C8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\rangle'
- U+27B9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar:
+ U+27E9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar:
greater than '>'. Matches:'\langle'.
'\rbrace'
@@ -5544,19 +6496,24 @@
'\restriction'
U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation).
- Synonym: '\upharpoonright'. Not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX
- you should load the 'amssymb' package.
+ Synonym: '\upharpoonright'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX
+ you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+'\revemptyset'
+ U+29B0 Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+ '\varnothing'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
+ load the 'stix' package.
+
'\rfloor'
U+230B Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
off (closing). Matches '\lfloor'.
'\rhd'
- U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). This
- is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
- 'amssymb' package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should
- instead load 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleright' (which is a
- relation and so gives better spacing).
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). Not
+ available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
+ package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
'\rho'
U+03C1 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
@@ -5608,7 +6565,7 @@
display (operator).
'\smile'
- U+2323 Upward curving arc (ordinary).
+ U+2323 Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
'\spadesuit'
U+2660 Spade card suit (ordinary).
@@ -5623,7 +6580,7 @@
'\sqsubset'
U+228F Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset '\subset'.
- This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
'amssymb' package.
'\sqsubseteq'
@@ -5632,8 +6589,8 @@
'\sqsupset'
U+2290 Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
- superset '\supset'. This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX
- you should load the 'amssymb' package.
+ superset '\supset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
+ to load the 'amssymb' package.
'\sqsupseteq'
U+2292 Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset
@@ -5671,7 +6628,7 @@
U+2287 Superset or equal to (relation).
'\surd'
- U+221A Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{..}'
+ U+221A Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{...}'
typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends
to cover the argument.
@@ -5694,8 +6651,8 @@
Synonym: '\rightarrow'.
'\top'
- U+22A4 Top, greatest element of a poset (ordinary). See
- also '\bot'.
+ U+22A4 Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary).
+ See also '\bot'.
'\triangle'
U+25B3 Triangle (ordinary).
@@ -5713,16 +6670,16 @@
spacing).
'\unlhd'
- U+22B4 Left-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with
- a line under (binary). This is not available in Plain TeX. In
- LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ U+22B4 Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+ triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which
is a relation and so gives better spacing).
'\unrhd'
- U+22B5 Right-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with
- a line under (binary). This is not available in Plain TeX. In
- LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ U+22B5 Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+ triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which
is a relation and so gives better spacing).
@@ -5746,8 +6703,8 @@
'\upharpoonright'
U+21BE Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
- Synonym: '\restriction'. Not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you
- should load the 'amssymb' package.
+ Synonym: '\restriction'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you
+ need to load the 'amssymb' package.
'\uplus'
U+228E Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the
@@ -5761,10 +6718,15 @@
U+03C5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\varepsilon'
- U+03B5 Rounded small epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used
- in mathematics than the non-variant lower case Greek-text letter
- form '\epsilon' U+03F5. Related: set membership '\in'.
+ U+03B5 Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely
+ used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+ '\epsilon' U+03F5. Related: set membership '\in'.
+'\vanothing'
+ U+2205 Empty set symbol. Similar: '\emptyset'. Related:
+ '\revemptyset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
+ load the 'amssymb' package.
+
'\varphi'
U+03C6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
non-variant form is '\phi' U+03D5.
@@ -5797,7 +6759,7 @@
U+2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
bar '\vert'.
- For a norm you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
+ For a norm symbol, you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
'\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}' to your preamble.
This gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars
that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
@@ -5946,7 +6908,7 @@
\sinh
'\sup'
- sup
+ \sup
'\tan'
\tan
@@ -6035,7 +6997,7 @@
'\,'
Normally '3mu'. The longer name is '\thinspace'. This can be used
- in both math mode and text mode.
+ in both math mode and text mode. *Note \thinspace::.
'\!'
A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'. Math mode only.
@@ -6063,8 +7025,23 @@
'\*'
A "discretionary" multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
- allowed.
+ allowed. Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated
+ by a space, while in the case of a break a U+00D7 symbol is printed
+ immediately before the break. So
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{document}
+ Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\)
+ through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is
+ equal to zero.
+ \end{document}
+
+ will make that sort of output (the ellipsis '[...]' is here to show
+ the line break at the same place as in a TeX output):
+
+ Now A_3 = 0, [...] A_1 through A_4, that is A_1 A_2 \times
+ A_3 A_4, is equal to zero.
+
'\cdots'
A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the
line.
@@ -6072,35 +7049,54 @@
'\ddots'
A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots.
-'\frac{num}{den}'
- Produces the fraction 'num' divided by 'den'.
+'\frac{NUM}{DEN}'
+ Produces the fraction NUM divided by DEN.
'\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2'
- The two delimiters need not match; '.' acts as a null delimiter,
+ The two delimiters need not match; '.' acts as a "null delimiter",
producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the
- math in between. Example: '\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]'.
+ math in between. Example: '\left( \sum_{i=1}^{10} a_i \right]'.
-'\overbrace{TEXT}'
- Generates a brace over TEXT. For example,
- \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}.
+'\mathdollar'
+ Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+'\mathellipsis'
+ Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: ....
+
+'\mathparagraph'
+ Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: U+00B6.
+
+'\mathsection'
+ Section sign in math mode.
+
+'\mathsterling'
+ Sterling sign in math mode: #.
+
+'\mathunderscore'
+ Underscore in math mode: _.
+
+'\overbrace{MATH}'
+ Generates a brace over MATH. For example,
+ '\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \;\textrm{times}}'.
+
'\overline{TEXT}'
- Generates a horizontal line over TEX. For example, \overline{x+y}.
+ Generates a horizontal line over TEX. For example,
+ '\overline{x+y}'.
-'\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}'
+'\sqrt[ROOT]{ARG}'
Produces the representation of the square root of ARG. The
optional argument ROOT determines what root to produce. For
- example, the cube root of 'x+y' would be typed as
- '$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'.
+ example, the cube root of 'x+y' would be typed as '\sqrt[3]{x+y}'.
'\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}'
Puts TEXT above RELATION. For example,
'\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
-'\underbrace{math}'
- Generates MATH with a brace underneath.
+'\underbrace{MATH}'
+ Generates MATH with a brace underneath. For example,
+ '\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}'
-'\underline{text}'
+'\underline{TEXT}'
Causes TEXT, which may be either math mode or not, to be
underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of
descenders.
@@ -6150,7 +7146,45 @@
paragraph mode" (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph mode, which it
starts out in, is called "outer paragraph mode".
+* Menu:
+
+* \ensuremath:: Ensure that math mode is active
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \ensuremath, Up: Modes
+
+17.1 '\ensuremath'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ensuremath{FORMULA}
+
+ The '\ensuremath' command ensures that FORMULA is typeset in math
+mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used.
+
+ For instance:
+
+ \documentclass{report}
+ \newcommand{\ab}{\ensuremath{(\delta, \varepsilon)}}
+ \begin{document}
+ Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac{1}{\pi}, 0)\), ...
+ \end{document}
+
+ One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that
+they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for
+'\leadsto':
+
+ \documentclass{report}
+ \usepackage{amssymb}
+ \newcommand{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}{}
+ \let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto
+ \renewcommand\leadsto{\ensuremath{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}}
+ \begin{document}
+ All roads \leadsto\ Rome.
+ \end{document}
+
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: Page styles, Next: Spaces, Prev: Modes, Up: Top
18 Page styles
@@ -6285,9 +7319,9 @@
Horizontal space
* \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space.
* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space.
-* \(SPACE) and \@:: Space after a period.
-* \(SPACE) after CS:: Controlling space gobbling after a control sequence.
-* \frenchspacing:: Make interword and intersentence space equal.
+* \(SPACE) and \@:: Space after a period.
+* \(SPACE) after control sequence:: Space (gobbling) after a control sequence.
+* \frenchspacing:: Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
* \thinspace:: One-sixth of an em.
* \/:: Insert italic correction.
* \hrulefill \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
@@ -6319,7 +7353,7 @@
Normally when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both.
-This command's starred version '\hspace*{..}' puts a non-discardable
+This command's starred version '\hspace*{...}' puts a non-discardable
invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
output.
@@ -6342,7 +7376,7 @@
(*note \hspace::).
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \(SPACE) and \@, Next: \(SPACE) after CS, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \(SPACE) and \@, Next: \(SPACE) after control sequence, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces
19.3 '\(SPACE)' and \@
======================
@@ -6357,7 +7391,7 @@
capital letter, in which case it takes that period for part of an
abbreviation. Note that if a sentence-ending period is immediately
followed by a right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or double
-quote, then the intersentence space follows that parenthesis or quote.
+quote, then the inter-sentence space follows that parenthesis or quote.
If you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not
a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last word in the
@@ -6365,66 +7399,48 @@
('~'). Examples are 'Nat.\ Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean', and
'(manure, etc.)\ for sale'.
- For other use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) after CS::.
+ For another use of '\ ', *note \(SPACE) after control sequence::.
In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
-period that ends the sentence, then put '\@' on the left of that period.
-For example, 'book by the MAA\@.' will have intersentence spacing after
-the period.
+period that ends the sentence, then put '\@' before that period. For
+example, 'book by the MAA\@.' will have inter-sentence spacing after the
+period.
- In contrast, putting '\@' on the right of a period tells TeX that the
-period does not end the sentence. In the example 'reserved words (if,
-then, etc.\@) are different', TeX will put interword space after the
-closing parenthesis (note that '\@' is before the parenthesis).
+ In contrast, putting '\@' after a period tells TeX that the period
+does not end the sentence. In the example 'reserved words (if, then,
+etc.\@) are different', TeX will put interword space after the closing
+parenthesis (note that '\@' is before the parenthesis).
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \(SPACE) after CS, Next: \frenchspacing, Prev: \(SPACE) and \@, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \(SPACE) after control sequence, Next: \frenchspacing, Prev: \(SPACE) and \@, Up: Spaces
-19.4 '\ ' after a control sequence
-==================================
+19.4 '\ ' after control sequence
+================================
The '\ ' command is often used after control sequences to keep them from
-gobbling the space that follows, as in '\TeX\ is a nice system.' And,
-under normal circumstances '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent to
-'\ '. For other use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) and \@::.
+gobbling the space that follows, as in '\TeX\ is nice'. And, under
+normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent to '\ '.
+For another use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) and \@::.
Some people prefer to use '{}' for the same purpose, as in '\TeX{} is
-a nice system.' This has the advantage that you can always write it the
-same way, like '\TeX{}', whether it is followed by a space or by a
-punctuation mark. Please compare:
+nice'. This has the advantage that you can always write it the same
+way, namely '\TeX{}', whether it is followed by a space or by a
+punctuation mark. Compare:
\TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.
\TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.
- When you define user commands (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::)
-you can prevent the space gobbling after the command by using the
-package 'xspace' and inserting '\xspace' at the end of the definition
-For instance:
- \documentclass{minimal}
- \usepackage{xspace}
- \newcommand*{\Loup}{Grand Cric\xspace}
- \begin{document}
- Que le \Loup me croque !
- \end{document}
+ Some individual commands, notably those defined with the 'xspace',
+package do not follow the standard behavior.
- A quick hack to use '\xspace' for existing command is as follows:
- \documentclass{minimal}
- \usepackage{xspace}
- \newcommand*{\SansXspaceTeX}{}
- \let\SansXspaceTeX\TeX
- \renewcommand{\TeX}{\SansXspaceTeX\xspace}
- \begin{document}
- \TeX is a nice system.
- \end{document}
-
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \frenchspacing, Next: \thinspace, Prev: \(SPACE) after CS, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \frenchspacing, Next: \thinspace, Prev: \(SPACE) after control sequence, Up: Spaces
19.5 '\frenchspacing'
=====================
-This declaration (from Plain TeX) causes LaTeX to treat intersentence
+This declaration (from Plain TeX) causes LaTeX to treat inter-sentence
spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions,
@@ -6513,9 +7529,9 @@
natural length of the total vertical space equal to LENGTH.
Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
-environment that starts a new paragraph. (For instance, a Theorem
-environment is defined to begin and end in '\addvspace{..}' so that two
-consecutive Theorem's are separated by one vertical space, not two.)
+environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a Theorem
+environment is defined to begin and end with '\addvspace{...}' so that
+two consecutive Theorem's are separated by one vertical space, not two.
This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
@@ -6589,10 +7605,14 @@
Add the vertical space LENGTH. This can be negative or positive, and
is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
- LaTeX removes the vertical space from '\vfill' at a page break, that
-is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version '\vspace*{..}'
+ LaTeX removes the vertical space from '\vspace' at a page break, that
+is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version '\vspace*{...}'
causes the space to stay.
+ If '\vspace' is used in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode), the space is inserted _after_ the line with the
+'\vspace' command. A new paragraph is not started.
+
In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
@@ -6666,13 +7686,17 @@
20.3 'lrbox'
============
-'\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}'
+Synopsis:
- This is the environment form of '\sbox'.
+ \begin{lrbox}{\CMD}
+ TEXT
+ \end{lrbox}
- The text inside the environment is saved in the box 'cmd', which must
-have been declared with '\newsavebox'.
+ This is the environment form of *note '\sbox': \sbox.
+ The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the box '\CMD', which
+must have been declared with '\newsavebox'.
+
File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Boxes
@@ -6712,7 +7736,7 @@
\parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{TEXT}
The '\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in
-'paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text,
+"paragraph mode". It should be used to make a box small pieces of text,
with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any
paragraph-making environments inside a '\parbox' argument. For larger
pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making
@@ -6725,9 +7749,12 @@
TEXT
the text that goes inside the parbox.
- The optional POSITION argument allows you to align either the top or
-bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text
-(default is top).
+ By default LaTeX will position vertically a parbox so its center
+lines up with the center of the surrounding text line. When the
+optional POSITION argument is present and equal either to 't' or 'b',
+this allows you respectively to align either the top or bottom line in
+the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text. You may also
+specify 'm' for POSITION to get the default behaviour.
The optional HEIGHT argument overrides the natural height of the box.
@@ -6752,7 +7779,7 @@
Synopsis:
- \raisebox{distance}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{text}
+ \raisebox{DISTANCE}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{TEXT}
The '\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT. The first mandatory
argument specifies how high TEXT is to be raised (or lowered if it is a
@@ -6760,7 +7787,7 @@
The optional arguments HEIGHT and DEPTH are dimensions. If they are
specified, LaTeX treats TEXT as extending a certain distance above the
-baseline (height) or below (depth), ignoring its natural height and
+baseline (HEIGHT) or below (DEPTH), ignoring its natural height and
depth.
@@ -6817,51 +7844,111 @@
* Menu:
-* Reserved characters:: Inserting '# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }'
-* Text symbols:: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
-* Accents:: Inserting accents.
-* Non-English characters:: Inserting other non-English characters.
-* \rule:: Inserting lines and rectangles.
-* \today:: Inserting today's date.
+* Reserved characters:: Inserting '# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \'
+* Upper and lower case:: Make text upper or lower case.
+* Symbols by font position:: Inserting font symbols by number.
+* Text symbols:: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+* Accents:: Inserting accents.
+* Additional Latin letters:: Inserting other non-English characters.
+* \rule:: Inserting lines and rectangles.
+* \today:: Inserting today's date.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: Reserved characters, Next: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Reserved characters, Next: Upper and lower case, Up: Special insertions
21.1 Reserved characters
========================
-The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
+LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes (for
+example, the percent sign '%' is for comments) so they are called
"reserved characters" or "special characters".
- # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+ # $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
- Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX will
-do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as
-itself, include a '\' in front of the character. For example, '\$' will
-produce '$' in your output.
+ If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash '\' in front of the character. Thus, '\$1.23' will
+produce '$1.23' in your output.
- One exception to this rule is '\' itself, because '\\' has its own
-special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing
-'$\backslash$' in your file, and a typewriter '\' is produced by using
-'\' in a verbatim command (*note verbatim::).
+ As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use '\~{}' (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
+receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text body font
+circumflex use '\^{}'. A text body font backslash results from
+'\textbackslash{}'.
- Also, '\~' and '\^' place tilde and circumflex accents over the
-following letter, as in o~ and o^ (*note Accents::); to get a standalone
-'~' or '^', you can again use a verbatim command.
+ To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
+'\verb!!', as below.
- Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you
-know its number by using the '\symbol' command. For example, the
-visible space character used in the '\verb*' command has the code
-decimal 32, so it can be typed as '\symbol{32}'.
+ \begin{center}
+ \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
+ \end{center}
- You can also specify octal numbers with ''' or hexadecimal numbers
-with '"', so the previous example could also be written as
-'\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.
+ In that example the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the
+lines.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: Text symbols, Next: Accents, Prev: Reserved characters, Up: Special insertions
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Upper and lower case, Next: Symbols by font position, Prev: Reserved characters, Up: Special insertions
-21.2 Text symbols
+21.2 Upper and lower case
+=========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \uppercase{TEXT}
+ \lowercase{TEXT}
+ \MakeUppercase{TEXT}
+ \MakeLowercase{TEXT}
+
+ Change the case of characters. The TeX primitives commands
+'\uppercase' and '\lowercase' only work for American characters. The
+LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' commands also
+change characters accessed by commands such as '\ae' or '\aa'. The
+commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' are robust but they have
+moving arguments (*note \protect::).
+
+ These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of
+a command within TEXT. But they do change the case of every other latin
+character inside the argument TEXT. Thus, '\MakeUppercase{Let
+$y=f(x)$'} produces "LET Y=F(X)". Another example is that the name of an
+environment will be changed, so that '\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ...
+\end{tabular}' will produce an error because the first half is changed
+to '\begin{TABULAR}'.
+
+ LaTeX uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
+document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
+works well with the standard TeX fonts for all Latin alphabets but will
+cause problems when using other alphabets.
+
+ To change the case of text that results from a command inside TEXT
+you need to do expansion. Here the '\Schoolname' produces "COLLEGE OF
+MATHEMATICS".
+
+ \newcommand{\schoolname}{College of Mathematics}
+ \newcommand{\Schoolname}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\expandafter{\schoolname}}
+
+ To uppercase only the first letter of words use the package
+'mfirstuc'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Symbols by font position, Next: Text symbols, Prev: Upper and lower case, Up: Special insertions
+
+21.3 Symbols by font position
+=============================
+
+You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the '\symbol' command. For example, the visible space character used in
+the '\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
+'\symbol{32}'.
+
+ You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ''' prefix,
+or hexadecimal (base 16) with a '"' prefix, so the previous example
+could also be written as '\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Text symbols, Next: Accents, Prev: Symbols by font position, Up: Special insertions
+
+21.4 Text symbols
=================
LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
@@ -6902,7 +7989,7 @@
'\P'
'\textparagraph'
- Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+ Paragraph sign (pilcrow): U+00B6.
'\pounds'
'\textsterling'
@@ -6916,7 +8003,7 @@
Right (closing) quote: '.
'\S'
- Section symbol.
+ \itemx \textsection Section sign: U+00A7.
'\TeX'
The TeX logo.
@@ -6955,8 +8042,8 @@
LETTER in a circle, as in (R).
'\textcompwordmark'
-'\textcapitalwordmark'
-'\textascenderwordmark'
+'\textcapitalcompwordmark'
+'\textascendercompwordmark'
Composite word mark (invisible). The '\textcapital...' form has
the cap height of the font, while the '\textascender...' form has
the ascender height.
@@ -6967,7 +8054,7 @@
'\textdaggerdbl'
Double dagger: \ddag.
-'\textdollar (or '$')'
+'\textdollar (or '\$')'
Dollar sign: $.
'\textemdash (or '---')'
@@ -6996,7 +8083,7 @@
Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: a, o.
'\textperiodcentered'
- Centered period: \cdot.
+ Centered period: U+00B7.
'\textquestiondown (or '?`')'
Upside down question mark: ?.
@@ -7004,7 +8091,7 @@
'\textquotedblleft (or '``')'
Double left quote: ".
-'\textquotedblright (or ''')'
+'\textquotedblright (or '''')'
Double right quote: ".
'\textquoteleft (or '`')'
@@ -7013,6 +8100,9 @@
'\textquoteright (or ''')'
Single right quote: '.
+'\textquotesingle'
+ Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+
'\textquotestraightbase'
'\textquotestraightdblbase'
Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
@@ -7027,7 +8117,7 @@
"Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
'\texttrademark'
- Trademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}.
+ Trademark symbol: U+2122.
'\texttwelveudash'
"Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
@@ -7039,9 +8129,9 @@
Visible space symbol.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: Accents, Next: Non-English characters, Prev: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Accents, Next: Additional Latin letters, Prev: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions
-21.3 Accents
+21.5 Accents
============
LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
@@ -7138,13 +8228,14 @@
Produces a ha'c<ek (check, caron) accent, as in 'o<'.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: Non-English characters, Next: \rule, Prev: Accents, Up: Special insertions
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Additional Latin letters, Next: \rule, Prev: Accents, Up: Special insertions
-21.4 Non-English characters
-===========================
+21.6 Additional Latin letters
+=============================
-Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting characters commonly used
-in languages other than English.
+Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters (beyond A-Z)
+extending the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than
+English.
'\aa'
'\AA'
@@ -7156,11 +8247,15 @@
'\dh'
'\DH'
- Icelandic letter eth: d and D.
+ Icelandic letter eth: d and D. Not available with OT1 encoding, you
+ need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font encoding,
+ such as T1.
'\dj'
'\DJ'
Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke.
+ Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the 'fontenc' package to
+ select an alternate font encoding, such as T1.
'\ij'
'\IJ'
@@ -7172,7 +8267,7 @@
'\ng'
'\NG'
- Latin letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+ Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
'\o'
'\O'
@@ -7188,12 +8283,14 @@
'\th'
'\TH'
- Icelandic letter thorn: th and TH.
+ Icelandic letter thorn: th and TH. Not available with OT1 encoding,
+ you need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font
+ encoding, such as T1.
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \rule, Next: \today, Prev: Non-English characters, Up: Special insertions
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \rule, Next: \today, Prev: Additional Latin letters, Up: Special insertions
-21.5 '\rule'
+21.7 '\rule'
============
Synopsis:
@@ -7215,7 +8312,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \today, Prev: \rule, Up: Special insertions
-21.6 '\today'
+21.8 '\today'
=============
The '\today' command produces today's date, in the format 'MONTH DD,
@@ -7223,6 +8320,17 @@
'\day', '\month', and '\year' (*note \day \month \year::) to do this.
It is not updated as the program runs.
+ Multilingual packages like 'babel' or classes like 'lettre', among
+others, will localize '\today'. For example, the following will output
+'4 juillet 1976':
+
+ \year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+ \documentclass{minimal}
+ \usepackage[french]{babel}
+ \begin{document}
+ \today
+ \end{document}
+
The 'datetime' package, among others, can produce a wide variety of
other date formats.
@@ -7235,7 +8343,7 @@
A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole
input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into
several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
+there is one that is the "root file"; it is the one whose name you type
when you run LaTeX.
*Note filecontents::, for an environment that allows bundling an
@@ -7262,8 +8370,8 @@
reads FILE, then does another '\clearpage'.
Given an '\includeonly' command, the '\include' actions are only run
-if FILE is listed as an argument to '\includeonly'. See the next
-section.
+if FILE is listed as an argument to '\includeonly'. See *note
+\includeonly::.
The '\include' command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
read by another '\include' command.
@@ -7271,7 +8379,7 @@
File: latex2e.info, Node: \includeonly, Next: \input, Prev: \include, Up: Splitting the input
-22.2 \'includeonly'
+22.2 '\includeonly'
===================
Synopsis:
@@ -7280,8 +8388,9 @@
The '\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by
subsequent '\include' commands. The list of filenames is
-comma-separated. Each FILE must exactly match a filename specified in a
-'\include' command for the selection to be effective.
+comma-separated. Each element FILE1, FILE2, ... must exactly match a
+filename specified in a '\include' command for the selection to be
+effective.
This command can only appear in the preamble.
@@ -7350,13 +8459,17 @@
23.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
-------------------------
-The '\addcontentsline'{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT} command adds an entry to the
-specified list or table where:
+Synopsis:
+ \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}
+
+ The '\addcontentsline' command adds an entry to the specified list or
+table where:
+
EXT
- The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
- typically one of: 'toc' (table of contents), 'lof' (list of
- figures), or 'lot' (list of tables).
+ The filename extension of the file on which information is to be
+ written, typically one of: 'toc' (table of contents), 'lof' (list
+ of figures), or 'lot' (list of tables).
UNIT
The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the
@@ -7366,15 +8479,16 @@
The name of the sectional unit: 'part', 'chapter', 'section',
'subsection', 'subsubsection'.
'lof'
- For the list of figures.
+ For the list of figures: 'figure'.
'lot'
- For the list of tables.
+ For the list of tables: 'table'.
-ENTRY
+TEXT
The text of the entry.
What is written to the '.EXT' file is the command
-'\contentsline{UNIT}{NAME}'.
+'\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the current value of
+counter 'UNIT'.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocontents, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Tables of contents
@@ -7422,7 +8536,7 @@
preamble.
The command '\index{TEXT}' writes an index entry for TEXT to an
-auxiliary file with the '.idx' extension.
+auxiliary file named with the '.idx' extension.
Specifically, what gets written is the command
'\indexentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current '\thepage'
@@ -7472,7 +8586,7 @@
LETTER BODY
\closing{CLOSING TEXT}
\end{letter}
- ... more letters ...
+ ... more letters ...
\end{document}
Produce one or more letters.
@@ -7497,12 +8611,12 @@
under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.
- Each letter environment begins with a required '\opening' command
-such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'. The LETTER BODY text is
-ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from from enumerated lists
-to displayed math, except that commands such as '\chapter' that make no
-sense in a letter are turned off. Each letter environment typically
-ends with a '\closing' command such as '\closing{Yours,}'.
+ Each 'letter' environment body begins with a required '\opening'
+command such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'. The LETTER BODY text is
+ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from enumerated lists to
+displayed math, except that commands such as '\chapter' that make no
+sense in a letter are turned off. Each 'letter' environment body
+typically ends with a '\closing' command such as '\closing{Yours,}'.
Additional material may come after the '\closing'. You can say who
is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like '\cc{the Boss \\
@@ -7589,11 +8703,12 @@
Synopsis:
\cc{FIRST NAME \\
- .. }
+ ... }
Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.
This command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
-'\closing'. Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.
+'\closing'. Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\', as
+in:
\cc{President \\
Vice President}
@@ -7606,7 +8721,7 @@
Synopsis:
- \closing{text}
+ \closing{TEXT}
Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature,
there is a '\closing' (although this command is optional). For example,
@@ -7622,7 +8737,7 @@
Synopsis:
\encl{FIRST ENCLOSED OBJECT \\
- .. }
+ ... }
Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
optional; when it is used, it typically is put after '\closing'.
@@ -7693,7 +8808,7 @@
\opening{TEXT}
This command is required. It starts a letter, following the
-'\begin{letter}{..}'. The mandatory argument TEXT is the text that
+'\begin{letter}{...}'. The mandatory argument TEXT is the text that
starts your letter. For instance:
\opening{Dear John:}
@@ -7711,7 +8826,7 @@
Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
'\closing'.
- \ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
+ \ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
File: latex2e.info, Node: \signature, Next: \telephone, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters
@@ -7722,7 +8837,7 @@
Synopsis:
\signature{FIRST LINE \\
- .. }
+ ... }
The sender's name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
is usual.
@@ -7783,10 +8898,10 @@
'\typein' prints MSG on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and
wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the
-optional \CMD argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if it
-had been included in the input file in place of the '\typein' command.
-If the \CMD argument is present, it must be a command name. This
-command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input.
+optional '\CMD' argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if
+it had been included in the input file in place of the '\typein'
+command. If the '\CMD' argument is present, it must be a command name.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input.
File: latex2e.info, Node: \typeout, Prev: \typein, Up: Terminal input/output
@@ -7914,6 +9029,7 @@
<http://tug.org/TUGboat>.
\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
\usepackage{graphicx}
\usepackage{ifpdf}
\ifpdf
@@ -7922,6 +9038,8 @@
\usepackage{url}
\fi
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
\title{Example \TUB\ article}
% repeat info for each author.
@@ -7930,6 +9048,8 @@
\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
\begin{document}
\maketitle
@@ -7936,36 +9056,34 @@
\begin{abstract}
This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
\end{abstract}
\section{Introduction}
-This is an example article for \TUB, from
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
-\texttt{hyperref} package for active urls in the \acro{PDF} output.
-Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
-The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more:
-
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
\begin{verbatim}[\small]
\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
-\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX
-\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
-\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
\TUB \TUG \tug
-\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
-\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
-\careof \thinskip
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
\cs{fred} -> \fred
-\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
\meta{fred} -> <fred>
\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
@@ -7972,10 +9090,15 @@
\booktitle{Book of Fred}
\end{verbatim}
-For more information, see the ltubguid document at:
-\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
-(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references).
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
Email \verb|tugboat at tug.org| if problems or questions.
\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
@@ -7994,32 +9117,38 @@
[index ]
* Menu:
-* '*' prompt: Command line. (line 18)
-* '*'-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 31)
-* '.glo' file: Glossaries. (line 8)
-* '.idx' file: Indexes. (line 9)
-* '.ind' file: Indexes. (line 23)
+* * prompt: Command line. (line 18)
+* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 14)
+* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 31)
+* *-form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 14)
+* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 8)
+* .idx file: Indexes. (line 9)
+* .ind file: Indexes. (line 23)
* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: Indexes. (line 16)
* abstracts: abstract. (line 6)
* accents: Accents. (line 6)
* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 6)
-* accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters. (line 25)
+* accessing any character of a font: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 6)
* acute accent: Accents. (line 20)
* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 11)
-* additional packages, loading: Document class options.
- (line 95)
-* ae ligature: Non-English characters.
- (line 15)
-* align environment, from 'amsmath': eqnarray. (line 6)
+* additional packages, loading: Additional packages. (line 6)
+* ae ligature: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 16)
+* align environment, from amsmath: eqnarray. (line 6)
* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 6)
* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
-* amsmath package, replacing 'eqnarray': eqnarray. (line 6)
+* amsmath package: array. (line 40)
+* amsmath package <1>: displaymath. (line 22)
+* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 6)
* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 37)
-* aring: Non-English characters.
- (line 11)
+* aring: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12)
* arrays, math: array. (line 6)
* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 131)
-* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 163)
+* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 166)
* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 99)
* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 64)
* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 67)
@@ -8027,7 +9156,7 @@
* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 23)
* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 12)
* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 33)
-* 'babel' package: Accents. (line 6)
+* babel package: Accents. (line 6)
* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 73)
* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 79)
* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 76)
@@ -8035,10 +9164,10 @@
* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 14)
* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 46)
* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6)
-* 'beamer' template and class: beamer template. (line 6)
+* beamer template and class: beamer template. (line 6)
* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3)
* bibliography format, open: Document class options.
- (line 62)
+ (line 65)
* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6)
* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6)
* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
@@ -8045,7 +9174,7 @@
* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 82)
* Big point: Units of length. (line 20)
* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
- (line 48)
+ (line 51)
* bold font: Font styles. (line 71)
* bold math: Font styles. (line 130)
* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 23)
@@ -8057,26 +9186,35 @@
* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6)
* breve accent: Accents. (line 86)
* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 17)
-* bug reporting: About this document. (line 6)
-* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 110)
+* bug reporting: About this document. (line 21)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 114)
* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 91)
* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 6)
* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 74)
* cap height: Text symbols. (line 99)
* caron accent: Accents. (line 97)
+* catcode: \makeatletter and \makeatother.
+ (line 18)
+* category code, character: \makeatletter and \makeatother.
+ (line 18)
* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6)
* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 51)
* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 70)
* centered equations: Document class options.
- (line 52)
+ (line 55)
* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 138)
* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 6)
* centering text, environment for: center. (line 6)
* Centimeter: Units of length. (line 24)
+* character category code: \makeatletter and \makeatother.
+ (line 18)
* characters, accented: Accents. (line 6)
-* characters, non-English: Non-English characters.
+* characters, case: Upper and lower case.
(line 6)
+* characters, non-English: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
* characters, reserved: Reserved characters. (line 6)
+* characters, special: Reserved characters. (line 6)
* check accent: Accents. (line 97)
* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
* Cicero: Units of length. (line 33)
@@ -8085,8 +9223,23 @@
* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 33)
* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 32)
* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 64)
+* citation key: \bibitem. (line 12)
+* class and package commands: Class and package commands.
+ (line 6)
+* class and package difference: Class and package construction.
+ (line 15)
+* class and package structure: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* class file example: Class and package structure.
+ (line 36)
+* class file layout: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
* class options: Document class options.
(line 6)
+* class options <1>: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* class options <2>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 6)
* closing letters: \closing. (line 6)
* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 55)
@@ -8094,11 +9247,16 @@
* command line: Command line. (line 6)
* command syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
(line 6)
+* commands, class and package: Class and package commands.
+ (line 6)
* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
+* commands, document class: Class and package construction.
+ (line 6)
* commands, redefining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
+* commands, star-variants: \@ifstar. (line 6)
* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 99)
* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
* contents file: Output files. (line 43)
@@ -8123,7 +9281,7 @@
* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 104)
* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 18)
* date, today's: \today. (line 6)
-* 'datetime' package: \today. (line 11)
+* datetime package: \today. (line 22)
* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
@@ -8136,11 +9294,16 @@
* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 23)
* Didot point: Units of length. (line 30)
* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 16)
+* difference between class and package: Class and package construction.
+ (line 15)
+* discretionary hyphenation: \discretionary. (line 6)
* discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany. (line 7)
* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
(line 6)
* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
(line 6)
+* document class commands: Class and package construction.
+ (line 6)
* document class options: Document class options.
(line 6)
* document class, defined: Starting and ending. (line 14)
@@ -8162,7 +9325,7 @@
* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 30)
* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 144)
* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 52)
-* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 157)
+* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 160)
* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 147)
* double spacing: Low-level font commands.
(line 114)
@@ -8172,8 +9335,8 @@
* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 36)
* em: Units of length. (line 38)
* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 113)
-* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 166)
-* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 172)
+* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 169)
+* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 175)
* emphasis: Font styles. (line 59)
* enclosure list: \encl. (line 6)
* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 3)
@@ -8187,21 +9350,25 @@
(line 6)
* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options.
- (line 58)
+ (line 61)
* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 41)
* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6)
* equations, environment for: equation. (line 6)
* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options.
+ (line 55)
+* es-zet German letter: Additional Latin letters.
(line 52)
-* es-zet German letter: Non-English characters.
- (line 47)
-* eth, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters.
- (line 19)
+* eth, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 20)
+* etoolbox package: Class and package commands.
+ (line 110)
* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 119)
* ex: Units of length. (line 38)
* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 122)
* exponent: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
+* extended Latin: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 6)
* families, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 20)
@@ -8209,11 +9376,13 @@
* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 21)
* figures, inserting: figure. (line 6)
+* file, root: Splitting the input. (line 9)
* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 92)
-* 'float' package: Floats. (line 52)
+* flafter package: Floats. (line 82)
+* float package: Floats. (line 52)
* float page: Floats. (line 58)
* flush left equations: Document class options.
- (line 52)
+ (line 55)
* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 6)
* font catalogue: Low-level font commands.
(line 20)
@@ -8223,11 +9392,15 @@
(line 98)
* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 6)
* font styles: Font styles. (line 6)
+* font symbols, by number: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 6)
* fonts: Fonts. (line 6)
* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6)
* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
+* footmisc package: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 10)
* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* footnote parameters: Footnote parameters. (line 6)
* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 21)
@@ -8235,19 +9408,21 @@
* Footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 35)
* Footnotes, in a table: Footnotes in a table.
(line 6)
+* footnotes, in section headings: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 6)
* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 23)
* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 6)
* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* forward reference: Cross references. (line 22)
* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 33)
* fragile commands: \protect. (line 6)
* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 30)
* functions, math: Math functions. (line 6)
-* 'geometry' package: Document class options.
- (line 37)
+* geometry package: Document class options.
+ (line 40)
* global options: Document class options.
(line 6)
-* global options <1>: Document class options.
- (line 103)
+* global options <1>: Additional packages. (line 15)
* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 6)
* glossary package: Glossaries. (line 15)
* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6)
@@ -8256,6 +9431,7 @@
* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 29)
* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 125)
* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* group, and environments: Environments. (line 18)
* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
* hacek accent: Accents. (line 97)
* hat accent: Accents. (line 33)
@@ -8267,14 +9443,15 @@
* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 52)
* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 59)
* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6)
+* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 6)
* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox. (line 6)
-* Icelandic eth: Non-English characters.
- (line 19)
-* Icelandic thorn: Non-English characters.
- (line 51)
-* ij letter, Dutch: Non-English characters.
- (line 27)
+* Icelandic eth: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 20)
+* Icelandic thorn: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 56)
+* ij letter, Dutch: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 32)
* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 6)
* in-line formulas: math. (line 6)
* indent, forcing: \indent. (line 6)
@@ -8294,16 +9471,19 @@
* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 6)
* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 6)
+* label: Cross references. (line 9)
* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 6)
* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 24)
* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 6)
* landscape orientation: Document class options.
- (line 55)
+ (line 58)
* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 21)
* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 6)
* LaTeX Project team: About this document. (line 17)
* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e: About this document. (line 13)
* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 24)
+* Latin letters, additional: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
* layout commands: Layout. (line 6)
* layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
@@ -8314,10 +9494,11 @@
* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 144)
* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 150)
* left-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 58)
+ (line 61)
* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6)
* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 6)
+* length command: \setlength. (line 10)
* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 6)
* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 6)
* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 6)
@@ -8325,9 +9506,9 @@
* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 6)
* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 128)
* letters, accented: Accents. (line 6)
+* letters, additional Latin: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
* letters, ending: \closing. (line 6)
-* letters, non-English: Non-English characters.
- (line 6)
* letters, starting: \opening. (line 6)
* letters, writing: Letters. (line 6)
* line break, forcing: \\. (line 6)
@@ -8346,25 +9527,30 @@
* lists of items: itemize. (line 6)
* lists of items, generic: list. (line 6)
* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 6)
-* loading additional packages: Document class options.
- (line 95)
+* loading additional packages: Additional packages. (line 6)
* log file: Output files. (line 28)
* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 21)
* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 24)
* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 61)
+* long command: Class and package commands.
+ (line 23)
* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 52)
* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
(line 6)
+* Lower case: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 6)
* LR mode: Modes. (line 6)
-* 'ltugboat' class: tugboat template. (line 6)
+* ltugboat class: tugboat template. (line 6)
* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 29)
* m-width: Units of length. (line 38)
* macro package, LaTeX as: Overview. (line 11)
* macron accent: Accents. (line 29)
* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 14)
+* macros2e package: \makeatletter and \makeatother.
+ (line 39)
* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 6)
-* 'makeidx' package: Indexes. (line 28)
-* 'makeindex' program: Indexes. (line 23)
+* makeidx package: Indexes. (line 28)
+* makeindex program: Indexes. (line 23)
* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6)
* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 6)
@@ -8383,15 +9569,21 @@
* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 6)
* modes: Modes. (line 6)
* monospace font: Font styles. (line 92)
-* moving arguments: \protect. (line 6)
+* moving arguments: \protect. (line 19)
* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 35)
* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 49)
* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 6)
* multilingual support: Accents. (line 6)
-* 'multind' package: Indexes. (line 39)
+* multind package: Indexes. (line 39)
* multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math miscellany.
(line 7)
-* nested '\include', not allowed: \include. (line 18)
+* nested \include, not allowed: \include. (line 18)
+* new class commands: Class and package construction.
+ (line 6)
+* new command, check: Class and package commands.
+ (line 21)
+* new command, definition: Class and package commands.
+ (line 96)
* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
@@ -8400,32 +9592,67 @@
* new line, starting: \\. (line 6)
* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6)
* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6)
-* non-English characters: Non-English characters.
+* non-English characters: Additional Latin letters.
(line 6)
* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6)
-* null delimiter: Math miscellany. (line 21)
+* null delimiter: Math miscellany. (line 36)
* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6)
* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 134)
* oblique font: Font styles. (line 89)
-* oe ligature: Non-English characters.
- (line 43)
+* oe ligature: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 48)
* ogonek: Accents. (line 70)
* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 134)
* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 6)
* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 40)
* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 6)
+* options, class: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
* options, document class: Document class options.
(line 6)
-* options, global: Document class options.
- (line 103)
+* options, document class <1>: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* options, global: Additional packages. (line 15)
+* options, package: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* options, package <1>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 135)
-* oslash: Non-English characters.
- (line 39)
+* oslash: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 44)
* overbar accent: Accents. (line 29)
* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 26)
* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6)
-* packages, loading additional: Document class options.
- (line 95)
+* package file layout: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* package options: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* package options <1>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* package, amsmath: array. (line 40)
+* package, amsmath <1>: displaymath. (line 22)
+* package, babel: Accents. (line 6)
+* package, datetime: \today. (line 22)
+* package, etoolbox: Class and package commands.
+ (line 110)
+* package, flafter: Floats. (line 82)
+* package, float: Floats. (line 52)
+* package, footmisc: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 10)
+* package, geometry: Document class options.
+ (line 40)
+* package, macros2e: \makeatletter and \makeatother.
+ (line 39)
+* package, makeidx: Indexes. (line 28)
+* package, multind: Indexes. (line 39)
+* package, picture: picture. (line 23)
+* package, setspace: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 114)
+* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 35)
+* package, textcomp: Font styles. (line 134)
+* package, xspace: \(SPACE) after control sequence.
+ (line 20)
+* packages, loading additional: Additional packages. (line 6)
* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
(line 6)
* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
@@ -8441,6 +9668,7 @@
* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation and quote.
(line 6)
* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 6)
+* paragraph mode <1>: \parbox. (line 10)
* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 44)
* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
* parameters, for footnotes: Footnote parameters. (line 6)
@@ -8450,28 +9678,32 @@
* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 12)
* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 138)
* pica: Units of length. (line 14)
-* 'pict2e' package: \line. (line 13)
+* pict2e package: \line. (line 13)
+* picture package: picture. (line 23)
* pictures, creating: picture. (line 6)
* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 44)
* placement of floats: Floats. (line 31)
* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6)
* Point: Units of length. (line 10)
-* polish l: Non-English characters.
- (line 31)
+* polish l: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 36)
* portrait orientation: Document class options.
- (line 55)
-* position, in picture: picture. (line 23)
+ (line 58)
+* position, in picture: picture. (line 28)
+* positional parameter: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 37)
* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 6)
* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 48)
* preamble, defined: Starting and ending. (line 19)
* predefined lengths: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
-* prompt, '*': Command line. (line 18)
+* prompt, *: Command line. (line 18)
* pronunciation: Overview. (line 24)
* quad: Spacing in math mode.
(line 32)
* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 141)
* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 30)
-* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 157)
+* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 156)
+* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 160)
* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
(line 6)
* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
@@ -8482,19 +9714,20 @@
* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
(line 6)
+* reference, forward: Cross references. (line 22)
* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 33)
-* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 160)
+* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 163)
* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6)
-* reporting bugs: About this document. (line 6)
+* reporting bugs: About this document. (line 21)
* reserved characters: Reserved characters. (line 6)
* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 30)
-* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 163)
+* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 166)
* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 88)
* right quote: Text symbols. (line 55)
* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 147)
* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 153)
* right-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 58)
+ (line 61)
* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
* ring accent: Accents. (line 75)
@@ -8501,6 +9734,7 @@
* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 41)
* robust commands: \protect. (line 6)
* roman font: Font styles. (line 80)
+* root file: Splitting the input. (line 9)
* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 6)
* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
@@ -8511,22 +9745,24 @@
* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 47)
* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 58)
+* section, redefining: \@startsection. (line 6)
* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 6)
* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 45)
-* 'setspace' package: Low-level font commands.
+* setspace package: Low-level font commands.
(line 114)
* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 6)
* shapes, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 85)
-* sharp S letters: Non-English characters.
- (line 47)
-* 'showidx' package: Indexes. (line 35)
+* sharp S letters: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 52)
+* showidx package: Indexes. (line 35)
* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6)
* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 30)
* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 30)
* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 150)
* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 52)
+* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 156)
* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 153)
* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 6)
* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6)
@@ -8537,20 +9773,27 @@
* spaces: Spaces. (line 6)
* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
(line 6)
-* spacing, intersentence: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
+* spacing, inter-sentence: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 135)
-* special characters: Non-English characters.
+* special characters: Reserved characters. (line 6)
+* special characters <1>: Additional Latin letters.
(line 6)
* special insertions: Special insertions. (line 6)
* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 31)
* splitting the input file: Splitting the input. (line 6)
+* stable option to footmisc package: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 10)
+* star-variants, commands: \@ifstar. (line 6)
+* starred form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 14)
* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6)
* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage. (line 6)
* starting and ending: Starting and ending. (line 6)
* starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 48)
-* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 157)
-* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 157)
+* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 160)
+* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 160)
+* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 156)
* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 6)
* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 6)
* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
@@ -8565,10 +9808,12 @@
* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 6)
* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
* table of contents file: Output files. (line 43)
+* table of contents, avoiding footnotes: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 6)
* table of contents, creating: Tables of contents. (line 6)
* tables, creating: table. (line 6)
-* template, 'beamer': beamer template. (line 6)
-* template, 'book': book template. (line 6)
+* template, beamer: beamer template. (line 6)
+* template, book: book template. (line 6)
* template, TUGboat: tugboat template. (line 6)
* templates, document: Document templates. (line 6)
* terminal input/output: Terminal input/output.
@@ -8575,29 +9820,29 @@
(line 6)
* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 61)
* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 6)
-* 'textcomp' package: Font styles. (line 134)
+* textcomp package: Font styles. (line 134)
* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 22)
* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6)
-* thorn, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters.
- (line 51)
-* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 166)
+* thorn, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 56)
+* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 169)
* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 81)
* tilde accent: Accents. (line 43)
* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 44)
* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 67)
* title page, separate or run-in: Document class options.
- (line 66)
+ (line 69)
* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6)
* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 26)
* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 6)
-* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 169)
+* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 172)
* transcript file: Output files. (line 28)
* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 6)
* TUGboat template: tugboat template. (line 6)
* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 6)
-* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 172)
+* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 175)
* type styles: Font styles. (line 6)
* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6)
* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 6)
@@ -8606,11 +9851,13 @@
* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 23)
* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 16)
* underbar: Accents. (line 89)
-* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 175)
+* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 178)
* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 6)
* units, of length: Units of length. (line 6)
* unofficial nature of this manual: About this document. (line 17)
* unordered lists: itemize. (line 6)
+* Upper case: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 6)
* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
* UTF-8: TeX engines. (line 6)
* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
@@ -8623,7 +9870,7 @@
* vertical space <1>: \vspace. (line 6)
* vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip. (line 6)
* visible space: \verb. (line 17)
-* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 178)
+* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 181)
* weights, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
(line 55)
* white space: Spaces. (line 6)
@@ -8635,7 +9882,9 @@
* writing letters: Letters. (line 6)
* x-height: Units of length. (line 38)
* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 38)
-* 'xindy' program: Indexes. (line 23)
+* xindy program: Indexes. (line 23)
+* xspace package: \(SPACE) after control sequence.
+ (line 20)
File: latex2e.info, Node: Command Index, Prev: Concept Index, Up: Top
@@ -8675,10 +9924,10 @@
* \!: Spacing in math mode.
(line 29)
* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 16)
-* \#: Reserved characters. (line 11)
-* \$: Reserved characters. (line 11)
-* \%: Reserved characters. (line 11)
-* \&: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \#: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \$: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \%: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \&: Reserved characters. (line 13)
* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 20)
* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 45)
* \(: Math formulas. (line 16)
@@ -8705,55 +9954,62 @@
* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 30)
* \@: \(SPACE) and \@. (line 6)
* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 23)
+* \@ifstar: \@ifstar. (line 6)
+* \@startsection: \@startsection. (line 6)
* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 60)
* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
-* \aa (aa): Non-English characters.
- (line 11)
-* \AA (AA): Non-English characters.
- (line 11)
+* \aa (aa): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12)
+* \AA (AA): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12)
* \acute: Math accents. (line 10)
-* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
+* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
* \address: \address. (line 6)
* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 6)
* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 6)
* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 6)
* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6)
-* \ae (ae): Non-English characters.
- (line 15)
-* \AE (AE): Non-English characters.
- (line 15)
-* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 19)
-* \alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 10)
-* \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 13)
+* \ae (ae): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 16)
+* \AE (AE): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 16)
+* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 22)
* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 52)
-* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 22)
+* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 25)
+* \alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 14)
+* \Alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 17)
* \alsoname: Indexes. (line 20)
-* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 25)
-* \and for '\author': \maketitle. (line 12)
-* \angle: Math symbols. (line 28)
+* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 28)
+* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 12)
+* \angle: Math symbols. (line 31)
* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 37)
-* \approx: Math symbols. (line 33)
-* \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 16)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 36)
+* \arabic{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 20)
* \arccos: Math functions. (line 9)
* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 12)
* \arctan: Math functions. (line 15)
* \arg: Math functions. (line 18)
-* \arraycolsep: array. (line 38)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 37)
* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 156)
* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 162)
-* \ast: Math symbols. (line 36)
-* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 45)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 39)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 48)
* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3)
+* \AtBeginDvi: Class and package commands.
+ (line 9)
* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 3)
+* \AtEndOfClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 14)
+* \AtEndOfPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 14)
* \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 11)
* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 46)
-* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 48)
-* \backslash <1>: Reserved characters. (line 16)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 51)
* \bar: Math accents. (line 13)
* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
(line 98)
@@ -8760,40 +10016,40 @@
* \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands.
(line 108)
* \begin: Environments. (line 6)
-* \beta: Math symbols. (line 52)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 55)
* \bf: Font styles. (line 70)
* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 39)
* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6)
* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
-* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 55)
-* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 59)
-* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 63)
-* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 67)
-* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 70)
-* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 73)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 58)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 62)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 66)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 70)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 73)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 76)
* \bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 10)
+ (line 9)
* \bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 10)
-* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 84)
-* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 76)
-* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 80)
-* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 87)
-* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 91)
-* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 94)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 87)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 79)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 83)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 90)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 94)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 97)
* \bmod: Math functions. (line 21)
* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 29)
-* \bot: Math symbols. (line 97)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 100)
* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 94)
* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 95)
-* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 101)
-* \Box: Math symbols. (line 104)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 105)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 108)
* \breve: Math accents. (line 16)
-* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 109)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 113)
* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 51)
* \cal: Font styles. (line 73)
-* \cap: Math symbols. (line 112)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 116)
* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 20)
* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 86)
* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 97)
@@ -8812,39 +10068,53 @@
* \caption: figure. (line 40)
* \caption <1>: table. (line 26)
* \cc: \cc. (line 6)
-* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 117)
-* \cdots: Math miscellany. (line 10)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 121)
+* \cdots: Math miscellany. (line 25)
* \centering: \centering. (line 6)
* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 9)
* \check: Math accents. (line 19)
-* \chi: Math symbols. (line 120)
-* \circ: Math symbols. (line 123)
+* \CheckCommand: Class and package commands.
+ (line 21)
+* \CheckCommand*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 21)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 124)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 127)
* \circle: \circle. (line 6)
* \cite: \cite. (line 6)
+* \ClassError: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \ClassInfo: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \ClassInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \ClassWarning: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \ClassWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 6)
* \cline: \cline. (line 6)
* \closing: \closing. (line 6)
-* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 128)
-* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 21)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 132)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 22)
* \columnsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
* \columnsep <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 9)
-* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 27)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 28)
* \columnseprule <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 7)
* \columnseprule <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 9)
-* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 34)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 35)
* \columnwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 8)
* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 9)
-* \complement: Math symbols. (line 131)
-* \cong: Math symbols. (line 137)
-* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 29)
-* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 140)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 135)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 141)
+* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 33)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 144)
* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 10)
* \cos: Math functions. (line 24)
* \cosh: Math functions. (line 27)
@@ -8851,53 +10121,63 @@
* \cot: Math functions. (line 30)
* \coth: Math functions. (line 33)
* \csc: Math functions. (line 36)
-* \cup: Math symbols. (line 143)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 147)
+* \CurrentOption: Class and package commands.
+ (line 60)
* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 55)
* \dag: Text symbols. (line 14)
-* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 148)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 152)
* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6)
-* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 151)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 155)
* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 17)
* \day: \day \month \year. (line 6)
-* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 68)
-* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 74)
-* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 81)
-* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 46)
-* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 86)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 69)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 75)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 82)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 47)
+* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 87)
* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 17)
-* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 155)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 159)
* \ddot: Math accents. (line 22)
-* \ddots: Math miscellany. (line 14)
+* \ddots: Math miscellany. (line 29)
+* \DeclareOption: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* \DeclareOption*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* \DeclareRobustCommand: Class and package commands.
+ (line 96)
+* \DeclareRobustCommand*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 96)
* \deg: Math functions. (line 39)
-* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 158)
-* \delta: Math symbols. (line 161)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 162)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 165)
* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 10)
* \det: Math functions. (line 42)
-* \dh (d): Non-English characters.
- (line 19)
-* \DH (D): Non-English characters.
- (line 19)
-* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 164)
-* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 168)
-* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 172)
+* \dh (d): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 20)
+* \DH (D): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 20)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 168)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 172)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 176)
* \dim: Math functions. (line 45)
* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 34)
-* \div: Math symbols. (line 175)
-* \dj: Non-English characters.
- (line 23)
-* \DJ: Non-English characters.
- (line 23)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 179)
+* \dj: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 26)
+* \DJ: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 26)
* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 6)
* \dot: Math accents. (line 25)
-* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 178)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 182)
* \dotfill: \hrulefill \dotfill. (line 6)
* \dots: Text symbols. (line 34)
* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 167)
-* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 182)
-* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 186)
-* \ell: Math symbols. (line 190)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 186)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 190)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 194)
* \emph: Font styles. (line 59)
-* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 193)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 197)
* \encl: \encl. (line 6)
* \end: Environments. (line 6)
* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
@@ -8905,16 +10185,18 @@
* \enumii: enumerate. (line 42)
* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 42)
* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 42)
-* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 197)
-* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 202)
-* \eta: Math symbols. (line 205)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 201)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 207)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 210)
* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 77)
+ (line 82)
* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 67)
* \evensidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 68)
-* \exists: Math symbols. (line 208)
+* \ExecuteOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 166)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 213)
* \exp: Math functions. (line 48)
* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 115)
* \fbox: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6)
@@ -8923,15 +10205,15 @@
* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 14)
* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 18)
* \fill: \hfill. (line 9)
-* \flat: Math symbols. (line 211)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 216)
* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 98)
* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 99)
* \floatsep: Floats. (line 114)
* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 115)
* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6)
-* \fnsymbol: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 25)
* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 23)
+* \fnsymbol{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 29)
* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
(line 11)
* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
@@ -8952,22 +10234,22 @@
(line 26)
* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 27)
-* \forall: Math symbols. (line 214)
-* \frac: Math miscellany. (line 18)
-* \frac{num}{den}: Math miscellany. (line 17)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 219)
+* \frac: Math miscellany. (line 33)
+* \frac{NUM}{DEN}: Math miscellany. (line 32)
* \frame: \frame. (line 6)
* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6)
* \framebox <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6)
* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
-* \frown: Math symbols. (line 217)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 222)
* \fussy: \fussy. (line 6)
-* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 220)
-* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 223)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 225)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 228)
* \gcd: Math functions. (line 51)
-* \ge: Math symbols. (line 226)
-* \geq: Math symbols. (line 230)
-* \gets: Math symbols. (line 234)
-* \gg: Math symbols. (line 237)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 231)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 235)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 239)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 242)
* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 8)
* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 11)
* \grave: Math accents. (line 28)
@@ -8977,7 +10259,7 @@
* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 29)
* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 59)
* \hat: Math accents. (line 31)
-* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 241)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 246)
* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
(line 14)
* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
@@ -8986,13 +10268,13 @@
(line 19)
* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 20)
-* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 244)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 249)
* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 8)
* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6)
* \hline: \hline. (line 6)
* \hom: Math functions. (line 54)
-* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 247)
-* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 250)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 252)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 255)
* \hrulefill: \hrulefill \dotfill. (line 6)
* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
(line 119)
@@ -9003,45 +10285,49 @@
* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6)
* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 63)
-* \iff: Math symbols. (line 253)
-* \ij (ij): Non-English characters.
- (line 27)
-* \IJ (IJ): Non-English characters.
- (line 27)
-* \Im: Math symbols. (line 257)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 258)
+* \IfFileExists: Class and package commands.
+ (line 127)
+* \ij (ij): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 32)
+* \IJ (IJ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 32)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 262)
* \imath: Math accents. (line 34)
-* \in: Math symbols. (line 260)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 265)
* \include: \include. (line 6)
* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6)
* \indent: \indent. (line 6)
* \index: Indexes. (line 9)
* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 12)
+* \indexspace: Indexes. (line 32)
* \inf: Math functions. (line 57)
-* \infty: Math symbols. (line 265)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 271)
* \input: \input. (line 6)
-* \int: Math symbols. (line 268)
+* \InputIfFileExists: Class and package commands.
+ (line 127)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 274)
* \intextsep: Floats. (line 118)
* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 119)
-* \iota: Math symbols. (line 271)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 277)
* \it: Font styles. (line 76)
-* \item: description. (line 14)
-* \item <1>: description. (line 19)
-* \item <2>: enumerate. (line 18)
-* \item <3>: itemize. (line 6)
+* \item: description. (line 19)
+* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 18)
+* \item <2>: itemize. (line 6)
* \itemindent: itemize. (line 49)
* \itemsep: itemize. (line 71)
* \itshape: Font styles. (line 33)
* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 66)
* \jmath: Math accents. (line 37)
-* \Join: Math symbols. (line 274)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 280)
* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 70)
-* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 278)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 284)
* \ker: Math functions. (line 60)
* \kill: tabbing. (line 65)
-* \l (/l): Non-English characters.
- (line 31)
-* \L (/L): Non-English characters.
- (line 31)
+* \l (/l): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 36)
+* \L (/L): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 36)
* \label: \label. (line 6)
* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 47)
* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 47)
@@ -9053,27 +10339,27 @@
* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 29)
* \labelsep: itemize. (line 52)
* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 55)
-* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 281)
-* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 284)
-* \land: Math symbols. (line 287)
-* \langle: Math symbols. (line 292)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 287)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 290)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 293)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 298)
* \large: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \Large: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 20)
* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 23)
-* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 297)
-* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 301)
-* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 305)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 303)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 307)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 311)
* \ldots: Text symbols. (line 33)
-* \le: Math symbols. (line 309)
-* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 313)
-* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math miscellany. (line 20)
-* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 320)
-* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 325)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 315)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 319)
+* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math miscellany. (line 35)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 326)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 331)
* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 46)
-* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 329)
-* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 332)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 335)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 338)
* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 36)
* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 36)
* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 36)
@@ -9081,12 +10367,12 @@
* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 36)
* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 36)
* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 36)
-* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 335)
-* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 340)
-* \leq: Math symbols. (line 345)
-* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 349)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 341)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 346)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 351)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 355)
* \lg: Math functions. (line 63)
-* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 352)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 358)
* \lim: Math functions. (line 66)
* \liminf: Math functions. (line 69)
* \limsup: Math functions. (line 72)
@@ -9103,24 +10389,28 @@
* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 16)
* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 16)
* \listparindent: itemize. (line 58)
-* \ll: Math symbols. (line 359)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 366)
* \ln: Math functions. (line 75)
-* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 363)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 370)
+* \LoadClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 144)
+* \LoadClassWithOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 144)
* \location: \location. (line 6)
* \log: Math functions. (line 78)
-* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 366)
-* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 371)
-* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 375)
-* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 380)
-* \lor: Math symbols. (line 385)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 373)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 378)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 382)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 387)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 392)
* \lq: Text symbols. (line 39)
* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6)
-* \makebox (for 'picture'): \makebox (picture). (line 6)
+* \makebox (for picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6)
* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 6)
* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 6)
* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6)
* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6)
-* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 388)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 395)
* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 6)
* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
(line 40)
@@ -9141,11 +10431,17 @@
* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 36)
* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 112)
* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 128)
+* \mathdollar: Math miscellany. (line 40)
+* \mathellipsis: Math miscellany. (line 43)
* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 125)
+* \mathparagraph: Math miscellany. (line 46)
* \mathring: Math accents. (line 40)
* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 109)
+* \mathsection: Math miscellany. (line 49)
* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 115)
+* \mathsterling: Math miscellany. (line 52)
* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 118)
+* \mathunderscore: Math miscellany. (line 55)
* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 130)
* \max: Math functions. (line 81)
* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6)
@@ -9152,27 +10448,29 @@
* \mbox, and LR mode: Modes. (line 24)
* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 36)
* \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 15)
+ (line 14)
* \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 15)
* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
(line 21)
-* \mho: Math symbols. (line 392)
-* \mid: Math symbols. (line 397)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 399)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 404)
* \min: Math functions. (line 84)
-* \models: Math symbols. (line 407)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 414)
* \month: \day \month \year. (line 6)
-* \mp: Math symbols. (line 412)
-* \mu: Math symbols. (line 415)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 419)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 422)
* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6)
* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6)
-* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 418)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 425)
* \name: \name. (line 6)
-* \natural: Math symbols. (line 421)
-* \ne: Math symbols. (line 424)
-* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 427)
-* \neg: Math symbols. (line 430)
-* \neq: Math symbols. (line 434)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 428)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 431)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 434)
+* \NeedsTeXFormat: Class and package commands.
+ (line 176)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 437)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 441)
* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6)
@@ -9186,11 +10484,11 @@
* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6)
* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* \newtie: Accents. (line 81)
-* \ng: Non-English characters.
- (line 35)
-* \NG: Non-English characters.
- (line 35)
-* \ni: Math symbols. (line 437)
+* \ng: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 40)
+* \NG: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 40)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 444)
* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6)
* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 21)
* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 21)
@@ -9205,42 +10503,54 @@
* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 57)
* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 24)
* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \not: Math symbols. (line 442)
-* \notin: Math symbols. (line 450)
-* \nu: Math symbols. (line 454)
-* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 457)
-* \o (/o): Non-English characters.
- (line 39)
-* \O (/O): Non-English characters.
- (line 39)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 449)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 457)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 461)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 464)
+* \o (/o): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 44)
+* \O (/O): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 44)
* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
(line 6)
* \oddsidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 77)
+ (line 82)
* \oddsidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 66)
* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
(line 68)
-* \odot: Math symbols. (line 460)
-* \oe (oe): Non-English characters.
- (line 43)
-* \OE (OE): Non-English characters.
- (line 43)
-* \oint: Math symbols. (line 465)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 467)
+* \oe (oe): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 48)
+* \OE (OE): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 48)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 472)
* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 134)
-* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 469)
-* \omega: Math symbols. (line 472)
-* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 475)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 476)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 479)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 482)
* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6)
* \opening: \opening. (line 6)
-* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 478)
-* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 482)
-* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 485)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 485)
+* \OptionNotUsed: Class and package commands.
+ (line 192)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 489)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 492)
* \oval: \oval. (line 6)
-* \overbrace{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 25)
-* \overline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 29)
-* \owns: Math symbols. (line 490)
+* \overbrace{MATH}: Math miscellany. (line 58)
+* \overline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 62)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 497)
* \P: Text symbols. (line 42)
+* \PackageError: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \PackageInfo: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \PackageInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \PackageWarning: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \PackageWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
(line 6)
* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
@@ -9255,7 +10565,7 @@
* \paperwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 86)
* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 14)
-* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 495)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 502)
* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6)
* \parindent: minipage. (line 17)
* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 6)
@@ -9263,32 +10573,47 @@
* \parskip: \parskip. (line 6)
* \parskip example: itemize. (line 92)
* \part: Sectioning. (line 8)
-* \partial: Math symbols. (line 498)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 505)
* \partopsep: itemize. (line 86)
+* \PassOptionsToClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 198)
+* \PassOptionsToPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 198)
* \pdfpageheight: Document class options.
- (line 37)
+ (line 40)
* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
- (line 37)
-* \perp: Math symbols. (line 501)
-* \phi: Math symbols. (line 506)
-* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 510)
-* \pi: Math symbols. (line 513)
-* \pm: Math symbols. (line 517)
+ (line 40)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 508)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 513)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 517)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 520)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 524)
* \pmod: Math functions. (line 87)
* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 71)
* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 72)
* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 46)
* \Pr: Math functions. (line 90)
-* \prec: Math symbols. (line 520)
-* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 523)
-* \prime: Math symbols. (line 528)
-* \prod: Math symbols. (line 539)
-* \propto: Math symbols. (line 542)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 527)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 530)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 535)
+* \printindex: Indexes. (line 28)
+* \ProcessOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 232)
+* \ProcessOptions*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 232)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 544)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 547)
* \protect: \protect. (line 6)
* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 6)
+* \ProvidesClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 270)
+* \ProvidesFile: Class and package commands.
+ (line 301)
+* \ProvidesPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 270)
* \ps: \ps. (line 6)
-* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 545)
-* \psi: Math symbols. (line 548)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 550)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 553)
* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 74)
* \put: \put. (line 6)
* \qquad: Spacing in math mode.
@@ -9302,35 +10627,40 @@
* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6)
* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6)
-* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 551)
-* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 555)
-* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 559)
-* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 563)
-* \Re: Math symbols. (line 566)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 556)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 560)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 564)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 568)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 571)
* \ref: \ref. (line 6)
* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6)
* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
(line 6)
+* \RequirePackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 310)
+* \RequirePackageWithOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 310)
* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
(line 6)
-* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 571)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 576)
+* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 581)
* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 24)
-* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 576)
-* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 580)
-* \rho: Math symbols. (line 587)
-* \right: Math miscellany. (line 21)
-* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 591)
-* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 595)
-* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 600)
-* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 603)
-* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 606)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 586)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 590)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 597)
+* \right: Math miscellany. (line 36)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 601)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 605)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 610)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 613)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 616)
* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 62)
* \rm: Font styles. (line 79)
* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 30)
-* \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 19)
-* \Roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 22)
+* \roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 23)
+* \Roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 26)
* \rq: Text symbols. (line 54)
* \rule: \rule. (line 6)
* \S: Text symbols. (line 57)
@@ -9339,7 +10669,7 @@
* \sc: Font styles. (line 82)
* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \scshape: Font styles. (line 51)
-* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 609)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 619)
* \sec: Math functions. (line 93)
* \section: Sectioning. (line 11)
* \seename: Indexes. (line 20)
@@ -9347,19 +10677,19 @@
(line 127)
* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6)
* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6)
-* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 612)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 622)
* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6)
* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6)
* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6)
* \sf: Font styles. (line 85)
* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 48)
-* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 618)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 628)
* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6)
-* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 621)
-* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 624)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 631)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 634)
* \signature: \signature. (line 11)
-* \sim: Math symbols. (line 628)
-* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 631)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 638)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 641)
* \sin: Math functions. (line 96)
* \sinh: Math functions. (line 99)
* \sl: Font styles. (line 88)
@@ -9366,43 +10696,44 @@
* \sloppy: \sloppy. (line 6)
* \slshape: Font styles. (line 45)
* \small: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 634)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 644)
* \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
- (line 20)
+ (line 19)
* \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 20)
-* \smile: Math symbols. (line 638)
-* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 641)
-* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 644)
-* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 648)
-* \sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: Math miscellany. (line 32)
-* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 652)
-* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 657)
-* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 662)
-* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 667)
-* \ss (ss): Non-English characters.
- (line 47)
-* \SS (SS): Non-English characters.
- (line 47)
-* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math miscellany. (line 38)
-* \star: Math symbols. (line 671)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 648)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 651)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 654)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 658)
+* \sqrt[ROOT]{ARG}: Math miscellany. (line 66)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 662)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 667)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 672)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 677)
+* \ss (ss): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 52)
+* \SS (SS): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 52)
+* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math miscellany. (line 71)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 681)
* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6)
* \stop: Command line. (line 18)
* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 15)
* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 12)
-* \subset: Math symbols. (line 678)
-* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 681)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 688)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 691)
* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 13)
-* \succ: Math symbols. (line 684)
-* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 688)
-* \sum: Math symbols. (line 693)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 694)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 698)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 703)
* \sup: Math functions. (line 102)
* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 87)
-* \supset: Math symbols. (line 697)
-* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 700)
-* \surd: Math symbols. (line 703)
-* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 708)
-* \symbol: Reserved characters. (line 25)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 707)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 710)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 713)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 718)
+* \symbol: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 6)
* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 81)
* \TAB: \(SPACE) and \@. (line 6)
* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 79)
@@ -9410,14 +10741,15 @@
* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 6)
* \tan: Math functions. (line 105)
* \tanh: Math functions. (line 108)
-* \tau: Math symbols. (line 711)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 721)
* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6)
* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 60)
-* \textascenderwordmark: Text symbols. (line 98)
+* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 98)
* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 63)
* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 66)
* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 69)
-* \textbackslash: Text symbols. (line 72)
+* \textbackslash: Reserved characters. (line 20)
+* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 72)
* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 75)
* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 78)
* \textbf: Font styles. (line 39)
@@ -9425,18 +10757,18 @@
* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 84)
* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 87)
* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 90)
-* \textcapitalwordmark: Text symbols. (line 97)
+* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 97)
* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 93)
* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 96)
* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 11)
* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 103)
* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 106)
-* \textdollar (or '$'): Text symbols. (line 109)
+* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 109)
* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 35)
-* \textemdash (or '---'): Text symbols. (line 112)
-* \textendash (or '--'): Text symbols. (line 115)
+* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 112)
+* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 115)
* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 118)
-* \textexclamdown (or '!`'): Text symbols. (line 121)
+* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 121)
* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 123)
* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 124)
* \textfraction: Floats. (line 102)
@@ -9455,37 +10787,38 @@
* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 134)
* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 43)
* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 137)
-* \textquestiondown (or '?`'): Text symbols. (line 140)
-* \textquotedblleft (or '``'): Text symbols. (line 143)
-* \textquotedblright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 146)
-* \textquoteleft (or '`'): Text symbols. (line 149)
-* \textquoteright (or '''): Text symbols. (line 152)
-* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 155)
-* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 156)
-* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 159)
-* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 162)
+* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 140)
+* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 143)
+* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 146)
+* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 149)
+* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 152)
+* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 155)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 158)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 159)
+* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 162)
+* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 165)
* \textrm: Font styles. (line 30)
* \textsc: Font styles. (line 51)
* \textsf: Font styles. (line 48)
* \textsl: Font styles. (line 45)
* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 47)
-* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 165)
-* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 168)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 168)
+* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 171)
* \texttt: Font styles. (line 54)
-* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 171)
-* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 174)
+* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 174)
+* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 177)
* \textup: Font styles. (line 42)
-* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 177)
+* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 180)
* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
(line 99)
* \textwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 100)
-* \th (th): Non-English characters.
- (line 51)
-* \TH (TH): Non-English characters.
- (line 51)
+* \th (th): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 56)
+* \TH (TH): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 56)
* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 21)
-* \theta: Math symbols. (line 714)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 724)
* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6)
* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
(line 16)
@@ -9495,12 +10828,12 @@
* \thinspace <1>: \thinspace. (line 6)
* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
* \tilde: Math accents. (line 43)
-* \times: Math symbols. (line 718)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 728)
* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 25)
-* \to: Math symbols. (line 722)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 732)
* \today: \today. (line 6)
-* \top: Math symbols. (line 726)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 736)
* \topfraction: Floats. (line 107)
* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 108)
* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
@@ -9511,9 +10844,9 @@
* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
(line 131)
* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 12)
-* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 730)
-* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 733)
-* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 739)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 741)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 744)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 750)
* \tt: Font styles. (line 91)
* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 54)
* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6)
@@ -9522,80 +10855,79 @@
* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 86)
* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 29)
* \underbar: Accents. (line 89)
-* \underbrace{math}: Math miscellany. (line 42)
-* \underline{text}: Math miscellany. (line 45)
+* \underbrace{MATH}: Math miscellany. (line 75)
+* \underline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 79)
* \unitlength: picture. (line 10)
-* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 745)
-* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 752)
-* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 759)
-* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 764)
-* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 768)
-* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 773)
-* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 778)
-* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 783)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 756)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 763)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 770)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 774)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 778)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 783)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 788)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 793)
* \upshape: Font styles. (line 42)
-* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 789)
-* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 792)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 800)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 803)
* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6)
* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6)
* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
(line 135)
-* \usepackage: Document class options.
- (line 95)
+* \usepackage: Additional packages. (line 6)
* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 97)
* \value: \value. (line 6)
-* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 795)
-* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 800)
-* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 804)
-* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 808)
-* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 812)
-* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 816)
-* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 820)
-* \vdots: Math miscellany. (line 50)
-* \vdots <1>: Math miscellany. (line 51)
+* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 811)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 806)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 816)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 820)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 824)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 828)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 832)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 836)
+* \vdots: Math miscellany. (line 84)
* \vec: Math accents. (line 46)
* \vector: \vector. (line 6)
-* \vee: Math symbols. (line 824)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 840)
* \verb: \verb. (line 6)
-* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 829)
-* \vert: Math symbols. (line 845)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 845)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 861)
* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6)
* \vline: \vline. (line 6)
* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6)
-* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 863)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 879)
* \widehat: Math accents. (line 49)
* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 52)
* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
-* \wp: Math symbols. (line 867)
-* \wr: Math symbols. (line 870)
-* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 873)
-* \xi: Math symbols. (line 876)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 883)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 886)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 889)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 892)
* \year: \day \month \year. (line 6)
-* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 879)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 895)
* \[: Math formulas. (line 16)
-* \\ (for 'center'): center. (line 18)
-* \\ (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 29)
-* \\ (for 'flushright'): flushright. (line 12)
-* \\ (for '\shortstack' objects): \shortstack. (line 20)
+* \\ (for center): center. (line 14)
+* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 29)
+* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 12)
+* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 20)
* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 24)
-* \\ for 'flushleft': flushleft. (line 12)
+* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 12)
* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 50)
-* \\ for 'tabular': tabular. (line 34)
-* \\ for 'verse': verse. (line 17)
-* \\ for '\author': \maketitle. (line 12)
-* \\ for '\title': \maketitle. (line 26)
+* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 34)
+* \\ for verse: verse. (line 17)
+* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 12)
+* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 26)
* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6)
-* \\* (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 37)
+* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 37)
* \]: Math formulas. (line 16)
-* \^: Reserved characters. (line 21)
+* \^: Reserved characters. (line 20)
* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 33)
-* \_: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \_: Reserved characters. (line 13)
* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 37)
* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 51)
-* \{: Reserved characters. (line 11)
-* \|: Math symbols. (line 16)
-* \}: Reserved characters. (line 11)
-* \~: Reserved characters. (line 21)
+* \{: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \|: Math symbols. (line 19)
+* \}: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \~: Reserved characters. (line 20)
* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 43)
* ^: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
@@ -9618,8 +10950,8 @@
* bp: Units of length. (line 20)
* cc: Units of length. (line 33)
* center environment: center. (line 6)
-* clock option to 'slides' class: Document class options.
- (line 92)
+* clock option to slides class: Document class options.
+ (line 97)
* cm: Units of length. (line 24)
* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 134)
* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 135)
@@ -9629,12 +10961,45 @@
* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
* document environment: document. (line 6)
* draft option: Document class options.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 10)
* dvips command: Output files. (line 10)
* dvitype command: Output files. (line 10)
* em: Units of length. (line 38)
* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 6)
+* environment, abstract: abstract. (line 6)
+* environment, array: array. (line 6)
+* environment, center: center. (line 6)
+* environment, description: description. (line 6)
+* environment, displaymath: displaymath. (line 6)
+* environment, displaymath <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* environment, document: document. (line 6)
+* environment, enumerate: enumerate. (line 6)
+* environment, eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* environment, equation: equation. (line 6)
+* environment, equation <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* environment, figure: figure. (line 6)
+* environment, filecontents: filecontents. (line 6)
+* environment, filecontents*: filecontents. (line 6)
+* environment, flushleft: flushleft. (line 6)
+* environment, flushright: flushright. (line 6)
+* environment, itemize: itemize. (line 6)
+* environment, letter: letter. (line 6)
+* environment, list: list. (line 6)
+* environment, math: math. (line 6)
+* environment, math <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* environment, minipage: minipage. (line 6)
+* environment, picture: picture. (line 6)
+* environment, quotation: quotation and quote. (line 6)
+* environment, quote: quotation and quote. (line 6)
+* environment, tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
+* environment, table: table. (line 6)
+* environment, tabular: tabular. (line 6)
+* environment, thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* environment, theorem: theorem. (line 6)
+* environment, titlepage: titlepage. (line 6)
+* environment, verbatim: verbatim. (line 6)
+* environment, verse: verse. (line 6)
* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 6)
* equation environment: equation. (line 6)
* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
@@ -9642,39 +11007,38 @@
* ex: Units of length. (line 38)
* executivepaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
-* figure: figure. (line 6)
-* filecontents: filecontents. (line 6)
+* figure environment: figure. (line 6)
+* filecontents environment: filecontents. (line 6)
+* filecontents* environment: filecontents. (line 6)
* final option: Document class options.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* first-latex-doc document: About this document. (line 33)
* fleqn option: Document class options.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 6)
* flushright environment: flushright. (line 6)
-* <http://home.gna.org/latexrefman> home page: About this document.
+* <http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/> home page: About this document.
(line 6)
* in: Units of length. (line 17)
* inch: Units of length. (line 17)
-* indexspace: Indexes. (line 32)
* itemize environment: itemize. (line 6)
* landscape option: Document class options.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* latex command: Output files. (line 10)
* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document. (line 30)
-* <latexrefman-discuss at gna.org> email address: About this document.
- (line 17)
+* <latexrefman at tug.org> email address: About this document. (line 17)
* legalpaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
* leqno option: Document class options.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* letter class: Document classes. (line 11)
* letter environment: letter. (line 6)
* letterpaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
-* list: list. (line 6)
-* lR box: picture. (line 66)
+* list environment: list. (line 6)
+* lR box: picture. (line 71)
* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6)
-* lshort document: About this document. (line 40)
+* lshort document: About this document. (line 41)
* lualatex command: TeX engines. (line 29)
* math environment: math. (line 6)
* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
@@ -9682,30 +11046,29 @@
* mm: Units of length. (line 27)
* mu: Units of length. (line 49)
* notitlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* onecolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 71)
+ (line 76)
* oneside option: Document class options.
- (line 71)
+ (line 76)
* openany option: Document class options.
- (line 71)
+ (line 76)
* openbib option: Document class options.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* openright option: Document class options.
- (line 71)
+ (line 76)
* pc: Units of length. (line 14)
* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 20)
-* picture: picture. (line 6)
-* printindex: Indexes. (line 28)
+* picture environment: picture. (line 6)
* pt: Units of length. (line 10)
-* quotation: quotation and quote. (line 6)
-* quote: quotation and quote. (line 6)
+* quotation environment: quotation and quote. (line 6)
+* quote environment: quotation and quote. (line 6)
* report class: Document classes. (line 11)
* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 47)
* slides class: Document classes. (line 11)
* sp: Units of length. (line 36)
* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 6)
-* table: table. (line 6)
+* table environment: table. (line 6)
* tabular environment: tabular. (line 6)
* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 6)
* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 6)
@@ -9712,7 +11075,7 @@
* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6)
* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6)
* titlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 44)
+ (line 47)
* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
(line 124)
* topnumber: Floats. (line 138)
@@ -9720,9 +11083,9 @@
* totalnumber: Floats. (line 142)
* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 143)
* twocolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 71)
+ (line 76)
* twoside option: Document class options.
- (line 71)
+ (line 76)
* usrguide official documentation: About this document. (line 36)
* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6)
* verse environment: verse. (line 6)
@@ -9733,224 +11096,243 @@
Tag Table:
-Node: Top1686
-Node: About this document3436
-Node: Overview5220
-Node: Starting and ending6720
-Ref: Starting & ending6855
-Node: Output files7841
-Node: TeX engines10099
-Node: LaTeX command syntax12537
-Node: Environment14289
-Node: Declaration15267
-Node: Document classes15559
-Node: Document class options16763
-Node: Fonts20023
-Ref: Typefaces20126
-Node: Font styles20454
-Node: Font sizes24883
-Node: Low-level font commands26114
-Node: Layout31347
-Node: \onecolumn31845
-Node: \twocolumn32207
-Node: \flushbottom36620
-Node: \raggedbottom37565
-Node: Page layout parameters38115
-Node: Floats43813
-Node: Sectioning50258
-Node: Cross references51803
-Node: \label52234
-Node: \pageref53687
-Node: \ref53986
-Node: Environments54376
-Node: abstract56064
-Node: array56306
-Node: center58359
-Node: \centering59635
-Node: description61005
-Node: displaymath62620
-Node: document64476
-Node: \AtBeginDocument64906
-Node: \AtEndDocument65479
-Node: enumerate66076
-Node: eqnarray68350
-Node: equation70404
-Node: figure70922
-Node: filecontents72734
-Node: flushleft74487
-Node: \raggedright74980
-Node: flushright75539
-Node: \raggedleft76037
-Node: itemize76594
-Node: letter80225
-Node: list80463
-Node: \item81449
-Node: math82507
-Node: minipage82808
-Node: picture84000
-Node: \circle88025
-Node: \makebox (picture)88368
-Node: \framebox (picture)89074
-Node: \dashbox89564
-Node: \frame90087
-Node: \line90413
-Node: \linethickness90871
-Node: \thicklines91292
-Node: \thinlines91602
-Node: \multiput91904
-Node: \oval92271
-Node: \put92992
-Node: \shortstack93283
-Node: \vector93757
-Node: quotation and quote94071
-Node: tabbing95277
-Node: table98458
-Node: tabular99885
-Node: \multicolumn107109
-Node: \vline110991
-Node: \cline112312
-Node: \hline112996
-Node: thebibliography113679
-Node: \bibitem114821
-Node: \cite115553
-Node: \nocite116053
-Node: Using BibTeX116327
-Node: theorem117810
-Node: titlepage118196
-Node: verbatim118798
-Node: \verb119425
-Node: verse119975
-Node: Line breaking120469
-Node: \\121473
-Node: \obeycr & \restorecr122510
-Node: \newline122912
-Node: \- (hyphenation)123745
-Node: \fussy124352
-Node: \sloppy124743
-Node: \hyphenation125070
-Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak125695
-Node: Page breaking126347
-Node: \cleardoublepage126955
-Node: \clearpage127384
-Node: \newpage127681
-Node: \enlargethispage127912
-Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak128439
-Node: Footnotes129133
-Node: \footnote130387
-Node: \footnotemark132183
-Node: \footnotetext133427
-Node: Footnotes in a table133917
-Node: Footnotes in section headings135735
-Node: Footnotes of footnotes136554
-Node: Multiple reference to footnotes137322
-Node: Footnote parameters138183
-Node: Definitions138933
-Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand139746
-Node: \providecommand143194
-Node: \newcounter143855
-Node: \newlength144791
-Node: \newsavebox145438
-Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment146049
-Node: \newtheorem150099
-Node: \newfont153495
-Node: \protect155060
-Node: Counters157174
-Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol158786
-Node: \usecounter159961
-Node: \value160793
-Node: \setcounter161736
-Node: \addtocounter162095
-Node: \refstepcounter162400
-Node: \stepcounter163058
-Node: \day \month \year163400
-Node: Lengths163945
-Node: Units of length165735
-Node: \setlength167229
-Node: \addtolength167595
-Node: \settodepth167894
-Node: \settoheight168169
-Node: \settowidth168448
-Node: Predefined lengths168712
-Node: Making paragraphs169227
-Node: \indent169799
-Node: \noindent170261
-Node: \parskip170769
-Node: Marginal notes171027
-Node: Math formulas172839
-Node: Subscripts & superscripts174623
-Node: Math symbols175970
-Node: Math functions200824
-Node: Math accents201766
-Node: Spacing in math mode202738
-Node: Math miscellany204184
-Node: Modes205683
-Node: Page styles207465
-Node: \maketitle207959
-Node: \pagenumbering209029
-Node: \pagestyle209525
-Node: \thispagestyle210666
-Node: Spaces210972
-Node: \hspace211899
-Node: \hfill212853
-Node: \(SPACE) and \@213248
-Ref: \AT213395
-Node: \(SPACE) after CS214940
-Node: \frenchspacing216449
-Node: \thinspace217052
-Node: \/217355
-Node: \hrulefill \dotfill218537
-Node: \addvspace219530
-Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip220575
-Node: \vfill221469
-Node: \vspace222338
-Node: Boxes223147
-Node: \mbox223872
-Node: \fbox and \framebox224159
-Node: lrbox224962
-Node: \makebox225279
-Node: \parbox225999
-Node: \raisebox227328
-Node: \savebox227925
-Node: \sbox228340
-Node: \usebox228789
-Node: Special insertions229050
-Node: Reserved characters229696
-Node: Text symbols231099
-Node: Accents234433
-Node: Non-English characters236973
-Node: \rule237740
-Node: \today238167
-Node: Splitting the input238612
-Node: \include239374
-Node: \includeonly239961
-Node: \input240453
-Node: Front/back matter240948
-Node: Tables of contents241153
-Node: \addcontentsline242214
-Node: \addtocontents243111
-Node: Glossaries243644
-Node: Indexes244163
-Node: Letters245790
-Node: \address249461
-Node: \cc250331
-Node: \closing250740
-Node: \encl251051
-Node: \location251464
-Node: \makelabels251733
-Node: \name252734
-Node: \opening252964
-Node: \ps253303
-Node: \signature253593
-Node: \telephone254684
-Node: Terminal input/output255049
-Node: \typein255314
-Node: \typeout255895
-Node: Command line256518
-Node: Document templates257470
-Node: beamer template257877
-Node: book template258528
-Node: tugboat template258896
-Node: Concept Index260998
-Node: Command Index307506
+Node: Top1697
+Node: About this document3446
+Node: Overview5306
+Node: Starting and ending6806
+Ref: Starting & ending6941
+Node: Output files7927
+Node: TeX engines10173
+Node: LaTeX command syntax12611
+Node: Environment14445
+Node: Declaration15518
+Node: \makeatletter and \makeatother15904
+Node: \@ifstar18097
+Node: Document classes20926
+Node: Document class options22249
+Node: Additional packages25345
+Node: Class and package construction25976
+Node: Class and package structure27428
+Node: Class and package commands29722
+Node: Fonts47247
+Ref: Typefaces47350
+Node: Font styles47678
+Node: Font sizes52107
+Node: Low-level font commands53338
+Node: Layout58571
+Node: \onecolumn59069
+Node: \twocolumn59400
+Node: \flushbottom63795
+Node: \raggedbottom64895
+Node: Page layout parameters65431
+Node: Floats71129
+Node: Sectioning77594
+Ref: Sectioning/secnumdepth78915
+Node: \@startsection79224
+Ref: \@startsection/name80318
+Ref: \@startsection/level80749
+Ref: \@startsection/indent81814
+Ref: \@startsection/beforeskip82070
+Ref: \@startsection/afterskip83573
+Ref: \@startsection/style84882
+Node: Cross references87617
+Node: \label89483
+Node: \pageref91030
+Node: \ref91700
+Node: Environments92389
+Node: abstract94392
+Node: array95981
+Node: center98239
+Node: \centering99880
+Node: description101252
+Node: displaymath102866
+Node: document104644
+Node: \AtBeginDocument105074
+Node: \AtEndDocument105647
+Node: enumerate106244
+Node: eqnarray108518
+Node: equation110572
+Node: figure111090
+Node: filecontents112902
+Node: flushleft114655
+Node: \raggedright115148
+Node: flushright115707
+Node: \raggedleft116205
+Node: itemize116762
+Node: letter120395
+Node: list120633
+Node: \item121619
+Node: math122750
+Node: minipage123051
+Node: picture124243
+Node: \circle128538
+Node: \makebox (picture)128881
+Node: \framebox (picture)129587
+Node: \dashbox130077
+Node: \frame130600
+Node: \line130926
+Node: \linethickness131384
+Node: \thicklines131805
+Node: \thinlines132115
+Node: \multiput132417
+Node: \oval132784
+Node: \put133505
+Node: \shortstack133796
+Node: \vector134270
+Node: quotation and quote134584
+Node: tabbing135791
+Node: table138972
+Node: tabular140399
+Node: \multicolumn147607
+Node: \vline151492
+Node: \cline152837
+Node: \hline153521
+Node: thebibliography154204
+Node: \bibitem155346
+Node: \cite156104
+Node: \nocite156623
+Node: Using BibTeX156911
+Node: theorem158420
+Node: titlepage158806
+Node: verbatim160096
+Node: \verb160723
+Node: verse161273
+Node: Line breaking161767
+Node: \\162864
+Node: \obeycr & \restorecr163902
+Node: \newline164304
+Node: \- (hyphenation)165138
+Node: \discretionary165753
+Node: \fussy166045
+Node: \sloppy166435
+Node: \hyphenation166762
+Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak167387
+Node: Page breaking168039
+Node: \cleardoublepage168647
+Node: \clearpage169076
+Node: \newpage169373
+Node: \enlargethispage169604
+Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak170131
+Node: Footnotes170825
+Node: \footnote172079
+Node: \footnotemark173875
+Node: \footnotetext175119
+Node: Footnotes in a table175609
+Node: Footnotes in section headings177466
+Node: Footnotes of footnotes178322
+Node: Multiple reference to footnotes179089
+Node: Footnote parameters179947
+Node: Definitions180697
+Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand181510
+Node: \providecommand185346
+Node: \newcounter186007
+Node: \newlength186978
+Node: \newsavebox187625
+Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment188236
+Node: \newtheorem192596
+Node: \newfont196085
+Node: \protect197650
+Node: Counters199990
+Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol201590
+Node: \usecounter203662
+Node: \value204494
+Node: \setcounter205437
+Node: \addtocounter205923
+Node: \refstepcounter206388
+Node: \stepcounter207046
+Node: \day \month \year207388
+Node: Lengths207933
+Node: Units of length209723
+Node: \setlength211217
+Node: \addtolength211621
+Node: \settodepth211939
+Node: \settoheight212230
+Node: \settowidth212527
+Node: Predefined lengths212835
+Node: Making paragraphs213350
+Node: \indent213922
+Node: \noindent214384
+Node: \parskip214893
+Node: Marginal notes215151
+Node: Math formulas216963
+Node: Subscripts & superscripts218747
+Node: Math symbols220085
+Node: Math functions245415
+Node: Math accents246358
+Node: Spacing in math mode247330
+Node: Math miscellany248797
+Node: Modes251347
+Node: \ensuremath253187
+Node: Page styles254103
+Node: \maketitle254597
+Node: \pagenumbering255667
+Node: \pagestyle256163
+Node: \thispagestyle257304
+Node: Spaces257610
+Node: \hspace258535
+Node: \hfill259490
+Node: \(SPACE) and \@259885
+Ref: \AT260046
+Node: \(SPACE) after control sequence261583
+Node: \frenchspacing262501
+Node: \thinspace263119
+Node: \/263422
+Node: \hrulefill \dotfill264604
+Node: \addvspace265597
+Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip266643
+Node: \vfill267537
+Node: \vspace268406
+Node: Boxes269399
+Node: \mbox270124
+Node: \fbox and \framebox270411
+Node: lrbox271214
+Node: \makebox271573
+Node: \parbox272293
+Node: \raisebox273861
+Node: \savebox274458
+Node: \sbox274873
+Node: \usebox275322
+Node: Special insertions275583
+Node: Reserved characters276384
+Node: Upper and lower case277585
+Node: Symbols by font position279329
+Node: Text symbols279949
+Node: Accents283397
+Node: Additional Latin letters285939
+Ref: Non-English characters286110
+Node: \rule287127
+Node: \today287556
+Node: Splitting the input288310
+Node: \include289074
+Node: \includeonly289665
+Node: \input290178
+Node: Front/back matter290673
+Node: Tables of contents290878
+Node: \addcontentsline291939
+Node: \addtocontents292957
+Node: Glossaries293490
+Node: Indexes294009
+Node: Letters295642
+Node: \address299320
+Node: \cc300190
+Node: \closing300608
+Node: \encl300919
+Node: \location301334
+Node: \makelabels301603
+Node: \name302604
+Node: \opening302834
+Node: \ps303174
+Node: \signature303463
+Node: \telephone304555
+Node: Terminal input/output304920
+Node: \typein305185
+Node: \typeout305770
+Node: Command line306393
+Node: Document templates307345
+Node: beamer template307752
+Node: book template308403
+Node: tugboat template308771
+Node: Concept Index311135
+Node: Command Index366769
End Tag Table
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -1,3 +1,1207 @@
+2017-08-06 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * README: update for move to puszcza/tug.
+
+2017-08-05 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (Upper and lower case) Added.
+
+2017-08-01 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: copyright 2017.
+
+2017-08-01 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Environment, Declaration, \makeatletter and \makeatother)
+ (\@@ifstar, \@@startsection): put a sectionning title to node.
+ (\@@ifstar): @cindex star-variants with key star-variants.
+ (Sectioning): Add anchor to secnumdepth counter for reference from
+ \@@startsection node.
+ (\@@startsection): Reword the explanation of redefining \section
+ as \@@startsection and how \section keeps is standard calling form
+ when redefined. heading -> title for consistency. @code{}-ify
+ class names, book, report & article. Use anchor to
+ secnumdepth. Typoes. rubber -> typically rubber. Solve overfully
+ hbox in example by not repeating explanations in examplified LaTeX
+ comments, rather make a simple link. style [...] file -> package
+ [...] file. redefined [...] sectional units -> redefined [...]
+ sectional unit title commands.
+ (Class and package commands): Amend Karl's r574 edit of
+ 2017-07-31, `When a document is processed using that class' ->
+ `When a document using that class is processed', as one usually
+ specify the class in the document itself, not on the command line,
+ although the latter is possible.
+
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header): update copyright for
+ translation.
+ (About this document, Class and package commands): Translate
+ Karl's r574 edits of 2017-07-31.
+ (Environment, Declaration, \makeatletter and \makeatother)
+ (\@@startsection,\@@ifstar): put a sectionning title to node.
+ (\@@startsection): Complete translation of Jim's r562 of
+ 2017-07-26 for this node, w/o moving the node under node
+ Sectionning.
+ (Sectioning): Add anchor to secnumdepth counter for reference from
+ \@@startsection node.
+
+2017-07-31 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Add \CheckCommand
+ and \DeclareRobustCommand as per Jim's r568 2017-07-30 edits + my
+ own modifications in latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Class and package commands/\CheckCommand): Use &
+ define term "long" for long command + improve description.
+ (Class and package commands/\DeclareRobustCommand): Improve
+ existing description. Add mention to etoolbox macros.
+
+2017-07-31 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1: Extend check-dw to handle other languages. Add
+ target help.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header): update version.
+ (About this document): Fix some leftover English/automatic
+ translated French. Typo.
+ (\pageref): Translate some leftover English.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (document header): update version.
+
+
+2017-07-31 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1: Add targets <lang><format>, like enpdf, frpdf,
+ eninfo, etc...
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header, About this document): Take
+ edits from Karl's r333 of 2015-05-12. and . Plus all my
+ modfifications in latex2e.texi --- like using common.texi for
+ project home page and bug report. `http://www.ctan.org/...' ->
+ `http://ctan.org/...'. Reword `non officiel' -> `officieux'.
+ (Overview): Take edits from Jim's r412+413 of 2015-08-21.
+ (Starting and ending): Typo. rewording `sections' -> `rubriques'.
+ (Output files): English quotes ``\xA0'' to French quotes
+ \xAB\xA0\xBB. Concerning .log, add @dfn{fichier journal} (the French for
+ ``log file''). Typo. Translate leftover English in .lot/.lof/.toc
+ cindex.
+ (@TeX{} engines): @TeX{} -> @TeX{} de base --- ie Plain- at TeX{}. Typo.
+ (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Typo.
+ (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Take edits from Jim's r564 of
+ 2017-07-26.
+ (\@@startsection): Preliminary taking into account of Jim's r562
+ of 2017-07-26.
+ (Class and package commands): Translate leftover English sentance.
+ (Floats): Translate leftover English
+ title. @PkgIndex{flafter}. Typo. Place URL to F. Mittelback
+ article in in round-bracket like in the English version.
+ (array): @PkgIndex{amsmath}
+ (displaymath): Take edits from Jim's r412 2015-08-21, plus my
+ modifications to latex2e.texi.
+ (picture): `sections' -> `rubriques'.
+ (\oval): English quotes ``\xA0'' to French quotes \xAB\xA0\xBB.
+ (table): Exchange order of \caption and \label in example to align
+ on the English version.
+ (Units of length): Translate to French leftover English @cindex
+ about mu.
+ (\parbox): Same change as in latex2e.texi, @dfn{}-ize and
+ @cindex-ize `paragraphe mode', so remove @code{} around
+ `paragraph'. Typo & some rewording.
+ (\today): Translate to French leftover English about datetime package.
+ (\addtocontents): @code{}-ify title.
+ (\addtocontents): Translate to French this node leftover in
+ English.
+ (Glossaries): Translate to French leftover English word. Fix translation.
+ (Indexes): Typo.
+
+ * common.texi: New file, for flags common to all 3 manuals.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Use common.texi for defining project home page
+ and bug report address.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (document header): @include common.texi for URL's
+ and other flags that we want to make common between all the translations.
+ (document titlepage): take home page URL from common.texi
+ (About this document): take home page URL from common.texi, same
+ for bug report address. @cindex bug report.
+ (Floats): @PkgIndex{flafter}.
+ (\@@startsection): @code{}-ify book and report class names.
+ (array): @PkgIndex{amsmath}.
+ (displaymath): @var{}-ify `math text'. Move upward sentence
+ `@LaTeX{} will not break the @var{math text} across lines.' in
+ order not to interrupt description about equation
+ numbering. @PkgIndex{amsmath}. Suppress verbous sentance `Those
+ facilities are the best approach for such output in new
+ documents.' and replace by add `significantly more' before
+ `extensive displayed equation facilities'. `options' -> `ways' in
+ order not to create confusion with package options.
+ (\parbox): @dfn{}-ize and @cindex-ize `paragraphe mode', so remove
+ @code{} around `paragraph'.
+ (\includeonly): Typo.
+ (\addcontentsline): extension -> filename extension.
+
+2017-07-31 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (About this document): latex2e frozen, not retired;
+ clarify usrguide status.
+ (Class and package commands): clarify \NeedsTeXFormat.
+ vincent xxx's + other typos.
+
+2017-07-30 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\@DeclareRobustCommand): Add.
+
+2017-07-30 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\@ifstar): Translate from the French version.
+ (\@startsection): Move to Sectioning.
+
+2017-07-27 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1 (compare-nodes, compare-nodes-fr, compare-nodes-es):
+ new targets to compare node lists between languages. compare-nodes
+ is made a synonym of compare-nodes-fr because the Spanish
+ translation does not reuse the same node names.
+
+2017-07-26 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (<header comment>): Add reference to
+ https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/lc2fr-apb.pdf, as far as
+ translation is concerned.
+ (Starting and ending): Fix @cindex translation.
+ (\@@startsection): Typo.
+ (\@@ifstar): Typo.
+ (Document classes): Add menu entries `Additional packages' and
+ `Class and package construction', as per Jim's r560 edits of 2017-07-21.
+ (Document class options): typo.
+ (Additional packages): Create new node entry, as per Jim's r560
+ edits of 2017-07-21.
+ (Class and package commands, Class and package construction): New
+ nodes, as per Jim's r560 edits of 2017-07-21.
+ (document): Add \AtBeginDocument &
+ \AtEndDocument sub node, as per Jim's r397 edits of 2015-08-11.
+ (itemize): Typo.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Class and package construction): Re-word avout
+ \makeat's surrounding, because the catcode must be changed outside
+ a macro definition, and not within it so that any @-char is
+ interpreted as a letter in the definition. Reword `interact' -> `interfere'.
+ (Class and package structure): Use an enumerate env for
+ enumerating. @dfn{...}-ize name of each part of the class/package file.
+ @code{...} -> @file{...} for file names.
+ (Class and package commands): Clarify that within
+ error/warning/info message, command \space is useful only after a
+ command name, as the usual space char can be used otherwise. Fix
+ prototype of \DeclareLOption* --- takes no @var{option}.
+ (Class and package commands): \IfFileExists, \InputIfFileExists,
+ use argument in description. Use @file{...} for file names. Add
+ @comment about at-macros for handling release date with more
+ refinement.
+ (Class and package commands): \ExecuteOptions, push @var{option}
+ into @code{...} for @code{\ds@@@var{option}}.
+ (Class and package commands): @comment, I do not understand ``that
+ you invoked''.
+ (Class and package commands): @var{option+s+ list} -> @var{option
+ list}.
+ (Class and package commands): If your code -> If your _own_ code
+ (Class and package commands): Cascaded package loading, clarify
+ text about how options get through.
+ (Class and package commands): \ProcessOpitons `Execute the code
+ +for+ each option' -> `Execute the code _associated with_ each
+ option'
+ (Class and package commands): @dfn{}-ize `global' and `local'
+ options.
+ (Class and package commands): Use enumerate env for enumerating.
+ (Class and package commands):
+ `@code{\ProcessOptions*}@var{\@@options}' ->
+ `@code{\ProcessOptions*}', fix this, probably a confusion with
+ `ds at ...' macros.
+ (Class and package commands): \ProvidesClass, \ProvidesPackage,
+ give synopsis with and w/o brief additional info.
+ (Class and package commands): optional part/portion -> optional
+ argument.
+ (Class and package commands): Place a version number also in the
+ brief additional information, as this is what people usually do.
+ (Class and package commands): smcmem -> smcmemo for consistency.
+ (Class and package commands): `by using the optional +calls+' ->
+ `by using the optional _arguments_'.
+ (Class and package commands): \ProvidesFile, relate @var{...}
+ arguments and description text.
+ (Class and package commands): \RequirePackage, author -> document
+ author, to distinguish from class/package authors.
+
+2017-07-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\makeatletter and \makeatother) Give an example
+ replacing the \@startsection one that migrated from there.
+
+2017-07-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\@startsection) Translate from French. Add text
+ and examples, including example of inventing new sectioning type.
+
+2017-07-21 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Typos.
+
+2017-07-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: added class and package commands from clsguide.pdf.
+
+2017-06-09 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (abstract): typo.
+ (\raggedleft): typo.
+ (\circle): Make \circle & \circle* two different synopsis rather
+ than signalling * as an optional argument by square bracketing it.
+ (Spacing in math mode): Typo.
+ (\hspace): Make \hspace & \hspace* two different synopsis rather
+ than signalling * as an optional argument by square bracketing
+ it. Typo.
+ (\addvspace): Typo (use masculine gender for espace when vertical,
+ feminine seems to be used only for horizontal space).
+ (tugboat template): Take Karl's edit of 2016-11-30 + translate to
+ French --- well maybe I should add that TUG articles have to be
+ written in English, and maybe I should add a template for cahiers
+ de GUTember.
+
+2016-11-30 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: assorted typos and rewordings.
+ - not "itemization"
+ - "paragraph" not "paragraphe"
+ - "sign" not "signe"
+ - "useful" not "usefull"
+ Also, "ctan.org" not "www.ctan.org".
+
+ (tugboat template): update.
+
+2016-11-24 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Place the English license in the @copying
+ section, and push the translation to an annex.
+
+ * Makefile.1 (fr, en, es): Change dependancy order so that license
+ check happens first.
+ (license-check-{fr, en, es}): Make the comparison relative to the
+ license as in latex2e.texi, and fix `/std/err' to `/dev/stderr'.
+ (distclean clean mostlyclean): Add license.texi to the files to be
+ cleaned off.
+ (txt_files): Remove license.texi from the list of files
+ to zip into the distributed archive.
+
+ * Makefile (txt_files): Remove license.texi from the list of files
+ to zip into the distributed archive.
+
+2016-11-23 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * license.texi: dos2unix + svn propset svn:eol-style to LF.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Cross references): Add word label to concept
+ index, and make it an @dfn{...} in the node text. `running the
+ document' -> `compiling the document'.
+ (\label): `number' -> `reference number'.
+ (abstract): Solve some overful hbox in @example... at end example
+ blocks.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header comment): Refer to
+ http://gdt.oqlf.gouv.qc.ca/ as one of the source for French
+ vocabulary.
+ (Cross references, \label, abstract): Same changes as in
+ latex2e.texi.
+ (Cross references, \label, \pageref, \ref): Take Jim's rev481
+ edits + fix some typoes.
+ (\includeonly): Fix typo.
+
+ * Makefile.1: Add check-license-<lang> targets to check that the
+ license is same as in license.texi
+
+2016-11-21 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * ltx-help.el (latex-help-file): Make this variable a defcustom
+ for selecting the manuel translation.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (copying): Restore license text without @include'sion of
+ license.texi, make it delimited by @comment's.
+ (dircategory): fix `LaTeX2e-fr' -> `latex2e-fr'
+ (throughout document): Use proper unbreakable space before colons.
+ (tabular, \newtheorem): typoes.
+ (\address): @var{...} instead of @code{...} for the argument + typoes.
+ (\cc): typoes + add example from latex2e.texi
+ (\closing): typo.
+ (\signature): Typoes, translate @var name.
+ (Command line): Typoes.
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Restore license text without @inclusion of
+ license.texi, make it delimited by @comment's.
+ (\cc): Add `, as in:' before example.
+
+2016-11-19 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * license.texi: Ooops... add this file.
+
+2016-11-19 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{xml,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt}: Make these files again
+ for the license.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Restore original English license text by
+ @inclusion of license.texi, and push translation thereof to an
+ annex.
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Make license text @include-ed
+
+ * NEWS-fr: Mention that original English license text is restored,
+ and translation thereof pushed to an annex.
+
+ * Makefile.1 (txt_files): Add license.texi file.
+
+ * Makefile (txt_files): Add license.texi file.
+
+2016-11-18 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1: Make variable txt_tiles a macro, so that NEWS-fr and
+ README-fr be delivered instead of NEWS and README for target
+ dist-fr.
+
+ * NEWS-fr: add news for November 2016 CTAN delivery.
+
+2016-11-18 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{xml,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt}: Make these files.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Add reference to
+ package macros2e.
+ (picture): Add reference to package picture.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Add reference
+ to package macros2e.
+ (picture): Fix typos. Add reference to package picture.
+ (\protect): Rephrase `argument mobile' to `argument mouvant'
+
+ * README-fr: Make it clear the motivation for changing `argument
+ mobile' into `argument mouvant'.
+
+ * Makefile.1 (spell-$(1)): Take in edit by Karl (rev 546) on Makefile
+
+2016-11-15 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math miscellany): Use `math' instead of `text' for
+ the @var{...} name.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math miscellany): Use `math' instead of `texte'
+ for the @var{...} name. Use `@ifset HAS-MATH' instead of `@iftex'
+ for displaying how the example looks like.
+ (\(SPACE) and \@@): `@key{espace}' -> `@key{<espace>}' + fix typo
+ missing \ in @code{\ }.
+
+2016-10-31 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (spell): A-Z intended in range.
+
+2016-09-14 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml,pdf}: Update French manuals.
+
+2016-09-13 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\@@ifstar): New node.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Comment that
+ documenting \@ifstar is TODO.
+
+2016-09-13 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand, Spaces)
+ (\(SPACE) and \@@, \(SPACE) after control sequence): Complete
+ taking on Karl's rev497 edits.
+
+2016-09-13 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\discretionary, Footnotes in section headings)
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand, Math miscellany, \(SPACE) and \@@)
+ (Text symbols): Align on Karl's rev533 changes.
+ (\(SPACE) after control sequence): Rename node --- old name was
+ ``\(SPACE) after CS'' --- as per Karl's rev497 edits.
+
+2016-09-12 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Remove @dmn{...} for
+ ``inches''.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Document class options): Remove @dmn{...} for
+ ``pouces''. Use comma instead of point as decimal symbol. Fix
+ left-over non translated word ``by''.
+ (Floats): Indicate that ``Here'' means ``Ici'', and fix left-over
+ non translated word ``For''.
+
+2016-09-09 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): @dmn{...}-ize the units
+ in the text from Jim's rev383 changes.
+ (All over document): Create PkgIndex macro and use it to add packages
+ to index.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Take left over Jim's rev383 changes ---
+ including further fix from Karl's rev 533. Move HAS_MATH flag
+ definition (as per Karl's rev533 changes). Fix typo inside
+ EnvIndex macro definition. Create PkgIndex macro for adding
+ packages to index.
+ (All over document): Use PkgIndex macro to add packages to index.
+ (Overview): Use term ``paquet'' instead of ``paquetage'' in the
+ cindex for ``paquet de macro'', to be in line with the text body.
+ (Document class options): As compared with Jim's rev383 changes,
+ @dmn{...}-ize the units.
+ (Math symbols): Fix typo in \uplus entry.
+
+2016-09-07 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Same changes as in latex2e.texi
+ (Document class options): Minor editorial change.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Align on Karl's rev538
+ change, ie clarify that @var{d\xE9butd\xE9f} and @var{find\xE9f} are
+ executed within a group. Rename @var{d\xE9butd\xE9f} and @var{find\xE9f} to
+ @var{d\xE9fd\xE9but} and @var{d\xE9ffin}
+
+ * latex2e.texi: new iftexthenelse macro.
+ (Footnotes in a table): Minor editorial change to avoid overfull hbox.
+ (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): Do not mention
+ Unicode for PDF output, and show the LaTeX commands producing the
+ symbols.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): clarify that @var{begdefn}
+ and @var{enddefn} are executed within a group. Plus clarify that
+ _body_ is also treated within a group. Replace word ``executed''
+ by ``processed'' because not only execution but also expansion
+ prior to it happens within a group.
+
+2016-09-05 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Add an
+ @findex for ``group''.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Align on
+ Karl's 2016-09-03, plus some typo/translation fixes. Add an @findex
+ for ``groupe''.
+
+ * README-fr,
+ * NEWS-fr: New file, translation of NEWS plus some French specifics.
+
+ * README: Clarify that
+ https://mail.gna.org/listinfo/latexrefman-discuss is for archives
+ and subsription.
+
+2016-09-04 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Whole file, suppress any trailing blanks.
+
+2016-09-04 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Fix translation of sub node menu entry text.
+ (Overview): Fix spelling. Fix leftover English. ``paquetage de
+ macros'' -> ``paquet de macros'', because here work ``package'' is
+ less formal (not using the kernel packaging mechanism).
+ (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Translate title.
+ (Fonts): in ``Low-level font commands'' menu entry, improve
+ translation (notably translat ``shape'' by ``allure'').
+ (Font styles): Use French guillemets.
+ (Low-level font commands): Fix spelling. ``shape'' -> ``allure''
+ (Layout): Fix menu entry Texinfoing.
+ (\centering): Fix spelling.
+ (\centering): Fix typo.
+ (minipage): Fix spelling.
+ (Footnotes in a table): Fix typo.
+ (Lengths): Provide menu entry text index translation where needed.
+ (Spaces): Fix spelling + provide ref text translation where needed.
+
+2016-09-03 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): wording,
+ examples, xref.
+ * aspell.en.pws: additions.
+
+2016-08-31 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * aspell.en.pws: additions.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): add a5paper.
+ (\discretionary): English description.
+
+ (Footnotes in section headers): wording, add index entries.
+
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): more attempts at clarity;
+ simplify examples.
+
+ (Math miscellany): add \mathdollar \mathellipsis \mathparagraph
+ \mathsection \mathsterling \mathunderscore \mathunderscore.
+ (Text symbols): add \textsection, \textquotesingle.
+
+2016-04-12 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Improve wording by
+ reusing package variable @var{pkg} in the synopsis description.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Fix typo.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Use term `positional
+ parameter' in addition of `@code{#@var{n}}'. `argument parameters' ->
+ `positional parameters'.
+ (Reserved characters): `\backslash' -> `\textbackslash' in the
+ @findex in accordance with description.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Document class options): Align \usepackage
+ description on latest latex2e.texi, improve wording by reusing
+ package variable @var{paquo} in the synopsis description.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Align description on latest
+ latex2e.texi by @code{...}-ifying all the occurrence of
+ `\@var{cmd}'. Fix typoes.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): nargs starting from 0
+ rather than from 1. Fix typoes. `argument positionnel' ->
+ `param\xE8tre positionnel'.
+ (Reserved characters): `\backslash' -> `\textbackslash' in the
+ @findex in accordance with description. Fix typoes.
+
+2016-04-12 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Top): Make version under quotes to
+ avoid incorrect French ``de Avril 2016'' or ``du Avril 2016''
+ instead of ``d'Avril 2016''.
+ (Document classes): Typoes.
+
+ * latex2e-{es,fr}.texi (top comment): Update dates in copyright
+ notice up to 2016.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment): `Copyright' -> `Tous droits
+ r\xE9serv\xE9s \xA9' + add ``Vincent Bela\xEFche'' as translator.
+
+2016-04-11 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (top comment, Using BibTeX): Replace CTAN
+ central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra
+ R\xFCbe-Pugliese.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Output files, Using BibTeX):
+ Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment
+ by Petra R\xFCbe-Pugliese.
+ (Output files, Using BibTeX): Typoes.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (top comment, Output files): Replace CTAN central
+ server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra
+ R\xFCbe-Pugliese.
+
+2016-04-08 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * NEWS: Add NEWS entry for the Apr 2016 release --- assuming
+ English will be released also.
+
+ * Makefile.1 (dist-xx, dist): Fix pior check that there aren't any
+ uncommited changes before making the zip.
+
+2016-04-07 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml,pdf}: Update French manuals
+ for distribution 2016-04-08 to CTAN.
+
+2016-04-07 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Updated @set UPDATED.
+
+ * aspell.es.pws: new file.
+
+ * aspell.fr.pws: new file.
+
+ * Makefile.1: new file evolved from Makefile, to be merged
+ later-on with Makefile once Karl has more time to review it and
+ validate the design. Compared to orignal Makefile the changes are
+ as follows, where xx denotes the language, ie is a two letter word
+ in {en,fr,es}:
+
+ - make it futureproof w.r.t. to new languages addition.
+
+ - make it safer:
+ - test for uncommitted changes before preparing distribution zip
+ - automate @set UPDATED flag before preparing distribution zip
+
+ - add target dist-xx, to prepare distribution for language xx only, this
+ triggers automatic update of @set UPDATED flag for the corresponding
+ language
+
+ - modify spell and spell-en target so as to support all languages. I had
+ to add custom dicitionnary for fr and es. spell will check all the
+ languages, use spell-en for English only. My aspell seems to be too
+ old to support --mode=texinfo, so I could not test it.
+
+ - modify target dist so that french is added to the zip file. Please
+ note that dist will not trigger automatic update of the @set UPDATED
+ flag, before Makefile cannot know which manual has been updated and
+ which not. This will also make the uncommitted check.
+
+ - add target updated-date-xx to automatically update @set UPDATED flag
+ in the xx manual
+
+ - add target updated-xx to do updated-date-xx + rebuild all outputs for
+ xx
+
+ - add target tag to make a tag, you can use this as follows for default
+ CTAN tag (which is `ctanYYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:SS', where
+ YYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:SS is an ISO time stamp):
+
+ make tag
+
+ or you can do this for make tag `foo' with message `Some message':
+
+ make tag TAG=foo "MESSAGE=Some message"
+
+
+2016-04-04 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Add EnvIndex macro to make indexing environments
+ consistent and throughout the manual. Replace any @findex of an
+ environment by a call to this macro.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Same as latex2e.texi.
+ (filecontents): Typoes.
+ (table): Typo (table evironment name mistakenly translated to
+ French).
+ (\\): Typoes.
+ (\enlargethispage): translate cindex entry to French.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Same as latex2e.texi.
+ (filecontents): Align to latest text in latex2e{,-fr}.texi.
+
+2016-04-02 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Add @BES and @BESU macro definitions.
+ (S\xEDmbolos de Texto): Use @BES macro rather than @math for
+ \textperiodcentered so that the other-than-PDF is clean. `$' ->
+ `\$' for \textdollar.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Use @BES macro rather than @math
+ for \textperiodcentered and \trademark so that the other-than-PDF
+ is clean. `$' -> `\$' for \textdollar.
+ (\makeatletter and \makeatother): re-indent
+ \@startsection example for solving the overfull hbox in the PDF
+ output.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Text symbols): \textquestiondown
+ Typo. \textexclamdown `haut en bas' -> `culbut\xE9'. Use @BES macro
+ rather than @math for \textperiodcentered and \trademark so that
+ the other-than-PDF is clean. `$' -> `\$' for \textdollar. `marque
+ de fabrique' -> `marque de commerce' for \texttrademark.
+ (\@@startsection): re-indent \@startsection example for solving
+ the overfull hbox in the PDF output, and fix some wrong reference.
+
+2016-03-31 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,dvi,html,info,pdf,texi,txt,xml}: make fr.
+
+2016-03-29 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Improve translation of
+ break/breaking, use `saut/sauter \xE0' rather than `rupture/rompre'.
+ (Spaces): Typo.
+ (Special insertions): Typo.
+ (Text symbols): Fix typo adding `comp' into
+ `\textcapitalcompwordmark' and `\textascendercompwordmark', and
+ translate this item.
+ (Math miscellany): Same change as in latex2e.texi
+ (\bigskip \medskip \smallskip): Same change as in latex2e.texi
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math miscellany): Remove @findex useless as we are in an ftable.
+ (\bigskip \medskip \smallskip): Replace @table by @ftable, and
+ remove @findex corresponding to @item's
+ (Text symbols): Fix typo adding `comp' into
+ `\textcapitalcompwordmark' and `\textascendercompwordmark'
+
+
+2016-03-17 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ Reword descrition of \epsilon and \varepsilon.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): About \epsilon ``Greek-letter'' ->
+ ``lunate'', plus add some notice that ``Similar to Greek text
+ letter''. About \varepsilon ``curly'' or ``rounded small'' ->
+ ``script small letter''.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): About \varepsilon ``en forme de
+ 3 retourn\xE9'' -> ``minuscule de ronde''.
+
+2016-03-15 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Fix compilation errors.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Fix compilation errors.
+
+2016-03-14 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Define flags NotInPlainTeX, NeedsAMSSymb and
+ NeedsSTIX, in order to factorize text of `Math symbols' node.
+ (Math symbols): Remove that \varnothing is reverse of \emptyset,
+ but make it variant. Add items for \revemptyset and varnothing.
+ Factorize text with news flags flags NotInPlainTeX, NeedsAMSSymb
+ and NeedsSTIX. \rangle, fix unicode code point. \smile: add
+ `smile' into meaning.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Progress translation of this
+ node and make same changes as for latex2e.texi.
+
+2016-03-08 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Typoe in `Modes' menu entry.
+ (eqnarray): `or' -> `ou'.
+ (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node + same changes
+ as in latex2e.texi.
+ (Modes): Typoes + same changes as in latex2e.texi.
+ (\ensuremath): new node.
+ (\(SPACE) and \@@): `guillemet anglais' -> `guillemet-apostrophe'.
+ (Text symbols): Progess translation of this node + same changes as
+ in latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Remove description how to make
+ \leadsto mode independent, and add a reference to new node
+ \ensuremath. Also clarify "Unless said otherwise" for this that
+ these commands are only available in math mode as this is not true
+ for \ldots.
+ (Modes): Point to new node \ensuremath
+ (\ensuremath): new node.
+ (Text symbols): Add pilcrow character for \P, similar change for \S.
+
+2016-03-06 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node.
+
+2016-02-29 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\circle): Use term ``disque'', in addition to
+ ``cercle plein'' (solid circle). @dmn{...}-ify unit.
+ (\makebox (picture)): Typo.
+ (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node.
+
+2016-02-22 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Fix @code{'}->@code{''} for \textquotedblright
+ (Splitting the input): @dfn{...}-ify `root file' and add it to concept index
+ (\include): Replace `See next section' -> `See @ref{\includeonly}'.
+ (\includeonly): `@var{file}s' -> `@var{file1}, @var{file2}, @dots{}'
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): `croix-mortuaire' -> `ob\xE8le'
+ (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node.
+ (Text symbols): Start translation of this node.
+ (\thinspace): `imbriqu\xE9' -> `embo\xEEt\xE9', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary
+ (Text symbols): Fix @code{'}->@code{''} for \textquotedblright
+ (Splitting the input, \include, \includeonly, \input): Translate these nodes.
+ (Splitting the input): @dfn{...}-ify `root file' and add it to concept index
+ (\include): Replace `See next section' -> `See @ref{\includeonly}'.
+ (\includeonly): `@var{file}s' -> `@var{file1}, @var{file2}, @dots{}'
+
+2016-02-15 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\noindent): `..' -> `...'.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (About this document, @LaTeX{} command syntax)
+ (Document class options, Document class options)
+ (Page\xA0layout\xA0parameters, Sectioning, enumerate, \item, \line)
+ (\thicklines, \thinlines, \cite, \newtheorem, \newtheorem, \newtheorem)
+ (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, \signature): @tie{} -> UTF-8
+ unbreakable space.
+ (Environment): `..' -> `...' + translation of text in example.
+ (\centering): Typo.
+ (quotation and quote, \newenvironment & \renewenvironment)
+ (\noindent, \signature): `..' -> `...'.
+ (Math symbols): Progress translation + @tie{} -> UTF-8 unbreakable
+ space.
+
+2016-02-11 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (abstract): @code{...}-ify words `article' &
+ `report' when they refer to classes.
+ (array): @code{...}-ify words `array' when it refers to
+ environment.
+ (array): Ellipsis `..' -> `...'.
+ (\multicolumn): Add empty blank line after `@end example'.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Throughout document align on Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary the following:
+ `indentation/indenter' -> `renfoncement/renfoncer', `en mode affichage' -> `en hors-texte'.
+ (\@@startsection): `@var{indent}' -> `@var{retrait}', indent(ation) -> retrait or renfoncement.
+ (Document class options): Added flegn concerns display mode formula only.
+ (Environments): `mise en vedette' -> `en hors texte'
+ (abstract): `abtracts' -> `r\xE9sum\xE9', and update translating this
+ node as per Jim's rev 486 of 2015-12-05T13:22:45+01 edit.
+ (Environment): Ellipsis `..' -> `...', and add
+ `Voir\xA0 at ref{Environments} pour une liste des environnements.' as
+ per Jim's rev 486 of 2015-12-05T13:22:45+01 edit.
+ (array): Update translation ad per Jim's edits rev 391 of
+ 2015-08-02T22:57:00+02 and with fixes from rev 469 by Karl of
+ 2015-11-01T23:58:36+01, and rev 503 by Karl of
+ 2016-02-10T00:11:11+01
+ (eqnarray): `style d'affichage' -> `hors texte'.
+ (itemize, minipage, quotation and quote): `Indentation' -> `Renfoncement'.
+ (tabular): Ellipsis `..' -> `...', from rev 469 by Karl of
+ 2015-11-01T23:58:36+01. Typo.
+ (\multicolumn): Update translation as per Jim's edit rev 390 of
+ 2015-08-02T20:08:26+02
+ (\verb): Typo.
+ (verse): indent(ation) -> retrait or renfoncement.
+ (\\): Ellipsis `..' -> `...', from rev 469 by Karl of
+ 2015-11-01T23:58:36+01.
+ (\footnotetext): Typo.
+ (Making paragraphs, \indent, \noindent): indent(ation) -> retrait
+ or renfoncement.
+ (Letters): `style d'affichage' -> `hors texte'. indente -> renfonce.
+
+
+2016-02-09 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (array): the directive is just p{...}, not @p{...}.
+ Noted by Vincent.
+
+2016-02-08 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (lrbox): Use Synopsis instead of in-line
+ @code{...}. `cmd' -> `\@var{cmd}'. @ref{...}-ify @code{\sbox}.
+ (\raisebox): @var{...}-ify some synopsis arguments.
+ (\addcontentsline): Remove args from @findex entry. Use synopis
+ rather than in-line @code{...}. Specify @var{unit} to be `figure',
+ resp. `table', when @var{ext} is `lof', resp. `lot'. Use `text'
+ everywhere instead of `text', `entry' and `name'. Fix `\contentsline'
+ description. Add third argument `num' to `\contentsline' and describe it.
+ (Indexes): Clarify `extension' is a filename extension. Add
+ missing antislash to \printindex and \indexspace.
+ (Letters): Typo. @code{...}-ify word `letter' when the environment
+ name. Add word `body' concerning whatever lies in the letter
+ environment body.
+ (\closing): @var{...}-ify argument.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: In file header, add reference to the
+ French/English LaTeX glossary published in the ``Cahier
+ GUTenberg'' #49 (2017), page 19--45.
+ (Top): Typo.
+ (itemize): Typo.
+ (\discretionary): Typo.
+ (\vfill): Translate this node.
+ (\vspace): Take fixes from rev 469 by Karl (2015-11-01T23:58:36+01).
+ (\opening): Take fixes from rev 469 by Karl (2015-11-01T23:58:36+01).
+ (lrbox): Translate this node.
+ (\raisebox): Complete translation of this node.
+ (Front/back matter): Typo.
+ (Tables of contents): `article' -> `entr\xE9e', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary.
+ (\addcontentsline): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
+ (\addtocontents): Translate this node.
+ (Glossaries): Translate this node.
+ (Indexes): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
+ (Letters): Typoes. `cl\xF4ture' -> `salutation'. Typo. Complete
+ translation with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
+ (\address): Translate this node.
+ (\cc): Translate this node.
+ (\closing): Translate this node with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
+ (\encl): Translate this node.
+ (\location): Translate this node.
+ (\makelabels): Typo.
+ (\opening): Typo.
+
+2016-02-05 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Line breaking, \discretionary): Add node
+ \discreionary, need completion.
+ (\protect): `they must be' -> `one solution is', as there are
+ alternative solution consisting in robustification of fragile
+ command. Move concept index entry "moving arguments" next to
+ concept first occurrence. Fix typo.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking, \discretionary): Add \discretionary node
+ (\linebreak & \nolinebreak): Translate this node.
+ (Page breaking): Translate this node.
+ (\protect): Translate this node, with same changes as in latex2e.texi.
+
+2016-02-04 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add @xref{\thinspace} to
+ the \thinspace entry.
+ (Math miscellany): Complete translation of this node. Clarify
+ discretionary multiplication and add example. Make TeX output only
+ when compilation is with TeX and fix some of the examples.
+ (\(SPACE) and \@@): Typo.
+ (\thinspace): Translate this node.
+ (Boxes): Translate intro in this node.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add @xref{\thinspace} to
+ the \thinspace entry.
+ (Math miscellany): Clarify discretionary multiplication and add
+ example. Make TeX output only when compilation is with TeX and fix
+ some of the examples.
+
+2016-02-02 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Reword copyright notice from
+ Automatic-translation French to real French.
+ (Environments): Remove spurious space.
+ (tabular): Typo.
+ (\hyphenation): Translate this node.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Typo. Align on change done by Jim
+ on rev 482 2015-11-30T12:06:12.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Align on changes done by Jim on rev
+ 345 2015-05-27T02:05:34+02. Also `@var{cmd}' or `@var{\cmd}' ->
+ `@cmd{\@var{cmd}}'.
+ (Math miscellany): Start translation of this node.
+ (Spaces): Typo in menu.
+ (\(SPACE) after CS): Typo. Translate remain pieces left over in
+ English, notably title. Align on rev 497 2016-02-01 by Karl (ie
+ make only a brief mention of xspace), plus my rewording in
+ latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): `@var{cmd}' or
+ `@var{\cmd}' -> `@cmd{\@var{cmd}}'
+ (\typein): `@var{cmd}' -> `@cmd{\@var{cmd}}'. Add `starred form' to concept index.
+ (\(SPACE) after control sequence): Rewording mention that xspace
+ alter standard behaviour. I gather the the intention was not to
+ say that individual commands alter the standard behaviour --- as
+ xspace package does --- but rather that some individual command do
+ not following the standard behaviour, and amongst them, those
+ defined with the xspace package.
+
+2016-02-01 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\(SPACE) after control sequence): replace xspace
+ details with a mere mention. Rename node from
+ \(SPACE) after control sequence.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): don't say "command".
+
+2016-01-30 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): mention "\ "
+ after control sequences, as noted by Vincent.
+
+2016-01-27 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Marginal notes): Typoes.
+ (Subscripts & superscripts): Typo.
+ (Math functions): Translate this node to French.
+ (Math accents): Translate this node to French.
+ (Math miscellany): Initiate translation of this node to French.
+ (Non-English characters): Translate this node to French.
+ (\today): Translate this node to French.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math functions): make `\sup' formatted as a math
+ operator when in TeX output, update comment accordingly.
+ (Additional Latin letters): Add information that \dh, \DH, \dj,
+ \DJ, \th and \TH do not exist in OT1 font encoding --- I got this
+ infomation from the comprehensive package.
+ (Additional Latin letters): \ng & \NG, `Latin' -> `Lappish'.
+ (\today): @samp-ify the example date.
+ (\today): Add information about localization by multilingual
+ packages & classes.
+
+2016-01-26 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Additional Latin letters): rename from
+ Non-English characters (leave anchor behind). Suggestion from
+ Vincent, 25 Jan 2016 17:27:30.
+
+2016-01-24 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\item): oops, should have been a subsection.
+ (throughout): use three dots consistently for displayed ellipses;
+ will fix in-text ellipses later.
+
+2016-01-23 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Environment[s], \item): fix undefined references.
+ (cross-reference): replace with "cross reference", for consistency.
+
+2016-01-22 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * aspell.en.pws: add more exceptions.
+ * latex2e.texi: fix typos, refilling.
+
+2016-01-15 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\setlength, \addtolength, \settodepth)
+ (\settoheight, \settowidth): Place synopsis in a Synopsis
+ paragraph, rather than in title, simplify title, use \@var{len}
+ for the length command (rather than \gnat). Add ``length command''
+ to concept index of \selength node with @dfn-fying it, and remove
+ quote in the other nodes.
+ (Predefined lengths): Make the formula defining \totalheight a
+ math formula.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Floats): Typo
+ (\setlength, \addtolength, \settodepth, \settoheight)
+ (\settowidth, Predefined lengths): Translate these nodes to
+ French, with taking into account changes done to latex2e.texi
+ (Special insertions): Fix menu entry syntax.
+ (Reserved characters): Translate this node to French
+ (Symbols by font position): Add this node, after update made to
+ latex2e.texi
+
+2015-12-14 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): section->rubrique, sectionement->rubricage
+ (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Add node ``\makeatletter and \makeatother''.
+ (\makeatletter and \makeatother): New node, translated from
+ English version, plus improvement as changes in latex2e.texi, plus
+ \@startsection example made a separate node with more information.
+ (\@@startsection): New node.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Change ``read by
+ TeX and LaTeX'' to ``read by TeX for LaTeX''. Change ``character
+ code'' to ``character category code'', and introduce term
+ ``catcode''. Use the term ``private commands'' for commands with
+ an ``@'' in their names. Improve wording about command names with
+ a single non-letter. Suppress chiasmus of ``\documentclass and
+ \usepackage'' w.r.t. ``.sty and .cls files''. Add TODO @comment
+ about making \@startsection a separate node, see French version.
+ (\makelabels) Add reminder TODO comment to align on French
+ version.
+
+2015-12-10 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (array, center): Adjust wording, add examples.
+
+2015-12-05 Kevin Ryde <user42_kevin at yahoo.com.au>
+
+ * ltx-help.el (ltxh-buffer-substring): defalias to use
+ 'buffer-substring-no-properties if available.
+ (latex-help-get-cmd-alist): support :: and (line 123).
+ Mail of 03 Dec 2015 17:49:05.
+
+2015-12-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (abstract): Add examples.
+
+2015-12-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\onecolumn, \twocolumn): Adjust wording (make
+ first sentence a one-sentence description).
+
+2015-12-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\flushbottom): Adjust wording.
+
+2015-12-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newtheorem): Add case of no optional arguments
+ to synopsis, with summary in body.
+
+2015-11-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand and \newenvironment): Minor wording
+ adjustments, mostly for consistency with subsequent practice.
+
+2015-11-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Cross references): Add examples, and description of
+ forward references.
+
+2015-11-28 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Counters): Adjust wording and add examples
+ for \setcounter and \addtocounter.
+
+2015-11-28 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Counters): Add variable `counter' to description
+ of the counter-formatting commands. (From latex.texinfo.)
+
+2015-11-27 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Adjust wording.
+
+2015-11-26 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newsavebox, \newtheorem, \newfont): Complete
+ translation of this node, and align on latest English version.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newtheorem): Typo.
+ (\newfont): `11pt' -> `1100' in the example, when the at clause
+ has the `scaled FACTOR' form.
+
+2015-11-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Add node for this,
+ as a subnode of the description of definition of commands.
+
+2015-11-25 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Reserved characters): Split out symbols by font
+ position. Distinguish between output in text body font and
+ output in typewriter font.
+
+2015-11-09 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Introduce the
+ concept of positional parameter.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Remove the text that
+ starred & nonstarred forms have the same effect, and restore the
+ original text that starred forms ban the use of \par in arguments.
+ Tell that the only allowed characters in environment names are
+ letters and character `*'. Use the term positional parameter, and
+ tell that expansion is within begdefn, not within environment,
+ which was misleading. @samp{...}-ify `Shakespear' outside of
+ @example... at end\xA0example.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Output files): Typo.
+ (tabular): Typoes.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Typo. Introduce the concept of positional parameter.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Complete the translation
+ and make the same text improvements as in latex2e.texi.
+
+2015-11-06 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Tell that `position=m' equates the
+ default behaviour.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\parbox): Same as latex2e-fr.texi.
+
+2015-11-05 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\fussy): Typo.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (verbatim): Translate this node.
+ (\verb): Clean-up left over English words.
+ (\obeycr & \restorecr, \fussy, \sloppy): Translate this node.
+
+2015-11-04 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (tabular): wording `@code{*-expression}' -> `@code{*}-expression'.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (tabular): Complete translation of this node.
+
+2015-11-03 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\parbox): Correct description of \parbox vertical
+ alignment after comment from Denis Bitouz\xE9.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Same as for latex2e.texi.
+
+2015-11-01 Karl Berry <karl at freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\vspace): mention behavior if used in hmode.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (throughout): consistently use ... instead of
+ .. for code ellipses.
+
+2015-10-27 Vincent Bela\xEFche <vincentb1 at users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (enumerate): Typo.
+ (itemize): Restore missing example.
+ (thebibliography): `label' -> `\xE9tiquette', `cite_key' ->
+ `clef_de_cite'. Change wording concerning `\refname' in standard classes.
+ (\bibitem, \cite, \nocite, Using BibTeX, theorem): Translate this node.
+ (\cleardoublepage, \newpage): Improve wording `page actuelle' ->
+ `page courante'.
+ (\typeout): Typo `\espace' -> `\space'.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\bibitem): 1/ Add to concept index "citation
+ key". 2/ @var{...}-ify word label where applicable for consistency
+ with @var{cite_key}. 3/ `see next section' -> `@pxref{\cite}'.
+ (\cite): 1/ Add reference to node \bibitem. 2/ @samp{...}-ify the
+ example possibly produced typeset text.
+ (\nocite): Add `Synopsis:' and `@example ... @end example'
+ encapsulation thereof.
+ (Using BibTeX): 1/ `@var{style}' -> `@var{bibstyle}'. 2/
+ `@file{@var{bibfile}.bib}' -> `@file{@var{bibfile1}.bib},
+ @file{@var{bibfile2}.bib}, @dots{}'.
+
+2015-10-27 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (titlepage): Add example.
+
2015-10-25 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
* Correct errors reported by CTAN, including my lack
@@ -5,9 +1209,9 @@
2015-10-24 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon at smcvt.edu>
- * New version for CTAN, since there were lots of updates over the
- summer. Just English for the moment; we need to smooth the process
- for other languages.
+ * New release, version of October 2015, for CTAN, since there
+ were lots of updates over the summer. Just English for the
+ moment; we need to smooth the process for other languages.
* Makefile (distzip): the phony target was not doing the recipies;
changed name of a variable to distzip.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# $Id: Makefile 462 2015-10-24 20:37:02Z jhefferon $
+# $Id: Makefile 555 2016-11-24 09:45:22Z vincentb1 $
# Public domain. Originally written 2006, Karl Berry.
# Makefile for latexrefman.
@@ -81,21 +81,21 @@
#
dist for CTAN. Also update NEWS
#
txt_files = ChangeLog Makefile NEWS README aspell.en.pws ltx-help.el
-distzip = latex2e-help-texinfo.zip
+dist = latex2e-help-texinfo.zip
#
dist: en
mkdir latex2e-help-texinfo && cd latex2e-help-texinfo && ln -s ../* .
- zip -q $(distzip) \
+ zip -q $(dist) \
$(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/, $(txt_files) \
latex2e.texi $(en_mi_output) latex2e.pdf)
rm -rf latex2e-help-texinfo
- @ls -l $(distzip); unzip -t $(distzip)
+ @ls -l $(dist); unzip -t $(dist)
# A hacky spell check target.
# Remove \commandnames to reduce exception list, but not {args} or
# [args], since they are often words.
spell spell-en:
- sed -e 's/\\[a-zA-z]*//g' latex2e.texi \
+ sed -e 's/\\[a-zA-Z]*//g' latex2e.texi \
| aspell list --mode=texinfo --add-extra-dicts=`pwd`/aspell.en.pws \
| sort -f -u
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -1,10 +1,31 @@
-$Id: NEWS 462 2015-10-24 20:37:02Z jhefferon $
+$Id: NEWS 580 2017-08-07 22:10:07Z jimhefferon $
NEWS for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package.
Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen.
-Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco.
+Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco (currently unmaintained).
French translation originally from Vincent Belaiche.
----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in Aug 2017 release:
+
+Besides the usual bug fixes, some of the changes in this version
+include coverage of \makeatletter and \makeatother, \@startsection,
+and commands for writing classes and packages, as well as improvements
+in the descriptions of floats, the letter environment, \raisebox,
+\onecolumn and \twocolumn, and many more.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in Apr 2016 release:
+
+Provide first complete French translation --- still not fully aligned
+on the latest revisions of the English version.
+
+Fix \newfont description. Clarify discretionary multiplication and
+\discretionary. Clarify space gobbling after control word. Making
+environment indexing consistent, improve some synopsis syntax, notably
+for optional parameters. Improve naming of Math symbols. Usual bug and
+typo fixes.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
Changes in Oct 2015 release:
Many examples added, often using typical constructs.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/README 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -1,16 +1,17 @@
-$Id: README 463 2015-10-25 18:16:55Z jhefferon $
+$Id: README 579 2017-08-06 21:52:19Z karl $
README for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package.
-Public domain. This file originally written 2008, Karl Berry.
+Public domain. This README file originally written 2008, Karl Berry.
This project is an attempt to write a reference manual for core LaTeX.
It is unofficial and the LaTeX Project members have not reviewed it.
-http://home.gna.org/latexrefman (the project home page) has more
-information, including links to the current output in various formats,
-sources, mailing lists, and other infrastructure.
+https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/ (the project home page)
+has more information, including links to the current output in various
+formats, sources, mailing lists, and other infrastructure.
Help is most definitely wanted. (Search for "xx" in the source for just
a few of the known deficiencies.) Please email any bug reports, new
-material, general discussion, whatever, to latexrefman-discuss at gna.org,
-also at https://mail.gna.org/listinfo/latexrefman-discuss.
+material, general discussion, whatever, to latexrefman at tug.org (see
+http://lists.tug.org/latexrefman for archives and subscription via the web).
+
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -1,20 +1,34 @@
personal_ws-1.1 en 0
+Avant
+Biemesderfer
+Botway
+EnvIndex
+Garde
+Kleene
+LAH
+Lappish
+Martinsen
+Overstrike
ae
arabic
aring
-Biemesderfer
-Botway
+ary
bowtie
+bp
cmd
+coproduct
cp
+del
dvi
dvitype
eg
ek
eng
+env
eth
executivepaper
f's
+fd
fleqn
fn
fnsymbol
@@ -23,13 +37,16 @@
hungarian
indexspace
intercolumn
-Itemizations
-LAH
+lR
+leadsto
legalpaper
letterpaper
-lR
+lhd
lrbox
-Martinsen
+lunate
+mho
+mpfootnote
+multiset
niques
notitlepage
oe
@@ -41,25 +58,42 @@
oslash
overbar
overdot
-Overstrike
+pagebreak
pagestyle
printindex
+ptr
+revemptyset
+rhd
secnumdepth
+sp
+sqsubset
+sqsupset
superscripted
teck
tecks
texinfo
+textstyle
th
titlepage
+topmargin
twocolumn
twoside
underbar
+unlhd
+unrhd
+upharpoonright
+usrguide
+varnothing
+vert
+xdv
xelatex
xyz
zet
-ptr
-usrguide
-Avant
-Garde
-fd
-xdv
+ddagger
+footmisc
+setspace
+showidx
+makeidx
+multind
+datetime
+PkgIndex
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
<!ENTITY latex "LaTeX">
]>
<book id="latex2e.dbk" lang="en">
-<title>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (October 2015)</title>
+<title>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (November 2016)</title>
<!-- %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
<!-- latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, -->
@@ -11,12 +11,13 @@
<!-- xx but latex2e stuff is missing. -->
<!-- xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file -->
<!-- -->
+<!-- xx misc commands from clsguide.pdf -->
<!-- xx ending a run with errors -->
<!-- xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX -->
<!-- xx classes and packages - required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts -->
<!-- -->
-<!-- xx merge http://mirror.ctan.org/info/latex-info/ (alt-latex-info) -->
-<!-- xx merge http://mirror.ctan.org/latex2e-reference.tar.gz -->
+<!-- xx merge http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-info (CTAN package latex-info) -->
+<!-- xx merge http://ctan.org/pkg/latex2e-reference -->
<!-- xx merge permuted-index -->
<!-- xx merge latex-manual from savannah -->
<!-- xx merge display style math -->
@@ -28,7 +29,7 @@
<!-- xx See also http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. -->
<bookinfo><legalnotice><para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of October 2015.
+document preparation system, version of November 2016.
</para>
<para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in
the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -43,12 +44,13 @@
text was directly copied).
</para>
<para>Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
-2014, 2015 Karl Berry.
+2014, 2015, 2016 Karl Berry.
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
</para>
+<!-- start of License -->
<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
are preserved on all copies.
@@ -61,11 +63,12 @@
</para>
<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+<!-- end of License -->
</para></legalnotice></bookinfo>
<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of October 2015.
+document preparation system, version of November 2016.
</para>
<para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in
the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -80,12 +83,13 @@
text was directly copied).
</para>
<para>Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
-2014, 2015 Karl Berry.
+2014, 2015, 2016 Karl Berry.
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
</para>
+<!-- start of License -->
<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
are preserved on all copies.
@@ -98,16 +102,19 @@
</para>
<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+<!-- end of License -->
</para>
<!-- Best Effort Symbol -->
+
+
<chapter label="" id="Top">
<title>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
-October 2015) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
+November 2016) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
</para>
@@ -264,7 +271,7 @@
Portable Document Format <literal>.pdf</literal> file with <command>dvipdfmx</command>.
The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with
<command>dvitype</command>. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
-available (<ulink url="http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware">http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware</ulink>).
+available (<ulink url="http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware">http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</ulink>).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>.pdf</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>.pdf file</primary></indexterm>
@@ -436,7 +443,7 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\begin{<replaceable>environment name</replaceable>}
- ..
+ ...
\end{<replaceable>environment name</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>An area of &latex; source, inside of which there is a distinct
@@ -444,10 +451,12 @@
<literal>\begin{verse}</literal> and <literal>\end{verse}</literal>.
</para>
<screen>\begin{verse}
- There once was a man from Nantucket \\
- ..
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
\end{verse}
</screen>
+<para>See <link linkend="Environments">Environments</link> for a list of environments.
+</para>
<para>The <replaceable>environment name</replaceable> at the beginning must exactly match that at
the end. This includes the case where <replaceable>environment name</replaceable> ends in a
star (<literal>*</literal>); both the <literal>\begin</literal> and <literal>\end</literal> texts must
@@ -459,7 +468,7 @@
required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
</para>
<screen>\begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
- .. rows of table ..
+ ... rows of table ...
\end{tabular}
</screen>
@@ -470,6 +479,68 @@
changes the setting of page numbers from roman numerals to arabic.
</para>
+<anchor id="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother"/>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @ in their name ..
+\makeatother
+</screen>
+<para>Used to redefine internal &latex; commands. <literal>\makeatletter</literal> makes
+the at-sign character <literal>@</literal> have the category code of a letter,
+11. <literal>\makeatother</literal> sets the category code of <literal>@</literal> to 12,
+its original value.
+</para>
+<para>As each character is read by &tex; for &latex;, it is assigned a
+character category code, or
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>catcode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>character category code</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>category code, character</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>catcode</firstterm> for shorter. For instance, the backslash <literal>\</literal> is
+assigned the catcode 0, for characters that start a command. These two
+commands alter the catcode assigned to <literal>@</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The alteration is needed because many of &latex;’s commands use
+<literal>@</literal> in their name, to prevent users from accidentally defining a
+command that replaces one of &latex;’s own. Command names consist of a
+category 0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed by letters,
+category 11 characters (except that a command name can also consist
+of a category 0 character followed by a single non-letter symbol).
+So under the default category codes, user-defined commands cannot
+contain an <literal>@</literal>. But <literal>\makeatletter</literal> and <literal>\makeatother</literal>
+allow users to define or redefine commands named with <literal>@</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Use these inside a <filename>.tex</filename> file, in the preamble. Don’t use them
+inside <filename>.sty</filename> or <filename>.cls</filename> files since the <literal>\usepackage</literal>
+and <literal>\documentclass</literal> commands set the at sign to have the character
+code of a letter.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>macros2e</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>macros2e</literal> package For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign</primary></indexterm>
+<para>in their names, see document
+<ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e">http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e</ulink>. These macros are mainly useful
+to package or class authors; examples that may be useful to document
+authors are provided hereinafter.
+</para>
+<para>The example code below, if put in the preamble, redefines the
+section command to center the section title, put it in bold type,
+and adjust the spacing.
+</para>
+<!-- xxx TODO, make \@startsection a separate node, see latex2e-fr.texi -->
+<!-- From http://zoonek.free.fr/LaTeX/LaTeX_samples_section/0.html -->
+<screen>\makeatletter
+\renewcommand\section{%
+ \@startsection{section}% Name
+ {1}% Level: 0=part, 1=chapter, etc.
+ {0pt}% Heading indent
+ {-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% Beforeskip (if neg, no head indent)
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}% Afterskip (if neg, run-in heading)
+ {\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}} % Style of head
+\makeatother
+</screen>
+<!-- xx TODO document \@ifstar, see latex2e-fr.texi -->
+
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter label="3" id="Document-classes">
@@ -553,22 +624,26 @@
size (these show height by width):
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>a4paper</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>210 by 297 mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+</term><listitem><para>210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>a5paper</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
+</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b5paper</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>176 by 250 mm (about 7 by 9.875 inches)
+</term><listitem><para>176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>executivepaper</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>7.25 by 10.5 inches
+</term><listitem><para>7.25 by 10.5 inches
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>legalpaper</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>8.5 by 14 inches
+</term><listitem><para>8.5 by 14 inches
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>letterpaper</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
+</term><listitem><para>8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pdfpagewidth</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pdfpageheight</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>geometry</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>geometry</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>When using one of the engines pdf&latex;, Lua&latex;, or Xe&latex;
(see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>), options other than <literal>letterpaper</literal> set
@@ -618,7 +693,10 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>titlepage</literal>
</term><term><literal>notitlepage</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>title page, separate or run-in</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class.
+<para>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
+for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
+<literal>report</literal> class is <literal>titlepage</literal>, for the other classes it is
+<literal>notitlepage</literal>.
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<para>The following options are not available with the <literal>slides</literal> class.
</para>
@@ -655,15 +733,21 @@
<para>The <literal>slides</literal> class offers the option <literal>clock</literal> for printing
the time at the bottom of each note.
</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="3.2" id="Additional-packages">
+<title>Additional packages</title>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>loading additional packages</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>packages, loading additional</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>additional packages, loading</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usepackage</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Additional packages are loaded like this:
+<para>Load a package <replaceable>pkg</replaceable>, with the package options given in the comma-separated
+list <replaceable>options</replaceable>, as here.
</para>
-<screen>\usepackage[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]{<replaceable>pkg</replaceable>}
+<screen>\usepackage[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]{<replaceable>pkg</replaceable>}.
</screen>
-<para>To specify more than one package, you can separate them with a comma,
+<para>To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
as in <literal>\usepackage{<replaceable>pkg1</replaceable>,<replaceable>pkg2</replaceable>,...}</literal>, or use multiple
<literal>\usepackage</literal> commands.
</para>
@@ -670,11 +754,428 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>global options</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, global</primary></indexterm>
<para>Any options given in the <literal>\documentclass</literal> command that are unknown
-by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
<literal>\usepackage</literal>.
</para>
</sect1>
+<sect1 label="3.3" id="Class-and-package-construction">
+<title>Class and package construction</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>document class commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, document class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new class commands</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a
+standard header for each page, then you could create a new class
+<literal>smcmemo.cls</literal> and begin your documents with
+<literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>What separates a package from a document class is that the commands in a
+package are useful across classes while those in a document class are
+specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for a
+package while a command to make the page headers say <literal>Memo from the
+SMC Math Department</literal> is for a class.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class and package difference</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>difference between class and package</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<para>Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign <literal>@</literal> as a
+character in command names without having to surround that command with
+<literal>\makeatletter</literal> and <literal>\makeatother</literal>. See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and
+\makeatother</link>. This allow you to create commands that users will not
+accidentally redefine. Another technique is to preface class- or
+package-specific commands with some string to prevent your class or
+package from interacting with others. For instance, the class
+<literal>smcmemo</literal> might have commands <literal>\smc at tolist</literal>,
+<literal>\smc at fromlist</literal>, etc.
+</para>
+
+
+
+<sect2 label="3.3.1" id="Class-and-package-structure">
+<title>Class and package structure</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class and package structure</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class file layout</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package file layout</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, document class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package options</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A class file or package file typically has four parts. (1) In the
+identification part, the file says that it is a &latex; package or
+class and describes itself, using the <literal>\NeedsTeXFormat</literal> and
+<literal>\ProvidesClass</literal> or <literal>\ProvidesPackage</literal> commands. (2) The
+preliminary declarations part declares some commands and can also load
+other files. Usually these commands will be those needed for the code
+used in the next part. For example, an <literal>smcmemo</literal> class might be
+called with an option to read in a file with a list of people for the
+to-head, as <literal>\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}</literal>, and therefore
+needs to define a command
+<literal>\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}</literal> used in that
+file. (3) In the handle options part the class or package declares
+and processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+document as <literal>\documentclass[<replaceable>option list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>class
+name</replaceable>}</literal>, to modify the behavior of the class. An example is when you
+declare <literal>\documentclass[11pt]{article}</literal> to set the default
+document font size. Finally, (4) in the more declarations part the
+class or package usually does most of its work: declaring new variables,
+commands and fonts, and loading other files.
+</para>
+<para>Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as <literal>stub.cls</literal>
+where &latex; can find it, for example in the same directory as the
+<literal>.tex</literal> file.
+</para>
+<screen>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{stub}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass{article}
+</screen><indexterm role="cp"><primary>class file example</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the <literal>article</literal> class, and then loads the
+<literal>article</literal> class to provide the basis for this class’s code.
+</para>
+<para>For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+<ulink url="http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf">http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf</ulink> (much
+of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+<ulink url="https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf">https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf</ulink>.
+</para>
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="3.3.2" id="Class-and-package-commands">
+<title>Class and package commands</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class and package commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, class and package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\AtBeginDvi{specials}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtBeginDvi</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Save in a box register things that are written to the <literal>.dvi</literal> file
+at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\AtEndOfClass{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\AtEndOfPackage{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtEndOfClass</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtEndOfPackage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Hook to insert <replaceable>code</replaceable> to be executed when &latex; finishes
+processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks
+multiple times; the <literal>code</literal> will be executed in the order that you
+called it. See also <link linkend="_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassError{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>error text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>help text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageError{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>error text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>help text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassWarning{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageWarning{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassWarningNoLine{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageWarningNoLine{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassInfo{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageInfo{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassInfoNoLine{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageInfoNoLine{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassError</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageError</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassWarning</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageWarning</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassWarningNoLine</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageWarningNoLine</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassInfo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageInfo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassInfoNoLine</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageInfoNoLine</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+</para>
+<para>For <literal>\ClassError</literal> and <literal>\PackageError</literal> the message is
+<replaceable>error text</replaceable>, followed by &tex;’s <literal>?</literal> error prompt. If the
+user then asks for help by typing <literal>h</literal>, they see the <replaceable>help
+text</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+<replaceable>warning text</replaceable> on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+commands write <replaceable>info text</replaceable> only in the transcript file. The
+<literal>NoLine</literal> versions do not show the number of the line generating the
+message, while the other versions do show that number.
+</para>
+<para>To format the messages, including the <replaceable>help text</replaceable>: use
+<literal>\protect</literal> to stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+<literal>\MessageBreak</literal>, and get a space with <literal>\space</literal>. Note that
+&latex; appends a period to the messages.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\CurrentOption</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\CurrentOption</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
+be used within the <replaceable>code</replaceable> argument of either <literal>\DeclareOption</literal>
+or <literal>\DeclareOption*</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareOption{<replaceable>option</replaceable>}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareOption*{<replaceable>option</replaceable>}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareOption</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareOption*</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their
+<literal>\documentclass</literal> command. For example, the <literal>smcmemo</literal> class
+could have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the
+first page with <literal>\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}</literal>. The class file
+must contain <literal>\DeclareOption{logo}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal> (and later,
+<literal>\ProcessOptions</literal>).
+</para>
+<para>If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this
+will produce a warning like <literal>Unused global option(s): [badoption].</literal>
+Change this behaviour with the starred version
+<literal>\DeclareOption*{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>. For example, many classes extend
+an existing class, using a declaration such as
+<literal>\LoadClass{article}</literal>, and for passing extra options to the
+underlying class use code such as this.
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareOption*{%
+\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+}
+</screen>
+<para>Another example is that the class <literal>smcmemo</literal> may allow users to keep
+lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could invoke
+<literal>\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}</literal> and it will read the file
+<literal>math.memo</literal>. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+passes the option to the <literal>article</literal> class.
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
+</screen>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\IfFileExists{<replaceable>file name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>true code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\InputIfFileExists{<replaceable>file name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>true code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\IfFileExists</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\InputIfFileExists</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Execute <replaceable>true code</replaceable> if &latex; can find the file and <replaceable>false
+code</replaceable> otherwise. In the second case it inputs the file immediately
+after executing <replaceable>true code</replaceable>. Thus
+<literal>\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{WARNING:
+img.pdf not found}}</literal> will include the graphic if it is found but
+otherwise just give a warning.
+</para>
+<para>This command looks for the file in all search paths that &latex; uses,
+not only in the current directory. To look only in the current
+directory do something like <literal>\IfFileExists{./filename}{<replaceable>true
+code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>. If you ask for a filename without a
+<literal>.tex</literal> extension then &latex; will first look for the file by
+appending the <literal>.tex</literal>; for more on how &latex; handles file
+extensions see <link linkend="_005cinput">\input</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\LoadClass[<replaceable>options list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\LoadClassWithOptions{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LoadClass</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LoadClassWithOptions</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Load a class, as with <literal>\documentclass[<replaceable>options
+list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release info</replaceable>]</literal>. An example is
+<literal>\LoadClass[twoside]{article}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <replaceable>options list</replaceable>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<replaceable>release date</replaceable> is optional. If present it must have the form
+<replaceable>YYYY/MM/DD</replaceable>. If you request a <replaceable>release date</replaceable> and the date of
+the package installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning
+on the screen and in the log like <literal>You have requested, on input
+line 4, version `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version
+`2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available.</literal>
+</para>
+<para>The command version <literal>\LoadClassWithOptions</literal> uses the list of
+options for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed
+to it via <literal>\PassOptionsToClass</literal>. This is a convenience command
+that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the standard
+<literal>article</literal> class, without having to track which options were passed.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ExecuteOptions{<replaceable>options-list</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ExecuteOptions</primary></indexterm>
+<para>For each option in the <replaceable>options-list</replaceable>, in order, this command
+executes the command <literal>\ds@</literal><replaceable>option</replaceable>. If this command is not
+defined then that option is silently ignored.
+</para>
+<para>It can be used to provide a default option list before
+<literal>\ProcessOptions</literal>. For example, if in a class file you want the
+default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+<literal>\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\NeedsTeXFormat{<replaceable>format</replaceable>}[<replaceable>format date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\NeedsTeXFormat</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Specifies the format that this class should be run under. Often issued
+as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+<literal>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}</literal>. The format that you specify must
+exactly match the one installed on your system that you invoked,
+including that the string is case sensitive. If it does not match then
+execution stops with an error like ‘<literal>This file needs format `xxx'
+but this is `LaTeX2e'.</literal>’
+</para>
+<para>To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+features, include the optional <replaceable>format date</replaceable> on which those features
+were implemented. If present it must be in the form <literal>YYYY/MM/DD</literal>.
+If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+<replaceable>format date</replaceable> then you get a warning like ‘<literal>You have requested
+release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is
+available.</literal>’ (The &latex; kernel has been frozen for many years so you
+probably do not not need to specify the format date.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\OptionNotUsed</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\OptionNotUsed</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+within the <replaceable>code</replaceable> argument of either <literal>\DeclareOption</literal> or
+<literal>\DeclareOption*</literal>.
+</para>
+<!-- I cannot reproduce this behavior as it is documented in clsguide. -->
+<!-- In the absence of a @code{\DeclareOption*} declaration, @LaTeX{} issues -->
+<!-- on the console a warning like @code{LaTeX Warning: Unused global -->
+<!-- option(s): [unusedoption].} with the list of not-used options when it -->
+<!-- reaches @code{\begin@{document@}}. -->
+
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PassOptionsToClass{<replaceable>options list</replaceable>}{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{<replaceable>options list</replaceable>}{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PassOptionsToClass</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PassOptionsToPackage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Adds the options in the comma-separated list <replaceable>option list</replaceable> to the
+options used by any future <literal>\RequirePackage</literal> or <literal>\usepackage</literal>
+command for package <replaceable>package name</replaceable> or the class <replaceable>class name</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number of
+times with no options but if you want options then you may only supply
+them when you first load the package. Loading a package with options
+more than once will get you an error like <literal>Option clash for package
+foo.</literal> (&latex; throws an error even if there is no conflict between the
+options.)
+</para>
+<para>If your code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse that
+to once, for example replacing the two
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}</literal>
+with the single
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}</literal>. But if you
+are loading a package that in turn loads another package then you need
+to queue up the options you desire. For instance, suppose the package
+<literal>foo</literal> loads the package <literal>geometry</literal>. Instead of <literal>
+\RequirePackage{foo}\RequirePackage[draft]{graphics}</literal> you must write
+<literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics}
+\RequirePackage{foo}</literal>. (If <literal>foo.sty</literal> loads an option in conflict
+with what you want then you may have to look into altering its source.)
+</para>
+<para>These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
+writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the <literal>graphicx</literal>
+package with the option <literal>draft</literal> and also wants to use a class
+<literal>foo</literal> that loads the <literal>graphicx</literal> package, but without that
+option. The user could start their &latex; file with
+<literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProcessOptions</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProcessOptions*<replaceable>\@options</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProcessOptions</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProcessOptions*</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
+in the class file as <literal>\ProcessOptions\relax</literal> (because of the
+existence of the starred command).
+</para>
+<para>Options come in two types. ‘Local’ options have been specified for this
+particular package in the <replaceable>options</replaceable> argument of
+<literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{<replaceable>options</replaceable>}</literal>,
+<literal>\usepackage[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]</literal>, or
+<literal>\RequirePackage[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]</literal>. ‘Global’ options are those given
+by the class user in <literal>\documentclass[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]</literal> (If an option
+is specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+</para>
+<para>When <literal>\ProcessOptions</literal> is called for a package <literal>pkg.sty</literal>, the
+following happens. (1) For each option <replaceable>option</replaceable> so far declared
+with <literal>\DeclareOption</literal>, it looks to see if that option is either a
+global or a local option for <literal>pkg</literal>. If so then it executes the
+declared code. This is done in the order in which these options were
+given in <literal>pkg.sty</literal>. (2) For each remaining local option, it
+executes the command <literal>\ds@</literal><replaceable>option</replaceable> if it has been defined
+somewhere (other than by a <literal>\DeclareOption</literal>); otherwise, it
+executes the default option code given in <literal>\DeclareOption*</literal>. If no
+default option code has been declared then it gives an error message.
+This is done in the order in which these options were specified.
+</para>
+<para>When <literal>\ProcessOptions</literal> is called for a class it works in the same
+way except that all options are local, and the default value for
+<literal>\DeclareOption*</literal> is <literal>\OptionNotUsed</literal> rather than an error.
+</para>
+<para>The starred version <literal>\ProcessOptions*</literal><replaceable>\@options</replaceable> executes the
+options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in
+the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
+means that the global options are processed first.
+</para>
+
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesClass{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable><release date></replaceable> <replaceable><brief additional information></replaceable>]</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable><release date></replaceable> <replaceable><brief additional information></replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesClass</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesPackage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and the log file.
+</para>
+<para>When a user writes <literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal> then &latex; loads
+the file <literal>smcmemo.cls</literal>. Similarly, a user writing
+<literal>\usepackage{test}</literal> prompts &latex; to load the file
+<literal>test.sty</literal>. If the name of the file does not match the declared
+class or package name then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+<literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal>, and the file <literal>smcmemo.cls</literal> has
+the statement <literal>\ProvidesClass{xxx}</literal> then you get a warning like
+<literal>You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
+class provides 'xxx'.</literal> This warning does not prevent &latex; from
+processing the rest of the class file normally.
+</para>
+<para>If you include the optional part then you must include the date, before
+the first space, and it must have the form <literal>YYYY/MM/DD</literal>. The rest
+of the optional part is free-form, although it traditionally identifies
+the class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the
+log file. Thus, if your file <literal>smcmem.cls</literal> contains the line
+<literal>\ProvidesClass{smcmem}[2008/06/01 SMC memo class]</literal> and your
+document’s first line is <literal>\documentclass{smcmem}</literal> then you will
+see <literal>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 SMC memo class</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The date in the optional portion allows class and package users to ask
+to be warned if the version of the class or package installed on their
+system is earlier than <replaceable>release date</replaceable>, by using the optional calls
+such as <literal>\documentclass{smcmem}[2018/10/12]</literal> or
+<literal>\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]</literal>. (Note that package users only
+rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesFile{<replaceable>file name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesFile</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that
+file and you get in the log a string like <literal>File: test.config
+2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\RequirePackage[<replaceable>options list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackageWithOptions</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Load a package, like the author command <literal>\usepackage</literal>.
+See <link linkend="Additional-packages">Additional packages</link>. An example is
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}</literal>. Note that the
+&latex; development team strongly recommends use of these commands over
+Plain &tex;’s <literal>\input</literal>; see the Class Guide.
+</para>
+<para>The <replaceable>options list</replaceable>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<replaceable>release date</replaceable>, if present, must have the form <replaceable>YYYY/MM/DD</replaceable>. If
+the release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+than <replaceable>release date</replaceable> then you get a warning like <literal>You have
+requested, on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but
+only version `2000/01/01' is available</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\RequirePackageWithOptions</literal> version uses the list of options
+for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it
+via <literal>\PassOptionsToClass</literal>. This is a convenience command to allow
+easily building classes on existing ones without having to track which
+options were passed.
+</para>
+<para>The difference between <literal>\usepackage</literal> and <literal>\RequirePackage</literal> is
+small. The <literal>\usepackage</literal> command is intended for the document file
+while <literal>\RequirePackage</literal> is intended for package and class files.
+Thus, using <literal>\usepackage</literal> before the <literal>\documentclass</literal> command
+causes &latex; to give error like <literal>\usepackage before
+\documentclass</literal>, but you can use <literal>\RequirePackage</literal> there.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter label="4" id="Fonts">
<title>Fonts</title>
@@ -880,6 +1381,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>numerals, old-style</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>old-style numerals</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lining numerals</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>textcomp</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>textcomp</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>Finally, the command <literal>\oldstylenums{<replaceable>numerals</replaceable>}</literal> will typeset
so-called “old-style” numerals, which have differing heights and
@@ -1081,6 +1583,7 @@
make line skip changes happen for the entire document by doing
<literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}</literal> in the preamble.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>setspace</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>setspace</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double spacing</primary></indexterm>
<para>However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
@@ -1135,10 +1638,9 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\onecolumn</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>one-column output</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\onecolumn</literal> declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output. If the document is given the class option
-<literal>onecolumn</literal> then this is the default behavior (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document
-class options</link>).
+<para>Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
+given the class option <literal>onecolumn</literal> then this is the default
+behavior (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
</para>
<para>This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
@@ -1151,14 +1653,14 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multicolumn text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>two-column output</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopses:
</para>
-<screen>\twocolumn[<replaceable>prelim one column text</replaceable>]
+<screen>\twocolumn
+\twocolumn[<replaceable>prelim one column text</replaceable>]
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>\twocolumn</literal> declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the document is given the class option
-<literal>twocolumn</literal> then this is the default (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class
-options</link>).
+<para>Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
+the class option <literal>twocolumn</literal> then this is the default
+(see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
</para>
<para>If the optional <replaceable>prelim one column text</replaceable> argument
is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
@@ -1199,7 +1701,7 @@
occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that
the height of a <literal>table*</literal> or <literal>figure*</literal> environment must not
exceed <literal>0.7\textheight</literal> . If the height of your starred float
-environment exceeeds this then you can take one of the following actions
+environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions
to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document:
</para>
<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Use the <literal>[tp]</literal> location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
@@ -1238,24 +1740,24 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<!-- From egreg at http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/142232/339 -->
-<para>This example shows the use of the optional argument of <literal>\twocolumn</literal>
-to create a title that spans the two-column article:
+<para>This example uses <literal>\twocolumn</literal>’s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
</para>
<screen>\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
\newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\begin{document}
\twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
- \centering
- \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
- \large Author One\authormark{1},
- Author Two\authormark{2},
- Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
- \normalsize
- \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
- \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
- School one &School two
- \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
-}]
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
Two column text here.
</screen>
@@ -1266,22 +1768,23 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\flushbottom</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\flushbottom</literal> command can go at any point in the document
-body. It makes all later pages the same height, stretching the vertical
-space where necessary to fill out the page.
+<para>Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
</para>
<para>If &tex; cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
then you get a message like ‘<literal>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
-occurred while \output is active</literal>’. You can change to
-<literal>\raggedbottom</literal> (see below). Alternatively, you can try to adjust
-the <literal>textheight</literal> to be compatible, or you can add some vertical
-stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs, as in
-<literal>\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}</literal>. In a final editing
-stage you can adjust the height of individual pages
+occurred while \output is active</literal>’. If you get that, one option is to
+change to <literal>\raggedbottom</literal> (see <link linkend="_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</link>). Alternatively,
+you can adjust the <literal>textheight</literal> to make compatible pages, or you
+can add some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs,
+as in <literal>\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}</literal>. Your last option
+is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages
(see <link linkend="_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</link>).
</para>
-<para>This is the default only if you select the <literal>twoside</literal> document class
-option (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
+<para>The <literal>\flushbottom</literal> state is the default only if you select the
+<literal>twoside</literal> document class option (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -1291,11 +1794,10 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raggedbottom</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stretch, omitting vertical</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\raggedbottom</literal> command can go at any point in the document
-body. It makes all later pages the natural height of the material on
-that page; no rubber lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
-document the facing pages may be different heights. See also
-<literal>\flushbottom</literal> above.
+<para>Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See <link linkend="_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</link>.
</para>
<para>This is the default unless you select the <literal>twoside</literal> document class
option (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
@@ -1487,14 +1989,14 @@
appears in the output after it.
</para>
<para>The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
-limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
-bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued up that the limits prevent
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and
+the bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent
them all from fitting on a page then &latex; places what it can and
-defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may be typset far
-from their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big can
-migrate to the end of the document. But then because all floats in a
-class must appear in sequential order, every subsequent float in that
-class also appears at the end.
+defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up
+being typeset far from their place in the source. In particular, a
+float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which
+event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order,
+every following float in that class also appears at the end.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>placement of floats</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>specifier, float placement</primary></indexterm>
@@ -1520,6 +2022,7 @@
automatically added.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>here, putting floats</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>float</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>float</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>To absolutely force a float to appear “here”, you can
<literal>\usepackage{float}</literal> and use the <literal>H</literal> specifier which it
@@ -1555,11 +2058,11 @@
is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.
</para>
<para>&latex; can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
-(although on the same output page) if there is a <literal>t</literal> specifier in the
-<replaceable>placement</replaceable> paramater. If this is not desired, and deleting the
-<literal>t</literal> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at
-the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using the
-<filename>flafter</filename> package or using the command
+(although on the same output page) if there is a <literal>t</literal> specifier in
+the <replaceable>placement</replaceable> parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
+the <literal>t</literal> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
+at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
+the <filename>flafter</filename> package or using the command
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\suppressfloats</primary></indexterm>
<literal>\suppressfloats[t]</literal>, which causes floats for the top position on
this page to moved to the next page.
@@ -1633,10 +2136,11 @@
<para>The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats
<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats</ulink> contains
suggestions for relaxing &latex;’s default parameters to reduce the
-problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explaination of the
-float placement algorithm is Frank Mittelbach’s article “How to
-infuence the position of float environments like figure and table in
-&latex;?” <ulink url="http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf">http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf</ulink>.
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach’s article “How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+&latex;?”
+(<ulink url="http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf">http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf</ulink>).
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -1708,9 +2212,39 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross references</primary></indexterm>
-<para>One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
-the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.”
+<para>One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to
+refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure~3 for more details.”
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>label</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if that
+number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to update
+this reference by hand. Instead, &latex; has you write a <firstterm>label</firstterm>
+like <literal>\label{eq:GreensThm}</literal> and refer to it with <literal>See
+equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; writes the information from the labels to a file with the same
+name as the file containing the <literal>\label{...}</literal> but with an
+<filename>.aux</filename> extension. (The information has the format
+<literal>\newlabel{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}{{<replaceable>currentlabel</replaceable>}{<replaceable>pagenumber</replaceable>}}</literal>
+where <replaceable>currentlabel</replaceable> is the current value of the macro
+<literal>\@currentlabel</literal> that is usually updated whenever you call
+<literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>.)
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>forward reference</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>reference, forward</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your
+document has a <firstterm>forward reference</firstterm>, a <literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> that
+appears earlier than the associated <literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal>; see the
+example in the <literal>\pageref{...}</literal> description. &latex; gets the
+information for references from the <filename>.aux</filename> file. If this is the
+first time you are compiling the document then you will get a message
+<literal>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get
+cross references right.</literal> and in the output the reference will appear as
+two question marks ‘<literal>??</literal>’, in boldface. Or, if you change some
+things so the references change then you get the same warning and the
+output contains the old reference information. The solution in either
+case is just to compile the document a second time.
+</para>
<sect1 label="7.1" id="_005clabel">
@@ -1722,35 +2256,22 @@
</para>
<screen>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>A <literal>\label</literal> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to
-<replaceable>key</replaceable> the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
-inside a numbered environment assigns that number to <replaceable>key</replaceable>. The
-assigned number can be retrieved with the <literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal>
-command (see <link linkend="_005cref">\ref</link>).
+<para>Assign a reference number to <replaceable>key</replaceable>. In ordinary text
+<literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> assigns to <replaceable>key</replaceable> the number of the
+current sectional unit. Inside an environment with numbering, such as a
+<literal>table</literal> or <literal>theorem</literal> environment, <literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal>
+assigns to <replaceable>key</replaceable> the number of that environment. Retrieve the
+assigned number with the <literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005cref">\ref</link>).
</para>
-<para>Thus, in the example below the key <literal>sec:test</literal> holds the number of
-the current section and the key <literal>fig:test</literal> that of the figure.
-(Incidentally, labels must appear after captions in figures and
-tables.)
-</para>
-<screen>\section{section name}
-\label{sec:test}
-This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
-\begin{figure}
- ...
- \caption{caption text}
- \label{fig:test}
-\end{figure}
-See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
-</screen>
<para>A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
distinguished, as usual.
</para>
-<para>Although the name can be more or less anything, a common convention is
-to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a colon
-or period. This helps to avoid accidentally creating two labels with
-the same name. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+<para>A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon or period. This helps to avoid accidentally
+creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more
+readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>ch</literal>
</term><listitem><para>for chapters
@@ -1763,9 +2284,24 @@
</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>eq</literal>
</term><listitem><para>for equations
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>Thus, a label for a figure would look like <literal>fig:test</literal> or
-<literal>fig.test</literal>.
+<para>Thus, <literal>\label{fig:Euler}</literal> is a label for a figure with a portrait
+of the great man.
</para>
+<para>In this example below the key <literal>sec:test</literal> will get the number of the
+current section and the key <literal>fig:test</literal> will get the number of the
+figure. (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and
+tables.)
+</para>
+<screen>\section{section name}
+\label{sec:test}
+This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+\begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+\end{figure}
+See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
+</screen>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="7.2" id="_005cpageref">
@@ -1779,10 +2315,20 @@
</para>
<screen>\pageref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>\pageref</literal>{<replaceable>key</replaceable>} command produces the page number of
-the place in the text where the corresponding
+<para>Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
<literal>\label</literal>{<replaceable>key</replaceable>} command appears.
</para>
+<para>In this example the <literal>\label{eq:main}</literal> is used both for the
+formula number and for the page number. (Note that the two references
+are forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice
+to resolve those.)
+</para>
+<screen>The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
+ ...
+\begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
+ \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="7.3" id="_005cref">
@@ -1799,11 +2345,22 @@
</para>
<screen>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>\ref</literal> command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+<para>Produces the number of the sectional unit,
equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding
<literal>\label</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005clabel">\label</link>). It does not produce any text,
such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself.
</para>
+<para>In this example, the <literal>\ref{popular}</literal> produces ‘<literal>2</literal>’. Note
+that it is a forward reference since it comes before
+<literal>\label{popular}</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Plain \TeX
+\item \label{popular} \LaTeX
+\item Con\TeX t
+\end{enumerate}
+</screen>
</sect1>
</chapter>
@@ -1814,19 +2371,30 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\begin</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\end</primary></indexterm>
-<para>&latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text.
-Each environment begins and ends in the same manner:
+<para>&latex; provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.
+An environment begins with <literal>\begin</literal> and ends with <literal>\end</literal>,
+like this:
</para>
-<screen>\begin{<replaceable>envname</replaceable>}
-...
-\end{<replaceable>envname</replaceable>}
+<screen>\begin{<replaceable>environment-name</replaceable>}
+ ...
+\end{<replaceable>environment-name</replaceable>}
</screen>
+<para>The <replaceable>environment-name</replaceable> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. For instance, the input
+<literal>\begin{table*}...\end{table}</literal> will cause an error like:
+‘<literal>! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
+\end{table}.</literal>’
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>group, and environments</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Environments are executed within a group.
+</para>
<sect1 label="8.1" id="abstract">
<title><literal>abstract</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>abstract environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>abstract</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>abstract</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>abstracts</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -1835,28 +2403,65 @@
...
\end{abstract}
</screen>
-<para>Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs.
+<para>Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This environment
+is only defined in the <literal>article</literal> and <literal>report</literal> document classes
+(see <link linkend="Document-classes">Document classes</link>).
</para>
+<para>Using the example below in the <literal>article</literal> class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option <literal>titlepage</literal> causes the abstract
+to be on a separate page (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>); this is the
+default only in the <literal>report</literal> class.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{abstract}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+\end{abstract}
+</screen>
+<para>The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for
+a more flexible solution, use the package <filename>abstract</filename>).
+</para>
+<!-- Adopted from http://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-onecolabs.html -->
+<screen>\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ ...
+\begin{document}
+\title{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach}
+\author{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks{Railroad tracking grant.}}
+\twocolumn[
+ \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin{abstract}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end{abstract}
+ \end{@twocolumnfalse}
+ ]
+{ % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \footnotetext[1]{Thanks for all the fish.}
+}
+</screen>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="8.2" id="array">
<title><literal>array</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>array environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>array</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>array</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>arrays, math</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\begin{array}{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
-<replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
-...
+ <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
+ ...
\end{array}
</screen>
<para>or
</para>
<screen>\begin{array}[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
-<replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
-...
+ <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
+ ...
\end{array}
</screen>
<para>Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in math
@@ -1863,7 +2468,7 @@
mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
such as <literal>equation</literal> (see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>). Column entries are
separated by an ampersand (<literal>&</literal>). Rows are terminated with
-double-backslashes (<literal>\\</literal>) (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
+double-backslashes (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
</para>
<para>The required argument <replaceable>cols</replaceable> describes the number of columns, their
alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. See
@@ -1872,24 +2477,24 @@
<replaceable>pos</replaceable> argument.
</para>
<para>There are two ways that <literal>array</literal> diverges from <literal>tabular</literal>. The
-first is that <literal>array</literal> entries are typeset in mathematics mode, in
+first is that <literal>array</literal> entries are typeset in math mode, in
textstyle (except if the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> definition specifies the column with
-<literal>@p{..}</literal>, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode).
+<literal>p{...}</literal>, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode).
The second is that, instead of <literal>tabular</literal>’s parameter
-<literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, &latex;’s intercolumn space in an array is governed
+<literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, &latex;’s intercolumn space in an <literal>array</literal> is governed
by
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arraycolsep</primary></indexterm>
-<literal>\arraycolsep</literal> which gives half the width between columns. The
+<literal>\arraycolsep</literal>, which gives half the width between columns. The
default for this is ‘<literal>5pt</literal>’.
</para>
<para>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <filename>amsmath</filename>
package. It comes with environments <literal>pmatrix</literal> for an array
-surrounded by parentheses <literal>(..)</literal>, <literal>bmatrix</literal> for an array
-surrounded by square brackets <literal>[..]</literal>, <literal>Bmatrix</literal> for an
-array surrounded by curly braces <literal>{..}</literal>, <literal>vmatrix</literal> for
-an array surrounded by vertical bars <literal>|..|</literal>, and
+surrounded by parentheses <literal>(...)</literal>, <literal>bmatrix</literal> for an array
+surrounded by square brackets <literal>[...]</literal>, <literal>Bmatrix</literal> for an
+array surrounded by curly braces <literal>{...}</literal>, <literal>vmatrix</literal> for
+an array surrounded by vertical bars <literal>|...|</literal>, and
<literal>Vmatrix</literal> for an array surrounded by double vertical
-bars <literal>||..||</literal>, along with a number of other array constructs.
+bars <literal>||...||</literal>, along with a number of other array constructs.
</para>
<para>Here is an example of an array:
</para>
@@ -1900,37 +2505,59 @@
\end{array}
\end{equation}
</screen>
+<para>The next example works if <literal>\usepackage{amsmath}</literal> is in the
+preamble:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+ \begin{vmatrix}{cc}
+ a &b \\
+ c &d
+ \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="8.3" id="center">
<title><literal>center</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>center environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>center</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>center</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centering text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\begin{center}
- .. text ..
+ ... text ...
\end{center}
</screen>
-<para>Environment to create a sequence of lines that are centered within the
-left and right margins on the current page. If the text in the
-environment body is too long to fit on a line, &latex; will insert line
-breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
-interword space. To force a line break at a particular spot use
-double-backslash <literal>\\</literal> (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
+<para>Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Use
+double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>center</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, &latex;
+will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or
+shrinking any interword space.
</para>
<para>This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
<link linkend="_005ccentering">\centering</link> to avoid such space, for example inside a <literal>figure</literal>
environment.
</para>
-<para>In this example, depending on the line width, &latex; may choose a break
-for the part before the double backslash, will center the line or two,
-then will break at the double backslash, and will center the ending.
+<para>This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
</para>
<screen>\begin{center}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>In this example, depending on the page’s line width, &latex; may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then &latex; will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
@@ -1946,7 +2573,7 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\centering</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centering text, declaration for</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
+<para>A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
most often used inside an environment such as <literal>figure</literal>, or in a
<literal>parbox</literal>.
</para>
@@ -1982,7 +2609,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.4" id="description">
<title><literal>description</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>description environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>description</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>description</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>labelled lists, creating</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>description lists, creating</primary></indexterm>
@@ -1994,7 +2622,6 @@
...
\end{description}
</screen>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
<para>Environment to make a labelled list of items. Each item’s <replaceable>label</replaceable>
is typeset in bold, flush-left. Each item’s text may contain multiple
paragraphs. Although the labels on the items are optional there is no
@@ -2001,19 +2628,20 @@
sensible default, so all items should have labels.
</para>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The list consists of at least one item; see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link> (having no
-items causes the &latex; error ‘<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a
-missing \item</literal>’). Each item is produced with an <literal>\item</literal> command.
+<para>The list consists of at least one item, created with the <literal>\item</literal>
+command (see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>). Having no items causes the &latex; error
+‘<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</literal>’).
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bold typewriter, avoiding</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>typewriter labels in lists</primary></indexterm>
<para>Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font
-change given in argument style (see <link linkend="Font-styles">Font styles</link>) then it will come
-out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
-<literal>\item[\texttt{label text}]</literal> then it will appear in bold
-typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bolded
-typewriter is to use declaritive style <literal>\item[{\tt label text}]</literal>.
-Similarly, get normal text use <literal>\item[{\rm label text}]</literal>.
+change given in argument style (see <link linkend="Font-styles">Font styles</link>) then it will
+come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter
+with <literal>\item[\texttt{label text}]</literal> then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bold
+typewriter is to use declarative style: <literal>\item[{\tt label
+text}]</literal>. Similarly, to get the standard roman font, use
+<literal>\item[{\rm label text}]</literal>.
</para>
<para>For other major &latex; labelled list environments, see <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>
and <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>. For information about customizing list layout, see
@@ -2032,12 +2660,13 @@
<title><literal>displaymath</literal></title>
<!-- http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/40492/what-are-the-differences-between-align-equation-and-displaymath -->
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>displaymath environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>displaymath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>displaymath</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\begin{displaymath}
- .. math text ..
+ ... math text ...
\end{displaymath}
</screen>
<para>Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style
@@ -2080,7 +2709,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.6" id="document">
<title><literal>document</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>document environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>document</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>document</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>document</literal> environment encloses the entire body of a document.
It is required in every &latex; document. See <link linkend="Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</link>.
@@ -2130,7 +2760,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.7" id="enumerate">
<title><literal>enumerate</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>enumerate environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>enumerate</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>enumerate</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lists of items, numbered</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -2208,7 +2839,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.8" id="eqnarray">
<title><literal>eqnarray</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>eqnarray environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>eqnarray</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>eqnarray</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>equations, aligning</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>aligning equations</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2277,7 +2909,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.9" id="equation">
<title><literal>equation</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>equation environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>equation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>equation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>equations, environment for</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>formulas, environment for</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2301,7 +2934,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.10" id="figure">
<title><literal>figure</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>figure</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>figure</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>figure</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>inserting figures</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>figures, inserting</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2338,7 +2972,7 @@
<para>The figure body is typeset in a <literal>parbox</literal> of width <literal>\textwidth</literal>
and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
</para>
-<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
+<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
references</link>).
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
The optional <literal>\caption</literal> command specifies caption text for the
@@ -2362,7 +2996,10 @@
<sect1 label="8.11" id="filecontents">
<title><literal>filecontents</literal>: Write an external file</title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>filecontents</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>filecontents</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>filecontents</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>filecontents*</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>filecontents*</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>external files, writing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>writing external files</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2419,7 +3056,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.12" id="flushleft">
<title><literal>flushleft</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>flushleft environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>flushleft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>flushleft</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-justifying text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ragged right text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2460,7 +3098,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.13" id="flushright">
<title><literal>flushright</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>flushright environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>flushright</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>flushright</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ragged left text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>right-justifying text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2501,7 +3140,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.14" id="itemize">
<title><literal>itemize</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>itemize environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>itemize</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>itemize</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lists of items</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>unordered lists</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2516,7 +3156,7 @@
\end{itemize}
</screen>
<para>The <literal>itemize</literal> environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted”
-list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four
+list. Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four
levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
environments, such as <literal>enumerate</literal> (see <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>).
</para>
@@ -2628,7 +3268,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.15" id="letter">
<title><literal>letter</literal> environment: writing letters</title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>letter environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>letter</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>letter</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<para>This environment is used for creating letters. See <link linkend="Letters">Letters</link>.
</para>
@@ -2637,7 +3278,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.16" id="list">
<title><literal>list</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>list</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>list</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>list</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lists of items, generic</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>list</literal> environment is a generic environment which is used for
@@ -2664,7 +3306,8 @@
</para>
-<anchor id="_005citem"/>
+<sect2 label="8.16.1" id="_005citem">
+<title><literal>\item</literal>: An entry in a list.</title>
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
@@ -2699,11 +3342,13 @@
</para>
+</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="8.17" id="math">
<title><literal>math</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>math environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>math</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>math</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>in-line formulas</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -2721,7 +3366,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.18" id="minipage">
<title><literal>minipage</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>minipage environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>minipage</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>minipage</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>minipage, creating a</primary></indexterm>
<screen>\begin{minipage}[<replaceable>position</replaceable>][<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}
@@ -2760,7 +3406,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.19" id="picture">
<title><literal>picture</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>picture</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>picture</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>picture</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>creating pictures</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>pictures, creating</primary></indexterm>
@@ -2783,6 +3430,14 @@
<literal>\setlength</literal> command, outside of a <literal>picture</literal> environment.
The default value is <literal>1pt</literal>.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>picture</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>picture</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>picture</literal> package redefine the <literal>picture</literal> environment so
+that everywhere a number is used in a <replaceable>picture commands</replaceable> to specify
+a coordinate, one can use alternatively a length. Be aware however that
+this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing <literal>\unitlength</literal>.
+</para>
+
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>position, in picture</primary></indexterm>
<para>A <firstterm>position</firstterm> is a pair of coordinates, such as <literal>(2.4,-5)</literal>, specifying
the point with x-coordinate <literal>2.4</literal> and y-coordinate <literal>-5</literal>.
@@ -3106,11 +3761,13 @@
<sect1 label="8.20" id="quotation-and-quote">
<title><literal>quotation</literal> and <literal>quote</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>quotation</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quotation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quotation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentations in quoted text</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>quote</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quote</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3145,7 +3802,7 @@
</para>
<screen>\begin{quotation}
\it Four score and seven years ago
- .. shall not perish from the earth.
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
\hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
\end{quotation}
</screen>
@@ -3154,7 +3811,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.21" id="tabbing">
<title><literal>tabbing</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>tabbing environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>tabbing</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>tabbing</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tab stops, using</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lining text up using tab stops</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>alignment via tabbing</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3259,7 +3917,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.22" id="table">
<title><literal>table</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>table</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>table</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>table</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tables, creating</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>creating tables</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3282,7 +3941,7 @@
<para>The table body is typeset in a <literal>parbox</literal> of width <literal>\textwidth</literal>
and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
</para>
-<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
+<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
references</link>).
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
The optional <literal>\caption</literal> command specifies caption text for the
@@ -3309,7 +3968,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.23" id="tabular">
<title><literal>tabular</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>tabular environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>tabular</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>tabular</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lines in tables</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lining text up in tables</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3356,7 +4016,7 @@
should be rubber, as with <literal>@{\extracolsep{\fill}}</literal>, to allow
the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
are likely to get the <literal>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
-..</literal> warning.
+...</literal> warning.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>pos</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>Optional. Specifies the table’s vertical position. The default is to
@@ -3391,14 +4051,14 @@
<replaceable>text or space</replaceable> material is typeset in LR mode. This text is
fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
-<para>This specifier is optional: unless you put in your own @-expression
-then &latex;’s book, article, and report classes will put on either
-side of each column a space of length <literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, which by
-default is ‘<literal>6pt</literal>’. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+<para>This specifier is optional: with no @-expression, &latex;’s
+<literal>book</literal>, <literal>article</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> classes will put on
+either side of each column a space of length <literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, which
+by default is ‘<literal>6pt</literal>’. That is, by default adjacent columns are
separated by 12pt (so <literal>\tabcolsep</literal> is misleadingly-named since it
-is not the separation between tabular columns). Also by default a space
-of 6pt comes before the first column as well as after the final column,
-unless you put a <literal>@{..}</literal> or <literal>|</literal> there.
+is not the separation between tabular columns). By implication, a
+space of 6pt also comes before the first column and after the final
+column, unless you put a <literal>@{...}</literal> or <literal>|</literal> there.
</para>
<para>If you override the default and use an @-expression then you must
insert any desired space yourself, as in <literal>@{\hspace{1em}}</literal>.
@@ -3409,7 +4069,7 @@
</para>
<screen>\begin{flushleft}
\begin{tabular}{@{}l}
- ..
+ ...
\end{tabular}
\end{flushleft}
</screen>
@@ -3460,7 +4120,7 @@
positive integer and <replaceable>cols</replaceable> is a list of specifiers. Thus
<literal>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</literal> is equivalent to
<literal>\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}</literal>. Note that <replaceable>cols</replaceable> may
-contain another <literal>*-expression</literal>.
+contain another <literal>*</literal>-expression.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<para>Parameters that control formatting:
@@ -3514,7 +4174,7 @@
<screen>\begin{tabular}{lccl}
\textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one
978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\ % row two
- ..
+ ...
\end{tabular}
</screen>
<para>What counts as a column is: the column format specifier for the
@@ -3527,7 +4187,7 @@
<para>The <replaceable>cols</replaceable> argument overrides the <literal>array</literal> or <literal>tabular</literal>
environment’s intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn
entry. To affect that area, this argument can contain vertical bars
-<literal>|</literal> indicating the placement of vertical rules, and <literal>@{..}</literal>
+<literal>|</literal> indicating the placement of vertical rules, and <literal>@{...}</literal>
expressions. Thus if <replaceable>cols</replaceable> is ‘<literal>|c|</literal>’ then this multicolumn
entry will be centered and a vertical rule will come in the intercolumn
area before it and after it. This table details the exact behavior.
@@ -3538,7 +4198,8 @@
&\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y} % entry three
&z % entry four
\end{tabular}
-</screen><para>Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
+</screen>
+<para>Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
the <literal>\multicolumn</literal> has the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> specifier ‘<literal>r</literal>’ with no
initial vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a
vertical rule; although the first <replaceable>cols</replaceable> does not have an ending
@@ -3584,13 +4245,13 @@
<title><literal>\vline</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vline</primary></indexterm>
-
<para>Draw a vertical line in a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment
-extending the full height and depth of an entry’s row. Can also be used
-in an @-expression, although its synonym vertical bar <literal>|</literal> is
-more common. This command is rarely used; typically a table’s vertical
-lines are specified in <literal>tabular</literal>’s <replaceable>cols</replaceable> argument and
-overriden as needed with <literal>\multicolumn</literal>.
+extending the full height and depth of an entry’s row. Can also be
+used in an @-expression, although its synonym vertical
+bar <literal>|</literal> is more common. This command is rarely used in the
+body of a table; typically a table’s vertical lines are specified in
+<literal>tabular</literal>’s <replaceable>cols</replaceable> argument and overridden as needed with
+<literal>\multicolumn</literal>.
</para>
<para>This example illustrates some pitfalls. In the first line’s second
entry the <literal>\hfill</literal> moves the <literal>\vline</literal> to the left edge of the
@@ -3663,7 +4324,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.24" id="thebibliography">
<title><literal>thebibliography</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>thebibliography environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>thebibliography</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>thebibliography</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bibliography, creating (manually)</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -3700,18 +4362,19 @@
</para>
<screen>\bibitem[<replaceable>label</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cite_key</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>\bibitem</literal> command generates an entry labelled by
-<replaceable>label</replaceable>. If the <replaceable>label</replaceable> argument is missing, a number is
-automatically generated using the <literal>enumi</literal> counter. The
-<replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> is any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation
-symbols not containing a comma.
+<para>The <literal>\bibitem</literal> command generates an entry labelled by <replaceable>label</replaceable>.
+If the <replaceable>label</replaceable> argument is missing, a number is automatically
+generated using the <literal>enumi</literal> counter. The <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> is a
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>citation key</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>citation key</firstterm> consisting in any sequence of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
</para>
<para>This command writes an entry to the <filename>.aux</filename> file containing the
-item’s <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> and label. When the <filename>.aux</filename> file is read by
-the <literal>\begin{document}</literal> command, the item’s <literal>label</literal> is
+item’s <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> and <replaceable>label</replaceable>. When the <filename>.aux</filename> file is
+read by the <literal>\begin{document}</literal> command, the item’s <replaceable>label</replaceable> is
associated with <literal>cite_key</literal>, causing references to <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable>
-with a <literal>\cite</literal> command (see next section) to produce the
-associated label.
+with a <literal>\cite</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005ccite">\cite</link>) to produce the associated
+<replaceable>label</replaceable>.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -3724,14 +4387,14 @@
</para>
<screen>\cite[<replaceable>subcite</replaceable>]{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>The <replaceable>keys</replaceable> argument is a list of one or more citation keys,
-separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to
-the references associated with <replaceable>keys</replaceable> by entries in the
-<filename>.aux</filename> file.
+<para>The <replaceable>keys</replaceable> argument is a list of one or more citation keys
+(see <link linkend="_005cbibitem">\bibitem</link>), separated by commas. This command generates an
+in-text citation to the references associated with <replaceable>keys</replaceable> by entries
+in the <filename>.aux</filename> file.
</para>
<para>The text of the optional <replaceable>subcite</replaceable> argument appears after the
citation. For example, <literal>\cite[p.~314]{knuth}</literal> might produce
-‘[Knuth, p. 314]’.
+‘<literal>[Knuth, p. 314]</literal>’.
</para>
</sect2>
@@ -3740,8 +4403,10 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocite</primary></indexterm>
-<para><literal>\nocite{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}</literal>
+<para>Synopsis:
</para>
+<screen><literal>\nocite{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}</literal>
+</screen>
<para>The <literal>\nocite</literal> command produces no text, but writes <replaceable>keys</replaceable>,
which is a list of one or more citation keys, to the <filename>.aux</filename> file.
</para>
@@ -3769,7 +4434,7 @@
its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will
be produced: <replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable> refers to a file
<replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable><filename>.bst</filename>, which defines how your citations will look.
-The standard <replaceable>style</replaceable> names distributed with Bib&tex; are:
+The standard <replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable> names distributed with Bib&tex; are:
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>alpha</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of
@@ -3787,7 +4452,8 @@
</para>
<para>The <literal>\bibliography</literal> command is what actually produces the
bibliography. The argument to <literal>\bibliography</literal> refers to files
-named <filename><replaceable>bibfile</replaceable>.bib</filename>, which should contain your database in
+named <filename><replaceable>bibfile1</replaceable>.bib</filename>, <filename><replaceable>bibfile2</replaceable>.bib</filename>, …,
+which should contain your database in
Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via <literal>\cite</literal> and
<literal>\nocite</literal> will be listed in the bibliography.
</para>
@@ -3797,7 +4463,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.25" id="theorem">
<title><literal>theorem</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>theorem environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>theorem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>theorem</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>theorems, typesetting</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -3816,7 +4483,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.26" id="titlepage">
<title><literal>titlepage</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>titlepage environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>titlepage</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>titlepage</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>making a title page</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>title pages, creating</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3823,24 +4491,46 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\begin{titlepage}
-<replaceable>text</replaceable>
+ ... text and spacing ...
\end{titlepage}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>titlepage</literal> environment creates a title page, i.e., a page
-with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following
-page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to
-you. The <literal>\today</literal> command may be useful on title pages
-(see <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
+<para>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading. The
+following page will be numbered page one.
</para>
-<para>You can use the <literal>\maketitle</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>) to
-produce a standard title page without a <literal>titlepage</literal> environment.
+<para>To instead produce a standard title page without a <literal>titlepage</literal>
+environment you can use <literal>\maketitle</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>).
</para>
+<para>Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical spacing,
+is left to the author.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{titlepage}
+\vspace*{\stretch{1}}
+\begin{center}
+ {\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title} \\[6.5ex]
+ {\large\bfseries Author name} \\
+ \vspace{4ex}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit{University name} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc{\Large Doctor of Philosophy} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc{\large Mathematics} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+\end{center}
+\vspace{\stretch{2}}
+\end{titlepage}
+</screen>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="8.27" id="verbatim">
<title><literal>verbatim</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>verbatim environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>verbatim</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>verbatim</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>verbatim text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>simulating typed text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>typed text, simulating</primary></indexterm>
@@ -3889,7 +4579,8 @@
<sect1 label="8.28" id="verse">
<title><literal>verse</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>verse environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>verse</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>verse</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>poetry, an environment for</primary></indexterm>
<para>Synopsis:
@@ -3953,7 +4644,7 @@
command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in
a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment.
</para>
-<para>Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a <literal>p{..}</literal> column
+<para>Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a <literal>p{...}</literal> column
in a <literal>tabular</literal> environment) the <literal>\newline</literal> command is a synonym for
<literal>\\</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link>).
</para>
@@ -3992,7 +4683,7 @@
breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
</para>
<para>Inside a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment, in a column with a
-specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically <literal>p{..}</literal>,
+specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically <literal>p{...}</literal>,
<literal>\newline</literal> will insert a line break inside of the column, that is,
it does not break the entire row. To break the entire row use <literal>\\</literal>
or its equivalent <literal>\tabularnewline</literal>.
@@ -4024,9 +4715,20 @@
hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points
that &latex; might otherwise have chosen.
</para>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.5" id="_005cdiscretionary">
+<title><literal>\discretionary</literal> (generalized hyphenation point)</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hyphenation, discretionary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>discretionary hyphenation</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\discretionary{<replaceable>pre-break-text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>post-break-text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>no-break-text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<!-- xxx TODO, complete this node, see LaTeX-fr -->
+
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="9.5" id="_005cfussy">
+<sect1 label="9.6" id="_005cfussy">
<title><literal>\fussy</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fussy</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4036,11 +4738,11 @@
words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.
</para>
<para>This command cancels the effect of a previous <literal>\sloppy</literal> command
-(see <link linkend="_005csloppy">\sloppy</link>.
+(see <link linkend="_005csloppy">\sloppy</link>).
</para>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="9.6" id="_005csloppy">
+<sect1 label="9.7" id="_005csloppy">
<title><literal>\sloppy</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sloppy</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4053,7 +4755,7 @@
</para>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="9.7" id="_005chyphenation">
+<sect1 label="9.8" id="_005chyphenation">
<title><literal>\hyphenation</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hyphenation</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4074,7 +4776,7 @@
</screen>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="9.8" id="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">
+<sect1 label="9.9" id="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">
<title><literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linebreak</primary></indexterm>
@@ -4338,7 +5040,8 @@
\textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\
\textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
- \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with
+ HMS Surprise.}
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
</screen>
@@ -4347,7 +5050,7 @@
</para>
<screen>\begin{center}
\begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
- .. tabular material ..
+ ... tabular material ...
\end{minipage}
\end{center}
</screen>
@@ -4374,22 +5077,28 @@
<sect1 label="11.5" id="Footnotes-in-section-headings">
<title>Footnotes in section headings</title>
-<para>Putting a footnote in a section heading
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnotes, in section headings</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, avoiding footnotes</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
</para>
-<screen>\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+<screen>\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
</screen>
-<para>causes the footnote to appear both at the bottom of the page where the
-section starts and at the bottom of the table of contents page. To have
-it not appear on the table of contents use the package <filename>footmisc</filename>
-with the <literal>stable</literal> option.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>footmisc</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>footmisc</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>stable</literal> option to <literal>footmisc</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. To have it not appear
+on the table of contents use the package <filename>footmisc</filename> with the
+<literal>stable</literal> option.
</para>
<screen>\usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
- ..
+...
\begin{document}
- ..
-\section{Full sets\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+...
+\section{Full sets\footnote{This material due to ...}}
</screen>
-<para>Note that the <literal>\protect</literal> is gone; putting it in causes the
+<para>Note that the <literal>\protect</literal> is gone; including it would cause the
footnote to reappear on the table of contents.
</para>
@@ -4405,12 +5114,12 @@
<screen>\usepackage{bigfoot}
\DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
\DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
- ..
+ ...
\begin{document}
- ..
+...
The third theorem is a partial converse of the
second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
- ..
+...
</screen>
</sect1>
@@ -4423,13 +5132,13 @@
<!-- from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339 -->
<screen>\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % this version of package or later
\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
- ..
+...
\begin{document}
- ..
+...
The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
- ..
+...
</screen>
<para>This solution will work with the package <filename>hyperref</filename>.
See <link linkend="_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</link> for a simpler solution in the common case
@@ -4483,75 +5192,80 @@
<para><literal>\newcommand</literal> and <literal>\renewcommand</literal> define and redefine a
command, respectively. Synopses:
</para>
-<screen> \newcommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
- \newcommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\renewcommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
-\renewcommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+<screen> \newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+ \newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>*</literal>-form of these two commands requires that the arguments
-not contain multiple paragraphs of text (not <literal>\long</literal>, in plain
-&tex; terms).
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starred form, defining new commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>*-form, defining new commands</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text (not <literal>\long</literal>, in plain &tex;
+terms).
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>cmd</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>Required; the command name. It must begin with <literal>\</literal>. For
-<literal>\newcommand</literal>, it must not be already defined and must not begin
-with <literal>\end</literal>. For <literal>\renewcommand</literal>, it must already be
-defined.
+</term><listitem><para>Required; <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is the command name. For <literal>\newcommand</literal>, it
+must not be already defined and must not begin with <literal>\end</literal>. For
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, it must already be defined.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>nargs</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
-that the command will take. If this argument is not present, the
-default is for the command to have no arguments. When redefining a
-command, the new version can have a different number of arguments than
-the old version.
+that the command can take, including any optional argument. If this
+argument is not present, the default is for the command to have no
+arguments. When redefining a command, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of defined
-command <replaceable>\cmd</replaceable> is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
+command <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
-<replaceable>\cmd</replaceable> does not take an optional argument.
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> does not take an optional argument.
</para>
-<para>That is, if <replaceable>\cmd</replaceable> is used with square brackets following, as in
-<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal>, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> <literal>#1</literal> expands
-<replaceable>myval</replaceable>. While if <replaceable>\cmd</replaceable> is called without square brackets
-following, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the <literal>#1</literal> expands to the default
-<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>. In either case, any required arguments will be
-referred to starting with <literal>#2</literal>.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>positional parameter</primary></indexterm>
+<para>That is, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is used with square brackets following,
+as in <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal>, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the first
+<firstterm>positional parameter</firstterm> <literal>#1</literal> expands <replaceable>myval</replaceable>. On the
+other hand, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is called without square brackets
+following, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the positional parameter <literal>#1</literal>
+expands to the default <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>. In either case, any
+required arguments will be referred to starting with <literal>#2</literal>.
</para>
-<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal> in the call is different from having the
+<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal> in a call is different from having the
square brackets with no contents, as in <literal>[]</literal>. The former results
in <literal>#1</literal> expanding to <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>; the latter results in
<literal>#1</literal> expanding to the empty string.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>defn</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <literal>cmd</literal>; a
-construct of the form <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> in <replaceable>defn</replaceable> is replaced by the
-text of the <replaceable>n</replaceable>th argument.
+</term><listitem><para>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>; the
+positional parameter <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> in <replaceable>defn</replaceable> is replaced by
+the text of the <replaceable>n</replaceable>th argument.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>A command with no arguments that is followed in the source by a space
-will swallow that space. The solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the
-command and before the space.
+<para>&tex; ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in ‘<literal>\cmd </literal>’. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the command (‘<literal>\cmd{} </literal>’;
+another solution is to use an explicit control space (‘<literal>\cmd\ </literal>’).
</para>
<para>A simple example of defining a new command:
-<literal>\newcommand{\JH}{Jim Hef{}feron}</literal> causes the abbreviation
-<literal>\JH</literal> to be replaced by the longer text.
+<literal>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</literal> results in
+<literal>\RS</literal> being replaced by the longer text.
</para>
-<para>Redefining a command is basically the same:
+<para>Redefining an existing command is similar:
<literal>\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}</literal>.
</para>
-<para>Here’s a command definition that uses arguments:
+<para>Here’s a command definition with one required argument:
</para>
-<screen>\newcommand{\defreference}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+<screen>\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
</screen>
-<para>Then, <literal>\defreference{def:basis}</literal> will expand to
+<para>Then, <literal>\defref{def:basis}</literal> expands to
+<literal>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</literal>, which will ultimately expand to
something like ‘<literal>Definition~3.14</literal>’.
</para>
-<para>An example with two arguments:
-<literal>\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{#1\!\times\!#2}</literal> is invoked as
+<para>An example with two required arguments:
+<literal>\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}</literal> is invoked as
<literal>\nbym{2}{k}</literal>.
</para>
-<para>An example with optional arguments:
+<para>An example with an optional argument:
</para>
<screen>\newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
</screen>
@@ -4559,15 +5273,17 @@
<literal>\salutation[John]</literal> gives ‘<literal>Dear John:</literal>’. And
<literal>\salutation[]</literal> gives ‘<literal>Dear :</literal>’.
</para>
-<para>The braces around <replaceable>defn</replaceable> do not delimit the scope of the result of
-expanding <replaceable>defn</replaceable>. So <literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</literal>
-is wrong since in the sentence
+<para>The braces around <replaceable>defn</replaceable> do not define a group, that is, they do
+not delimit the scope of the result of expanding <replaceable>defn</replaceable>. So
+<literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</literal> is problematic; in this
+sentence,
</para>
-<screen>The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Virginia}.
+<screen>The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
</screen>
-<para>the words ‘<literal>met the</literal>’ will incorrectly be in italics. An
-extra pair of braces <literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</literal>
-fixes it.
+<para>the words ‘<literal>met the</literal>’ would incorrectly be in italics. Another
+pair of braces in the definition is needed, like this:
+<literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</literal>. Those braces are
+part of the definition and thus do define a group.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -4599,19 +5315,22 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newcounter</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, defining new</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Synopsis:
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
</para>
-<screen>\newcounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]
+<screen>\newcounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}
+\newcounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]
</screen>
-<para>The <literal>\newcounter</literal> command globally defines a new counter named
-<replaceable>countername</replaceable>. The name consists of letters only and does not begin
-with a backslash (‘<literal>\</literal>’). The name must not already be used by
-another counter. The new counter is initialized to zero.
+<para>Globally defines a new counter named <replaceable>countername</replaceable> and initialize
+the new counter to zero.
</para>
-<para>If the optional argument <literal>[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]</literal> appears, then
+<para>The name <replaceable>countername</replaceable> must consists of letters only, and does not
+begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+</para>
+<para>When you use the optional argument <literal>[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]</literal> then
<replaceable>countername</replaceable> will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the
existing counter <replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>. For example, ordinarily
-<literal>subsection</literal> is numbered within <literal>section</literal>. Any time
+<literal>subsection</literal> is numbered within <literal>section</literal> so that any time
<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable> is incremented with <literal>\stepcounter</literal>
(see <link linkend="_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</link>) or <literal>\refstepcounter</literal>
(see <link linkend="_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</link>) then <replaceable>countername</replaceable> is reset to zero.
@@ -4675,19 +5394,21 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>redefining environments</primary></indexterm>
<para>These commands define or redefine an environment <replaceable>env</replaceable>, that is,
-<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>} … \end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>. Synopses:
+<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>} <replaceable>body</replaceable> \end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>. Synopses:
</para>
-<screen> \newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
+<screen> \newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
\newenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
-\renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
+ \renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
\renewenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Unlike <literal>\newcommand</literal> and <literal>\renewcommand</literal>, the <literal>*</literal>-forms
-<literal>\newenvironment*</literal> and <literal>\renewcommand*</literal> have the same effect
-as the forms with no <literal>*</literal>.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>*</literal>-form of environment commands</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. The body of these environments can
+still contain multiple paragraphs.
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>env</replaceable>
-</term><listitem><para>Required; the environment name. It does not begin with backslash
+</term><listitem><para>Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+<literal>*</literal> character, and thus does not begin with backslash
(<literal>\</literal>). It must not begin with the string <literal>end</literal>. For
<literal>\newenvironment</literal>, the name <replaceable>env</replaceable> must not be the name of an
already existing environment, and also the command <literal>\<replaceable>env</replaceable></literal>
@@ -4696,8 +5417,8 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>nargs</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
-that the environment will take. These arguments appear after the
-<literal>\begin</literal>, as in
+that the environment will take. When the environment is used these
+arguments appear after the <literal>\begin</literal>, as in
<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>arg1</replaceable>}…{<replaceable>argn</replaceable>}</literal>. If this
argument is not present then the default is for the environment to have
no arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have
@@ -4709,16 +5430,16 @@
(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
the environment does not take an optional argument.
</para>
-<para>That is, when <literal>[<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]</literal> is present in the environment
-definition, if <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal> is used with square brackets
-following, as in <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal>, then within
-the environment <literal>#1</literal> expands <replaceable>myval</replaceable>. If
-<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal> is called without square brackets following,
-then within the environment the <literal>#1</literal> expands to the default
-<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>. In either case, any required arguments will be
-referred to starting with <literal>#2</literal>.
+<para>That is, when <literal>[<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]</literal> is present in the
+environment definition, if <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal> is used with
+square brackets following, as in
+<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal>, then, within <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>,
+the positional parameter <literal>#1</literal> expands to <replaceable>myval</replaceable>. If
+<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal> is called without square brackets
+following, then, within within <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>, the positional parameter
+<literal>#1</literal> expands to the default <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>. In either case,
+any required arguments will be referred to starting with <literal>#2</literal>.
</para>
-
<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal> in the call is different from having the
square brackets with no contents, as in <literal>[]</literal>. The former results
in <literal>#1</literal> expanding to <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>; the latter results in
@@ -4726,22 +5447,24 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>begdefn</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
-<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>; a construct of the form <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> in
-<replaceable>begdef</replaceable> is replaced by the text of the <replaceable>n</replaceable>th argument.
+<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>. Within <replaceable>begdef</replaceable>, the <replaceable>n</replaceable>th
+positional parameter (i.e., <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal>) is replaced by the text
+of the <replaceable>n</replaceable>th argument.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
-<literal>\end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>. Note that it may not contain any argument
-parameters, so <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> cannot be used here.
+<literal>\end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>. This may not contain any positional
+parameters, so <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> cannot be used here (but see the final
+example below).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>The environment <replaceable>env</replaceable> delimits the scope of the result of expanding
-<replaceable>begdefn</replaceable> and <replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>. Thus, in the first example below, the
-effect of the <literal>\small</literal> is limited to the quote and does not extend
-to material following the environment.
+<para>All environments, that is to say the <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable> code, the environment
+body and the <replaceable>enddefn</replaceable> code, are processed within a group. Thus, in
+the first example below, the effect of the <literal>\small</literal> is limited to
+the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
</para>
-<para>This example gives an environment like &latex;’s <literal>quotation</literal> except that
-it will be set in smaller type.
+<para>This example gives an environment like &latex;’s <literal>quotation</literal>
+except that it will be set in smaller type:
</para>
<screen>\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
\small\begin{quotation}
@@ -4749,8 +5472,8 @@
\end{quotation}
}
</screen>
-<para>This shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment that
-cites the author.
+<para>This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
+that cites the author:
</para>
<screen>\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
\begin{quotation}
@@ -4759,15 +5482,15 @@
\end{quotation}
}
</screen>
-<para>The author’s name is optional, and defaults to Shakespeare.
-In the document, use the environment as here:
+<para>The author’s name is optional, and defaults to ‘<literal>Shakespeare</literal>’.
+In the document, use the environment like this:
</para>
<screen>\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
- ..
+ ...
\end{citequote}
</screen>
<para>The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in
-<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>.
+<replaceable>enddefn</replaceable>, in this case in a box (see <link linkend="_005csbox">\sbox</link>):
</para>
<screen>\newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
@@ -4789,36 +5512,36 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>theorem-like environment</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>environment, theorem-like</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Define a new <firstterm>theorem-like environment</firstterm>. Synopses:
+<para>Define a new theorem-like environment. Synopses:
</para>
-<screen>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]
+<screen>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]
\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
</screen>
-<para>Both create a theorem-like environment <replaceable>name</replaceable>. Using the first
-form,
+<para>Using the first form, <literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal>
+creates an environment that will be labelled with <replaceable>title</replaceable>. See the
+first example below.
</para>
-<screen>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]
-</screen>
-<para>with the optional argument after the second required argument,
+<para>The second form
+<literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]</literal>
creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
-counter <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>: it will be reset when
+counter <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> (its counter will be reset when
<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> is reset).
</para>
-<para>Using the second form,
+
+<para>The third form
+<literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal>,
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, will create
+an environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>.
</para>
-<screen>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
-</screen>
-<para>with the optional argument between the two required
-arguments, will create an environment whose counter will share the
-previously defined counter <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>.
-</para>
<para>You can specify one of <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> and <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>,
or neither, but not both.
</para>
<para>This command creates a counter named <replaceable>name</replaceable>. In addition, unless
-the optional argument <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable> is used, the current
-<literal>\ref</literal> value will be that of <literal>\the<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable></literal>
-(see <link linkend="_005cref">\ref</link>).
+the optional argument <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable> is used, inside of the
+theorem-like environment the current <literal>\ref</literal> value will be that of
+<literal>\the<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable></literal> (see <link linkend="_005cref">\ref</link>).
</para>
<para>This declaration is global. It is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
@@ -4848,8 +5571,9 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<para>Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
-sequentially. This example has a declaration in the preamble that
-results in ‘<literal>Definition 1</literal>’ and ‘<literal>Definition 2</literal>’ in the output.
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in ‘<literal>Definition 1</literal>’ and ‘<literal>Definition 2</literal>’ in the
+output.
</para>
<screen>\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
\begin{document}
@@ -4863,7 +5587,7 @@
Second def
\end{defn}
</screen>
-<para>Because this example specifies the optional argument
+<para>Because the next example specifies the optional argument
<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> to <literal>\newtheorem</literal> as <literal>section</literal>, the
example, with the same document body, gives ‘<literal>Definition 1.1</literal>’
and ‘<literal>Definition 2.1</literal>’.
@@ -4880,8 +5604,8 @@
Second def
\end{defn}
</screen>
-<para>In this example there are two declarations in the preamble, the second
-of which calls for the new <literal>thm</literal> environment to use the same
+<para>In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new <literal>thm</literal> environment to use the same
counter as <literal>defn</literal>. It gives ‘<literal>Definition 1.1</literal>’, followed
by ‘<literal>Theorem 2.1</literal>’ and ‘<literal>Definition 2.2</literal>’.
</para>
@@ -4944,7 +5668,7 @@
characters in each:
</para>
<screen>\newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
-\newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 11pt}
+\newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
\testfontat abc
\testfontscaled abc
</screen>
@@ -4956,13 +5680,13 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\protect</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fragile commands</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>robust commands</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>moving arguments</primary></indexterm>
<para>All &latex; commands are either <firstterm>fragile</firstterm> or <firstterm>robust</firstterm>.
Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
many more, are fragile. A fragile command can break when it is used in
the argument to certain commands. To prevent such commands from
-breaking they must be preceded by the command <literal>\protect</literal>.
+breaking one solution is to have them preceded by the command
+<literal>\protect</literal>.
</para>
<para>For example, when &latex; runs the <literal>\section{<replaceable>section
name</replaceable>}</literal> command it writes the <replaceable>section name</replaceable> text to the
@@ -4969,10 +5693,12 @@
<filename>.aux</filename> auxiliary file, moving it there for use elsewhere in the
document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is
internally expanded by &latex; without typesetting it directly is
-referred to as a <firstterm>moving argument</firstterm>. A command is fragile if it can
+referred to as a
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>moving arguments</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>moving argument</firstterm>. A command is fragile if it can
expand during this process into invalid &tex; code. Some examples of
-moving arguments are those that appear in the <literal>\caption{..}</literal>
-command (see <link linkend="figure">figure</link>), in the <literal>\thanks{..}</literal> command
+moving arguments are those that appear in the <literal>\caption{...}</literal>
+command (see <link linkend="figure">figure</link>), in the <literal>\thanks{...}</literal> command
(see <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>), and in @-expressions in the <literal>tabular</literal> and
<literal>array</literal> environments (see <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>).
</para>
@@ -4985,12 +5711,12 @@
command. Nor can a <literal>\protect</literal> command be used in the argument to
<literal>\addtocounter</literal> or <literal>\setcounter</literal> command.
</para>
-<para>In this example the <literal>caption</literal> command gives a mysterious error
+<para>In this example the <literal>\caption</literal> command gives a mysterious error
about an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each
<literal>\raisebox</literal> command with <literal>\protect</literal>.
</para>
<screen>\begin{figure}
- ..
+ ...
\caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
\end{figure}
</screen>
@@ -5001,9 +5727,9 @@
</para>
<screen>\begin{document}
\tableofcontents
- ..
+...
\section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
- ..
+...
</screen>
</sect1>
@@ -5016,12 +5742,14 @@
<para>Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with
it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the
-environment or command associated with the number, except with no
-backslash (<literal>\</literal>). Thus the <literal>\chapter</literal> command starts a
-chapter and the <literal>chapter</literal> counter keeps track of the chapter
-number. Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;’s standard
-document classes to control numbering.
+environment or command associated with the number, except that the
+counter’s name has no backslash <literal>\</literal>. Thus, associated with
+the <literal>\chapter</literal> command is the <literal>chapter</literal> counter that keeps
+track of the chapter number.
</para>
+<para>Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;’s standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+</para>
<screen>part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
section page footnote enumiii
@@ -5029,12 +5757,10 @@
subsubsection
</screen>
<para>The <literal>mpfootnote</literal> counter is used by the <literal>\footnote</literal> command
-inside of a minipage (see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>).
+inside of a minipage (see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>). The counters <literal>enumi</literal>
+through <literal>enumiv</literal> are used in the <literal>enumerate</literal> environment, for
+up to four levels of nesting (see <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>).
</para>
-<para>The <literal>enumi</literal> through <literal>enumiv</literal> counters are used in the
-<literal>enumerate</literal> environment, for up to four nested levels
-(see <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>).
-</para>
<para>New counters are created with <literal>\newcounter</literal>. See <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.
</para>
@@ -5045,36 +5771,48 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, printing</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter <replaceable>counter</replaceable> has the value 1 then a
+<literal>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> in your source will result in a lower case
+letter a appearing in the output.
+</para>
<para>All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
instance, <literal>\alph{enumi}</literal>. Note that the counter name does not
start with a backslash.
</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alph</primary></indexterm><literal>\alph</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>prints <replaceable>counter</replaceable> using lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ...
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ...
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Alph</primary></indexterm><literal>\Alph</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>uses uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ...
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\Alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ...
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arabic</primary></indexterm><literal>\arabic</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>uses Arabic numbers: ‘1’, ‘2’, ...
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arabic{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\arabic{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print in Arabic numbers: ‘1’, ‘2’, ...
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\roman</primary></indexterm><literal>\roman</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>uses lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ...
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ...
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Roman</primary></indexterm><literal>\Roman</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>uses uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ...
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\Roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ...
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol</primary></indexterm><literal>\fnsymbol</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>prints the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> in a specific sequence of nine
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\fnsymbol{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Prints the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> in a specific sequence of nine
symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of
<replaceable>counter</replaceable> must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
</para>
-<para>Here are the symbols (as Unicode code points in ASCII output):
+<para>Here are the symbols:
</para>
-<literallayout>asterisk(*) dagger(‡) ddagger(‡)
-section-sign(§) paragraph-sign(¶) parallel(∥)
-double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(††) double-ddagger(‡‡)
-</literallayout>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="3"><colspec colwidth="33*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="33*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="33*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Name</para></entry><entry><para>Command</para></entry><entry><para>Equivalent Unicode symbol and/or numeric code point<!-- -->
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para>asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>*<!-- -->
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>†
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>‡
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>section-sign</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\S</literal></para></entry><entry><para>§
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>paragraph-sign</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\P</literal></para></entry><entry><para>¶
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>double-vert</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\parallel</literal></para></entry><entry><para>‖
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>double-asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>**<!-- -->
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>double-dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>††
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>double-ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>‡‡
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
</sect1>
@@ -5160,6 +5898,11 @@
to the <replaceable>value</replaceable> argument. Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.
</para>
+<para>In this example the section value appears as ‘<literal>V</literal>’.
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{section}{5}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+</screen>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="13.5" id="_005caddtocounter">
@@ -5170,6 +5913,12 @@
<para>The <literal>\addtocounter</literal> command globally increments <replaceable>counter</replaceable> by
the amount specified by the <replaceable>value</replaceable> argument, which may be negative.
</para>
+<para>In this example the section value appears as ‘<literal>VII</literal>’.
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{section}{5}
+\addtocounter{section}{2}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+</screen>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="13.6" id="_005crefstepcounter">
@@ -5338,29 +6087,39 @@
</sect1>
<sect1 label="14.2" id="_005csetlength">
-<title><literal>\setlength{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\setlength</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setlength</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lengths, setting</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\setlength</literal> sets the value of <replaceable>\len</replaceable> to the <replaceable>value</replaceable>
-argument, which can be expressed in any units that &latex;
-understands, i.e., inches (<literal>in</literal>), millimeters (<literal>mm</literal>), points
-(<literal>pt</literal>), big points (<literal>bp</literal>, etc.
+<para>Synopsis:
</para>
+<screen>\setlength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\setlength</literal> sets the value of <firstterm>length command</firstterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>length command</primary></indexterm>
+<literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal> to the <replaceable>value</replaceable> argument which can be expressed in any
+units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (<literal>in</literal>), millimeters
+(<literal>mm</literal>), points (<literal>pt</literal>), big points (<literal>bp</literal>), etc.
+</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 label="14.3" id="_005caddtolength">
-<title><literal>\addtolength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<title><literal>\addtolength</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtolength</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lengths, adding to</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\addtolength</literal> command increments a “length command”
-<replaceable>\len</replaceable> by the amount specified in the <replaceable>amount</replaceable> argument, which
-may be negative.
+<para>Synopsis:
</para>
+<screen>\addtolength{<replaceable>\len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\addtolength</literal> command increments a length command <literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal>
+by the amount specified in the <replaceable>amount</replaceable> argument, which may be
+negative.
+</para>
+
</sect1>
<sect1 label="14.4" id="_005csettodepth">
<title><literal>\settodepth</literal></title>
@@ -5367,10 +6126,12 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settodepth</primary></indexterm>
-<para><literal>\settodepth{\gnat}{text}</literal>
+<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<para>The <literal>\settodepth</literal> command sets the value of a <literal>length</literal> command
-equal to the depth of the <literal>text</literal> argument.
+<screen>\settodepth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\settodepth</literal> command sets the value of a length command
+<literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal> equal to the depth of the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -5379,9 +6140,11 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settoheight</primary></indexterm>
-<para><literal>\settoheight{\gnat}{text}</literal>
+<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<para>The <literal>\settoheight</literal> command sets the value of a <literal>length</literal> command
+<screen>\settoheight{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{text}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\settoheight</literal> command sets the value of a length command <literal>\<replaceable>len</replaceable></literal>
equal to the height of the <literal>text</literal> argument.
</para>
@@ -5392,6 +6155,10 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settowidth</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
<para>The <literal>\settowidth</literal> command sets the value of the command <replaceable>\len</replaceable>
to the width of the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument.
</para>
@@ -5417,12 +6184,12 @@
</para>
<para>These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
commands (see <link linkend="Boxes">Boxes</link>). They specify the natural width, etc., of
-the text in the box. <literal>\totalheight</literal> equals <literal>\height</literal> +
-<literal>\depth</literal>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
+the text in the box. <literal>\totalheight</literal> equals <inlineequation><mathphrase><literal>\height</literal> +
+<literal>\depth</literal></mathphrase></inlineequation>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
natural size, e.g., say
</para>
-<para><literal>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}</literal>
-</para>
+<screen>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+</screen>
</sect1>
</chapter>
@@ -5465,7 +6232,7 @@
<para>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any
paragraph indentation, as in this example.
</para>
-<screen>.. end of the prior paragraph.
+<screen>... end of the prior paragraph.
\noindent This paragraph is not indented.
</screen>
@@ -5554,9 +6321,12 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math formulas</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>formulas, math</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode, entering</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>math environment</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>displaymath environment</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>equation environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>math</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>math</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>displaymath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>displaymath</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>equation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>equation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
<para>There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode:
</para>
@@ -5615,7 +6385,7 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>^</primary></indexterm>
<para>In math mode, use the caret character <literal>^</literal> to make the
-<replaceable>exp</replaceable> appear as a superscript, ie. type <literal>^{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}</literal>.
+<replaceable>exp</replaceable> appear as a superscript: <literal>^{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}</literal>.
Similarly, in math mode, underscore <literal>_{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}</literal> makes a
subscript out of <replaceable>exp</replaceable>.
</para>
@@ -5663,9 +6433,13 @@
<para>Below is a list of commonly-available symbols. It is by no means an
exhaustive list. Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
-parenthesis. The commands for these symbols can be used only in math
-mode.
+parenthesis. Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
+be used only in math mode.
</para>
+<para>To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current mode,
+see <link linkend="_005censuremath">\ensuremath</link>.
+</para>
+
<!-- xx Add Negation: @code{} for negations of relevant symbols -->
<!-- Useful: http://www.w3.org/TR/WD-math-970515/section6.html -->
@@ -5696,7 +6470,7 @@
sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\asymp</primary></indexterm><literal>\asymp</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>≍ Asymptomatically equivalent (relation).
+</term><listitem><para>≍ Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\backslash</literal>
</term><listitem><para>\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus <literal>\setminus</literal>, and
@@ -5748,16 +6522,15 @@
</term><listitem><para>⋀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bot</primary></indexterm><literal>\bot</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⊥ Up tack, bottom, least element of a poset, or a contradiction
-(ordinary). See also <literal>\top</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>⊥ Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered
+set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also <literal>\top</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bowtie</primary></indexterm><literal>\bowtie</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⋈ Natural join of two relations (relation).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Box</primary></indexterm><literal>\Box</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>□ Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary). This
-is not available in Plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the
-<filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</term><listitem><para>□ Modal operator for necessity; square open box
+(ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
<!-- bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bullet</primary></indexterm><literal>\bullet</literal>
@@ -5785,8 +6558,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\complement</primary></indexterm><literal>\complement</literal>
</term><listitem><para>∁ Set complement, used as a superscript as in
-<literal>$S^\complement$</literal> (ordinary). This is not available in Plain
-&tex;. In &latex; you should load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. Also
+<literal>$S^\complement$</literal> (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. Also
used: <literal>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</literal> or <literal>$\bar{S}$</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cong</primary></indexterm><literal>\cong</literal>
@@ -5816,8 +6588,7 @@
</term><listitem><para>δ Greek lower case delta (ordinary).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\Diamond</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). This is not available in
-Plain &tex;. In &latex; you must load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</term><listitem><para>◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
<!-- bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\diamond</literal>
@@ -5846,15 +6617,15 @@
</term><listitem><para>ℓ Lower-case cursive letter l (ordinary).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\emptyset</primary></indexterm><literal>\emptyset</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>∅ Empty set symbol (ordinary). Similar: reversed empty
-set <literal>\varnothing</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>∅ Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+<literal>\varnothing</literal>.
<!-- bb Why Unicode has \revemptyset but no \emptyset? -->
-</para>
+</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\epsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\epsilon</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>ϵ Lower case Greek-text letter (ordinary). More widely used in
-mathematics is the curly epsilon
-<literal>\varepsilon</literal> ε. Related: the set membership relation
-<literal>\in</literal> ∈.
+</term><listitem><para>ϵ Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
+letter epsilon <literal>\varepsilon</literal> ε. Related:
+the set membership relation <literal>\in</literal> ∈.
<!-- src: David Carlisle http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/98018/339 and -->
<!-- Unicode referenced there asserts varepsilon is much more widely used. -->
</para>
@@ -5918,8 +6689,8 @@
</term><listitem><para>ℑ Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part <literal>\Re</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\in</primary></indexterm><literal>\in</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>∈ Set element (relation). See also: lower case Greek letter
-epsilon <literal>\epsilon</literal>ϵ and rounded small
+</term><listitem><para>∈ Set element (relation). See also: lower case lunate
+epsilon <literal>\epsilon</literal>ϵ and small letter script
epsilon <literal>\varepsilon</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\infty</primary></indexterm><literal>\infty</literal>
@@ -5969,8 +6740,7 @@
for <literal>\leq</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leadsto</primary></indexterm><literal>\leadsto</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). This is not available in
-Plain &tex;. In &latex; you should load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</term><listitem><para>⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put
<literal>\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}</literal> in the
preamble and then use <literal>\Leadsto</literal> instead.
@@ -6004,12 +6774,11 @@
for <literal>\le</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lfloor</primary></indexterm><literal>\lfloor</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⌊ Left floor bracket (opening).
+</term><listitem><para>⌊ Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: <literal>\floor</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\lhd</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). This is
-not available in Plain &tex;. In &latex; you should load the
-<filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+</term><listitem><para>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
<filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleleft</literal> (which is a relation
and so gives better spacing).
</para>
@@ -6045,8 +6814,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mho</primary></indexterm><literal>\mho</literal>
</term><listitem><para>℧ Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
-This is not available in Plain &tex;. In &latex; you should load the
-<filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mid</primary></indexterm><literal>\mid</literal>
</term><listitem><para>∣ Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
@@ -6170,21 +6938,21 @@
</term><listitem><para>± Plus or minus (binary).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prec</primary></indexterm><literal>\prec</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>≺ Preceeds (relation). Similar: less than <literal><</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>≺ Precedes (relation). Similar: less than <literal><</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\preceq</primary></indexterm><literal>\preceq</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⪯ Preceeds or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+</term><listitem><para>⪯ Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
equals <literal>\leq</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prime</primary></indexterm><literal>\prime</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>′ Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
-used as a superscript <literal>$A^\prime$</literal>. Note that <literal>$f^\prime$</literal>
-and <literal>$f'$</literal> produce the same result. An advantage of the second is
-that <literal>$f'''$</literal> produces the the desired symbol, that is, the same
-result as <literal>$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$</literal>, but uses somewhat less
-typing. Note that you can only use <literal>\prime</literal> in math mode but you
-can type right single quote <literal>'</literal> in text mode also, although it
-resuts in a different look than in math mode.
+</term><listitem><para>′ Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).
+Typically used as a superscript: <literal>$f^\prime$</literal>; <literal>$f^\prime$</literal>
+and <literal>$f'$</literal> produce the same result. An advantage of the second
+is that <literal>$f'''$</literal> produces the desired symbol, that is, the same
+result as <literal>$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$</literal>, but uses rather less
+typing. You can only use <literal>\prime</literal> in math mode. Using the right
+single quote <literal>'</literal> in text mode produces a different character
+(apostrophe).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prod</primary></indexterm><literal>\prod</literal>
</term><listitem><para>∏ Product (operator).
@@ -6199,7 +6967,7 @@
</term><listitem><para>ψ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rangle</primary></indexterm><literal>\rangle</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>➹ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
+</term><listitem><para>⟩ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
than <literal>></literal>. Matches:<literal>\langle</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rbrace</primary></indexterm><literal>\rbrace</literal>
@@ -6220,18 +6988,20 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\restriction</primary></indexterm><literal>\restriction</literal>
</term><listitem><para>↾ Restriction of a function
-(relation). Synonym: <literal>\upharpoonright</literal>. Not available in
-Plain &tex;. In &latex; you should load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+(relation). Synonym: <literal>\upharpoonright</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\revemptyset</primary></indexterm><literal>\revemptyset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>⦰ Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+<literal>\varnothing</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>stix</filename> package.
+</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rfloor</primary></indexterm><literal>\rfloor</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⌋ Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
off (closing). Matches <literal>\lfloor</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\rhd</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). This is
-not available in Plain &tex;. In &latex; you should load the
-<filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should
-instead load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which
+</term><listitem><para>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
+load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which
is a relation and so gives better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rho</primary></indexterm><literal>\rho</literal>
@@ -6283,7 +7053,7 @@
display (operator).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smile</primary></indexterm><literal>\smile</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⌣ Upward curving arc (ordinary).
+</term><listitem><para>⌣ Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\spadesuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\spadesuit</literal>
</term><listitem><para>♠ Spade card suit (ordinary).
@@ -6299,8 +7069,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsubset</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsubset</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊏ Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
-subset <literal>\subset</literal>. This is not available in Plain &tex;. In
-&latex; you should load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+subset <literal>\subset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsubseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsubseteq</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊑ Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
@@ -6308,8 +7077,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupset</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupset</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊐ Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
-superset <literal>\supset</literal>. This is not available in Plain &tex;. In
-&latex; you should load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+superset <literal>\supset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupseteq</literal>
</term><listitem><para>⊒ Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or
@@ -6348,7 +7116,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\surd</primary></indexterm><literal>\surd</literal>
</term><listitem><para>√ Radical symbol (ordinary). The &latex; command
-<literal>\sqrt{..}</literal> typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
+<literal>\sqrt{...}</literal> typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
that extends to cover the argument.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\swarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\swarrow</literal>
@@ -6370,8 +7138,8 @@
Synonym: <literal>\rightarrow</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\top</primary></indexterm><literal>\top</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⊤ Top, greatest element of a poset (ordinary). See
-also <literal>\bot</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>⊤ Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set
+(ordinary). See also <literal>\bot</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangle</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangle</literal>
</term><listitem><para>△ Triangle (ordinary).
@@ -6383,36 +7151,39 @@
is a relation and so gives better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangleright</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangleright</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>▷ Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
-subgroup symbol you should instead load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
-use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
-better spacing).
+</term><listitem><para>▷ Not-filled triangle pointing right
+(binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+<filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unlhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unlhd</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⊴ Left-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with a
-line under (binary). This is not available in Plain &tex;. In &latex;
-you should load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup
-symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartrianglelefteq</literal> (which
-is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+</term><listitem><para>⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
+is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For
+the normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
+use <literal>\vartrianglelefteq</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unrhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unrhd</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⊵ Right-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with a
-line under (binary). This is not available in Plain &tex;. In &latex;
-you should load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup
-symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use <literal>\vartrianglerighteq</literal>
-(which is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+</term><listitem><para>⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
+is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For
+the normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
+use <literal>\vartrianglerighteq</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Uparrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Uparrow</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⇑ Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
-single-line up-pointing arrow <literal>\uparrow</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>⇑ Double-line upward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing
+arrow <literal>\uparrow</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\uparrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\uparrow</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>↑ Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation). Similar:
-double-line up-pointing arrow <literal>\Uparrow</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>↑ Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges
+(relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing
+arrow <literal>\Uparrow</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Updownarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Updownarrow</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⇕ Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
-single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow <literal>\updownarrow</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>⇕ Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow <literal>\updownarrow</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\updownarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\updownarrow</literal>
</term><listitem><para>↕ Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
@@ -6420,13 +7191,12 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upharpoonright</primary></indexterm><literal>\upharpoonright</literal>
</term><listitem><para>↾ Up harpoon, with barb on right side
-(relation). Synonym: <literal>\restriction</literal>. Not available in Plain
-&tex;. In &latex; you should load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+(relation). Synonym: <literal>\restriction</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\uplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\uplus</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the middle
-(binary). Similar: union <literal>\cup</literal>. Related: variable-sized
-operator <literal>\biguplus</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
+the middle (binary). Similar: union <literal>\cup</literal>. Related:
+variable-sized operator <literal>\biguplus</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Upsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\Upsilon</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Υ Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
@@ -6435,37 +7205,45 @@
</term><listitem><para>υ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varepsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\varepsilon</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>ε Rounded small epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used in
-mathematics than the non-variant lower case Greek-text letter form
-<literal>\epsilon</literal> ϵ. Related: set membership <literal>\in</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>ε Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is
+more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+<literal>\epsilon</literal> ϵ. Related: set
+membership <literal>\in</literal>.
</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vanothing</primary></indexterm><literal>\vanothing</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>∅ Empty set symbol. Similar:
+<literal>\emptyset</literal>. Related: <literal>\revemptyset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varphi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varphi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>φ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <literal>\phi</literal> ϕ.
+</term><listitem><para>φ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <literal>\phi</literal> ϕ.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varpi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varpi</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>ϖ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <literal>\pi</literal> π.
+</term><listitem><para>ϖ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <literal>\pi</literal> π.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varrho</primary></indexterm><literal>\varrho</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>ϱ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <literal>\rho</literal> ρ.
+</term><listitem><para>ϱ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <literal>\rho</literal> ρ.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varsigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\varsigma</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>ς Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <literal>\sigma</literal> σ.
+</term><listitem><para>ς Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<literal>\sigma</literal> σ.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vartheta</primary></indexterm><literal>\vartheta</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>ϑ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <literal>\theta</literal> θ.
+</term><listitem><para>ϑ Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<literal>\theta</literal> θ.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdash</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdash</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>⊢ Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation). Similar:
-turnstile rotated a half-circle <literal>\dashv</literal>.
+</term><listitem><para>⊢ Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash
+(relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a
+half-circle <literal>\dashv</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vee</primary></indexterm><literal>\vee</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>∨ Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
-and <literal>\wedge</literal>. Similar: variable-sized
+</term><listitem><para>∨ Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related:
+logical and <literal>\wedge</literal>. Similar: variable-sized
operator <literal>\bigvee</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\Vert</literal>
@@ -6472,16 +7250,17 @@
</term><listitem><para>‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
bar <literal>\vert</literal>.
</para>
-<para>For a norm you can use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package and add
+<para>For a norm symbol, you can use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package and add
<literal>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}</literal> to your
-preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line vertical
-bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
-write the starred version <literal>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</literal> then the height of
-the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
-<literal>\norm{M^\perp}</literal> the bars do not grow with the height of the
-argument but instead are the default height, and <literal>\norm[<replaceable>size
-command</replaceable>]{M^\perp}</literal> also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
-the size given in the <replaceable>size command</replaceable>, e.g., <literal>\Bigg</literal>.
+preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line
+vertical bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the
+document body you write the starred version <literal>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</literal>
+then the height of the vertical bars will match the height of the
+argument, whereas with <literal>\norm{M^\perp}</literal> the bars do not grow
+with the height of the argument but instead are the default height,
+and <literal>\norm[<replaceable>size command</replaceable>]{M^\perp}</literal> also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the <replaceable>size command</replaceable>,
+e.g., <literal>\Bigg</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\vert</literal>
</term><listitem><para>| Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
@@ -6626,10 +7405,10 @@
</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sinh</mathphrase></inlineequation>
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sup</primary></indexterm><literal>\sup</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>sup
-<!-- don't try to use \sup since that turned into a Texinfo command -->
-<!-- and it's not worth hassling with different versions when it's -->
-<!-- just three roman letters anyway. -->
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sup</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+<!-- don't try to use \sup with dvi/pdf output since that turned into a -->
+<!-- Texinfo command and it's not worth hassling with different versions -->
+<!-- when it's just three roman letters anyway. -->
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tan</primary></indexterm><literal>\tan</literal>
</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\tan</mathphrase></inlineequation>
@@ -6750,7 +7529,7 @@
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\,</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinspace</primary></indexterm>
<para>Normally <literal>3mu</literal>. The longer name is <literal>\thinspace</literal>. This can
-be used in both math mode and text mode.
+be used in both math mode and text mode. See <link linkend="_005cthinspace">\thinspace</link>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\!</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\!</primary></indexterm>
@@ -6784,9 +7563,30 @@
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\*</primary></indexterm><literal>\*</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>discretionary multiplication</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multiplication symbol, discretionary line break</primary></indexterm>
-<para>A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
-allowed.
+<para>A <firstterm>discretionary</firstterm> multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
+allowed. Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated by a
+space, while in the case of a break a × symbol is
+printed immediately before the break. So
</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\)
+through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is
+equal to zero.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>will make that sort of output<!-- -->
+ <!-- /@w -->(the ellipsis ‘<literal>[…]</literal>’ is here to show the line break at
+the same place as in a &tex; output)<!-- -->
+:
+</para>
+<para>Now <inlineequation><mathphrase>A_3 = 0</mathphrase></inlineequation>,
+[…]
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>A_1</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+through <inlineequation><mathphrase>A_4</mathphrase></inlineequation>, that is <inlineequation><mathphrase>A_1 A_2 \times</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>A_3 A_4</mathphrase></inlineequation>, is
+equal to zero.
+</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\cdots</literal>
</term><listitem><para>A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line.
</para>
@@ -6793,47 +7593,64 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddots</literal>
</term><listitem><para>A diagonal ellipsis: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\ddots</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac{num}{den}</primary></indexterm><literal>\frac{num}{den}</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}{<replaceable>den</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\frac{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}{<replaceable>den</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces the fraction <literal>num</literal> divided by <literal>den</literal>.
+<para>Produces the fraction <replaceable>num</replaceable> divided by <replaceable>den</replaceable>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\left <replaceable>delim1</replaceable> ... \right <replaceable>delim2</replaceable></primary></indexterm><literal>\left <replaceable>delim1</replaceable> ... \right <replaceable>delim2</replaceable></literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\right</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>null delimiter</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The two delimiters need not match; ‘<literal>.</literal>’ acts as a null delimiter,
+<para>The two delimiters need not match; ‘<literal>.</literal>’ acts as a <firstterm>null delimiter</firstterm>,
producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math
-in between. Example: <literal>\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]</literal>.
+in between. Example: <literal>\left( \sum_{i=1}^{10} a_i \right]</literal>.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overbrace{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overbrace{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Generates a brace over <replaceable>text</replaceable>.
-For example, <inlineequation><mathphrase>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathdollar</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathdollar</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathellipsis</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathellipsis</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: ….
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathparagraph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: ¶.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsection</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Section sign in math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsterling</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sterling sign in math mode: £.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathunderscore</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathunderscore</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Underscore in math mode: _.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Generates a brace over <replaceable>math</replaceable>.
+For example, <literal>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \;\textrm{times}}</literal>.
+</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Generates a horizontal line over <replaceable>tex</replaceable>.
-For example, <inlineequation><mathphrase>\overline{x+y}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+For example, <literal>\overline{x+y}</literal>.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqrt[<replaceable>root</replaceable>]{arg}</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqrt[<replaceable>root</replaceable>]{arg}</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqrt[<replaceable>root</replaceable>]{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqrt[<replaceable>root</replaceable>]{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Produces the representation of the square root of <replaceable>arg</replaceable>. The
optional argument <replaceable>root</replaceable> determines what root to produce. For
example, the cube root of <literal>x+y</literal> would be typed as
-<literal>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</literal>.
+<literal>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</literal>.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stackrel{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relation</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\stackrel{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relation</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Puts <replaceable>text</replaceable> above <replaceable>relation</replaceable>. For example,
<literal>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</literal>.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbrace{math}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underbrace{math}</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>Generates <replaceable>math</replaceable> with a brace underneath.
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Generates <replaceable>math</replaceable> with a brace underneath. For example, <literal>\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}</literal>
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underline{text}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underline{text}</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
</term><listitem><para>Causes <replaceable>text</replaceable>, which may be either math mode or not, to be
underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of
descenders.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdots</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdots</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Produces a vertical ellipsis.
+</term><listitem><para>Produces a vertical ellipsis.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
@@ -6886,6 +7703,42 @@
mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”.
</para>
+<sect1 label="17.1" id="_005censuremath">
+<title><literal>\ensuremath</literal></title>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\ensuremath{<replaceable>formula</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\ensuremath</literal> command ensures that <replaceable>formula</replaceable> is typeset in
+math mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used.
+</para>
+<para>For instance:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{report}
+\newcommand{\ab}{\ensuremath{(\delta, \varepsilon)}}
+\begin{document}
+Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac{1}{\pi}, 0)\), ...
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that
+they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for
+<literal>\leadsto</literal>:
+</para>
+<!-- Vincent 2 Karl : "Tous les chemins mènent à Rome" is a French saying -->
+<!-- meaning that there are many different ways to get the same result. I -->
+<!-- am not sure whether in English the given example is also funny. -->
+<screen>\documentclass{report}
+\usepackage{amssymb}
+\newcommand{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}{}
+\let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto
+\renewcommand\leadsto{\ensuremath{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}}
+\begin{document}
+All roads \leadsto\ Rome.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter label="18" id="Page-styles">
<title>Page styles</title>
@@ -7058,7 +7911,7 @@
<para>Normally when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both. This
-command’s starred version <literal>\hspace*{..}</literal> puts a non-discardable
+command’s starred version <literal>\hspace*{...}</literal> puts a non-discardable
invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
output.
</para>
@@ -7106,7 +7959,7 @@
sentence unless it is preceded by a capital letter, in which case it
takes that period for part of an abbreviation. Note that if a
sentence-ending period is immediately followed by a right parenthesis or
-bracket, or right single or double quote, then the intersentence space
+bracket, or right single or double quote, then the inter-sentence space
follows that parenthesis or quote.
</para>
<para>If you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not a
@@ -7115,61 +7968,45 @@
a tie (<literal>~</literal>). Examples are <literal>Nat.\ Acad.\ Science</literal>, and
<literal>Mr.~Bean</literal>, and <literal>(manure, etc.)\ for sale</literal>.
</para>
-<para>For other use of <literal>\ </literal>, see also <link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-CS">\(SPACE) after CS</link>.
+<para>For another use of <literal>\ </literal>, see <link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence">\(SPACE) after control sequence</link>.
</para>
<para>In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
-period that ends the sentence, then put <literal>\@</literal> on the left of that
-period. For example, <literal>book by the MAA\@.</literal> will have intersentence
+period that ends the sentence, then put <literal>\@</literal> before that period.
+For example, <literal>book by the MAA\@.</literal> will have inter-sentence
spacing after the period.
</para>
-<para>In contrast, putting <literal>\@</literal> on the right of a period tells &tex;
-that the period does not end the sentence. In the example
-<literal>reserved words (if, then, etc.\@) are different</literal>, &tex; will put
-interword space after the closing parenthesis (note that <literal>\@</literal> is
-before the parenthesis).
+<para>In contrast, putting <literal>\@</literal> after a period tells &tex; that the
+period does not end the sentence. In the example <literal>reserved words
+(if, then, etc.\@) are different</literal>, &tex; will put interword space
+after the closing parenthesis (note that <literal>\@</literal> is before the
+parenthesis).
</para>
+
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="19.4" id="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-CS">
-<title><literal>\ </literal> after a control sequence</title>
+<sect1 label="19.4" id="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence">
+<title><literal>\ </literal> after control sequence</title>
-<para>The <literal>\ </literal> command is often used after control sequences to keep them
-from gobbling the space that follows, as in <literal>\TeX\ is a nice
-system.</literal> And, under normal circumstances <literal>\</literal><keycap>tab</keycap> and
-<literal>\</literal><keycap>newline</keycap> are equivalent to <literal>\ </literal>. For other use of
+<para>The <literal>\ </literal> command is often used after control sequences to keep
+them from gobbling the space that follows, as in ‘<literal>\TeX\ is nice</literal>’.
+And, under normal circumstances, <literal>\</literal><keycap>tab</keycap> and
+<literal>\</literal><keycap>newline</keycap> are equivalent to <literal>\ </literal>. For another use of
<literal>\ </literal>, see also <link linkend="_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040">\(SPACE) and \@</link>.
</para>
<para>Some people prefer to use <literal>{}</literal> for the same purpose, as in
-<literal>\TeX{} is a nice system.</literal> This has the advantage that you can
-always write it the same way, like <literal>\TeX{}</literal>, whether it is
-followed by a space or by a punctuation mark. Please compare:
+<literal>\TeX{} is nice</literal>. This has the advantage that you can always
+write it the same way, namely <literal>\TeX{}</literal>, whether it is followed
+by a space or by a punctuation mark. Compare:
</para>
<screen>\TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.
\TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.
</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>xspace</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>xspace</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Some individual commands, notably those defined with the <literal>xspace</literal>,
+package do not follow the standard behavior.
+</para>
-<para>When you define user commands (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</link>) you
-can prevent the space gobbling after the command by using the package
-<literal>xspace</literal> and inserting <literal>\xspace</literal> at the end of the definition
-For instance:
-</para><screen>\documentclass{minimal}
-\usepackage{xspace}
-\newcommand*{\Loup}{Grand Cric\xspace}
-\begin{document}
-Que le \Loup me croque !
-\end{document}
-</screen>
-<para>A quick hack to use <literal>\xspace</literal> for existing command is as follows:
-</para><screen>\documentclass{minimal}
-\usepackage{xspace}
-\newcommand*{\SansXspaceTeX}{}
-\let\SansXspaceTeX\TeX
-\renewcommand{\TeX}{\SansXspaceTeX\xspace}
-\begin{document}
-\TeX is a nice system.
-\end{document}
-</screen>
-
</sect1>
<sect1 label="19.5" id="_005cfrenchspacing">
<title><literal>\frenchspacing</literal></title>
@@ -7176,10 +8013,10 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nonfrenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, intersentence</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, inter-sentence</primary></indexterm>
<para>This declaration (from Plain &tex;) causes &latex; to treat
-intersentence spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
+inter-sentence spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
</para>
<para>In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions, including
English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or after other
@@ -7279,10 +8116,10 @@
the natural length of the total vertical space equal to <replaceable>length</replaceable>.
</para>
<para>Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
-environment that starts a new paragraph. (For instance, a Theorem
-environment is defined to begin and end in <literal>\addvspace{..}</literal> so
-that two consecutive Theorem’s are separated by one vertical space, not
-two.)
+environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a Theorem
+environment is defined to begin and end with <literal>\addvspace{...}</literal>
+so that two consecutive Theorem’s are separated by one vertical space,
+not two.
</para>
<para>This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
</para>
@@ -7298,23 +8135,20 @@
<para>These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the
document class.
</para>
-<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\bigskip</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskip</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskipamount</primary></indexterm>
<para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about one line
space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the <literal>book</literal> and
<literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</literal>).
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\medskip</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskip</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\medskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskipamount</primary></indexterm>
<para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\medskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about half of
a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the <literal>book</literal>
and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</literal>).
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\smallskip</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskip</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\smallskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskipamount</primary></indexterm>
<para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\smallskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about a
quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the
<literal>book</literal> and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>3pt plus 1pt minus
@@ -7370,10 +8204,14 @@
<para>Add the vertical space <replaceable>length</replaceable>. This can be negative or positive,
and is a rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
</para>
-<para>&latex; removes the vertical space from <literal>\vfill</literal> at a page break,
-that is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version
-<literal>\vspace*{..}</literal> causes the space to stay.
+<para>&latex; removes the vertical space from <literal>\vspace</literal> at a page
+break, that is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version
+<literal>\vspace*{...}</literal> causes the space to stay.
</para>
+<para>If <literal>\vspace</literal> is used in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode), the space is inserted <emphasis>after</emphasis> the line with
+the <literal>\vspace</literal> command. A new paragraph is not started.
+</para>
<para>In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
</para>
@@ -7445,12 +8283,16 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>lrbox</primary></indexterm>
-<para><literal>\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}</literal>
+<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<para>This is the environment form of <literal>\sbox</literal>.
+<screen>\begin{lrbox}{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>text </replaceable>
+\end{lrbox}
+</screen>
+<para>This is the environment form of <link linkend="_005csbox"><literal>\sbox</literal></link>.
</para>
-<para>The text inside the environment is saved in the box <literal>cmd</literal>, which
-must have been declared with <literal>\newsavebox</literal>.
+<para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> inside the environment is saved in the box <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>,
+which must have been declared with <literal>\newsavebox</literal>.
</para>
</sect1>
@@ -7508,9 +8350,13 @@
</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>text</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>the text that goes inside the parbox.
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-<para>The optional <replaceable>position</replaceable> argument allows you to align either the
-top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding
-text (default is top).
+<para>By default &latex; will position vertically a parbox so its center
+lines up with the center of the surrounding text line. When the
+optional <replaceable>position</replaceable> argument is present and equal either to ‘<literal>t</literal>’
+or ‘<literal>b</literal>’, this allows you respectively to align either the top or
+bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text. You
+may also specify ‘<literal>m</literal>’ for <replaceable>position</replaceable> to get the default
+behaviour.
</para>
<para>The optional <replaceable>height</replaceable> argument overrides the natural height of the box.
</para>
@@ -7536,7 +8382,7 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\raisebox{distance}[<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>depth</replaceable>]{text}
+<screen>\raisebox{<replaceable>distance</replaceable>}[<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>depth</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>The <literal>\raisebox</literal> command raises or lowers <replaceable>text</replaceable>. The first
mandatory argument specifies how high <replaceable>text</replaceable> is to be raised (or
@@ -7543,9 +8389,9 @@
lowered if it is a negative amount). <replaceable>text</replaceable> itself is processed
in LR mode.
</para>
-<para>The optional arguments <replaceable>height</replaceable> and <replaceable>depth</replaceable> are dimensions.
-If they are specified, &latex; treats <replaceable>text</replaceable> as extending a
-certain distance above the baseline (height) or below (depth),
+<para>The optional arguments <replaceable>height</replaceable> and <replaceable>depth</replaceable> are dimensions. If
+they are specified, &latex; treats <replaceable>text</replaceable> as extending a certain
+distance above the baseline (<replaceable>height</replaceable>) or below (<replaceable>depth</replaceable>),
ignoring its natural height and depth.
</para>
@@ -7614,11 +8460,13 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>reserved characters</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, reserved</primary></indexterm>
-
-<para>The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called
-“reserved characters” or “special characters”.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>special characters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, special</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes (for
+example, the percent sign <literal>%</literal> is for comments) so they are
+called <firstterm>reserved characters</firstterm> or <firstterm>special characters</firstterm>.
</para>
-<screen># $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+<screen># $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
</screen>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\#</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\$</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7627,39 +8475,53 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\_</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\{</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\}</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex;
-will do something special. If you simply want the character to be
-printed as itself, include a <literal>\</literal> in front of the character. For
-example, <literal>\$</literal> will produce <literal>$</literal> in your output.
+<para>If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash <literal>\</literal> in front of the character. Thus,
+<literal>\$1.23</literal> will produce <literal>$1.23</literal> in your output.
</para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backslash</primary></indexterm>
-<para>One exception to this rule is <literal>\</literal> itself, because <literal>\\</literal> has
-its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by
-typing <literal>$\backslash$</literal> in your file, and a typewriter <literal>\</literal> is
-produced by using ‘<literal>\</literal>’ in a verbatim command (see <link linkend="verbatim">verbatim</link>).
-</para>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\~</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\^</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Also, <literal>\~</literal> and <literal>\^</literal> place tilde and circumflex accents over
-the following letter, as in õ and ô (see <link linkend="Accents">Accents</link>); to get
-a standalone <literal>~</literal> or <literal>^</literal>, you can again use a verbatim
-command.
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbackslash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use <literal>\~{}</literal> (omitting the curly braces would result in the next
+character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text
+body font circumflex use <literal>\^{}</literal>. A text body font backslash
+results from <literal>\textbackslash{}</literal>.
</para>
+<para>To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
+<literal>\verb!!</literal>, as below.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>In that example the double backslash <literal>\\</literal> is only there to
+split the lines.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.2" id="Symbols-by-font-position">
+<title>Symbols by font position</title>
+
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\symbol</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>accessing any character of a font</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>font symbols, by number</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you
-know its number by using the <literal>\symbol</literal> command. For example, the
-visible space character used in the <literal>\verb*</literal> command has the code
-decimal 32, so it can be typed as <literal>\symbol{32}</literal>.
+<para>You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the <literal>\symbol</literal> command. For example, the visible space character
+used in the <literal>\verb*</literal> command has the code decimal 32, so it can be
+typed as <literal>\symbol{32}</literal>.
</para>
-<para>You can also specify octal numbers with <literal>'</literal> or hexadecimal numbers
-with <literal>"</literal>, so the previous example could also be written as
-<literal>\symbol{'40}</literal> or <literal>\symbol{"20}</literal>.
+<para>You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a <literal>'</literal>
+prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a <literal>"</literal> prefix, so the previous
+example could also be written as <literal>\symbol{'40}</literal> or
+<literal>\symbol{"20}</literal>.
</para>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="21.2" id="Text-symbols">
+<sect1 label="21.3" id="Text-symbols">
<title>Text symbols</title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>text symbols</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7724,7 +8586,7 @@
</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\textparagraph</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph symbol</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>pilcrow</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+<para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow): ¶.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pounds</primary></indexterm><literal>\pounds</literal>
</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\textsterling</literal>
@@ -7746,8 +8608,9 @@
<para>Right (closing) quote: ’.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\S</primary></indexterm><literal>\S</literal>
-</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>section symbol</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Section symbol.
+</term><listitem><para>\itemx \textsection
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section symbol</primary></indexterm>
+Section sign: §.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TeX</primary></indexterm><literal>\TeX</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>&tex; logo</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7808,8 +8671,8 @@
<para><replaceable>letter</replaceable> in a circle, as in ®.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcompwordmark</literal>
-</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcapitalwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcapitalwordmark</literal>
-</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textascenderwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textascenderwordmark</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcapitalcompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcapitalcompwordmark</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textascendercompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textascendercompwordmark</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>composite word mark, in text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cap height</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ascender height</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7826,7 +8689,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
<para>Double dagger: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\ddag</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdollar (or <literal>$</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdollar (or <literal>$</literal>)</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdollar (or <literal>\$</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdollar (or <literal>\$</literal>)</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dollar sign</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>currency, dollar</primary></indexterm>
<para>Dollar sign: $.
@@ -7872,7 +8735,7 @@
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textperiodcentered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textperiodcentered</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, centered, in text</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centered period, in text</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Centered period: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\cdot</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Centered period: ·.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquestiondown (or <literal>?`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquestiondown (or <literal>?`</literal>)</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>question mark, upside-down</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7883,7 +8746,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double left quote</primary></indexterm>
<para>Double left quote: “.
</para>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotedblright (or <literal>'</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotedblright (or <literal>'</literal>)</literal>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotedblright (or <literal>''</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotedblright (or <literal>''</literal>)</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right quote, double</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double right quote</primary></indexterm>
<para>Double right quote: ”.
@@ -7898,6 +8761,12 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>single right quote</primary></indexterm>
<para>Single right quote: ’.
</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotesingle</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotesingle</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>quote, single straight</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>straight single quote</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>single quote, straight</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotestraightbase</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotestraightbase</literal>
</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotestraightdblbase</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotestraightdblbase</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>quote, straight base</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7922,7 +8791,7 @@
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttrademark</primary></indexterm><literal>\texttrademark</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>trademark symbol</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Trademark symbol: <inlineequation><mathphrase>^{\hbox{TM}}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+<para>Trademark symbol: ™.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttwelveudash</primary></indexterm><literal>\texttwelveudash</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>two-thirds em-dash</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7940,7 +8809,7 @@
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="21.3" id="Accents">
+<sect1 label="21.4" id="Accents">
<title>Accents</title>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>accents</primary></indexterm>
@@ -7947,6 +8816,7 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, accented</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letters, accented</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multilingual support</primary></indexterm>
<para>&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and
@@ -8105,16 +8975,19 @@
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="21.4" id="Non_002dEnglish-characters">
-<title>Non-English characters</title>
+<sect1 label="21.5" id="Additional-Latin-letters">
+<title>Additional Latin letters</title>
+<anchor id="Non_002dEnglish-characters"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Latin letters, additional</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letters, additional Latin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>extended Latin</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>special characters</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>non-English characters</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, non-English</primary></indexterm>
-<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letters, non-English</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly
-used in languages other than English.
+<para>Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters (beyond
+A–Z) extending the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
+than English.
</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\aa</literal>
</term><term><literal>\AA</literal>
@@ -8136,13 +9009,17 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DH (Ð)</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Icelandic eth</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>eth, Icelandic letter</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð.
+<para>Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. Not available with OT1
+encoding, you need the <filename>fontenc</filename> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as T1.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\dj</literal>
</term><term><literal>\DJ</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dj</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DJ</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke.
+<para>Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke. Not
+available with OT1 encoding, you need the <filename>fontenc</filename> package to
+select an alternate font encoding, such as T1.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ij</literal>
</term><term><literal>\IJ</literal>
@@ -8162,7 +9039,7 @@
</term><term><literal>\NG</literal>
</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ng</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\NG</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Latin letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+<para>Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\o</literal>
</term><term><literal>\O</literal>
@@ -8192,12 +9069,14 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TH (Þ)</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Icelandic thorn</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thorn, Icelandic letter</primary></indexterm>
-<para>Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ.
+<para>Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. Not available with OT1
+encoding, you need the <filename>fontenc</filename> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as T1.
</para>
</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="21.5" id="_005crule">
+<sect1 label="21.6" id="_005crule">
<title><literal>\rule</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rule</primary></indexterm>
@@ -8220,7 +9099,7 @@
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
</sect1>
-<sect1 label="21.6" id="_005ctoday">
+<sect1 label="21.7" id="_005ctoday">
<title><literal>\today</literal></title>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\today</primary></indexterm>
@@ -8227,11 +9106,23 @@
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>date, today’s</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>\today</literal> command produces today’s date, in the format
-‘<literal><replaceable>month</replaceable> <replaceable>dd</replaceable>, <replaceable>yyyy</replaceable></literal>’; for example, ‘July 4, 1976’.
+‘<literal><replaceable>month</replaceable> <replaceable>dd</replaceable>, <replaceable>yyyy</replaceable></literal>’; for example, ‘<literal>July 4, 1976</literal>’.
It uses the predefined counters <literal>\day</literal>, <literal>\month</literal>, and
<literal>\year</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">\day \month \year</link>) to do this. It is not
updated as the program runs.
</para>
+<para>Multilingual packages like <filename>babel</filename> or classes like <filename>lettre</filename>,
+among others, will localize <literal>\today</literal>. For example, the following
+will output ‘<literal>4 juillet 1976</literal>’:
+</para>
+<screen>\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+\documentclass{minimal}
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\begin{document}
+\today
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>datetime</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>datetime</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>datetime</literal> package, among others, can produce a wide variety
of other date formats.
@@ -8248,7 +9139,10 @@
<para>A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole
input in a single large file, it’s more efficient to split it into
several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
+there is one that is the
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>root file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>file, root</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>root file</firstterm>; it is the one whose name you type
when you run &latex;.
</para>
<para>See <link linkend="filecontents">filecontents</link>, for an environment that allows bundling an
@@ -8272,7 +9166,7 @@
</para>
<para>Given an <literal>\includeonly</literal> command, the <literal>\include</literal> actions are
only run if <replaceable>file</replaceable> is listed as an argument to
-<literal>\includeonly</literal>. See the next section.
+<literal>\includeonly</literal>. See <link linkend="_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</link>.
</para>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nested <literal>\include</literal>, not allowed</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>\include</literal> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
@@ -8291,9 +9185,9 @@
</screen>
<para>The <literal>\includeonly</literal> command controls which files will be read by
subsequent <literal>\include</literal> commands. The list of filenames is
-comma-separated. Each <replaceable>file</replaceable> must exactly match a filename
-specified in a <literal>\include</literal> command for the selection to be
-effective.
+comma-separated. Each element <replaceable>file1</replaceable>, <replaceable>file2</replaceable>, … must
+exactly match a filename specified in a <literal>\include</literal> command for the
+selection to be effective.
</para>
<para>This command can only appear in the preamble.
</para>
@@ -8360,12 +9254,16 @@
<sect2 label="23.1.1" id="_005caddcontentsline">
<title><literal>\addcontentsline</literal></title>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addcontentsline{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addcontentsline</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents entry, manually adding</primary></indexterm>
-<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal>{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
-command adds an entry to the specified list or table where:
+<para>Synopsis:
</para>
+<screen>\addcontentsline{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command adds an entry to the specified list
+or table where:
+</para>
<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>ext</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
typically one of: <literal>toc</literal> (table of contents), <literal>lof</literal> (list of
@@ -8379,16 +9277,17 @@
</term><listitem><para>The name of the sectional unit: <literal>part</literal>, <literal>chapter</literal>,
<literal>section</literal>, <literal>subsection</literal>, <literal>subsubsection</literal>.
</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lof</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>For the list of figures.
+</term><listitem><para>For the list of figures: <literal>figure</literal>.
</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lot</literal>
-</term><listitem><para>For the list of tables.
+</term><listitem><para>For the list of tables: <literal>table</literal>.
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
-</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>entry</replaceable>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>text</replaceable>
</term><listitem><para>The text of the entry.
</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\contentsline</primary></indexterm>
-<para>What is written to the <filename>.<replaceable>ext</replaceable></filename> file is the
-command <literal>\contentsline{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}</literal>.
+<para>What is written to the <filename>.<replaceable>ext</replaceable></filename> file is the command
+<literal>\contentsline{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}</literal>, where
+<literal><replaceable>num</replaceable></literal> is the current value of counter <literal><replaceable>unit</replaceable></literal>.
</para>
<!-- xx how hardwired are these values? other unit names? -->
@@ -8450,7 +9349,7 @@
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\index</primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.idx</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
<para>The command <literal>\index{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> writes an index entry for
-<replaceable>text</replaceable> to an auxiliary file with the <filename>.idx</filename> extension.
+<replaceable>text</replaceable> to an auxiliary file named with the <filename>.idx</filename> extension.
</para>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexentry</primary></indexterm>
<para>Specifically, what gets written is the command
@@ -8479,22 +9378,25 @@
This results in a <filename>.ind</filename> file, which can then be read to typeset
the index.
</para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>printindex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printindex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>makeidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>makeidx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>The index is usually generated with the <literal>\printindex</literal> command.
This is defined in the <literal>makeidx</literal> package, so
<literal>\usepackage{makeidx}</literal> needs to be in the preamble.
</para>
-<indexterm role="fn"><primary>indexspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexspace</primary></indexterm>
<para>The rubber length <literal>\indexspace</literal> is inserted before each new
letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘<literal>10pt plus5pt
minus3pt</literal>’.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>showidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>showidx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>showidx</literal> package causes each index entries to be shown in
the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in
preparing the index.
</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>multind</literal></primary></indexterm>
<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>multind</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
<para>The <literal>multind</literal> package supports multiple indexes. See also the
&tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
@@ -8520,7 +9422,7 @@
<replaceable>letter body</replaceable>
\closing{<replaceable>closing text</replaceable>}
\end{letter}
- ... more letters ...
+... more letters ...
\end{document}
</screen>
<para>Produce one or more letters.
@@ -8546,13 +9448,13 @@
under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.
</para>
-<para>Each letter environment begins with a required <literal>\opening</literal> command
+<para>Each <literal>letter</literal> environment body begins with a required <literal>\opening</literal> command
such as <literal>\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}</literal>. The <replaceable>letter body</replaceable>
-text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain everything from from
+text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain everything from
enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands such as
<literal>\chapter</literal> that make no sense in a letter are turned off. Each
-letter environment typically ends with a <literal>\closing</literal> command such as
-<literal>\closing{Yours,}</literal>.
+<literal>letter</literal> environment body typically ends with a <literal>\closing</literal>
+command such as <literal>\closing{Yours,}</literal>.
</para>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for letters</primary></indexterm>
<para>Additional material may come after the <literal>\closing</literal>. You can say who
@@ -8629,12 +9531,12 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\cc{<replaceable>first name</replaceable> \\
- .. }
+ ... }
</screen>
<para>Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent. This
command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
<literal>\closing</literal>. Separate multiple lines with a double
-backslash <literal>\\</literal>.
+backslash <literal>\\</literal>, as in:
</para>
<screen>\cc{President \\
Vice President}
@@ -8650,7 +9552,7 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\closing{text}
+<screen>\closing{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature, there
is a <literal>\closing</literal> (although this command is optional). For example,
@@ -8668,7 +9570,7 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\encl{<replaceable>first enclosed object</replaceable> \\
- .. }
+ ... }
</screen>
<para>Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
optional; when it is used, it typically is put after <literal>\closing</literal>.
@@ -8718,6 +9620,8 @@
in the argument to the <literal>letter</literal> environment. By default
<literal>\mlabel</literal> ignores the first argument, the <replaceable>sender address</replaceable>.
</para>
+<!-- xxx TODO, align on latex2e-fr.texi, see https://mail.gna.org/public/latexrefman-discuss/2015-10/msg00000.html -->
+
</sect1>
<sect1 label="24.7" id="_005cname">
<title><literal>\name</literal></title>
@@ -8744,7 +9648,7 @@
<screen>\opening{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para>This command is required. It starts a letter, following the
-<literal>\begin{letter}{..}</literal>. The mandatory argument <replaceable>text</replaceable> is the
+<literal>\begin{letter}{...}</literal>. The mandatory argument <replaceable>text</replaceable> is the
text that starts your letter. For instance:
</para>
<screen>\opening{Dear John:}
@@ -8763,7 +9667,7 @@
<para>Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
<literal>\closing</literal>.
</para>
-<screen>\ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
+<screen>\ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
</screen>
</sect1>
@@ -8773,7 +9677,7 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
<screen>\signature{<replaceable>first line</replaceable> \\
- .. }
+ ... }
</screen>
<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\signature</primary></indexterm>
@@ -8853,13 +9757,13 @@
<para>Synopsis:
</para>
-<screen>\typein[<replaceable>\cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}
+<screen>\typein[\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}
</screen>
<para><literal>\typein</literal> prints <replaceable>msg</replaceable> on the terminal and causes &latex; to
stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If
-the optional <replaceable>\cmd</replaceable> argument is omitted, the typed input is
+the optional <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> argument is omitted, the typed input is
processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the
-<literal>\typein</literal> command. If the <replaceable>\cmd</replaceable> argument is present, it
+<literal>\typein</literal> command. If the <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> argument is present, it
must be a command name. This command name is then defined or
redefined to be the typed input.
</para>
@@ -9002,6 +9906,7 @@
<ulink url="http://tug.org/TUGboat">http://tug.org/TUGboat</ulink>.
</para>
<screen>\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
\usepackage{graphicx}
\usepackage{ifpdf}
\ifpdf
@@ -9010,6 +9915,8 @@
\usepackage{url}
\fi
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
\title{Example \TUB\ article}
% repeat info for each author.
@@ -9018,6 +9925,8 @@
\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
\begin{document}
\maketitle
@@ -9024,36 +9933,34 @@
\begin{abstract}
This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
\end{abstract}
\section{Introduction}
-This is an example article for \TUB, from
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
-\texttt{hyperref} package for active urls in the \acro{PDF} output.
-Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
-The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more:
-
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
\begin{verbatim}[\small]
\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
-\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX
-\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
-\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
\TUB \TUG \tug
-\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
-\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
-\careof \thinskip
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
\cs{fred} -> \fred
-\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
\meta{fred} -> <fred>
\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
@@ -9060,10 +9967,15 @@
\booktitle{Book of Fred}
\end{verbatim}
-For more information, see the ltubguid document at:
-\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
-(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references).
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
Email \verb|tugboat at tug.org| if problems or questions.
\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
<html>
<!-- This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a
-document preparation system, version of October 2015.
+document preparation system, version of August 2017.
This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in
the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
text was directly copied).
Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
-2014, 2015 Karl Berry.
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017 Karl Berry.
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
@@ -34,12 +34,12 @@
Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. -->
-<!-- Created by GNU Texinfo 6.0, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ -->
+<!-- Created by GNU Texinfo 6.1, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ -->
<head>
-<title>LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2015)</title>
+<title>LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (August 2017)</title>
-<meta name="description" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2015)">
-<meta name="keywords" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2015)">
+<meta name="description" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (August 2017)">
+<meta name="keywords" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (August 2017)">
<meta name="resource-type" content="document">
<meta name="distribution" content="global">
<meta name="Generator" content="makeinfo">
@@ -69,9 +69,8 @@
pre.smallexample {font-size: smaller}
pre.smallformat {font-family: inherit; font-size: smaller}
pre.smalllisp {font-size: smaller}
-span.nocodebreak {white-space: nowrap}
span.nolinebreak {white-space: nowrap}
-span.roman {font-family: serif; font-weight: normal}
+span.roman {font-family: initial; font-weight: normal}
span.sansserif {font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: normal}
ul.no-bullet {list-style: none}
-->
@@ -81,7 +80,7 @@
</head>
<body lang="en">
-<h1 class="settitle" align="center">LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2015)</h1>
+<h1 class="settitle" align="center">LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (August 2017)</h1>
@@ -100,7 +99,7 @@
<li><a name="stoc-Layout-1" href="#toc-Layout-1">5 Layout</a></li>
<li><a name="stoc-Sectioning-1" href="#toc-Sectioning-1">6 Sectioning</a></li>
<li><a name="stoc-Cross-references-1" href="#toc-Cross-references-1">7 Cross references</a></li>
-<li><a name="stoc-Environments-1" href="#toc-Environments-1">8 Environments</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Environments-2" href="#toc-Environments-2">8 Environments</a></li>
<li><a name="stoc-Line-breaking-1" href="#toc-Line-breaking-1">9 Line breaking</a></li>
<li><a name="stoc-Page-breaking-1" href="#toc-Page-breaking-1">10 Page breaking</a></li>
<li><a name="stoc-Footnotes-1" href="#toc-Footnotes-1">11 Footnotes</a></li>
@@ -137,11 +136,25 @@
<li><a name="toc-Starting-and-ending-1" href="#Starting-and-ending">2.1 Starting and ending</a></li>
<li><a name="toc-Output-files-1" href="#Output-files">2.2 Output files</a></li>
<li><a name="toc-TeX-engines-1" href="#TeX-engines">2.3 TeX engines</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-LaTeX-command-syntax-1" href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">2.4 LaTeX command syntax</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-LaTeX-command-syntax-1" href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">2.4 LaTeX command syntax</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Environments-1" href="#Environment">2.4.1 Environments</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Command-declarations" href="#Declaration">2.4.2 Command declarations</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother-1" href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">2.4.3 <code>\makeatletter</code> and <code>\makeatother</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_0040ifstar-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">2.4.3.1 <code>\@ifstar</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ </ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-Document-classes-1" href="#Document-classes">3 Document classes</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a name="toc-Document-class-options-1" href="#Document-class-options">3.1 Document class options</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Additional-packages-1" href="#Additional-packages">3.2 Additional packages</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Class-and-package-construction-1" href="#Class-and-package-construction">3.3 Class and package construction</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Class-and-package-structure-1" href="#Class-and-package-structure">3.3.1 Class and package structure</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Class-and-package-commands-1" href="#Class-and-package-commands">3.3.2 Class and package commands</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-Fonts-1" href="#Fonts">4 Fonts</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
@@ -158,7 +171,10 @@
<li><a name="toc-Page-layout-parameters-1" href="#Page-layout-parameters">5.5 Page layout parameters</a></li>
<li><a name="toc-Floats-1" href="#Floats">5.6 Floats</a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a name="toc-Sectioning-1" href="#Sectioning">6 Sectioning</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Sectioning-1" href="#Sectioning">6 Sectioning</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_0040startsection-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">6.1 <code>\@startsection</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-Cross-references-1" href="#Cross-references">7 Cross references</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a name="toc-_005clabel-1" href="#g_t_005clabel">7.1 <code>\label</code></a></li>
@@ -165,7 +181,7 @@
<li><a name="toc-_005cpageref_007bkey_007d" href="#g_t_005cpageref">7.2 <code>\pageref{<var>key</var>}</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005cref_007bkey_007d" href="#g_t_005cref">7.3 <code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a name="toc-Environments-1" href="#Environments">8 Environments</a>
+ <li><a name="toc-Environments-2" href="#Environments">8 Environments</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a name="toc-abstract-1" href="#abstract">8.1 <code>abstract</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-array-1" href="#array">8.2 <code>array</code></a></li>
@@ -191,7 +207,10 @@
</ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-itemize-1" href="#itemize">8.14 <code>itemize</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-letter-environment_003a-writing-letters" href="#letter">8.15 <code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-list-1" href="#list">8.16 <code>list</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-list-1" href="#list">8.16 <code>list</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005citem_003a-An-entry-in-a-list_002e" href="#g_t_005citem">8.16.1 <code>\item</code>: An entry in a list.</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-math-1" href="#math">8.17 <code>math</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-minipage-1" href="#minipage">8.18 <code>minipage</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-picture-1" href="#picture">8.19 <code>picture</code></a>
@@ -242,10 +261,11 @@
<li><a name="toc-_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr-1" href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">9.2 <code>\obeycr</code> & <code>\restorecr</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005cnewline-1" href="#g_t_005cnewline">9.3 <code>\newline</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005c_002d-_0028discretionary-hyphen_0029" href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">9.4 <code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005cfussy-1" href="#g_t_005cfussy">9.5 <code>\fussy</code></a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005csloppy-1" href="#g_t_005csloppy">9.6 <code>\sloppy</code></a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005chyphenation-1" href="#g_t_005chyphenation">9.7 <code>\hyphenation</code></a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak-1" href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">9.8 <code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cdiscretionary-_0028generalized-hyphenation-point_0029" href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary">9.5 <code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfussy-1" href="#g_t_005cfussy">9.6 <code>\fussy</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csloppy-1" href="#g_t_005csloppy">9.7 <code>\sloppy</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chyphenation-1" href="#g_t_005chyphenation">9.8 <code>\hyphenation</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak-1" href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">9.9 <code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-Page-breaking-1" href="#Page-breaking">10 Page breaking</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
@@ -292,8 +312,8 @@
<li><a name="toc-Lengths-1" href="#Lengths">14 Lengths</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a name="toc-Units-of-length-1" href="#Units-of-length">14.1 Units of length</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005csetlength_007b_005clen_007d_007bvalue_007d" href="#g_t_005csetlength">14.2 <code>\setlength{\<var>len</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code></a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005caddtolength_007b_005clen_007d_007bamount_007d" href="#g_t_005caddtolength">14.3 <code>\addtolength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csetlength-1" href="#g_t_005csetlength">14.2 <code>\setlength</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddtolength-1" href="#g_t_005caddtolength">14.3 <code>\addtolength</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005csettodepth-1" href="#g_t_005csettodepth">14.4 <code>\settodepth</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005csettoheight-1" href="#g_t_005csettoheight">14.5 <code>\settoheight</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005csettowidth_007b_005clen_007d_007btext_007d" href="#g_t_005csettowidth">14.6 <code>\settowidth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code></a></li>
@@ -315,7 +335,10 @@
<li><a name="toc-Spacing-in-math-mode-1" href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">16.5 Spacing in math mode</a></li>
<li><a name="toc-Math-miscellany-1" href="#Math-miscellany">16.6 Math miscellany</a></li>
</ul></li>
- <li><a name="toc-Modes-1" href="#Modes">17 Modes</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Modes-1" href="#Modes">17 Modes</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005censuremath-1" href="#g_t_005censuremath">17.1 <code>\ensuremath</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-Page-styles-1" href="#Page-styles">18 Page styles</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a name="toc-_005cmaketitle-1" href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">18.1 <code>\maketitle</code></a></li>
@@ -328,7 +351,7 @@
<li><a name="toc-_005chspace-1" href="#g_t_005chspace">19.1 <code>\hspace</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005chfill-1" href="#g_t_005chfill">19.2 <code>\hfill</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040-1" href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040">19.3 <code>\(SPACE)</code> and \@</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005c--after-a-control-sequence" href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-CS">19.4 <code>\ </code> after a control sequence</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c--after-control-sequence" href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence">19.4 <code>\ </code> after control sequence</a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005cfrenchspacing-1" href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing">19.5 <code>\frenchspacing</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005cthinspace_003a-Insert-1_002f6em" href="#g_t_005cthinspace">19.6 <code>\thinspace</code>: Insert 1/6em</a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005c_002f_003a-Insert-italic-correction" href="#g_t_005c_002f">19.7 <code>\/</code>: Insert italic correction</a></li>
@@ -353,16 +376,18 @@
<li><a name="toc-Special-insertions-1" href="#Special-insertions">21 Special insertions</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a name="toc-Reserved-characters-1" href="#Reserved-characters">21.1 Reserved characters</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-Text-symbols-1" href="#Text-symbols">21.2 Text symbols</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-Accents-1" href="#Accents">21.3 Accents</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-Non_002dEnglish-characters-1" href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">21.4 Non-English characters</a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005crule-1" href="#g_t_005crule">21.5 <code>\rule</code></a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005ctoday-1" href="#g_t_005ctoday">21.6 <code>\today</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Upper-and-lower-case-1" href="#Upper-and-lower-case">21.2 Upper and lower case</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Symbols-by-font-position-1" href="#Symbols-by-font-position">21.3 Symbols by font position</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Text-symbols-1" href="#Text-symbols">21.4 Text symbols</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Accents-1" href="#Accents">21.5 Accents</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Additional-Latin-letters-1" href="#Additional-Latin-letters">21.6 Additional Latin letters</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005crule-1" href="#g_t_005crule">21.7 <code>\rule</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctoday-1" href="#g_t_005ctoday">21.8 <code>\today</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-Splitting-the-input-1" href="#Splitting-the-input">22 Splitting the input</a>
<ul class="no-bullet">
<li><a name="toc-_005cinclude-1" href="#g_t_005cinclude">22.1 <code>\include</code></a></li>
- <li><a name="toc-_005cincludeonly-1" href="#g_t_005cincludeonly">22.2 \<code>includeonly</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cincludeonly-1" href="#g_t_005cincludeonly">22.2 <code>\includeonly</code></a></li>
<li><a name="toc-_005cinput-1" href="#g_t_005cinput">22.3 <code>\input</code></a></li>
</ul></li>
<li><a name="toc-Front_002fback-matter-1" href="#Front_002fback-matter">23 Front/back matter</a>
@@ -408,6 +433,8 @@
+
+
<a name="Top"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
@@ -417,7 +444,7 @@
<h1 class="top">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</h1>
<p>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
-October 2015) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+August 2017) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
</p>
<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="1">About this document</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Bug reporting, etc.
@@ -490,13 +517,11 @@
<a name="About-this-document-1"></a>
<h2 class="chapter">1 About this document</h2>
-<a name="index-bug-reporting"></a>
-<a name="index-reporting-bugs"></a>
-<a name="index-http_003a_002f_002fhome_002egna_002eorg_002flatexrefman-home-page"></a>
+<a name="index-http_003a_002f_002fpuszcza_002egnu_002eorg_002eua_002fsoftware_002flatexrefman_002f-home-page"></a>
<p>This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX
typesetting program (see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>). This document’s home page is
-<a href="http://home.gna.org/latexrefman">http://home.gna.org/latexrefman</a>. That page has links to the
+<a href="http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/">http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</a>. That page has links to the
current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and
subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
</p>
@@ -503,18 +528,20 @@
<a name="index-LaTeX-vs_002e-LaTeX2e"></a>
<p>In this document, we will mostly just use ‘LaTeX’ rather than
‘LaTeX2e’, since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was
-retired many years ago.
+frozen decades ago.
</p>
<a name="index-unofficial-nature-of-this-manual"></a>
<a name="index-LaTeX-Project-team"></a>
-<a name="index-latexrefman_002ddiscuss_0040gna_002eorg-email-address"></a>
+<a name="index-latexrefman_0040tug_002eorg-email-address"></a>
<p>LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
(<a href="http://latex-project.org">http://latex-project.org</a>). The official documentation written by
the LaTeX project is available from their web site. This document is
completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX
-maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this
-document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
-<a href="mailto:latexrefman-discuss at gna.org">latexrefman-discuss at gna.org</a>.
+maintainers.
+<a name="index-bug-reporting"></a>
+<a name="index-reporting-bugs"></a>
+Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them.
+Instead, please send all comments to <a href="mailto:latexrefman at tug.org">latexrefman at tug.org</a>.
</p>
<p>This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
of information about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a few
@@ -533,8 +560,9 @@
</dd>
<dt><a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide">http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide</a></dt>
<dd><a name="index-usrguide-official-documentation"></a>
-<p>The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX;
-there are plenty of others available elsewhere.
+<p>The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX.
+Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent
+of LaTeX itself; one such is the next item:
</p>
</dd>
<dt><a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort">http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</a></dt>
@@ -674,7 +702,7 @@
Portable Document Format <code>.pdf</code> file with <code>dvipdfmx</code>.
The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with
<code>dvitype</code>. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
-available (<a href="http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware">http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware</a>).
+available (<a href="http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware">http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</a>).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>.pdf</code></dt>
@@ -866,6 +894,8 @@
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Declaration" accesskey="2">Declaration</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Change the value or meaning of a command.
</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="3">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Change the status of the at-sign character.
+</td></tr>
</table>
@@ -875,13 +905,14 @@
<p>
Next: <a href="#Declaration" accesskey="n" rel="next">Declaration</a>, Up: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX command syntax</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<h4 class="node-heading">Environment</h4>
+<a name="Environments-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">2.4.1 Environments</h4>
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{<var>environment name</var>}
- ..
+ ...
\end{<var>environment name</var>}
</pre></div>
@@ -891,11 +922,13 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{verse}
- There once was a man from Nantucket \\
- ..
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
\end{verse}
</pre></div>
+<p>See <a href="#Environments">Environments</a> for a list of environments.
+</p>
<p>The <var>environment name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
the end. This includes the case where <var>environment name</var> ends in a
star (<code>*</code>); both the <code>\begin</code> and <code>\end</code> texts must
@@ -908,7 +941,7 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
- .. rows of table ..
+ ... rows of table ...
\end{tabular}
</pre></div>
@@ -917,9 +950,10 @@
<a name="Declaration"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Previous: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environment</a>, Up: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX command syntax</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a>, Previous: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environment</a>, Up: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX command syntax</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<h4 class="node-heading">Declaration</h4>
+<a name="Command-declarations"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">2.4.2 Command declarations</h4>
<p>A command that changes the value, or changes the meaning, of some other
command or parameter. For instance, the <code>\mainmatter</code> command
@@ -927,6 +961,154 @@
</p>
<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Declaration" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Declaration</a>, Up: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="u" rel="up">LaTeX command syntax</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">2.4.3 <code>\makeatletter</code> and <code>\makeatother</code></h4>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @ in their name ..
+\makeatother
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Used to redefine internal LaTeX commands. <code>\makeatletter</code> makes
+the at-sign character <code>@</code> have the category code of a letter,
+11. <code>\makeatother</code> sets the category code of <code>@</code> to 12,
+its original value.
+</p>
+<p>As each character is read by TeX for LaTeX, it is assigned a
+character category code, or
+<a name="index-catcode"></a>
+<a name="index-character-category-code"></a>
+<a name="index-category-code_002c-character"></a>
+<em>catcode</em> for short. For instance, the backslash <code>\</code> is
+assigned the catcode 0, for characters that start a command. These two
+commands alter the catcode assigned to <code>@</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The alteration is needed because many of LaTeX’s commands use
+<code>@</code> in their name, to prevent users from accidentally defining a
+command that replaces one of LaTeX’s own. Command names consist of a
+category 0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed by letters,
+category 11 characters (except that a command name can also consist
+of a category 0 character followed by a single non-letter symbol).
+So under the default category codes, user-defined commands cannot
+contain an <code>@</code>. But <code>\makeatletter</code> and <code>\makeatother</code>
+allow users to define or redefine commands named with <code>@</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Use these two commands inside a <samp>.tex</samp> file, in the preamble, when
+defining or redefining a command with <code>@</code> in its name. Don’t use
+them inside <samp>.sty</samp> or <samp>.cls</samp> files since the
+<code>\usepackage</code> and <code>\documentclass</code> commands set the at sign to
+have the character code of a letter.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-macros2e"></a>
+<a name="index-macros2e-package"></a>
+<p>For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign
+in their names see <a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e">http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e</a>. These macros are
+mainly intended to package or class authors.
+</p>
+<p>The example below is typical. In the user’s class file is a command
+<code>\thesis at universityname</code>. The user wants to change the
+definition. These three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+<code>\begin{document}</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\thesis at universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
+\makeatother
+</pre></div>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="1">\@ifstar</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Define your own commands with *-variants.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040ifstar"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="u" rel="up">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040ifstar-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsubsection">2.4.3.1 <code>\@ifstar</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_0040ifstar"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-star_002dvariants"></a>
+<a name="index-star_002dvariants_002c-commands"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd at star}{\mycmd at nostar}}
+\newcommand{\mycmd at nostar}[<var>non-starred command number of args</var>]{<var>body of non-starred command</var>}
+\newcommand{\mycmd at star}[<var>starred command number of args</var>]{<var>body of starred command</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Many standard LaTeX environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character <code>*</code>, an asterisk.
+Examples are the <code>table</code> and <code>table*</code> environments and the
+<code>\section</code> and <code>\section*</code> commands.
+</p>
+<p>When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because <code>\newenvironment</code> and <code>\renewenvironment</code> allow the
+environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more
+complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command,
+given above as <code>\mycmd</code>, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed
+by a star. For instance, LaTeX does not really have a
+<code>\section*</code> command; instead, the <code>\section</code> command peeks
+ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to
+one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two
+are <code>\mycmd at nostar</code> and <code>\mycmd at star</code>. They could take the
+same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all.
+As always, in a LaTeX document a command using at-sign <code>@</code>
+must be enclosed inside a <code>\makeatletter ... \makeatother</code> block
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example of <code>\@ifstar</code> defines the command <code>\ciel</code> and a
+variant <code>\ciel*</code>. Both have one required argument. A call to
+<code>\ciel{night}</code> will return "starry night sky" while
+<code>\ciel*{blue}</code> will return "starry not blue sky".
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand*{\ciel at unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
+\newcommand*{\ciel at starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+\newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel at starred}{\ciel at unstarred}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than does the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent
+007’s <code>``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond},
+\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''</code> is equivalent to <code>``My name is
+\textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''</code>
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand*{\agentsecret at unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\agentsecret at starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{\@ifstar{\agentsecret at starred}{\agentsecret at unstarred}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of
+<code>\@ifstar</code>. The <samp>suffix</samp> package allows the construct
+<code>\newcommand\mycommand{<var>unstarred version</var>}</code> followed by
+<code>\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{<var>starred version</var>}</code>. And
+LaTeX3 has the <samp>xparse</samp> package that allows this code.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
+ {<var>starred version</var>}%
+ {<var>unstarred version</var>}%
+ }
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
<a name="Document-classes"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
@@ -988,6 +1170,10 @@
<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Document-class-options" accesskey="1">Document class options</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Global options.
</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="2">Additional packages</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Bring in packages.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="3">Class and package construction</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Create new classes and packages.
+</td></tr>
</table>
@@ -995,7 +1181,7 @@
<a name="Document-class-options"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="n" rel="next">Additional packages</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="Document-class-options-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">3.1 Document class options</h3>
@@ -1036,28 +1222,33 @@
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dt><code>a4paper</code></dt>
-<dd><p>210 by 297 mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+<dd><p>210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
</p>
</dd>
+<dt><code>a5paper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
+</p>
+</dd>
<dt><code>b5paper</code></dt>
-<dd><p>176 by 250 mm (about 7 by 9.875 inches)
+<dd><p>176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>executivepaper</code></dt>
-<dd><p>7.25 by 10.5 inches
+<dd><p>7.25 by 10.5 inches
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>legalpaper</code></dt>
-<dd><p>8.5 by 14 inches
+<dd><p>8.5 by 14 inches
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>letterpaper</code></dt>
-<dd><p>8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
+<dd><p>8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
</p></dd>
</dl>
<a name="index-_005cpdfpagewidth"></a>
<a name="index-_005cpdfpageheight"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-geometry"></a>
<a name="index-geometry-package"></a>
<p>When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX
(see <a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>), options other than <code>letterpaper</code> set
@@ -1113,7 +1304,10 @@
<dt><code>titlepage</code></dt>
<dt><code>notitlepage</code></dt>
<dd><a name="index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din"></a>
-<p>Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class.
+<p>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
+for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
+<code>report</code> class is <code>titlepage</code>, for the other classes it is
+<code>notitlepage</code>.
</p></dd>
</dl>
@@ -1157,17 +1351,28 @@
<p>The <code>slides</code> class offers the option <code>clock</code> for printing
the time at the bottom of each note.
</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Additional-packages"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="n" rel="next">Class and package construction</a>, Previous: <a href="#Document-class-options" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Document class options</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Additional-packages-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">3.2 Additional packages</h3>
+
<a name="index-loading-additional-packages"></a>
<a name="index-packages_002c-loading-additional"></a>
<a name="index-additional-packages_002c-loading"></a>
<a name="index-_005cusepackage"></a>
-<p>Additional packages are loaded like this:
+<p>Load a package <var>pkg</var>, with the package options given in the comma-separated
+list <var>options</var>, as here.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\usepackage[<var>options</var>]{<var>pkg</var>}
+<pre class="example">\usepackage[<var>options</var>]{<var>pkg</var>}.
</pre></div>
-<p>To specify more than one package, you can separate them with a comma,
+<p>To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
as in <code>\usepackage{<var>pkg1</var>,<var>pkg2</var>,...}</code>, or use multiple
<code>\usepackage</code> commands.
</p>
@@ -1174,11 +1379,539 @@
<a name="index-global-options-1"></a>
<a name="index-options_002c-global"></a>
<p>Any options given in the <code>\documentclass</code> command that are unknown
-by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
<code>\usepackage</code>.
</p>
<hr>
+<a name="Class-and-package-construction"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Additional packages</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Class-and-package-construction-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">3.3 Class and package construction</h3>
+
+<a name="index-document-class-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-document-class"></a>
+<a name="index-new-class-commands"></a>
+
+<p>You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a
+standard header for each page, then you could create a new class
+<code>smcmemo.cls</code> and begin your documents with
+<code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>What separates a package from a document class is that the commands in a
+package are useful across classes while those in a document class are
+specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for a
+package while a command to make the page headers say <code>Memo from the
+SMC Math Department</code> is for a class.
+<a name="index-class-and-package-difference"></a>
+<a name="index-difference-between-class-and-package"></a>
+</p>
+<p>Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign <code>@</code> as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with <code>\makeatletter</code> and
+<code>\makeatother</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a>. This allow
+you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
+Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
+some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
+others. For instance, the class <code>smcmemo</code> might have commands
+<code>\smc at tolist</code>, <code>\smc at fromlist</code>, etc.
+</p>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Class-and-package-structure" accesskey="1">Class and package structure</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Layout of the file.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Class-and-package-commands" accesskey="2">Class and package commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">List of commands.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Class-and-package-structure"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Class-and-package-commands" accesskey="n" rel="next">Class and package commands</a>, Up: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="u" rel="up">Class and package construction</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Class-and-package-structure-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">3.3.1 Class and package structure</h4>
+
+<a name="index-class-and-package-structure"></a>
+<a name="index-class-file-layout"></a>
+<a name="index-package-file-layout"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-document-class-1"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-package"></a>
+<a name="index-class-options-1"></a>
+<a name="index-package-options"></a>
+
+<p>A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+</p><ol>
+<li>In the <em>identification part</em>, the file says that it is a LaTeX
+package or class and describes itself, using the <code>\NeedsTeXFormat</code>
+and <code>\ProvidesClass</code> or <code>\ProvidesPackage</code> commands.
+</li><li> The <em>preliminary declarations part</em> declares some commands and
+can also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+for the code used in the next part. For example, an <code>smcmemo</code>
+class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list of
+people for the to-head, as <code>\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}</code>, and
+therefore needs to define a command
+<code>\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}</code> used in that
+file.
+</li><li> In the <em>handle options part</em> the class or package declares
+and processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+document as <code>\documentclass[<var>option list</var>]{<var>class
+name</var>}</code>, to modify the behavior of the class. An example is when you
+declare <code>\documentclass[11pt]{article}</code> to set the default
+document font size.
+</li><li> Finally, in the <em>more declarations part</em> the class or package usually does
+most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and
+loading other files.
+</li></ol>
+
+
+<p>Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as <samp>stub.cls</samp>
+where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the
+<samp>.tex</samp> file.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{stub}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass{article}
+</pre></div>
+<a name="index-class-file-example"></a>
+
+<p>It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the <code>article</code> class, and then loads the
+<code>article</code> class to provide the basis for this class’s code.
+</p>
+<p>For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+<a href="http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf">http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf</a> (much
+of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+<a href="https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf">https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf</a>.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<a name="Class-and-package-commands"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Class-and-package-structure" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Class and package structure</a>, Up: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="u" rel="up">Class and package construction</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Class-and-package-commands-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">3.3.2 Class and package commands</h4>
+<a name="index-class-and-package-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-class-and-package"></a>
+
+<p>These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\AtBeginDvi{specials}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cAtBeginDvi"></a>
+<p>Save in a box register things that are written to the <samp>.dvi</samp> file
+at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\AtEndOfClass{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\AtEndOfPackage{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cAtEndOfClass"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cAtEndOfPackage"></a>
+<p>Hook to insert <var>code</var> to be executed when LaTeX finishes
+processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks
+multiple times; the <code>code</code> will be executed in the order that you
+called it. See also <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\CheckCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\CheckCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cCheckCommand"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cCheckCommand_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-new-command_002c-check"></a>
+<p>Like <code>\newcommand</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>) but does
+not define <var>cmd</var>; instead it checks that the current definition of
+<var>cmd</var> is exactly as given by <var>definition</var> and is or is not
+<a name="index-long-command"></a>
+<em>long</em> as expected. A long command is a command that accepts
+<code>\par</code> within an argument. The <var>cmd</var> command is expected to be
+long with the unstarred version of <code>\CheckCommand</code>. Raises an
+error when the check fails. This allows you to check before you start
+redefining <code>cmd</code> yourself that no other package has already
+redefined this command.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ClassError{<var>class name</var>}{<var>error text</var>}{<var>help text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageError{<var>package name</var>}{<var>error text</var>}{<var>help text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ClassWarning{<var>class name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageWarning{<var>package name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ClassWarningNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageWarningNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ClassInfo{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageInfo{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ClassInfoNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageInfoNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cClassError"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageError"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cClassWarning"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageWarning"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cClassWarningNoLine"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageWarningNoLine"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cClassInfo"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageInfo"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cClassInfoNoLine"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageInfoNoLine"></a>
+<p>Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+</p>
+<p>For <code>\ClassError</code> and <code>\PackageError</code> the message is
+<var>error text</var>, followed by TeX’s <code>?</code> error prompt. If the
+user then asks for help by typing <code>h</code>, they see the <var>help
+text</var>.
+</p>
+<p>The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+<var>warning text</var> on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+commands write <var>info text</var> only in the transcript file. The
+<code>NoLine</code> versions do not show the number of the line generating the
+message, while the other versions do show that number.
+</p>
+<p>To format the messages, including the <var>help text</var>: use
+<code>\protect</code> to stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+<code>\MessageBreak</code>, and get a space with <code>\space</code> when a space
+character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that LaTeX
+appends a period to the messages.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\CurrentOption</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cCurrentOption"></a>
+<p>Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
+be used within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code>
+or <code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\DeclareOption{<var>option</var>}{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\DeclareOption*{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cDeclareOption"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cDeclareOption_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-class-options-2"></a>
+<a name="index-package-options-1"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-class"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-package-1"></a>
+<p>Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their
+<code>\documentclass</code> command. For example, the <code>smcmemo</code> class
+could have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the
+first page with <code>\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}</code>. The class file
+must contain <code>\DeclareOption{logo}{<var>code</var>}</code> (and later,
+<code>\ProcessOptions</code>).
+</p>
+<p>If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this
+will produce a warning like <code>Unused global option(s): [badoption].</code>
+Change this behaviour with the starred version
+<code>\DeclareOption*{<var>code</var>}</code>. For example, many classes extend
+an existing class, using a declaration such as
+<code>\LoadClass{article}</code>, and for passing extra options to the
+underlying class use code such as this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareOption*{%
+\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Another example is that the class <code>smcmemo</code> may allow users to keep
+lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could invoke
+<code>\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}</code> and it will read the file
+<code>math.memo</code>. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+passes the option to the <code>article</code> class.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
+</pre></div>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\DeclareRobustCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\DeclareRobustCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-new-command_002c-definition"></a>
+<p>Like <code>\newcommand</code> and <code>\newcommand*</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
+within the <var>definition</var> is fragile. (For a discussion of robust and
+fragile commands see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>.) Use this command to define new
+robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+robust. Unlike <code>\newcommand</code> these do not give an error if macro
+<var>cmd</var> already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+transcript file if a command is redefined.
+</p>
+<p>Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those defined
+using <code>\newcommand</code> so unless the command’s data is fragile and the
+command is used within a moving argument, use <code>\newcommand</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-etoolbox"></a>
+<a name="index-etoolbox-package"></a>
+<p>The <code>etoolbox</code> package offers commands <code>\newrobustcmd</code>,
+<code>\newrobustcmd*</code>, <code>\renewrobustcmd</code>, <code>\renewrobustcmd*</code>,
+<code>\providerobustcmd</code>, and <code>\providerobustcmd*</code> which are similar
+to <code>\newcommand</code>, <code>\newcommand*</code>, <code>\renewcommand</code>,
+<code>\renewcommand*</code>, <code>\providecommand</code>, and
+<code>\providecommand*</code>, but define a robust <var>cmd</var> with two advantages
+as compared to <code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code>:
+</p><ol>
+<li> They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than the
+higher level LaTeX <code>\protect</code> mechanism, so they do not incur
+the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+</li><li> They make the same distinction between <code>\new…</code>,
+<code>\renew…</code>, and <code>\provide…</code>, as the standard
+commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine
+<var>cmd</var> that already exists, in that case you need to use either
+<code>\renew…</code> or <code>\provide…</code> or you get an error.
+</li></ol>
+
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\IfFileExists{<var>file name</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\InputIfFileExists{<var>file name</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cIfFileExists"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cInputIfFileExists"></a>
+<p>Execute <var>true code</var> if LaTeX can find the file <samp><var>file
+name</var></samp> and <var>false code</var> otherwise. In the second case it inputs the
+file immediately after executing <var>true code</var>. Thus
+<code>\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{WARNING:
+img.pdf not found}}</code> will include the graphic <samp>img.pdf</samp> if it is
+found but otherwise just give a warning.
+</p>
+<p>This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX uses,
+not only in the current directory. To look only in the current
+directory do something like <code>\IfFileExists{./filename}{<var>true
+code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code>. If you ask for a filename without a
+<code>.tex</code> extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by
+appending the <code>.tex</code>; for more on how LaTeX handles file
+extensions see <a href="#g_t_005cinput">\input</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\LoadClass[<var>options list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\LoadClassWithOptions{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cLoadClass"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cLoadClassWithOptions"></a>
+<p>Load a class, as with <code>\documentclass[<var>options
+list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release info</var>]</code>. An example is
+<code>\LoadClass[twoside]{article}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <var>options list</var>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<var>release date</var> is optional. If present it must have the form
+<var>YYYY/MM/DD</var>.
+</p>
+<p>If you request a <var>release date</var> and the date of
+the package installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning
+on the screen and in the log like <code>You have requested, on input
+line 4, version `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version
+`2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available.</code>
+</p>
+<p>The command version <code>\LoadClassWithOptions</code> uses the list of
+options for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed
+to it via <code>\PassOptionsToClass</code>. This is a convenience command
+that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the standard
+<code>article</code> class, without having to track which options were passed.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ExecuteOptions{<var>options-list</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cExecuteOptions"></a>
+<p>For each option <var>option</var> in the <var>options-list</var>, in order, this command
+executes the command <code>\ds@<var>option</var></code>. If this command is not
+defined then that option is silently ignored.
+</p>
+<p>It can be used to provide a default option list before
+<code>\ProcessOptions</code>. For example, if in a class file you want the
+default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+<code>\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\NeedsTeXFormat{<var>format</var>}[<var>format date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cNeedsTeXFormat"></a>
+<p>Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
+as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+<code>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}</code>. When a document using that class is
+processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+actually being run (including that the <var>format</var> string is case
+sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an error
+like ‘<samp>This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.</samp>’
+</p>
+<p>To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+features, include the optional <var>format date</var> on which those features
+were implemented. If present it must be in the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>.
+If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+<var>format date</var> then you get a warning like ‘<samp>You have requested
+release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is
+available.</samp>’
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\OptionNotUsed</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cOptionNotUsed"></a>
+<p>Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code> or
+<code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
+</p>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\PassOptionsToClass{<var>option list</var>}{<var>class name</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PassOptionsToPackage{<var>option list</var>}{<var>package name</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cPassOptionsToClass"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPassOptionsToPackage"></a>
+<p>Adds the options in the comma-separated list <var>option list</var> to the
+options used by any future <code>\RequirePackage</code> or <code>\usepackage</code>
+command for package <var>package name</var> or the class <var>class name</var>.
+</p>
+<p>The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number of
+times with no options but if you want options then you may only supply
+them when you first load the package. Loading a package with options
+more than once will get you an error like <code>Option clash for package
+foo.</code> (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no conflict between the
+options.)
+</p>
+<p>If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse
+that to once, for example replacing the two
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}</code>
+with the single
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}</code>. But if you
+are loading a package that in turn loads another package then you need
+to queue up the options you desire for this other package. For
+instance, suppose the package <code>foo</code> loads the package
+<code>geometry</code>. Instead of
+<code>\RequirePackage{foo}\RequirePackage[draft]{graphics}</code> you must
+write <code>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics}
+\RequirePackage{foo}</code>. (If <code>foo.sty</code> loads an option in conflict
+with what you want then you may have to look into altering its source.)
+</p>
+<p>These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
+writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the <code>graphicx</code>
+package with the option <code>draft</code> and also wants to use a class
+<code>foo</code> that loads the <code>graphicx</code> package, but without that
+option. The user could start their LaTeX file with
+<code>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ProcessOptions</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ProcessOptions*<var>\@options</var></code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cProcessOptions"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cProcessOptions_002a"></a>
+<p>Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
+in the class file as <code>\ProcessOptions\relax</code> (because of the
+existence of the starred command).
+</p>
+<p>Options come in two types. <em>Local options</em> have been specified for this
+particular package in the <var>options</var> argument of
+<code>\PassOptionsToPackage{<var>options</var>}</code>,
+<code>\usepackage[<var>options</var>]</code>, or
+<code>\RequirePackage[<var>options</var>]</code>. <em>Global options</em> are those given
+by the class user in <code>\documentclass[<var>options</var>]</code> (If an option
+is specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+</p>
+<p>When <code>\ProcessOptions</code> is called for a package <samp>pkg.sty</samp>, the
+following happens:
+</p><ol>
+<li> For each option <var>option</var> so far declared
+with <code>\DeclareOption</code>, it looks to see if that option is either a
+global or a local option for <code>pkg</code>. If so then it executes the
+declared code. This is done in the order in which these options were
+given in <samp>pkg.sty</samp>.
+</li><li> For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+<code>\ds@</code><var>option</var> if it has been defined somewhere (other than by
+a <code>\DeclareOption</code>); otherwise, it executes the default option code
+given in <code>\DeclareOption*</code>. If no default option code has been
+declared then it gives an error message. This is done in the order in
+which these options were specified.
+</li></ol>
+
+<p>When <code>\ProcessOptions</code> is called for a class it works in the same
+way except that all options are local, and the default <var>code</var> for
+<code>\DeclareOption*</code> is <code>\OptionNotUsed</code> rather than an error.
+</p>
+<p>The starred version <code>\ProcessOptions*</code> executes the
+options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in
+the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
+means that the global options are processed first.
+</p>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cProvidesClass"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cProvidesPackage"></a>
+<p>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and the log file.
+</p>
+<p>When a user writes <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code> then LaTeX loads
+the file <samp>smcmemo.cls</samp>. Similarly, a user writing
+<code>\usepackage{test}</code> prompts LaTeX to load the file
+<code>test.sty</code>. If the name of the file does not match the declared
+class or package name then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+<code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code>, and the file <samp>smcmemo.cls</samp> has
+the statement <code>\ProvidesClass{xxx}</code> then you get a warning like
+<code>You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
+class provides 'xxx'.</code> This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
+processing the rest of the class file normally.
+</p>
+<p>If you include the optional argument, then you must include the date, before
+the first space if any, and it must have the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>. The rest
+of the optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies
+the class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the
+log file. Thus, if your file <samp>smcmemo.cls</samp> contains the line
+<code>\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]</code> and your
+document’s first line is <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code> then you will
+see <code>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask
+to be warned if the version of the class or package installed on their
+system is earlier than <var>release date</var>, by using the optional arguments
+such as <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]</code> or
+<code>\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]</code>. (Note that package users only
+rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesFile{<var>file name</var>}[<var>additional information</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cProvidesFile"></a>
+<p>Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that
+file and you get in the log a string like <code>File: test.config
+2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</code> for <var>file name</var> equal to
+‘<samp>test.config</samp>’ and <var>additional information</var> equal to
+‘<samp>2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</samp>’.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\RequirePackage[<var>option list</var>]{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cRequirePackage"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cRequirePackageWithOptions"></a>
+<p>Load a package, like the document author command <code>\usepackage</code>.
+See <a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a>. An example is
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}</code>. Note that the
+LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of these commands over
+Plain TeX’s <code>\input</code>; see the Class Guide.
+</p>
+<p>The <var>option list</var>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<var>release date</var>, if present, must have the form <var>YYYY/MM/DD</var>. If
+the release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+than <var>release date</var> then you get a warning like <code>You have
+requested, on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but
+only version `2000/01/01' is available</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\RequirePackageWithOptions</code> version uses the list of options
+for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it
+via <code>\PassOptionsToClass</code>. This is a convenience command to allow
+easily building classes on existing ones without having to track which
+options were passed.
+</p>
+<p>The difference between <code>\usepackage</code> and <code>\RequirePackage</code> is
+small. The <code>\usepackage</code> command is intended for the document file
+while <code>\RequirePackage</code> is intended for package and class files.
+Thus, using <code>\usepackage</code> before the <code>\documentclass</code> command
+causes LaTeX to give error like <code>\usepackage before
+\documentclass</code>, but you can use <code>\RequirePackage</code> there.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
<a name="Fonts"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
@@ -1448,6 +2181,7 @@
<a name="index-numerals_002c-old_002dstyle"></a>
<a name="index-old_002dstyle-numerals"></a>
<a name="index-lining-numerals"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-textcomp"></a>
<a name="index-textcomp-package"></a>
<p>Finally, the command <code>\oldstylenums{<var>numerals</var>}</code> will typeset
so-called “old-style” numerals, which have differing heights and
@@ -1661,6 +2395,7 @@
make line skip changes happen for the entire document by doing
<code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}</code> in the preamble.
</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-setspace"></a>
<a name="index-setspace-package"></a>
<a name="index-double-spacing"></a>
<p>However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
@@ -1744,9 +2479,9 @@
<a name="index-_005conecolumn"></a>
<a name="index-one_002dcolumn-output"></a>
-<p>The <code>\onecolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output. If the document is given the class option
-<code>onecolumn</code> then this is the default behavior (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+<p>Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
+given the class option <code>onecolumn</code> then this is the default
+behavior (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
</p>
<p>This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
</p>
@@ -1764,15 +2499,16 @@
<a name="index-multicolumn-text"></a>
<a name="index-two_002dcolumn-output"></a>
-<p>Synopsis:
+<p>Synopses:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\twocolumn[<var>prelim one column text</var>]
+<pre class="example">\twocolumn
+\twocolumn[<var>prelim one column text</var>]
</pre></div>
-<p>The <code>\twocolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the document is given the class option
-<code>twocolumn</code> then this is the default (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+<p>Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
+the class option <code>twocolumn</code> then this is the default
+(see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
</p>
<p>If the optional <var>prelim one column text</var> argument
is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
@@ -1827,7 +2563,7 @@
occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that
the height of a <code>table*</code> or <code>figure*</code> environment must not
exceed <code>0.7\textheight</code> . If the height of your starred float
-environment exceeeds this then you can take one of the following actions
+environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions
to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document:
</p>
<ul>
@@ -1881,8 +2617,8 @@
</dd>
</dl>
-<p>This example shows the use of the optional argument of <code>\twocolumn</code>
-to create a title that spans the two-column article:
+<p>This example uses <code>\twocolumn</code>’s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
@@ -1889,17 +2625,17 @@
\newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\begin{document}
\twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
- \centering
- \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
- \large Author One\authormark{1},
- Author Two\authormark{2},
- Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
- \normalsize
- \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
- \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
- School one &School two
- \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
-}]
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
Two column text here.
</pre></div>
@@ -1916,22 +2652,23 @@
<a name="index-_005cflushbottom"></a>
-<p>The <code>\flushbottom</code> command can go at any point in the document
-body. It makes all later pages the same height, stretching the vertical
-space where necessary to fill out the page.
+<p>Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
</p>
<p>If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
then you get a message like ‘<samp>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
-occurred while \output is active</samp>’. You can change to
-<code>\raggedbottom</code> (see below). Alternatively, you can try to adjust
-the <code>textheight</code> to be compatible, or you can add some vertical
-stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs, as in
-<code>\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}</code>. In a final editing
-stage you can adjust the height of individual pages
+occurred while \output is active</samp>’. If you get that, one option is to
+change to <code>\raggedbottom</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>). Alternatively,
+you can adjust the <code>textheight</code> to make compatible pages, or you
+can add some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs,
+as in <code>\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}</code>. Your last option
+is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages
(see <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>).
</p>
-<p>This is the default only if you select the <code>twoside</code> document class
-option (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+<p>The <code>\flushbottom</code> state is the default only if you select the
+<code>twoside</code> document class option (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
</p>
<hr>
@@ -1946,11 +2683,10 @@
<a name="index-_005craggedbottom"></a>
<a name="index-stretch_002c-omitting-vertical"></a>
-<p>The <code>\raggedbottom</code> command can go at any point in the document
-body. It makes all later pages the natural height of the material on
-that page; no rubber lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
-document the facing pages may be different heights. See also
-<code>\flushbottom</code> above.
+<p>Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>.
</p>
<p>This is the default unless you select the <code>twoside</code> document class
option (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
@@ -2198,14 +2934,14 @@
appears in the output after it.
</p>
<p>The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
-limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
-bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued up that the limits prevent
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and
+the bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent
them all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and
-defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may be typset far
-from their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big can
-migrate to the end of the document. But then because all floats in a
-class must appear in sequential order, every subsequent float in that
-class also appears at the end.
+defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up
+being typeset far from their place in the source. In particular, a
+float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which
+event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order,
+every following float in that class also appears at the end.
</p>
<a name="index-placement-of-floats"></a>
<a name="index-specifier_002c-float-placement"></a>
@@ -2234,6 +2970,7 @@
automatically added.
</p>
<a name="index-here_002c-putting-floats"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-float"></a>
<a name="index-float-package"></a>
<p>To absolutely force a float to appear “here”, you can
<code>\usepackage{float}</code> and use the <code>H</code> specifier which it
@@ -2272,12 +3009,14 @@
<code>\afterpage{\clearpage}</code>. This will wait until the current page
is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.
</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-flafter"></a>
+<a name="index-flafter-package"></a>
<p>LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
-(although on the same output page) if there is a <code>t</code> specifier in the
-<var>placement</var> paramater. If this is not desired, and deleting the
-<code>t</code> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at
-the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using the
-<samp>flafter</samp> package or using the command
+(although on the same output page) if there is a <code>t</code> specifier in
+the <var>placement</var> parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
+the <code>t</code> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
+at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
+the <samp>flafter</samp> package or using the command
<a name="index-_005csuppressfloats"></a>
<code>\suppressfloats[t]</code>, which causes floats for the top position on
this page to moved to the next page.
@@ -2390,10 +3129,11 @@
<p>The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
<a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats</a> contains
suggestions for relaxing LaTeX’s default parameters to reduce the
-problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explaination of the
-float placement algorithm is Frank Mittelbach’s article “How to
-infuence the position of float environments like figure and table in
-LaTeX?” <a href="http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf">http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf</a>.
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach’s article “How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+LaTeX?”
+(<a href="http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf">http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf</a>).
</p>
<hr>
@@ -2479,7 +3219,7 @@
<a name="index-secnumdepth-counter"></a>
<a name="index-section-numbers_002c-printing"></a>
-<p>The <code>secnumdepth</code> counter controls printing of section numbers.
+<a name="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"></a><p>The <code>secnumdepth</code> counter controls printing of section numbers.
The setting
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -2489,8 +3229,213 @@
<p>suppresses heading numbers at any depth <em>> <var>level</var></em>, where
<code>chapter</code> is level zero. (See <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>.)
</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection" accesskey="1">\@startsection</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Redefine layout of start of sections, subsections, etc.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.1 <code>\@startsection</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_0040startsection"></a>
+<a name="index-section_002c-redefining"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\@startsection{<var>name</var>}{<var>level</var>}{<var>indent</var>}{<var>beforeskip</var>}{<var>afterskip</var>}{<var>style</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning divisions such
+as <code>\section</code> or <code>\subsection</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Note that the <samp>titlesec</samp> package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with <code>\@startsection</code>, some cannot. For instance, in
+the standard LaTeX <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> classes the commands
+<code>\chapter</code> and <code>\report</code> are not constructed in this way. To
+make such a command you may want to use the <code>\secdef</code> command.
+</p>
+<p>Technically, this command has the form:
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\@startsection{<var>name</var>}{<var>level</var>}{<var>indent</var>}{<var>beforeskip</var>}{<var>afterskip</var>}{<var>style</var>}
+ *[<var>toctitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+<p>so that issuing:
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{<var>name</var>}{<var>level</var>}{<var>indent</var>}%
+ {<var>beforeskip</var>}{<var>afterskip</var>}{<var>style</var>}}
+</pre></div>
+<p>redefine <code>\section</code> while keeping its standard calling form
+<code>\section*[<var>toctitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}</code>. See <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a> and
+the examples below.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>name</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fname"></a><p>Name of the counter (which must be defined
+separately) used to number for the sectioning header. Most commonly
+either <code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, or <code>paragraph</code>. Although
+in those three cases the name of the counter is also the name of the
+sectioning command itself, using the same name is not required.
+</p>
+<p>Then <code>\the</code><var>name</var> displays the title number and
+<code>\</code><var>name</var><code>mark</code> is for the page headers.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>level</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"></a><p>An integer giving the depth of the
+sectioning command: 0 for <code>chapter</code> (only applies to the standard
+<code>book</code> and <code>report</code> classes), 1 for <code>section</code>, 2 for
+<code>subsection</code>, 3 for <code>subsubsection</code>, 4 for <code>paragraph</code>,
+and 5 for <code>subparagraph</code>. In the <code>book</code> and <code>report</code>
+classes <code>part</code> has level -1, while in the <code>article</code> class
+<code>part</code> has level 0.
+</p>
+<p>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of <code>secnumdepth</code>
+then the titles for this sectioning command will be numbered. For
+instance, in an <code>article</code>, if <code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 then a
+<code>\section{Introduction}</code> command will produce output like <code>1
+Introduction</code> while <code>\subsection{History}</code> will produce output
+like <code>History</code>, without the number
+prefix. See <a href="#Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</a>.
+</p>
+<p>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of <var>tocdepth</var> then
+the table of contents will have an entrie for this sectioning unit.
+For instance, in an <code>article</code>, if <var>tocdepth</var> is 1 then the table of
+contents will list sections but not subsections.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>indent</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002findent"></a><p>A length giving the indentation of all
+of the title lines with respect to the left margin. To have the
+title flush with the margin use <code>0pt</code>. A negative indentation
+such as <code>-1em</code> will move the title into the left margin.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>beforeskip</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"></a><p>The absolute value of this length is
+the amount of vertical space that is inserted before this sectioning
+unit’s title. This space will be discarded if the sectioning unit
+happens to start at the top of a fresh page. If this number is negative
+then the first paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
+non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the
+negative of <code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code> is <code>-1pt plus -2pt minus
+-3pt</code>.)
+</p>
+<p>For example, if <var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>
+then to start the new sectioning unit, LaTeX will add about 3.5 times
+the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph in
+the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+<code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code>, is good practice here since it gives
+LaTeX more flexibility in making up the page.
+</p>
+<p>The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of the
+line prior to this sectioning unit’s header and the baseline of the
+header is that it is the sum of the <code>\parskip</code> of the text font,
+the <code>\baselineskip</code> of the title font, and the absolute value of
+the <var>beforeskip</var>. This space is typically rubber so it may stretch
+or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page so that the
+vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the header text will be
+where LaTeX would put the baseline of the first text line on that
+page.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>afterskip</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"></a><p>This is a length. If <var>afterskip</var>
+is non-negative then this is the vertical space inserted after the
+sectioning unit’s title header. If it is negative then the title header
+becomes a run-in header, so that it becomes part of the next paragraph.
+In this case the absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space
+between the end of the title and the beginning of the following
+paragraph. (Note that the negative of <code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code> is
+<code>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</code>.)
+</p>
+<p>As with <var>beforeskip</var>, using a rubber length with <code>plus</code> and
+<code>minus</code> components is good practice here since it gives LaTeX
+more flexibility in putting the page together.
+</p>
+<p>If <code>afterskip</code> is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit’s header and
+the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is that it is
+the sum of the <code>\parskip</code> of the title font, the
+<code>\baselineskip</code> of the text font, and the value of <var>after</var>.
+That space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+because the sign of <code>afterskip</code> changes the sectioning unit
+header’s from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+<code>afterskip</code> to cancel part of the <code>\parskip</code>.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>style</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"></a><p>Controls the styling of the title. See
+the examples below. Typical commands to use here are <code>\centering</code>,
+<code>\raggedright</code>, <code>\normalfont</code>, <code>\hrule</code>, or
+<code>\newpage</code>. The last command in <var>style</var> may be one such as
+<code>\MakeUppercase</code> or <code>\fbox</code> that takes one argument. The
+section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For
+instance, setting <var>style</var> to <code>\bfseries\MakeUppercase</code> would
+produce titles that are bold and upper case.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Here are examples. To use them, either put them in a package or class
+file, or put them in the preamble of a LaTeX document between a
+<code>\makeatletter</code> command and a <code>\makeatother</code>. (Probably the
+error message <code>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode.</code>
+means that you forgot this.) See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a>.
+</p>
+<p>This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand\section{%
+ \@startsection{section}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><var>name</var></a>.
+ {1}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><var>level</var></a>.
+ {0pt}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><var>indent</var></a>.
+ {-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><var>beforeskip</var></a>.
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><var>afterskip</var></a>.
+ {\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><var>style</var></a>.
+ }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This will put <code>subsection</code> titles in small caps type, inline with the paragraph.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand\subsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsection}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><var>name</var></a>.
+ {2}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><var>level</var></a>.
+ {0em}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><var>indent</var></a>.
+ {-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><var>beforeskip</var></a>.
+ {-1em plus 0.2em}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><var>afterskip</var></a>.
+ {\scshape}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><var>style</var></a>.
+ }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands. This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to display that counter.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down
+\newcounter{subsubparagraph}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+\renewcommand{\thesubsubparagraph}% how to display
+ {\thesubparagraph.\@arabic\c at subsubparagraph}% numbering
+\newcommand{\subsubparagraph}{\@startsection
+ {subsubparagraph}%
+ {6}%
+ {0em}%
+ {\baselineskip}%
+ {0.5\baselineskip}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize}}
+\newcommand*\l at subsubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{6}{10em}{5em}}% for toc
+\newcommand{\subsubparagraphmark}[1]{}% for page headers
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
<a name="Cross-references"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
@@ -2501,9 +3446,39 @@
<a name="index-cross-references"></a>
-<p>One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
-the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.”
+<p>One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to
+refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure~3 for more details.”
</p>
+<a name="index-label"></a>
+<p>Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if that
+number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to update
+this reference by hand. Instead, LaTeX has you write a <em>label</em>
+like <code>\label{eq:GreensThm}</code> and refer to it with <code>See
+equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX writes the information from the labels to a file with the same
+name as the file containing the <code>\label{...}</code> but with an
+<samp>.aux</samp> extension. (The information has the format
+<code>\newlabel{<var>label</var>}{{<var>currentlabel</var>}{<var>pagenumber</var>}}</code>
+where <var>currentlabel</var> is the current value of the macro
+<code>\@currentlabel</code> that is usually updated whenever you call
+<code>\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code>.)
+</p>
+<a name="index-forward-reference"></a>
+<a name="index-reference_002c-forward"></a>
+<p>The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your
+document has a <em>forward reference</em>, a <code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code> that
+appears earlier than the associated <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code>; see the
+example in the <code>\pageref{...}</code> description. LaTeX gets the
+information for references from the <samp>.aux</samp> file. If this is the
+first time you are compiling the document then you will get a message
+<code>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get
+cross references right.</code> and in the output the reference will appear as
+two question marks ‘<samp>??</samp>’, in boldface. Or, if you change some
+things so the references change then you get the same warning and the
+output contains the old reference information. The solution in either
+case is just to compile the document a second time.
+</p>
<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="1">\label</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
</td></tr>
@@ -2531,37 +3506,22 @@
<pre class="example">\label{<var>key</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>A <code>\label</code> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to
-<var>key</var> the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
-inside a numbered environment assigns that number to <var>key</var>. The
-assigned number can be retrieved with the <code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code>
-command (see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>).
+<p>Assign a reference number to <var>key</var>. In ordinary text
+<code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code> assigns to <var>key</var> the number of the
+current sectional unit. Inside an environment with numbering, such as a
+<code>table</code> or <code>theorem</code> environment, <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code>
+assigns to <var>key</var> the number of that environment. Retrieve the
+assigned number with the <code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code> command
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>).
</p>
-<p>Thus, in the example below the key <code>sec:test</code> holds the number of
-the current section and the key <code>fig:test</code> that of the figure.
-(Incidentally, labels must appear after captions in figures and
-tables.)
-</p>
-<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\section{section name}
-\label{sec:test}
-This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
-\begin{figure}
- ...
- \caption{caption text}
- \label{fig:test}
-\end{figure}
-See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
-</pre></div>
-
<p>A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
distinguished, as usual.
</p>
-<p>Although the name can be more or less anything, a common convention is
-to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a colon
-or period. This helps to avoid accidentally creating two labels with
-the same name. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+<p>A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon or period. This helps to avoid accidentally
+creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more
+readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dt><code>ch</code></dt>
@@ -2581,10 +3541,27 @@
</p></dd>
</dl>
-<p>Thus, a label for a figure would look like <code>fig:test</code> or
-<code>fig.test</code>.
+<p>Thus, <code>\label{fig:Euler}</code> is a label for a figure with a portrait
+of the great man.
</p>
+<p>In this example below the key <code>sec:test</code> will get the number of the
+current section and the key <code>fig:test</code> will get the number of the
+figure. (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and
+tables.)
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section{section name}
+\label{sec:test}
+This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+\begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+\end{figure}
+See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
+</pre></div>
+
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005cpageref"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -2604,11 +3581,23 @@
<pre class="example">\pageref{<var>key</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>The <code>\pageref</code>{<var>key</var>} command produces the page number of
-the place in the text where the corresponding
+<p>Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
<code>\label</code>{<var>key</var>} command appears.
</p>
+<p>In this example the <code>\label{eq:main}</code> is used both for the
+formula number and for the page number. (Note that the two references
+are forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice
+to resolve those.)
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
+ ...
+\begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
+ \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005cref"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -2631,12 +3620,25 @@
<pre class="example">\ref{<var>key</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>The <code>\ref</code> command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+<p>Produces the number of the sectional unit,
equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding
<code>\label</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005clabel">\label</a>). It does not produce any text,
such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself.
</p>
+<p>In this example, the <code>\ref{popular}</code> produces ‘<samp>2</samp>’. Note
+that it is a forward reference since it comes before
+<code>\label{popular}</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Plain \TeX
+\item \label{popular} \LaTeX
+\item Con\TeX t
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre></div>
+
<hr>
<a name="Environments"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -2643,7 +3645,7 @@
<p>
Next: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="n" rel="next">Line breaking</a>, Previous: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Cross references</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<a name="Environments-1"></a>
+<a name="Environments-2"></a>
<h2 class="chapter">8 Environments</h2>
<a name="index-environments"></a>
@@ -2650,15 +3652,25 @@
<a name="index-_005cbegin"></a>
<a name="index-_005cend"></a>
-<p>LaTeX provides many environments for marking off certain text.
-Each environment begins and ends in the same manner:
+<p>LaTeX provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.
+An environment begins with <code>\begin</code> and ends with <code>\end</code>,
+like this:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\begin{<var>envname</var>}
-...
-\end{<var>envname</var>}
+<pre class="example">\begin{<var>environment-name</var>}
+ ...
+\end{<var>environment-name</var>}
</pre></div>
+<p>The <var>environment-name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. For instance, the input
+<code>\begin{table*}...\end{table}</code> will cause an error like:
+‘<samp>! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
+\end{table}.</samp>’
+</p>
+<a name="index-group_002c-and-environments"></a>
+<p>Environments are executed within a group.
+</p>
<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#abstract" accesskey="1">abstract</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Produce an abstract.
</td></tr>
@@ -2728,6 +3740,7 @@
<a name="abstract-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.1 <code>abstract</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-abstract"></a>
<a name="index-abstract-environment"></a>
<a name="index-abstracts"></a>
@@ -2739,9 +3752,48 @@
\end{abstract}
</pre></div>
-<p>Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs.
+<p>Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This environment
+is only defined in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code> document classes
+(see <a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a>).
</p>
+<p>Using the example below in the <code>article</code> class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option <code>titlepage</code> causes the abstract
+to be on a separate page (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>); this is the
+default only in the <code>report</code> class.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{abstract}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+\end{abstract}
+</pre></div>
+<p>The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for
+a more flexible solution, use the package <samp>abstract</samp>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ ...
+\begin{document}
+\title{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach}
+\author{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks{Railroad tracking grant.}}
+\twocolumn[
+ \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin{abstract}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end{abstract}
+ \end{@twocolumnfalse}
+ ]
+{ % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \footnotetext[1]{Thanks for all the fish.}
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+
<hr>
<a name="array"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -2751,6 +3803,7 @@
<a name="array-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.2 <code>array</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-array"></a>
<a name="index-array-environment"></a>
<a name="index-arrays_002c-math"></a>
@@ -2758,8 +3811,8 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{array}{<var>cols</var>}
-<var>column 1 entry</var> &<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &<var>column n entry</var> \\
-...
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
\end{array}
</pre></div>
@@ -2767,8 +3820,8 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{array}[<var>pos</var>]{<var>cols</var>}
-<var>column 1 entry</var> &<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &<var>column n entry</var> \\
-...
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
\end{array}
</pre></div>
@@ -2776,7 +3829,7 @@
mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
such as <code>equation</code> (see <a href="#equation">equation</a>). Column entries are
separated by an ampersand (<code>&</code>). Rows are terminated with
-double-backslashes (<code>\\</code>) (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
+double-backslashes (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
</p>
<p>The required argument <var>cols</var> describes the number of columns, their
alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. See
@@ -2785,24 +3838,26 @@
<var>pos</var> argument.
</p>
<p>There are two ways that <code>array</code> diverges from <code>tabular</code>. The
-first is that <code>array</code> entries are typeset in mathematics mode, in
+first is that <code>array</code> entries are typeset in math mode, in
textstyle (except if the <var>cols</var> definition specifies the column with
-<code>@p{..}</code>, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode).
+<code>p{...}</code>, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode).
The second is that, instead of <code>tabular</code>’s parameter
-<code>\tabcolsep</code>, LaTeX’s intercolumn space in an array is governed
+<code>\tabcolsep</code>, LaTeX’s intercolumn space in an <code>array</code> is governed
by
<a name="index-_005carraycolsep"></a>
-<code>\arraycolsep</code> which gives half the width between columns. The
+<code>\arraycolsep</code>, which gives half the width between columns. The
default for this is ‘<samp>5pt</samp>’.
</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package"></a>
<p>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <samp>amsmath</samp>
package. It comes with environments <code>pmatrix</code> for an array
-surrounded by parentheses <code>(..)</code>, <code>bmatrix</code> for an array
-surrounded by square brackets <code>[..]</code>, <code>Bmatrix</code> for an
-array surrounded by curly braces <code>{..}</code>, <code>vmatrix</code> for
-an array surrounded by vertical bars <code>|..|</code>, and
+surrounded by parentheses <code>(...)</code>, <code>bmatrix</code> for an array
+surrounded by square brackets <code>[...]</code>, <code>Bmatrix</code> for an
+array surrounded by curly braces <code>{...}</code>, <code>vmatrix</code> for
+an array surrounded by vertical bars <code>|...|</code>, and
<code>Vmatrix</code> for an array surrounded by double vertical
-bars <code>||..||</code>, along with a number of other array constructs.
+bars <code>||...||</code>, along with a number of other array constructs.
</p>
<p>Here is an example of an array:
</p>
@@ -2815,7 +3870,19 @@
\end{equation}
</pre></div>
+<p>The next example works if <code>\usepackage{amsmath}</code> is in the
+preamble:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+ \begin{vmatrix}{cc}
+ a &b \\
+ c &d
+ \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
<hr>
<a name="center"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -2825,6 +3892,7 @@
<a name="center-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.3 <code>center</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-center"></a>
<a name="index-center-environment"></a>
<a name="index-centering-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
@@ -2832,28 +3900,41 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{center}
- .. text ..
+ ... text ...
\end{center}
</pre></div>
-<p>Environment to create a sequence of lines that are centered within the
-left and right margins on the current page. If the text in the
-environment body is too long to fit on a line, LaTeX will insert line
-breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
-interword space. To force a line break at a particular spot use
-double-backslash <code>\\</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
+<p>Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Use
+double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028for-center_0029"></a>
+If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, LaTeX
+will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or
+shrinking any interword space.
</p>
<p>This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
<a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a> to avoid such space, for example inside a <code>figure</code>
environment.
</p>
-<p>In this example, depending on the line width, LaTeX may choose a break
-for the part before the double backslash, will center the line or two,
-then will break at the double backslash, and will center the ending.
+<p>This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In this example, depending on the page’s line width, LaTeX may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then LaTeX will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
@@ -2880,7 +3961,7 @@
<a name="index-_005ccentering"></a>
<a name="index-centering-text_002c-declaration-for"></a>
-<p>Declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
+<p>A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
most often used inside an environment such as <code>figure</code>, or in a
<code>parbox</code>.
</p>
@@ -2922,6 +4003,7 @@
<a name="description-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.4 <code>description</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-description"></a>
<a name="index-description-environment"></a>
<a name="index-labelled-lists_002c-creating"></a>
<a name="index-description-lists_002c-creating"></a>
@@ -2936,26 +4018,26 @@
\end{description}
</pre></div>
-<a name="index-_005citem"></a>
<p>Environment to make a labelled list of items. Each item’s <var>label</var>
is typeset in bold, flush-left. Each item’s text may contain multiple
paragraphs. Although the labels on the items are optional there is no
sensible default, so all items should have labels.
</p>
-<a name="index-_005citem-1"></a>
-<p>The list consists of at least one item; see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a> (having no
-items causes the LaTeX error ‘<samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a
-missing \item</samp>’). Each item is produced with an <code>\item</code> command.
+<a name="index-_005citem"></a>
+<p>The list consists of at least one item, created with the <code>\item</code>
+command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). Having no items causes the LaTeX error
+‘<samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp>’).
</p>
<a name="index-bold-typewriter_002c-avoiding"></a>
<a name="index-typewriter-labels-in-lists"></a>
<p>Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font
-change given in argument style (see <a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a>) then it will come
-out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
-<code>\item[\texttt{label text}]</code> then it will appear in bold
-typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bolded
-typewriter is to use declaritive style <code>\item[{\tt label text}]</code>.
-Similarly, get normal text use <code>\item[{\rm label text}]</code>.
+change given in argument style (see <a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a>) then it will
+come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter
+with <code>\item[\texttt{label text}]</code> then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bold
+typewriter is to use declarative style: <code>\item[{\tt label
+text}]</code>. Similarly, to get the standard roman font, use
+<code>\item[{\rm label text}]</code>.
</p>
<p>For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>
and <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>. For information about customizing list layout, see
@@ -2980,6 +4062,7 @@
<a name="displaymath-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.5 <code>displaymath</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-displaymath"></a>
<a name="index-displaymath-environment"></a>
<p>Synopsis:
@@ -2986,7 +4069,7 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{displaymath}
- .. math text ..
+<var>math text</var>
\end{displaymath}
</pre></div>
@@ -2994,29 +4077,30 @@
and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option
<code>fleqn</code>; see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>.
</p>
-<p>LaTeX will not break the math text across lines.
-</p>
<p>In the <code>displaymath</code> environment no equation number is added to the
math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the
<code>equation</code> environment (see <a href="#equation">equation</a>).
</p>
-<p>Note that the <samp>amsmath</samp> package has extensive displayed equation
-facilities. Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
-new documents. For example, there are a number of options in that
-package for having math text broken across lines.
+<p>LaTeX will not break the <var>math text</var> across lines.
</p>
-<p>The construct <code>\[..math text..\]</code> is essentially a synonym for
-<code>\begin{displaymath}..math text..\end{displaymath}</code> but the
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-1"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-1"></a>
+<p>Note that the <samp>amsmath</samp> package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of
+ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+</p>
+<p>The construct <code>\[<var>math text</var>\]</code> is essentially a synonym for
+<code>\begin{displaymath}<var>math text</var>\end{displaymath}</code> but the
latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance,
searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word
-<code>displaymath</code> will likely be unique. (The construct <code>$$..math
-text..$$</code> from Plain TeX is sometimes mistakenly used as a
-synonym for <code>displaymath</code>. It is not a synonym, because the
-<code>displaymath</code> environment checks that it isn’t started in math mode
-and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching environment start,
-because the <code>displaymath</code> environment has different vertical
-spacing, and because the <code>displaymath</code> environment honors the
-<code>fleqn</code> option.)
+<code>displaymath</code> will likely be unique. (The construct
+<code>$$<var>math text</var>$$</code> from Plain TeX is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for <code>displaymath</code>. It is not a
+synonym, because the <code>displaymath</code> environment checks that it isn’t
+started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the <code>displaymath</code> environment has
+different vertical spacing, and because the <code>displaymath</code>
+environment honors the <code>fleqn</code> option.)
</p>
<p>The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
</p><div class="example">
@@ -3037,6 +4121,7 @@
<a name="document-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.6 <code>document</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-document"></a>
<a name="index-document-environment"></a>
<p>The <code>document</code> environment encloses the entire body of a document.
@@ -3114,6 +4199,7 @@
<a name="enumerate-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.7 <code>enumerate</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-enumerate"></a>
<a name="index-enumerate-environment"></a>
<a name="index-lists-of-items_002c-numbered"></a>
@@ -3131,7 +4217,7 @@
label numbering depends on whether this environment is nested within
another; see below.
</p>
-<a name="index-_005citem-2"></a>
+<a name="index-_005citem-1"></a>
<p>The list consists of at least one item. Having no items causes the
LaTeX error ‘<samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp>’. Each
item is produced with an <code>\item</code> command.
@@ -3205,6 +4291,7 @@
<a name="eqnarray-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.8 <code>eqnarray</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-eqnarray"></a>
<a name="index-eqnarray-environment"></a>
<a name="index-equations_002c-aligning"></a>
<a name="index-aligning-equations"></a>
@@ -3285,6 +4372,7 @@
<a name="equation-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.9 <code>equation</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-equation"></a>
<a name="index-equation-environment"></a>
<a name="index-equations_002c-environment-for"></a>
<a name="index-formulas_002c-environment-for"></a>
@@ -3316,7 +4404,8 @@
<a name="figure-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.10 <code>figure</code></h3>
-<a name="index-figure"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-figure"></a>
+<a name="index-figure-environment"></a>
<a name="index-inserting-figures"></a>
<a name="index-figures_002c-inserting"></a>
@@ -3357,7 +4446,7 @@
<p>The figure body is typeset in a <code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>
and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
</p>
-<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>).
+<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>).
<a name="index-_005ccaption"></a>
The optional <code>\caption</code> command specifies caption text for the
figure. By default it is numbered. If <var>loftitle</var> is present, it is
@@ -3386,7 +4475,10 @@
<a name="filecontents_003a-Write-an-external-file"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.11 <code>filecontents</code>: Write an external file</h3>
-<a name="index-filecontents"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-filecontents"></a>
+<a name="index-filecontents-environment"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-filecontents_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-filecontents_002a-environment"></a>
<a name="index-external-files_002c-writing"></a>
<a name="index-writing-external-files"></a>
@@ -3456,6 +4548,7 @@
<a name="flushleft-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.12 <code>flushleft</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-flushleft"></a>
<a name="index-flushleft-environment"></a>
<a name="index-left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
<a name="index-ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
@@ -3513,6 +4606,7 @@
<a name="flushright-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.13 <code>flushright</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-flushright"></a>
<a name="index-flushright-environment"></a>
<a name="index-ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
<a name="index-right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
@@ -3570,8 +4664,9 @@
<a name="itemize-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.14 <code>itemize</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-itemize"></a>
<a name="index-itemize-environment"></a>
-<a name="index-_005citem-3"></a>
+<a name="index-_005citem-2"></a>
<a name="index-lists-of-items"></a>
<a name="index-unordered-lists"></a>
<a name="index-bulleted-lists"></a>
@@ -3587,7 +4682,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>The <code>itemize</code> environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted”
-list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four
+list. Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four
levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
environments, such as <code>enumerate</code> (see <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>).
</p>
@@ -3742,6 +4837,7 @@
<a name="letter-environment_003a-writing-letters"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.15 <code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-letter"></a>
<a name="index-letter-environment"></a>
<p>This environment is used for creating letters. See <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>.
@@ -3756,7 +4852,8 @@
<a name="list-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.16 <code>list</code></h3>
-<a name="index-list"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-list"></a>
+<a name="index-list-environment"></a>
<a name="index-lists-of-items_002c-generic"></a>
<p>The <code>list</code> environment is a generic environment which is used for
@@ -3795,7 +4892,8 @@
<p>
Up: <a href="#list" accesskey="u" rel="up">list</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<h4 class="node-heading">\item</h4>
+<a name="g_t_005citem_003a-An-entry-in-a-list_002e"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.16.1 <code>\item</code>: An entry in a list.</h4>
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
@@ -3845,6 +4943,7 @@
<a name="math-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.17 <code>math</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-math"></a>
<a name="index-math-environment"></a>
<a name="index-in_002dline-formulas"></a>
@@ -3870,6 +4969,7 @@
<a name="minipage-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.18 <code>minipage</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-minipage"></a>
<a name="index-minipage-environment"></a>
<a name="index-minipage_002c-creating-a"></a>
@@ -3915,7 +5015,8 @@
<a name="picture-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.19 <code>picture</code></h3>
-<a name="index-picture"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-picture"></a>
+<a name="index-picture-environment"></a>
<a name="index-creating-pictures"></a>
<a name="index-pictures_002c-creating"></a>
@@ -3940,6 +5041,14 @@
<code>\setlength</code> command, outside of a <code>picture</code> environment.
The default value is <code>1pt</code>.
</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-picture"></a>
+<a name="index-picture-package"></a>
+<p>The <code>picture</code> package redefine the <code>picture</code> environment so
+that everywhere a number is used in a <var>picture commands</var> to specify
+a coordinate, one can use alternatively a length. Be aware however that
+this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing <code>\unitlength</code>.
+</p>
+
<a name="index-position_002c-in-picture"></a>
<p>A <em>position</em> is a pair of coordinates, such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>, specifying
the point with x-coordinate <code>2.4</code> and y-coordinate <code>-5</code>.
@@ -4410,11 +5519,13 @@
<a name="quotation-and-quote-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.20 <code>quotation</code> and <code>quote</code></h3>
-<a name="index-quotation"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-quotation"></a>
+<a name="index-quotation-environment"></a>
<a name="index-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying"></a>
<a name="index-displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation"></a>
<a name="index-paragraph-indentations-in-quoted-text"></a>
-<a name="index-quote"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-quote"></a>
+<a name="index-quote-environment"></a>
<a name="index-quoted-text-without-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying"></a>
<a name="index-displaying-quoted-text-without-paragraph-indentation"></a>
<a name="index-paragraph-indentations-in-quoted-text_002c-omitting"></a>
@@ -4454,7 +5565,7 @@
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{quotation}
\it Four score and seven years ago
- .. shall not perish from the earth.
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
\hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
\end{quotation}
</pre></div>
@@ -4469,6 +5580,7 @@
<a name="tabbing-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.21 <code>tabbing</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-tabbing"></a>
<a name="index-tabbing-environment"></a>
<a name="index-tab-stops_002c-using"></a>
<a name="index-lining-text-up-using-tab-stops"></a>
@@ -4624,7 +5736,8 @@
<a name="table-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.22 <code>table</code></h3>
-<a name="index-table"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-table"></a>
+<a name="index-table-environment"></a>
<a name="index-tables_002c-creating"></a>
<a name="index-creating-tables"></a>
@@ -4649,7 +5762,7 @@
<p>The table body is typeset in a <code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>
and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
</p>
-<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>).
+<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>).
<a name="index-_005ccaption-1"></a>
The optional <code>\caption</code> command specifies caption text for the
table. By default it is numbered. If <var>lottitle</var> is present, it is
@@ -4681,6 +5794,7 @@
<a name="tabular-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.23 <code>tabular</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-tabular"></a>
<a name="index-tabular-environment"></a>
<a name="index-lines-in-tables"></a>
<a name="index-lining-text-up-in-tables"></a>
@@ -4735,7 +5849,7 @@
should be rubber, as with <code>@{\extracolsep{\fill}}</code>, to allow
the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
are likely to get the <code>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
-..</code> warning.
+...</code> warning.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><var>pos</var></dt>
@@ -4777,14 +5891,14 @@
<var>text or space</var> material is typeset in LR mode. This text is
fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
</p>
-<p>This specifier is optional: unless you put in your own @-expression
-then LaTeX’s book, article, and report classes will put on either
-side of each column a space of length <code>\tabcolsep</code>, which by
-default is ‘<samp>6pt</samp>’. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+<p>This specifier is optional: with no @-expression, LaTeX’s
+<code>book</code>, <code>article</code>, and <code>report</code> classes will put on
+either side of each column a space of length <code>\tabcolsep</code>, which
+by default is ‘<samp>6pt</samp>’. That is, by default adjacent columns are
separated by 12pt (so <code>\tabcolsep</code> is misleadingly-named since it
-is not the separation between tabular columns). Also by default a space
-of 6pt comes before the first column as well as after the final column,
-unless you put a <code>@{..}</code> or <code>|</code> there.
+is not the separation between tabular columns). By implication, a
+space of 6pt also comes before the first column and after the final
+column, unless you put a <code>@{...}</code> or <code>|</code> there.
</p>
<p>If you override the default and use an @-expression then you must
insert any desired space yourself, as in <code>@{\hspace{1em}}</code>.
@@ -4796,7 +5910,7 @@
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{flushleft}
\begin{tabular}{@{}l}
- ..
+ ...
\end{tabular}
\end{flushleft}
</pre></div>
@@ -4853,7 +5967,7 @@
positive integer and <var>cols</var> is a list of specifiers. Thus
<code>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</code> is equivalent to
<code>\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}</code>. Note that <var>cols</var> may
-contain another <code>*-expression</code>.
+contain another <code>*</code>-expression.
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
@@ -4943,7 +6057,7 @@
<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{lccl}
\textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one
978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\ % row two
- ..
+ ...
\end{tabular}
</pre></div>
@@ -4957,7 +6071,7 @@
<p>The <var>cols</var> argument overrides the <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code>
environment’s intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn
entry. To affect that area, this argument can contain vertical bars
-<code>|</code> indicating the placement of vertical rules, and <code>@{..}</code>
+<code>|</code> indicating the placement of vertical rules, and <code>@{...}</code>
expressions. Thus if <var>cols</var> is ‘<samp>|c|</samp>’ then this multicolumn
entry will be centered and a vertical rule will come in the intercolumn
area before it and after it. This table details the exact behavior.
@@ -4970,6 +6084,7 @@
&z % entry four
\end{tabular}
</pre></div>
+
<p>Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
the <code>\multicolumn</code> has the <var>cols</var> specifier ‘<samp>r</samp>’ with no
initial vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a
@@ -5023,13 +6138,13 @@
<h4 class="subsection">8.23.2 <code>\vline</code></h4>
<a name="index-_005cvline"></a>
-
<p>Draw a vertical line in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment
-extending the full height and depth of an entry’s row. Can also be used
-in an @-expression, although its synonym vertical bar <code>|</code> is
-more common. This command is rarely used; typically a table’s vertical
-lines are specified in <code>tabular</code>’s <var>cols</var> argument and
-overriden as needed with <code>\multicolumn</code>.
+extending the full height and depth of an entry’s row. Can also be
+used in an @-expression, although its synonym vertical
+bar <code>|</code> is more common. This command is rarely used in the
+body of a table; typically a table’s vertical lines are specified in
+<code>tabular</code>’s <var>cols</var> argument and overridden as needed with
+<code>\multicolumn</code>.
</p>
<p>This example illustrates some pitfalls. In the first line’s second
entry the <code>\hfill</code> moves the <code>\vline</code> to the left edge of the
@@ -5124,6 +6239,7 @@
<a name="thebibliography-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.24 <code>thebibliography</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-thebibliography"></a>
<a name="index-thebibliography-environment"></a>
<a name="index-bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029"></a>
@@ -5183,18 +6299,19 @@
<pre class="example">\bibitem[<var>label</var>]{<var>cite_key</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>The <code>\bibitem</code> command generates an entry labelled by
-<var>label</var>. If the <var>label</var> argument is missing, a number is
-automatically generated using the <code>enumi</code> counter. The
-<var>cite_key</var> is any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation
-symbols not containing a comma.
+<p>The <code>\bibitem</code> command generates an entry labelled by <var>label</var>.
+If the <var>label</var> argument is missing, a number is automatically
+generated using the <code>enumi</code> counter. The <var>cite_key</var> is a
+<a name="index-citation-key"></a>
+<em>citation key</em> consisting in any sequence of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
</p>
<p>This command writes an entry to the <samp>.aux</samp> file containing the
-item’s <var>cite_key</var> and label. When the <samp>.aux</samp> file is read by
-the <code>\begin{document}</code> command, the item’s <code>label</code> is
+item’s <var>cite_key</var> and <var>label</var>. When the <samp>.aux</samp> file is
+read by the <code>\begin{document}</code> command, the item’s <var>label</var> is
associated with <code>cite_key</code>, causing references to <var>cite_key</var>
-with a <code>\cite</code> command (see next section) to produce the
-associated label.
+with a <code>\cite</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005ccite">\cite</a>) to produce the associated
+<var>label</var>.
</p>
<hr>
@@ -5214,14 +6331,14 @@
<pre class="example">\cite[<var>subcite</var>]{<var>keys</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>The <var>keys</var> argument is a list of one or more citation keys,
-separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to
-the references associated with <var>keys</var> by entries in the
-<samp>.aux</samp> file.
+<p>The <var>keys</var> argument is a list of one or more citation keys
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>), separated by commas. This command generates an
+in-text citation to the references associated with <var>keys</var> by entries
+in the <samp>.aux</samp> file.
</p>
<p>The text of the optional <var>subcite</var> argument appears after the
citation. For example, <code>\cite[p.~314]{knuth}</code> might produce
-‘[Knuth, p. 314]’.
+‘<samp>[Knuth, p. 314]</samp>’.
</p>
<hr>
@@ -5235,8 +6352,12 @@
<a name="index-_005cnocite"></a>
-<p><code>\nocite{<var>keys</var>}</code>
+<p>Synopsis:
</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><code>\nocite{<var>keys</var>}</code>
+</pre></div>
+
<p>The <code>\nocite</code> command produces no text, but writes <var>keys</var>,
which is a list of one or more citation keys, to the <samp>.aux</samp> file.
</p>
@@ -5271,7 +6392,7 @@
its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will
be produced: <var>bibstyle</var> refers to a file
<var>bibstyle</var><samp>.bst</samp>, which defines how your citations will look.
-The standard <var>style</var> names distributed with BibTeX are:
+The standard <var>bibstyle</var> names distributed with BibTeX are:
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dt><code>alpha</code></dt>
@@ -5295,7 +6416,8 @@
</p>
<p>The <code>\bibliography</code> command is what actually produces the
bibliography. The argument to <code>\bibliography</code> refers to files
-named <samp><var>bibfile</var>.bib</samp>, which should contain your database in
+named <samp><var>bibfile1</var>.bib</samp>, <samp><var>bibfile2</var>.bib</samp>, …,
+which should contain your database in
BibTeX format. Only the entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and
<code>\nocite</code> will be listed in the bibliography.
</p>
@@ -5309,6 +6431,7 @@
<a name="theorem-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.25 <code>theorem</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-theorem"></a>
<a name="index-theorem-environment"></a>
<a name="index-theorems_002c-typesetting"></a>
@@ -5335,6 +6458,7 @@
<a name="titlepage-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.26 <code>titlepage</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-titlepage"></a>
<a name="index-titlepage-environment"></a>
<a name="index-making-a-title-page"></a>
<a name="index-title-pages_002c-creating"></a>
@@ -5343,20 +6467,43 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{titlepage}
-<var>text</var>
+ ... text and spacing ...
\end{titlepage}
</pre></div>
-<p>The <code>titlepage</code> environment creates a title page, i.e., a page
-with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following
-page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to
-you. The <code>\today</code> command may be useful on title pages
-(see <a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a>).
+<p>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading. The
+following page will be numbered page one.
</p>
-<p>You can use the <code>\maketitle</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>) to
-produce a standard title page without a <code>titlepage</code> environment.
+<p>To instead produce a standard title page without a <code>titlepage</code>
+environment you can use <code>\maketitle</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>).
</p>
+<p>Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical spacing,
+is left to the author.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{titlepage}
+\vspace*{\stretch{1}}
+\begin{center}
+ {\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title} \\[6.5ex]
+ {\large\bfseries Author name} \\
+ \vspace{4ex}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit{University name} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc{\Large Doctor of Philosophy} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc{\large Mathematics} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+\end{center}
+\vspace{\stretch{2}}
+\end{titlepage}
+</pre></div>
+
<hr>
<a name="verbatim"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -5366,6 +6513,7 @@
<a name="verbatim-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.27 <code>verbatim</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-verbatim"></a>
<a name="index-verbatim-environment"></a>
<a name="index-verbatim-text"></a>
<a name="index-simulating-typed-text"></a>
@@ -5433,6 +6581,7 @@
<a name="verse-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">8.28 <code>verse</code></h3>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-verse"></a>
<a name="index-verse-environment"></a>
<a name="index-poetry_002c-an-environment-for"></a>
@@ -5485,14 +6634,16 @@
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="4">\- (hyphenation)</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert explicit hyphenation.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfussy" accesskey="5">\fussy</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Be fussy about line breaking.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="5">\discretionary</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert explicit hyphenation with control of hyphen character.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csloppy" accesskey="6">\sloppy</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Be sloppy about line breaking.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfussy" accesskey="6">\fussy</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Be fussy about line breaking.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="7">\hyphenation</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csloppy" accesskey="7">\sloppy</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Be sloppy about line breaking.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="8">\linebreak & \nolinebreak</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="8">\hyphenation</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="9">\linebreak & \nolinebreak</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
+</td></tr>
</table>
@@ -5531,7 +6682,7 @@
command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in
a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment.
</p>
-<p>Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a <code>p{..}</code> column
+<p>Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a <code>p{...}</code> column
in a <code>tabular</code> environment) the <code>\newline</code> command is a synonym for
<code>\\</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a>).
</p>
@@ -5582,7 +6733,7 @@
breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
</p>
<p>Inside a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment, in a column with a
-specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically <code>p{..}</code>,
+specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically <code>p{...}</code>,
<code>\newline</code> will insert a line break inside of the column, that is,
it does not break the entire row. To break the entire row use <code>\\</code>
or its equivalent <code>\tabularnewline</code>.
@@ -5603,7 +6754,7 @@
<a name="g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy" accesskey="n" rel="next">\fussy</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newline</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="n" rel="next">\discretionary</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newline</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005c_002d-_0028discretionary-hyphen_0029"></a>
<h3 class="section">9.4 <code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</h3>
@@ -5621,15 +6772,32 @@
hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points
that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
</p>
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cdiscretionary"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy" accesskey="n" rel="next">\fussy</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\- (hyphenation)</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cdiscretionary-_0028generalized-hyphenation-point_0029"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.5 <code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</h3>
+<a name="index-hyphenation_002c-discretionary"></a>
+<a name="index-discretionary-hyphenation"></a>
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\discretionary{<var>pre-break-text</var>}{<var>post-break-text</var>}{<var>no-break-text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005cfussy"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005csloppy" accesskey="n" rel="next">\sloppy</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\- (hyphenation)</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csloppy" accesskey="n" rel="next">\sloppy</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\discretionary</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005cfussy-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">9.5 <code>\fussy</code></h3>
+<h3 class="section">9.6 <code>\fussy</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005cfussy"></a>
@@ -5638,7 +6806,7 @@
words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.
</p>
<p>This command cancels the effect of a previous <code>\sloppy</code> command
-(see <a href="#g_t_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>.
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>).
</p>
<hr>
@@ -5648,7 +6816,7 @@
Next: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hyphenation</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\fussy</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005csloppy-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">9.6 <code>\sloppy</code></h3>
+<h3 class="section">9.7 <code>\sloppy</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005csloppy"></a>
@@ -5666,7 +6834,7 @@
Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next">\linebreak & \nolinebreak</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csloppy" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\sloppy</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005chyphenation-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">9.7 <code>\hyphenation</code></h3>
+<h3 class="section">9.8 <code>\hyphenation</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005chyphenation"></a>
<a name="index-hyphenation_002c-defining"></a>
@@ -5696,7 +6864,7 @@
Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hyphenation</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">9.8 <code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></h3>
+<h3 class="section">9.9 <code>\linebreak</code> & <code>\nolinebreak</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005clinebreak"></a>
<a name="index-_005cnolinebreak"></a>
@@ -6061,7 +7229,8 @@
\textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\
\textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
\textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
- \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with
+ HMS Surprise.}
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
</pre></div>
@@ -6072,7 +7241,7 @@
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{center}
\begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
- .. tabular material ..
+ ... tabular material ...
\end{minipage}
\end{center}
</pre></div>
@@ -6107,26 +7276,32 @@
<a name="Footnotes-in-section-headings-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">11.5 Footnotes in section headings</h3>
-<p>Putting a footnote in a section heading
+<a name="index-footnotes_002c-in-section-headings"></a>
+<a name="index-table-of-contents_002c-avoiding-footnotes"></a>
+<p>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+<pre class="example">\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
</pre></div>
-<p>causes the footnote to appear both at the bottom of the page where the
-section starts and at the bottom of the table of contents page. To have
-it not appear on the table of contents use the package <samp>footmisc</samp>
-with the <code>stable</code> option.
+<a name="index-package_002c-footmisc"></a>
+<a name="index-footmisc-package"></a>
+<a name="index-stable-option-to-footmisc-package"></a>
+<p>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. To have it not appear
+on the table of contents use the package <samp>footmisc</samp> with the
+<code>stable</code> option.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
- ..
+...
\begin{document}
- ..
-\section{Full sets\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+...
+\section{Full sets\footnote{This material due to ...}}
</pre></div>
-<p>Note that the <code>\protect</code> is gone; putting it in causes the
+<p>Note that the <code>\protect</code> is gone; including it would cause the
footnote to reappear on the table of contents.
</p>
@@ -6148,12 +7323,12 @@
<pre class="example">\usepackage{bigfoot}
\DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
\DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
- ..
+ ...
\begin{document}
- ..
+...
The third theorem is a partial converse of the
second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
- ..
+...
</pre></div>
@@ -6172,13 +7347,13 @@
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % this version of package or later
\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
- ..
+...
\begin{document}
- ..
+...
The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
- ..
+...
</pre></div>
<p>This solution will work with the package <samp>hyperref</samp>.
@@ -6276,46 +7451,49 @@
command, respectively. Synopses:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example"> \newcommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
- \newcommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
-\renewcommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
-\renewcommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+<pre class="example"> \newcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+ \newcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>The <code>*</code>-form of these two commands requires that the arguments
-not contain multiple paragraphs of text (not <code>\long</code>, in plain
-TeX terms).
+<a name="index-starred-form_002c-defining-new-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-_002a_002dform_002c-defining-new-commands"></a>
+<p>The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text (not <code>\long</code>, in plain TeX
+terms).
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dt><var>cmd</var></dt>
-<dd><p>Required; the command name. It must begin with <code>\</code>. For
-<code>\newcommand</code>, it must not be already defined and must not begin
-with <code>\end</code>. For <code>\renewcommand</code>, it must already be
-defined.
+<dd><p>Required; <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is the command name. For <code>\newcommand</code>, it
+must not be already defined and must not begin with <code>\end</code>. For
+<code>\renewcommand</code>, it must already be defined.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><var>nargs</var></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
-that the command will take. If this argument is not present, the
-default is for the command to have no arguments. When redefining a
-command, the new version can have a different number of arguments than
-the old version.
+that the command can take, including any optional argument. If this
+argument is not present, the default is for the command to have no
+arguments. When redefining a command, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><var>optargdefault</var></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of defined
-command <var>\cmd</var> is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var>
+command <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var>
(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
-<var>\cmd</var> does not take an optional argument.
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> does not take an optional argument.
</p>
-<p>That is, if <var>\cmd</var> is used with square brackets following, as in
-<code>\<var>cmd</var>[<var>myval</var>]</code>, then within <var>defn</var> <code>#1</code> expands
-<var>myval</var>. While if <var>\cmd</var> is called without square brackets
-following, then within <var>defn</var> the <code>#1</code> expands to the default
-<var>optargdefault</var>. In either case, any required arguments will be
-referred to starting with <code>#2</code>.
+<a name="index-positional-parameter"></a>
+<p>That is, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is used with square brackets following,
+as in <code>\<var>cmd</var>[<var>myval</var>]</code>, then within <var>defn</var> the first
+<em>positional parameter</em> <code>#1</code> expands <var>myval</var>. On the
+other hand, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is called without square brackets
+following, then within <var>defn</var> the positional parameter <code>#1</code>
+expands to the default <var>optargdefault</var>. In either case, any
+required arguments will be referred to starting with <code>#2</code>.
</p>
-<p>Omitting <code>[<var>myval</var>]</code> in the call is different from having the
+<p>Omitting <code>[<var>myval</var>]</code> in a call is different from having the
square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>. The former results
in <code>#1</code> expanding to <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter results in
<code>#1</code> expanding to the empty string.
@@ -6322,38 +7500,40 @@
</p>
</dd>
<dt><var>defn</var></dt>
-<dd><p>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <code>cmd</code>; a
-construct of the form <code>#<var>n</var></code> in <var>defn</var> is replaced by the
-text of the <var>n</var>th argument.
+<dd><p>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <code>\<var>cmd</var></code>; the
+positional parameter <code>#<var>n</var></code> in <var>defn</var> is replaced by
+the text of the <var>n</var>th argument.
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
-<p>A command with no arguments that is followed in the source by a space
-will swallow that space. The solution is to type <code>{}</code> after the
-command and before the space.
+<p>TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in ‘<samp>\cmd </samp>’. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type <code>{}</code> after the command (‘<samp>\cmd{} </samp>’;
+another solution is to use an explicit control space (‘<samp>\cmd\ </samp>’).
</p>
<p>A simple example of defining a new command:
-<code>\newcommand{\JH}{Jim Hef{}feron}</code> causes the abbreviation
-<code>\JH</code> to be replaced by the longer text.
+<code>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</code> results in
+<code>\RS</code> being replaced by the longer text.
</p>
-<p>Redefining a command is basically the same:
+<p>Redefining an existing command is similar:
<code>\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}</code>.
</p>
-<p>Here’s a command definition that uses arguments:
+<p>Here’s a command definition with one required argument:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\newcommand{\defreference}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
</pre></div>
-<p>Then, <code>\defreference{def:basis}</code> will expand to
+<p>Then, <code>\defref{def:basis}</code> expands to
+<code>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</code>, which will ultimately expand to
something like ‘<samp>Definition~3.14</samp>’.
</p>
-<p>An example with two arguments:
-<code>\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{#1\!\times\!#2}</code> is invoked as
+<p>An example with two required arguments:
+<code>\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}</code> is invoked as
<code>\nbym{2}{k}</code>.
</p>
-<p>An example with optional arguments:
+<p>An example with an optional argument:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
@@ -6363,17 +7543,19 @@
<code>\salutation[John]</code> gives ‘<samp>Dear John:</samp>’. And
<code>\salutation[]</code> gives ‘<samp>Dear :</samp>’.
</p>
-<p>The braces around <var>defn</var> do not delimit the scope of the result of
-expanding <var>defn</var>. So <code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</code>
-is wrong since in the sentence
+<p>The braces around <var>defn</var> do not define a group, that is, they do
+not delimit the scope of the result of expanding <var>defn</var>. So
+<code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</code> is problematic; in this
+sentence,
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Virginia}.
+<pre class="example">The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
</pre></div>
-<p>the words ‘<samp>met the</samp>’ will incorrectly be in italics. An
-extra pair of braces <code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</code>
-fixes it.
+<p>the words ‘<samp>met the</samp>’ would incorrectly be in italics. Another
+pair of braces in the definition is needed, like this:
+<code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</code>. Those braces are
+part of the definition and thus do define a group.
</p>
<hr>
@@ -6417,21 +7599,24 @@
<a name="index-_005cnewcounter"></a>
<a name="index-counters_002c-defining-new"></a>
-<p>Synopsis:
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\newcounter{<var>countername</var>}[<var>supercounter</var>]
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{<var>countername</var>}
+\newcounter{<var>countername</var>}[<var>supercounter</var>]
</pre></div>
-<p>The <code>\newcounter</code> command globally defines a new counter named
-<var>countername</var>. The name consists of letters only and does not begin
-with a backslash (‘<samp>\</samp>’). The name must not already be used by
-another counter. The new counter is initialized to zero.
+<p>Globally defines a new counter named <var>countername</var> and initialize
+the new counter to zero.
</p>
-<p>If the optional argument <code>[<var>supercounter</var>]</code> appears, then
+<p>The name <var>countername</var> must consists of letters only, and does not
+begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+</p>
+<p>When you use the optional argument <code>[<var>supercounter</var>]</code> then
<var>countername</var> will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the
existing counter <var>supercounter</var>. For example, ordinarily
-<code>subsection</code> is numbered within <code>section</code>. Any time
+<code>subsection</code> is numbered within <code>section</code> so that any time
<var>supercounter</var> is incremented with <code>\stepcounter</code>
(see <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>) or <code>\refstepcounter</code>
(see <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>) then <var>countername</var> is reset to zero.
@@ -6514,22 +7699,24 @@
<a name="index-redefining-environments"></a>
<p>These commands define or redefine an environment <var>env</var>, that is,
-<code>\begin{<var>env</var>} … \end{<var>env</var>}</code>. Synopses:
+<code>\begin{<var>env</var>} <var>body</var> \end{<var>env</var>}</code>. Synopses:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example"> \newenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
+<pre class="example"> \newenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
\newenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
-\renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
+ \renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
\renewenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdefn</var>}{<var>enddefn</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>Unlike <code>\newcommand</code> and <code>\renewcommand</code>, the <code>*</code>-forms
-<code>\newenvironment*</code> and <code>\renewcommand*</code> have the same effect
-as the forms with no <code>*</code>.
+<a name="index-_002a_002dform-of-environment-commands"></a>
+<p>The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. The body of these environments can
+still contain multiple paragraphs.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dt><var>env</var></dt>
-<dd><p>Required; the environment name. It does not begin with backslash
+<dd><p>Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+<code>*</code> character, and thus does not begin with backslash
(<code>\</code>). It must not begin with the string <code>end</code>. For
<code>\newenvironment</code>, the name <var>env</var> must not be the name of an
already existing environment, and also the command <code>\<var>env</var></code>
@@ -6539,8 +7726,8 @@
</dd>
<dt><var>nargs</var></dt>
<dd><p>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
-that the environment will take. These arguments appear after the
-<code>\begin</code>, as in
+that the environment will take. When the environment is used these
+arguments appear after the <code>\begin</code>, as in
<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}{<var>arg1</var>}…{<var>argn</var>}</code>. If this
argument is not present then the default is for the environment to have
no arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have
@@ -6553,16 +7740,16 @@
(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
the environment does not take an optional argument.
</p>
-<p>That is, when <code>[<var>optargdefault</var>]</code> is present in the environment
-definition, if <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> is used with square brackets
-following, as in <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}[<var>myval</var>]</code>, then within
-the environment <code>#1</code> expands <var>myval</var>. If
-<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> is called without square brackets following,
-then within the environment the <code>#1</code> expands to the default
-<var>optargdefault</var>. In either case, any required arguments will be
-referred to starting with <code>#2</code>.
+<p>That is, when <code>[<var>optargdefault</var>]</code> is present in the
+environment definition, if <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> is used with
+square brackets following, as in
+<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}[<var>myval</var>]</code>, then, within <var>begdefn</var>,
+the positional parameter <code>#1</code> expands to <var>myval</var>. If
+<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> is called without square brackets
+following, then, within within <var>begdefn</var>, the positional parameter
+<code>#1</code> expands to the default <var>optargdefault</var>. In either case,
+any required arguments will be referred to starting with <code>#2</code>.
</p>
-
<p>Omitting <code>[<var>myval</var>]</code> in the call is different from having the
square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>. The former results
in <code>#1</code> expanding to <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter results in
@@ -6571,25 +7758,27 @@
</dd>
<dt><var>begdefn</var></dt>
<dd><p>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
-<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code>; a construct of the form <code>#<var>n</var></code> in
-<var>begdef</var> is replaced by the text of the <var>n</var>th argument.
+<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code>. Within <var>begdef</var>, the <var>n</var>th
+positional parameter (i.e., <code>#<var>n</var></code>) is replaced by the text
+of the <var>n</var>th argument.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><var>enddefn</var></dt>
<dd><p>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
-<code>\end{<var>env</var>}</code>. Note that it may not contain any argument
-parameters, so <code>#<var>n</var></code> cannot be used here.
+<code>\end{<var>env</var>}</code>. This may not contain any positional
+parameters, so <code>#<var>n</var></code> cannot be used here (but see the final
+example below).
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
-<p>The environment <var>env</var> delimits the scope of the result of expanding
-<var>begdefn</var> and <var>enddefn</var>. Thus, in the first example below, the
-effect of the <code>\small</code> is limited to the quote and does not extend
-to material following the environment.
+<p>All environments, that is to say the <var>begdefn</var> code, the environment
+body and the <var>enddefn</var> code, are processed within a group. Thus, in
+the first example below, the effect of the <code>\small</code> is limited to
+the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
</p>
-<p>This example gives an environment like LaTeX’s <code>quotation</code> except that
-it will be set in smaller type.
+<p>This example gives an environment like LaTeX’s <code>quotation</code>
+except that it will be set in smaller type:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
@@ -6599,8 +7788,8 @@
}
</pre></div>
-<p>This shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment that
-cites the author.
+<p>This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
+that cites the author:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
@@ -6611,17 +7800,17 @@
}
</pre></div>
-<p>The author’s name is optional, and defaults to Shakespeare.
-In the document, use the environment as here:
+<p>The author’s name is optional, and defaults to ‘<samp>Shakespeare</samp>’.
+In the document, use the environment like this:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
- ..
+ ...
\end{citequote}
</pre></div>
<p>The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in
-<var>enddefn</var>.
+<var>enddefn</var>, in this case in a box (see <a href="#g_t_005csbox">\sbox</a>):
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
@@ -6650,42 +7839,38 @@
<a name="index-theorem_002dlike-environment"></a>
<a name="index-environment_002c-theorem_002dlike"></a>
-<p>Define a new <em>theorem-like environment</em>. Synopses:
+<p>Define a new theorem-like environment. Synopses:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}[<var>numbered_within</var>]
+<pre class="example">\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}
+\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}[<var>numbered_within</var>]
\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}[<var>numbered_like</var>]{<var>title</var>}
</pre></div>
-<p>Both create a theorem-like environment <var>name</var>. Using the first
-form,
+<p>Using the first form, <code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}</code>
+creates an environment that will be labelled with <var>title</var>. See the
+first example below.
</p>
-<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}[<var>numbered_within</var>]
-</pre></div>
-
-<p>with the optional argument after the second required argument,
+<p>The second form
+<code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}[<var>numbered_within</var>]</code>
creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
-counter <var>numbered_within</var>: it will be reset when
+counter <var>numbered_within</var> (its counter will be reset when
<var>numbered_within</var> is reset).
</p>
-<p>Using the second form,
-</p>
-<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}[<var>numbered_like</var>]{<var>title</var>}
-</pre></div>
-<p>with the optional argument between the two required
-arguments, will create an environment whose counter will share the
-previously defined counter <var>numbered_like</var>.
+<p>The third form
+<code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}[<var>numbered_like</var>]{<var>title</var>}</code>,
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, will create
+an environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+<var>numbered_like</var>.
</p>
<p>You can specify one of <var>numbered_within</var> and <var>numbered_like</var>,
or neither, but not both.
</p>
<p>This command creates a counter named <var>name</var>. In addition, unless
-the optional argument <var>numbered_like</var> is used, the current
-<code>\ref</code> value will be that of <code>\the<var>numbered_within</var></code>
-(see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>).
+the optional argument <var>numbered_like</var> is used, inside of the
+theorem-like environment the current <code>\ref</code> value will be that of
+<code>\the<var>numbered_within</var></code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>).
</p>
<p>This declaration is global. It is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
</p>
@@ -6721,8 +7906,9 @@
</dl>
<p>Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
-sequentially. This example has a declaration in the preamble that
-results in ‘<samp>Definition 1</samp>’ and ‘<samp>Definition 2</samp>’ in the output.
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in ‘<samp>Definition 1</samp>’ and ‘<samp>Definition 2</samp>’ in the
+output.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
@@ -6738,7 +7924,7 @@
\end{defn}
</pre></div>
-<p>Because this example specifies the optional argument
+<p>Because the next example specifies the optional argument
<var>numbered_within</var> to <code>\newtheorem</code> as <code>section</code>, the
example, with the same document body, gives ‘<samp>Definition 1.1</samp>’
and ‘<samp>Definition 2.1</samp>’.
@@ -6757,8 +7943,8 @@
\end{defn}
</pre></div>
-<p>In this example there are two declarations in the preamble, the second
-of which calls for the new <code>thm</code> environment to use the same
+<p>In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new <code>thm</code> environment to use the same
counter as <code>defn</code>. It gives ‘<samp>Definition 1.1</samp>’, followed
by ‘<samp>Theorem 2.1</samp>’ and ‘<samp>Definition 2.2</samp>’.
</p>
@@ -6830,7 +8016,7 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
-\newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 11pt}
+\newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
\testfontat abc
\testfontscaled abc
</pre></div>
@@ -6848,13 +8034,16 @@
<a name="index-_005cprotect"></a>
<a name="index-fragile-commands"></a>
<a name="index-robust-commands"></a>
-<a name="index-moving-arguments"></a>
-<p>All LaTeX commands are either <em>fragile</em> or <em>robust</em>.
-Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
-many more, are fragile. A fragile command can break when it is used in
-the argument to certain commands. To prevent such commands from
-breaking they must be preceded by the command <code>\protect</code>.
+<p>All LaTeX commands are either <em>fragile</em> or <em>robust</em>. A
+fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain
+other commands. Commands that contain data that LaTeX writes to an
+auxiliary file and re-reads later are fragile. This includes material
+that goes into a table of contents, list of figures, list of tables,
+etc. Fragile commands also include line breaks, any command that has an
+optional argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from
+breaking, one solution is to preceded them with the command
+<code>\protect</code>.
</p>
<p>For example, when LaTeX runs the <code>\section{<var>section
name</var>}</code> command it writes the <var>section name</var> text to the
@@ -6861,10 +8050,12 @@
<samp>.aux</samp> auxiliary file, moving it there for use elsewhere in the
document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is
internally expanded by LaTeX without typesetting it directly is
-referred to as a <em>moving argument</em>. A command is fragile if it can
+referred to as a
+<a name="index-moving-arguments"></a>
+<em>moving argument</em>. A command is fragile if it can
expand during this process into invalid TeX code. Some examples of
-moving arguments are those that appear in the <code>\caption{..}</code>
-command (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>), in the <code>\thanks{..}</code> command
+moving arguments are those that appear in the <code>\caption{...}</code>
+command (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>), in the <code>\thanks{...}</code> command
(see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>), and in @-expressions in the <code>tabular</code> and
<code>array</code> environments (see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>).
</p>
@@ -6877,13 +8068,13 @@
command. Nor can a <code>\protect</code> command be used in the argument to
<code>\addtocounter</code> or <code>\setcounter</code> command.
</p>
-<p>In this example the <code>caption</code> command gives a mysterious error
+<p>In this example the <code>\caption</code> command gives a mysterious error
about an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each
<code>\raisebox</code> command with <code>\protect</code>.
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{figure}
- ..
+ ...
\caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
\end{figure}
</pre></div>
@@ -6896,9 +8087,9 @@
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\begin{document}
\tableofcontents
- ..
+...
\section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
- ..
+...
</pre></div>
@@ -6916,12 +8107,14 @@
<p>Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with
it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the
-environment or command associated with the number, except with no
-backslash (<code>\</code>). Thus the <code>\chapter</code> command starts a
-chapter and the <code>chapter</code> counter keeps track of the chapter
-number. Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX’s standard
-document classes to control numbering.
+environment or command associated with the number, except that the
+counter’s name has no backslash <code>\</code>. Thus, associated with
+the <code>\chapter</code> command is the <code>chapter</code> counter that keeps
+track of the chapter number.
</p>
+<p>Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX’s standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
@@ -6931,12 +8124,10 @@
</pre></div>
<p>The <code>mpfootnote</code> counter is used by the <code>\footnote</code> command
-inside of a minipage (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>).
+inside of a minipage (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>). The counters <code>enumi</code>
+through <code>enumiv</code> are used in the <code>enumerate</code> environment, for
+up to four levels of nesting (see <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>).
</p>
-<p>The <code>enumi</code> through <code>enumiv</code> counters are used in the
-<code>enumerate</code> environment, for up to four nested levels
-(see <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>).
-</p>
<p>New counters are created with <code>\newcounter</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>.
</p>
@@ -6945,15 +8136,15 @@
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="2">\usecounter</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Use a specified counter in a list environment.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="3">\value</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="3">\value</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Use the value of a counter in an expression.
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="4">\setcounter</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Set the value of a counter.
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="5">\addtocounter</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add a quantity to a counter.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="6">\refstepcounter</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="6">\refstepcounter</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add to a counter.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="7">\stepcounter</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="7">\stepcounter</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear" accesskey="8">\day \month \year</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Numeric date values.
</td></tr>
@@ -6971,55 +8162,67 @@
<a name="index-counters_002c-printing"></a>
+<p>Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter <var>counter</var> has the value 1 then a
+<code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code> in your source will result in a lower case
+letter a appearing in the output.
+</p>
<p>All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
instance, <code>\alph{enumi}</code>. Note that the counter name does not
start with a backslash.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\alph</code>
-<a name="index-_005calph"></a>
+<dt><code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005calph_007bcounter_007d"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>prints <var>counter</var> using lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+<dd><p>Print the value of <var>counter</var> in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\Alph</code>
-<a name="index-_005cAlph"></a>
+<dt><code>\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cAlph_007bcounter_007d"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>uses uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+<dd><p>Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\arabic</code>
-<a name="index-_005carabic"></a>
+<dt><code>\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005carabic_007bcounter_007d"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>uses Arabic numbers: ‘1’, ‘2’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+<dd><p>Print in Arabic numbers: ‘1’, ‘2’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\roman</code>
-<a name="index-_005croman"></a>
+<dt><code>\roman{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005croman_007bcounter_007d"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>uses lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+<dd><p>Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\Roman</code>
-<a name="index-_005cRoman"></a>
+<dt><code>\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cRoman_007bcounter_007d"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>uses uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+<dd><p>Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, <small class="enddots">...</small>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\fnsymbol</code>
-<a name="index-_005cfnsymbol"></a>
+<dt><code>\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfnsymbol_007bcounter_007d"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>prints the value of <var>counter</var> in a specific sequence of nine
+<dd><p>Prints the value of <var>counter</var> in a specific sequence of nine
symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of
<var>counter</var> must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
</p>
-<p>Here are the symbols (as Unicode code points in ASCII output):
+<p>Here are the symbols:
</p>
-<div class="display">
-<pre class="display">asterisk(*) dagger(‡) ddagger(‡)
-section-sign(§) paragraph-sign(¶) parallel(∥)
-double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(††) double-ddagger(‡‡)
-</pre></div>
+<table>
+<thead><tr><th width="33%">Name</th><th width="33%">Command</th><th width="33%">Equivalent Unicode symbol and/or numeric code point</th></tr></thead>
+<tr><td width="33%">asterisk</td><td width="33%"><code>\ast</code></td><td width="33%">*</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="33%">dagger</td><td width="33%"><code>\dagger</code></td><td width="33%">†</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="33%">ddagger</td><td width="33%"><code>\ddagger</code></td><td width="33%">‡</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="33%">section-sign</td><td width="33%"><code>\S</code></td><td width="33%">§</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="33%">paragraph-sign</td><td width="33%"><code>\P</code></td><td width="33%">¶</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="33%">double-vert</td><td width="33%"><code>\parallel</code></td><td width="33%">‖</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="33%">double-asterisk</td><td width="33%"><code>\ast\ast</code></td><td width="33%">**</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="33%">double-dagger</td><td width="33%"><code>\dagger\dagger</code></td><td width="33%">††</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="33%">double-ddagger</td><td width="33%"><code>\ddagger\ddagger</code></td><td width="33%">‡‡</td></tr>
+</table>
</dd>
</dl>
@@ -7135,7 +8338,14 @@
to the <var>value</var> argument. Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.
</p>
+<p>In this example the section value appears as ‘<samp>V</samp>’.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{section}{5}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+</pre></div>
+
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005caddtocounter"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -7150,7 +8360,15 @@
<p>The <code>\addtocounter</code> command globally increments <var>counter</var> by
the amount specified by the <var>value</var> argument, which may be negative.
</p>
+<p>In this example the section value appears as ‘<samp>VII</samp>’.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{section}{5}
+\addtocounter{section}{2}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+</pre></div>
+
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005crefstepcounter"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -7374,18 +8592,25 @@
<p>
Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtolength</a>, Previous: <a href="#Units-of-length" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Units of length</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<a name="g_t_005csetlength_007b_005clen_007d_007bvalue_007d"></a>
-<h3 class="section">14.2 <code>\setlength{\<var>len</var>}{<var>value</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="g_t_005csetlength-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.2 <code>\setlength</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005csetlength"></a>
<a name="index-lengths_002c-setting"></a>
-<p>The <code>\setlength</code> sets the value of <var>\len</var> to the <var>value</var>
-argument, which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX
-understands, i.e., inches (<code>in</code>), millimeters (<code>mm</code>), points
-(<code>pt</code>), big points (<code>bp</code>, etc.
+<p>Synopsis:
</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
+</pre></div>
+<p>The <code>\setlength</code> sets the value of <em>length command</em>
+<a name="index-length-command"></a>
+<code>\<var>len</var></code> to the <var>value</var> argument which can be expressed in any
+units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (<code>in</code>), millimeters
+(<code>mm</code>), points (<code>pt</code>), big points (<code>bp</code>), etc.
+</p>
+
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005caddtolength"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -7392,17 +8617,24 @@
<p>
Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settodepth</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\setlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<a name="g_t_005caddtolength_007b_005clen_007d_007bamount_007d"></a>
-<h3 class="section">14.3 <code>\addtolength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtolength-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.3 <code>\addtolength</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005caddtolength"></a>
<a name="index-lengths_002c-adding-to"></a>
-<p>The <code>\addtolength</code> command increments a “length command”
-<var>\len</var> by the amount specified in the <var>amount</var> argument, which
-may be negative.
+<p>Synopsis:
</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addtolength{<var>\len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\addtolength</code> command increments a length command <code>\<var>len</var></code>
+by the amount specified in the <var>amount</var> argument, which may be
+negative.
+</p>
+
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005csettodepth"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -7414,10 +8646,14 @@
<a name="index-_005csettodepth"></a>
-<p><code>\settodepth{\gnat}{text}</code>
+<p>Synopsis:
</p>
-<p>The <code>\settodepth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command
-equal to the depth of the <code>text</code> argument.
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\settodepth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\settodepth</code> command sets the value of a length command
+<code>\<var>len</var></code> equal to the depth of the <var>text</var> argument.
</p>
<hr>
@@ -7431,9 +8667,13 @@
<a name="index-_005csettoheight"></a>
-<p><code>\settoheight{\gnat}{text}</code>
+<p>Synopsis:
</p>
-<p>The <code>\settoheight</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\settoheight{\<var>len</var>}{text}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\settoheight</code> command sets the value of a length command <code>\<var>len</var></code>
equal to the height of the <code>text</code> argument.
</p>
@@ -7449,6 +8689,12 @@
<a name="index-_005csettowidth"></a>
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\settowidth{\<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
<p>The <code>\settowidth</code> command sets the value of the command <var>\len</var>
to the width of the <var>text</var> argument.
</p>
@@ -7479,13 +8725,15 @@
</p>
<p>These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
commands (see <a href="#Boxes">Boxes</a>). They specify the natural width, etc., of
-the text in the box. <code>\totalheight</code> equals <code>\height</code> +
-<code>\depth</code>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
+the text in the box. <code>\totalheight</code> equals <em><code>\height</code> +
+<code>\depth</code></em>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
natural size, e.g., say
</p>
-<p><code>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}</code>
-</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+</pre></div>
+
<hr>
<a name="Making-paragraphs"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -7553,7 +8801,7 @@
paragraph indentation, as in this example.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">.. end of the prior paragraph.
+<pre class="example">... end of the prior paragraph.
\noindent This paragraph is not indented.
</pre></div>
@@ -7669,8 +8917,11 @@
<a name="index-math-formulas"></a>
<a name="index-formulas_002c-math"></a>
<a name="index-math-mode_002c-entering"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-math-1"></a>
<a name="index-math-environment-1"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-displaymath-1"></a>
<a name="index-displaymath-environment-1"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-equation-1"></a>
<a name="index-equation-environment-1"></a>
<p>There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
@@ -7759,7 +9010,7 @@
<a name="index-_005e"></a>
<p>In math mode, use the caret character <code>^</code> to make the
-<var>exp</var> appear as a superscript, ie. type <code>^{<var>exp</var>}</code>.
+<var>exp</var> appear as a superscript: <code>^{<var>exp</var>}</code>.
Similarly, in math mode, underscore <code>_{<var>exp</var>}</code> makes a
subscript out of <var>exp</var>.
</p>
@@ -7815,10 +9066,14 @@
<p>Below is a list of commonly-available symbols. It is by no means an
exhaustive list. Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
-parenthesis. The commands for these symbols can be used only in math
-mode.
+parenthesis. Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
+be used only in math mode.
</p>
+<p>To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current mode,
+see <a href="#g_t_005censuremath">\ensuremath</a>.
+</p>
+
<dl compact="compact">
<dt><code>\|</code>
<a name="index-_005c_007c"></a>
@@ -7870,7 +9125,7 @@
<dt><code>\asymp</code>
<a name="index-_005casymp"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>≍ Asymptomatically equivalent (relation).
+<dd><p>≍ Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\backslash</code>
@@ -7966,8 +9221,8 @@
<dt><code>\bot</code>
<a name="index-_005cbot"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⊥ Up tack, bottom, least element of a poset, or a contradiction
-(ordinary). See also <code>\top</code>.
+<dd><p>⊥ Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered
+set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also <code>\top</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\bowtie</code>
@@ -7979,9 +9234,8 @@
<dt><code>\Box</code>
<a name="index-_005cBox"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>□ Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary). This
-is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
-<samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+<dd><p>□ Modal operator for necessity; square open box
+(ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\bullet</code>
@@ -8029,8 +9283,7 @@
<a name="index-_005ccomplement"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>∁ Set complement, used as a superscript as in
-<code>$S^\complement$</code> (ordinary). This is not available in Plain
-TeX. In LaTeX you should load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. Also
+<code>$S^\complement$</code> (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. Also
used: <code>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</code> or <code>$\bar{S}$</code>.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -8087,8 +9340,7 @@
<dt><code>\Diamond</code>
<a name="index-_005cDiamond"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). This is not available in
-Plain TeX. In LaTeX you must load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+<dd><p>◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\diamond</code>
@@ -8140,17 +9392,17 @@
<dt><code>\emptyset</code>
<a name="index-_005cemptyset"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>∅ Empty set symbol (ordinary). Similar: reversed empty
-set <code>\varnothing</code>.
-</p>
+<dd><p>∅ Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varnothing</code>.
+</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\epsilon</code>
<a name="index-_005cepsilon"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>ϵ Lower case Greek-text letter (ordinary). More widely used in
-mathematics is the curly epsilon
-<code>\varepsilon</code> ε. Related: the set membership relation
-<code>\in</code> ∈.
+<dd><p>ϵ Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
+letter epsilon <code>\varepsilon</code> ε. Related:
+the set membership relation <code>\in</code> ∈.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\equiv</code>
@@ -8269,8 +9521,8 @@
<dt><code>\in</code>
<a name="index-_005cin"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>∈ Set element (relation). See also: lower case Greek letter
-epsilon <code>\epsilon</code>ϵ and rounded small
+<dd><p>∈ Set element (relation). See also: lower case lunate
+epsilon <code>\epsilon</code>ϵ and small letter script
epsilon <code>\varepsilon</code>.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -8362,8 +9614,7 @@
<dt><code>\leadsto</code>
<a name="index-_005cleadsto"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). This is not available in
-Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+<dd><p>⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put
<code>\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}</code> in the
preamble and then use <code>\Leadsto</code> instead.
@@ -8420,15 +9671,14 @@
<dt><code>\lfloor</code>
<a name="index-_005clfloor"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⌊ Left floor bracket (opening).
+<dd><p>⌊ Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: <code>\floor</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\lhd</code>
<a name="index-_005clhd"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). This is
-not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
-<samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+<dd><p>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
+Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
<samp>amssymb</samp> and use <code>\vartriangleleft</code> (which is a relation
and so gives better spacing).
</p>
@@ -8491,8 +9741,7 @@
<a name="index-_005cmho"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>℧ Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
-This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
-<samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\mid</code>
@@ -8711,13 +9960,13 @@
<dt><code>\prec</code>
<a name="index-_005cprec"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>≺ Preceeds (relation). Similar: less than <code><</code>.
+<dd><p>≺ Precedes (relation). Similar: less than <code><</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\preceq</code>
<a name="index-_005cpreceq"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⪯ Preceeds or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+<dd><p>⪯ Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
equals <code>\leq</code>.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -8724,14 +9973,14 @@
<dt><code>\prime</code>
<a name="index-_005cprime"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>′ Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
-used as a superscript <code>$A^\prime$</code>. Note that <code>$f^\prime$</code>
-and <code>$f'$</code> produce the same result. An advantage of the second is
-that <code>$f'''$</code> produces the the desired symbol, that is, the same
-result as <code>$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$</code>, but uses somewhat less
-typing. Note that you can only use <code>\prime</code> in math mode but you
-can type right single quote <code>'</code> in text mode also, although it
-resuts in a different look than in math mode.
+<dd><p>′ Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).
+Typically used as a superscript: <code>$f^\prime$</code>; <code>$f^\prime$</code>
+and <code>$f'$</code> produce the same result. An advantage of the second
+is that <code>$f'''$</code> produces the desired symbol, that is, the same
+result as <code>$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$</code>, but uses rather less
+typing. You can only use <code>\prime</code> in math mode. Using the right
+single quote <code>'</code> in text mode produces a different character
+(apostrophe).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\prod</code>
@@ -8761,7 +10010,7 @@
<dt><code>\rangle</code>
<a name="index-_005crangle"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>➹ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
+<dd><p>⟩ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
than <code>></code>. Matches:<code>\langle</code>.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -8797,10 +10046,16 @@
<a name="index-_005crestriction"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>↾ Restriction of a function
-(relation). Synonym: <code>\upharpoonright</code>. Not available in
-Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+(relation). Synonym: <code>\upharpoonright</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
</p>
</dd>
+<dt><code>\revemptyset</code>
+<a name="index-_005crevemptyset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>⦰ Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+<code>\varnothing</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>stix</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
<dt><code>\rfloor</code>
<a name="index-_005crfloor"></a>
</dt>
@@ -8811,10 +10066,9 @@
<dt><code>\rhd</code>
<a name="index-_005crhd"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). This is
-not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
-<samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should
-instead load <samp>amssymb</samp> and use <code>\vartriangleright</code> (which
+<dd><p>◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
+Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
+load <samp>amssymb</samp> and use <code>\vartriangleright</code> (which
is a relation and so gives better spacing).
</p>
</dd>
@@ -8911,7 +10165,7 @@
<dt><code>\smile</code>
<a name="index-_005csmile"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⌣ Upward curving arc (ordinary).
+<dd><p>⌣ Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\spadesuit</code>
@@ -8939,8 +10193,7 @@
<a name="index-_005csqsubset"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>⊏ Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
-subset <code>\subset</code>. This is not available in Plain TeX. In
-LaTeX you should load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+subset <code>\subset</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\sqsubseteq</code>
@@ -8954,8 +10207,7 @@
<a name="index-_005csqsupset"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>⊐ Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
-superset <code>\supset</code>. This is not available in Plain TeX. In
-LaTeX you should load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+superset <code>\supset</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\sqsupseteq</code>
@@ -9024,7 +10276,7 @@
<a name="index-_005csurd"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>√ Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command
-<code>\sqrt{..}</code> typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
+<code>\sqrt{...}</code> typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
that extends to cover the argument.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -9064,8 +10316,8 @@
<dt><code>\top</code>
<a name="index-_005ctop"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⊤ Top, greatest element of a poset (ordinary). See
-also <code>\bot</code>.
+<dd><p>⊤ Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set
+(ordinary). See also <code>\bot</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\triangle</code>
@@ -9086,51 +10338,54 @@
<dt><code>\triangleright</code>
<a name="index-_005ctriangleright"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>▷ Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
-subgroup symbol you should instead load <samp>amssymb</samp> and
-use <code>\vartriangleright</code> (which is a relation and so gives
-better spacing).
+<dd><p>▷ Not-filled triangle pointing right
+(binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+<samp>amssymb</samp> and use <code>\vartriangleright</code> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\unlhd</code>
<a name="index-_005cunlhd"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⊴ Left-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with a
-line under (binary). This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX
-you should load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the normal subgroup
-symbol load <samp>amssymb</samp> and use <code>\vartrianglelefteq</code> (which
-is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+<dd><p>⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
+is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For
+the normal subgroup symbol load <samp>amssymb</samp> and
+use <code>\vartrianglelefteq</code> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\unrhd</code>
<a name="index-_005cunrhd"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⊵ Right-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with a
-line under (binary). This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX
-you should load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the normal subgroup
-symbol load <samp>amssymb</samp> and use <code>\vartrianglerighteq</code>
-(which is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+<dd><p>⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
+is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For
+the normal subgroup symbol load <samp>amssymb</samp> and
+use <code>\vartrianglerighteq</code> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\Uparrow</code>
<a name="index-_005cUparrow"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⇑ Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
-single-line up-pointing arrow <code>\uparrow</code>.
+<dd><p>⇑ Double-line upward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing
+arrow <code>\uparrow</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\uparrow</code>
<a name="index-_005cuparrow"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>↑ Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation). Similar:
-double-line up-pointing arrow <code>\Uparrow</code>.
+<dd><p>↑ Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges
+(relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing
+arrow <code>\Uparrow</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\Updownarrow</code>
<a name="index-_005cUpdownarrow"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⇕ Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
-single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow <code>\updownarrow</code>.
+<dd><p>⇕ Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow <code>\updownarrow</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\updownarrow</code>
@@ -9144,16 +10399,15 @@
<a name="index-_005cupharpoonright"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>↾ Up harpoon, with barb on right side
-(relation). Synonym: <code>\restriction</code>. Not available in Plain
-TeX. In LaTeX you should load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+(relation). Synonym: <code>\restriction</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\uplus</code>
<a name="index-_005cuplus"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the middle
-(binary). Similar: union <code>\cup</code>. Related: variable-sized
-operator <code>\biguplus</code>.
+<dd><p>⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
+the middle (binary). Similar: union <code>\cup</code>. Related:
+variable-sized operator <code>\biguplus</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\Upsilon</code>
@@ -9171,58 +10425,69 @@
<dt><code>\varepsilon</code>
<a name="index-_005cvarepsilon"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>ε Rounded small epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used in
-mathematics than the non-variant lower case Greek-text letter form
-<code>\epsilon</code> ϵ. Related: set membership <code>\in</code>.
+<dd><p>ε Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is
+more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+<code>\epsilon</code> ϵ. Related: set
+membership <code>\in</code>.
</p>
</dd>
+<dt><code>\vanothing</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvanothing"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>∅ Empty set symbol. Similar:
+<code>\emptyset</code>. Related: <code>\revemptyset</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
<dt><code>\varphi</code>
<a name="index-_005cvarphi"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>φ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <code>\phi</code> ϕ.
+<dd><p>φ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\phi</code> ϕ.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\varpi</code>
<a name="index-_005cvarpi"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>ϖ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <code>\pi</code> π.
+<dd><p>ϖ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\pi</code> π.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\varrho</code>
<a name="index-_005cvarrho"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>ϱ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <code>\rho</code> ρ.
+<dd><p>ϱ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\rho</code> ρ.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\varsigma</code>
<a name="index-_005cvarsigma"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>ς Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <code>\sigma</code> σ.
+<dd><p>ς Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<code>\sigma</code> σ.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\vartheta</code>
<a name="index-_005cvartheta"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>ϑ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is <code>\theta</code> θ.
+<dd><p>ϑ Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<code>\theta</code> θ.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\vdash</code>
<a name="index-_005cvdash"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>⊢ Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation). Similar:
-turnstile rotated a half-circle <code>\dashv</code>.
+<dd><p>⊢ Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash
+(relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a
+half-circle <code>\dashv</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\vee</code>
<a name="index-_005cvee"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>∨ Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
-and <code>\wedge</code>. Similar: variable-sized
+<dd><p>∨ Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related:
+logical and <code>\wedge</code>. Similar: variable-sized
operator <code>\bigvee</code>.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -9232,16 +10497,17 @@
<dd><p>‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
bar <code>\vert</code>.
</p>
-<p>For a norm you can use the <samp>mathtools</samp> package and add
+<p>For a norm symbol, you can use the <samp>mathtools</samp> package and add
<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}</code> to your
-preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line vertical
-bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
-write the starred version <code>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</code> then the height of
-the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
-<code>\norm{M^\perp}</code> the bars do not grow with the height of the
-argument but instead are the default height, and <code>\norm[<var>size
-command</var>]{M^\perp}</code> also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
-the size given in the <var>size command</var>, e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
+preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line
+vertical bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the
+document body you write the starred version <code>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</code>
+then the height of the vertical bars will match the height of the
+argument, whereas with <code>\norm{M^\perp}</code> the bars do not grow
+with the height of the argument but instead are the default height,
+and <code>\norm[<var>size command</var>]{M^\perp}</code> also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the <var>size command</var>,
+e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\vert</code>
@@ -9510,7 +10776,7 @@
<dt><code>\sup</code>
<a name="index-_005csup"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>sup
+<dd><p><em>\sup</em>
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\tan</code>
@@ -9698,7 +10964,7 @@
<dd><a name="index-_005c_002c"></a>
<a name="index-_005cthinspace"></a>
<p>Normally <code>3mu</code>. The longer name is <code>\thinspace</code>. This can
-be used in both math mode and text mode.
+be used in both math mode and text mode. See <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace">\thinspace</a>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\!</code></dt>
@@ -9747,9 +11013,31 @@
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-discretionary-multiplication"></a>
<a name="index-multiplication-symbol_002c-discretionary-line-break"></a>
-<p>A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
-allowed.
+<p>A <em>discretionary</em> multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
+allowed. Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated by a
+space, while in the case of a break a × symbol is
+printed immediately before the break. So
</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\)
+through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is
+equal to zero.
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>will make that sort of output <!-- /@w -->(the ellipsis ‘<samp>[…]</samp>’ is here to show the line break at
+the same place as in a TeX output):
+</p>
+<blockquote class="indentedblock">
+<p>Now <em>A_3 = 0</em>,
+[…]
+<em>A_1</em>
+through <em>A_4</em>, that is <em>A_1 A_2 \times</em><br><em>A_3 A_4</em>, is
+equal to zero.
+</p></blockquote>
+
</dd>
<dt><code>\cdots</code>
<a name="index-_005ccdots"></a>
@@ -9763,11 +11051,11 @@
<dd><p>A diagonal ellipsis: <em>\ddots</em>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\frac{num}{den}</code>
+<dt><code>\frac{<var>num</var>}{<var>den</var>}</code>
<a name="index-_005cfrac_007bnum_007d_007bden_007d"></a>
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-_005cfrac"></a>
-<p>Produces the fraction <code>num</code> divided by <code>den</code>.
+<p>Produces the fraction <var>num</var> divided by <var>den</var>.
</p>
</dd>
@@ -9776,32 +11064,68 @@
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-_005cright"></a>
<a name="index-null-delimiter"></a>
-<p>The two delimiters need not match; ‘<samp>.</samp>’ acts as a null delimiter,
+<p>The two delimiters need not match; ‘<samp>.</samp>’ acts as a <em>null delimiter</em>,
producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math
-in between. Example: <code>\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]</code>.
+in between. Example: <code>\left( \sum_{i=1}^{10} a_i \right]</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\overbrace{<var>text</var>}</code>
-<a name="index-_005coverbrace_007btext_007d"></a>
+<dt><code>\mathdollar</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathdollar"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>Generates a brace over <var>text</var>.
-For example, <em>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}</em>.
+<dd><p>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
</p>
</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathellipsis</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathellipsis"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: ….
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathparagraph</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathparagraph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: ¶.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathsection</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathsection"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Section sign in math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathsterling</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathsterling"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sterling sign in math mode: £.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathunderscore</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathunderscore"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Underscore in math mode: _.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\overbrace{<var>math</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005coverbrace_007bmath_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Generates a brace over <var>math</var>.
+For example, <code>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \;\textrm{times}}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
<dt><code>\overline{<var>text</var>}</code>
<a name="index-_005coverline_007btext_007d"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>Generates a horizontal line over <var>tex</var>.
-For example, <em>\overline{x+y}</em>.
+For example, <code>\overline{x+y}</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\sqrt[<var>root</var>]{arg}</code>
+<dt><code>\sqrt[<var>root</var>]{<var>arg</var>}</code>
<a name="index-_005csqrt_005broot_005d_007barg_007d"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>Produces the representation of the square root of <var>arg</var>. The
optional argument <var>root</var> determines what root to produce. For
example, the cube root of <code>x+y</code> would be typed as
-<code>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</code>.
+<code>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</code>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\stackrel{<var>text</var>}{<var>relation</var>}</code>
@@ -9811,13 +11135,13 @@
<code>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</code>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\underbrace{math}</code>
+<dt><code>\underbrace{<var>math</var>}</code>
<a name="index-_005cunderbrace_007bmath_007d"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><p>Generates <var>math</var> with a brace underneath.
+<dd><p>Generates <var>math</var> with a brace underneath. For example, <code>\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}</code>
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\underline{text}</code>
+<dt><code>\underline{<var>text</var>}</code>
<a name="index-_005cunderline_007btext_007d"></a>
</dt>
<dd><p>Causes <var>text</var>, which may be either math mode or not, to be
@@ -9828,8 +11152,7 @@
<dt><code>\vdots</code>
<a name="index-_005cvdots"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><a name="index-_005cvdots-1"></a>
-<p>Produces a vertical ellipsis.
+<dd><p>Produces a vertical ellipsis.
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
@@ -9889,8 +11212,56 @@
be in “inner paragraph mode” (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph
mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”.
</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005censuremath" accesskey="1">\ensuremath</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Ensure that math mode is active
+</td></tr>
+</table>
<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005censuremath"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#Modes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Modes</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005censuremath-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">17.1 <code>\ensuremath</code></h3>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ensuremath{<var>formula</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\ensuremath</code> command ensures that <var>formula</var> is typeset in
+math mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used.
+</p>
+<p>For instance:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{report}
+\newcommand{\ab}{\ensuremath{(\delta, \varepsilon)}}
+\begin{document}
+Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac{1}{\pi}, 0)\), ...
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that
+they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for
+<code>\leadsto</code>:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{report}
+\usepackage{amssymb}
+\newcommand{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}{}
+\let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto
+\renewcommand\leadsto{\ensuremath{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}}
+\begin{document}
+All roads \leadsto\ Rome.
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
<a name="Page-styles"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
@@ -10127,17 +11498,18 @@
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040" accesskey="3">\(SPACE) and \@</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Space after a period.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-CS" accesskey="4">\(SPACE) after CS</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Controlling space gobbling after a control sequence.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence" accesskey="4">\(SPACE) after control sequence</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Space (gobbling) after a control sequence.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing" accesskey="5">\frenchspacing</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Make interword and intersentence space equal.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing" accesskey="5">\frenchspacing</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace" accesskey="6">\thinspace</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">One-sixth of an em.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_002f" accesskey="7">\/</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert italic correction.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005c_002f" accesskey="7">\/</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert italic correction.
</td></tr>
<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_005cdotfill" accesskey="8">\hrulefill \dotfill</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
</td></tr>
<tr><th colspan="3" align="left" valign="top"><pre class="menu-comment">
+
Vertical space
</pre></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005caddvspace" accesskey="9">\addvspace</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
</td></tr>
@@ -10178,7 +11550,7 @@
<p>Normally when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both. This
-command’s starred version <code>\hspace*{..}</code> puts a non-discardable
+command’s starred version <code>\hspace*{...}</code> puts a non-discardable
invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
output.
</p>
@@ -10217,7 +11589,7 @@
<a name="g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-CS" accesskey="n" rel="next">\(SPACE) after CS</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chfill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence" accesskey="n" rel="next">\(SPACE) after control sequence</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chfill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">19.3 <code>\(SPACE)</code> and \@</h3>
@@ -10237,7 +11609,7 @@
sentence unless it is preceded by a capital letter, in which case it
takes that period for part of an abbreviation. Note that if a
sentence-ending period is immediately followed by a right parenthesis or
-bracket, or right single or double quote, then the intersentence space
+bracket, or right single or double quote, then the inter-sentence space
follows that parenthesis or quote.
</p>
<p>If you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not a
@@ -10246,38 +11618,39 @@
a tie (<code>~</code>). Examples are <code>Nat.\ Acad.\ Science</code>, and
<code>Mr.~Bean</code>, and <code>(manure, etc.)\ for sale</code>.
</p>
-<p>For other use of <code>\ </code>, see also <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-CS">\(SPACE) after CS</a>.
+<p>For another use of <code>\ </code>, see <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence">\(SPACE) after control sequence</a>.
</p>
<p>In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
-period that ends the sentence, then put <code>\@</code> on the left of that
-period. For example, <code>book by the MAA\@.</code> will have intersentence
+period that ends the sentence, then put <code>\@</code> before that period.
+For example, <code>book by the MAA\@.</code> will have inter-sentence
spacing after the period.
</p>
-<p>In contrast, putting <code>\@</code> on the right of a period tells TeX
-that the period does not end the sentence. In the example
-<code>reserved words (if, then, etc.\@) are different</code>, TeX will put
-interword space after the closing parenthesis (note that <code>\@</code> is
-before the parenthesis).
+<p>In contrast, putting <code>\@</code> after a period tells TeX that the
+period does not end the sentence. In the example <code>reserved words
+(if, then, etc.\@) are different</code>, TeX will put interword space
+after the closing parenthesis (note that <code>\@</code> is before the
+parenthesis).
</p>
+
<hr>
-<a name="g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-CS"></a>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing" accesskey="n" rel="next">\frenchspacing</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\(SPACE) and \@</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<a name="g_t_005c--after-a-control-sequence"></a>
-<h3 class="section">19.4 <code>\ </code> after a control sequence</h3>
+<a name="g_t_005c--after-control-sequence"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.4 <code>\ </code> after control sequence</h3>
-<p>The <code>\ </code> command is often used after control sequences to keep them
-from gobbling the space that follows, as in <code>\TeX\ is a nice
-system.</code> And, under normal circumstances <code>\</code><tt class="key">tab</tt> and
-<code>\</code><tt class="key">newline</tt> are equivalent to <code>\ </code>. For other use of
+<p>The <code>\ </code> command is often used after control sequences to keep
+them from gobbling the space that follows, as in ‘<samp>\TeX\ is nice</samp>’.
+And, under normal circumstances, <code>\</code><tt class="key">tab</tt> and
+<code>\</code><tt class="key">newline</tt> are equivalent to <code>\ </code>. For another use of
<code>\ </code>, see also <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040">\(SPACE) and \@</a>.
</p>
<p>Some people prefer to use <code>{}</code> for the same purpose, as in
-<code>\TeX{} is a nice system.</code> This has the advantage that you can
-always write it the same way, like <code>\TeX{}</code>, whether it is
-followed by a space or by a punctuation mark. Please compare:
+<code>\TeX{} is nice</code>. This has the advantage that you can always
+write it the same way, namely <code>\TeX{}</code>, whether it is followed
+by a space or by a punctuation mark. Compare:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.
@@ -10285,38 +11658,17 @@
\TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.
</pre></div>
+<a name="index-package_002c-xspace"></a>
+<a name="index-xspace-package"></a>
+<p>Some individual commands, notably those defined with the <code>xspace</code>,
+package do not follow the standard behavior.
+</p>
-<p>When you define user commands (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a>) you
-can prevent the space gobbling after the command by using the package
-<code>xspace</code> and inserting <code>\xspace</code> at the end of the definition
-For instance:
-</p><div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\documentclass{minimal}
-\usepackage{xspace}
-\newcommand*{\Loup}{Grand Cric\xspace}
-\begin{document}
-Que le \Loup me croque !
-\end{document}
-</pre></div>
-
-<p>A quick hack to use <code>\xspace</code> for existing command is as follows:
-</p><div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\documentclass{minimal}
-\usepackage{xspace}
-\newcommand*{\SansXspaceTeX}{}
-\let\SansXspaceTeX\TeX
-\renewcommand{\TeX}{\SansXspaceTeX\xspace}
-\begin{document}
-\TeX is a nice system.
-\end{document}
-</pre></div>
-
-
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005cfrenchspacing"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thinspace</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-CS" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\(SPACE) after CS</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thinspace</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\(SPACE) after control sequence</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005cfrenchspacing-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">19.5 <code>\frenchspacing</code></h3>
@@ -10323,10 +11675,10 @@
<a name="index-_005cfrenchspacing"></a>
<a name="index-_005cnonfrenchspacing"></a>
-<a name="index-spacing_002c-intersentence"></a>
+<a name="index-spacing_002c-inter_002dsentence"></a>
<p>This declaration (from Plain TeX) causes LaTeX to treat
-intersentence spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
+inter-sentence spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
</p>
<p>In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions, including
English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or after other
@@ -10446,10 +11798,10 @@
the natural length of the total vertical space equal to <var>length</var>.
</p>
<p>Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
-environment that starts a new paragraph. (For instance, a Theorem
-environment is defined to begin and end in <code>\addvspace{..}</code> so
-that two consecutive Theorem’s are separated by one vertical space, not
-two.)
+environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a Theorem
+environment is defined to begin and end with <code>\addvspace{...}</code>
+so that two consecutive Theorem’s are separated by one vertical space,
+not two.
</p>
<p>This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
</p>
@@ -10471,25 +11823,28 @@
document class.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
-<dt><code>\bigskip</code></dt>
-<dd><a name="index-_005cbigskip"></a>
-<a name="index-_005cbigskipamount"></a>
+<dt><code>\bigskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cbigskipamount"></a>
<p>The same as <code>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about one line
space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the <code>book</code> and
<code>article</code> classes is <code>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</code>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\medskip</code></dt>
-<dd><a name="index-_005cmedskip"></a>
-<a name="index-_005cmedskipamount"></a>
+<dt><code>\medskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmedskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmedskipamount"></a>
<p>The same as <code>\vspace{\medskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about half of
a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the <code>book</code>
and <code>article</code> classes is <code>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</code>).
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\smallskip</code></dt>
-<dd><a name="index-_005csmallskip"></a>
-<a name="index-_005csmallskipamount"></a>
+<dt><code>\smallskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005csmallskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005csmallskipamount"></a>
<p>The same as <code>\vspace{\smallskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about a
quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the
<code>book</code> and <code>article</code> classes is <code>3pt plus 1pt minus
@@ -10561,10 +11916,14 @@
<p>Add the vertical space <var>length</var>. This can be negative or positive,
and is a rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
</p>
-<p>LaTeX removes the vertical space from <code>\vfill</code> at a page break,
-that is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version
-<code>\vspace*{..}</code> causes the space to stay.
+<p>LaTeX removes the vertical space from <code>\vspace</code> at a page
+break, that is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version
+<code>\vspace*{...}</code> causes the space to stay.
</p>
+<p>If <code>\vspace</code> is used in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode), the space is inserted <em>after</em> the line with
+the <code>\vspace</code> command. A new paragraph is not started.
+</p>
<p>In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
</p>
@@ -10679,12 +12038,18 @@
<a name="index-lrbox"></a>
-<p><code>\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}</code>
+<p>Synopsis:
</p>
-<p>This is the environment form of <code>\sbox</code>.
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{lrbox}{\<var>cmd</var>}
+ <var>text </var>
+\end{lrbox}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This is the environment form of <a href="#g_t_005csbox"><code>\sbox</code></a>.
</p>
-<p>The text inside the environment is saved in the box <code>cmd</code>, which
-must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
+<p>The <var>text</var> inside the environment is saved in the box <code>\<var>cmd</var></code>,
+which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
</p>
<hr>
@@ -10747,8 +12112,9 @@
<pre class="example">\parbox[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>][<var>inner-pos</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>text</var>}
</pre></div>
+<a name="index-paragraph-mode-1"></a>
<p>The <code>\parbox</code> command produces a box whose contents are created
-in <code>paragraph</code> mode. It should be used to make a box small
+in <em>paragraph mode</em>. It should be used to make a box small
pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you
shouldn’t use any paragraph-making environments inside a
<code>\parbox</code> argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones
@@ -10766,9 +12132,13 @@
</p></dd>
</dl>
-<p>The optional <var>position</var> argument allows you to align either the
-top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding
-text (default is top).
+<p>By default LaTeX will position vertically a parbox so its center
+lines up with the center of the surrounding text line. When the
+optional <var>position</var> argument is present and equal either to ‘<samp>t</samp>’
+or ‘<samp>b</samp>’, this allows you respectively to align either the top or
+bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text. You
+may also specify ‘<samp>m</samp>’ for <var>position</var> to get the default
+behaviour.
</p>
<p>The optional <var>height</var> argument overrides the natural height of the box.
</p>
@@ -10806,7 +12176,7 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\raisebox{distance}[<var>height</var>][<var>depth</var>]{text}
+<pre class="example">\raisebox{<var>distance</var>}[<var>height</var>][<var>depth</var>]{<var>text</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>The <code>\raisebox</code> command raises or lowers <var>text</var>. The first
@@ -10814,9 +12184,9 @@
lowered if it is a negative amount). <var>text</var> itself is processed
in LR mode.
</p>
-<p>The optional arguments <var>height</var> and <var>depth</var> are dimensions.
-If they are specified, LaTeX treats <var>text</var> as extending a
-certain distance above the baseline (height) or below (depth),
+<p>The optional arguments <var>height</var> and <var>depth</var> are dimensions. If
+they are specified, LaTeX treats <var>text</var> as extending a certain
+distance above the baseline (<var>height</var>) or below (<var>depth</var>),
ignoring its natural height and depth.
</p>
@@ -10904,18 +12274,22 @@
special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
</p>
<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Reserved-characters" accesskey="1">Reserved characters</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting ‘<samp># $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }</samp>’
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Reserved-characters" accesskey="1">Reserved characters</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting ‘<samp># $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \</samp>’
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="2">Text symbols</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Upper-and-lower-case" accesskey="2">Upper and lower case</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Make text upper or lower case.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Accents" accesskey="3">Accents</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting accents.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Symbols-by-font-position" accesskey="3">Symbols by font position</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting font symbols by number.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters" accesskey="4">Non-English characters</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting other non-English characters.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="4">Text symbols</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="5">\rule</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting lines and rectangles.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Accents" accesskey="5">Accents</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting accents.
</td></tr>
-<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005ctoday" accesskey="6">\today</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting today’s date.
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#Additional-Latin-letters" accesskey="6">Additional Latin letters</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting other non-English characters.
</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="7">\rule</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting lines and rectangles.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">• <a href="#g_t_005ctoday" accesskey="8">\today</a>:</td><td> </td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting today’s date.
+</td></tr>
</table>
@@ -10923,7 +12297,7 @@
<a name="Reserved-characters"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="n" rel="next">Text symbols</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Upper-and-lower-case" accesskey="n" rel="next">Upper and lower case</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="Reserved-characters-1"></a>
<h3 class="section">21.1 Reserved characters</h3>
@@ -10930,12 +12304,14 @@
<a name="index-reserved-characters"></a>
<a name="index-characters_002c-reserved"></a>
-
-<p>The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
-“reserved characters” or “special characters”.
+<a name="index-special-characters"></a>
+<a name="index-characters_002c-special"></a>
+<p>LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes (for
+example, the percent sign <code>%</code> is for comments) so they are
+called <em>reserved characters</em> or <em>special characters</em>.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example"># $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+<pre class="example"># $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
</pre></div>
<a name="index-_005c_0023"></a>
@@ -10945,35 +12321,113 @@
<a name="index-_005c_005f"></a>
<a name="index-_005c_007b"></a>
<a name="index-_005c_007d"></a>
-<p>Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX
-will do something special. If you simply want the character to be
-printed as itself, include a <code>\</code> in front of the character. For
-example, <code>\$</code> will produce <code>$</code> in your output.
+<p>If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash <code>\</code> in front of the character. Thus,
+<code>\$1.23</code> will produce <code>$1.23</code> in your output.
</p>
-<a name="index-_005cbackslash-1"></a>
-<p>One exception to this rule is <code>\</code> itself, because <code>\\</code> has
-its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by
-typing <code>$\backslash$</code> in your file, and a typewriter <code>\</code> is
-produced by using ‘<samp>\</samp>’ in a verbatim command (see <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>).
-</p>
<a name="index-_005c_007e"></a>
<a name="index-_005c_005e"></a>
-<p>Also, <code>\~</code> and <code>\^</code> place tilde and circumflex accents over
-the following letter, as in õ and ô (see <a href="#Accents">Accents</a>); to get
-a standalone <code>~</code> or <code>^</code>, you can again use a verbatim
-command.
+<a name="index-_005ctextbackslash"></a>
+<p>As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use <code>\~{}</code> (omitting the curly braces would result in the next
+character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text
+body font circumflex use <code>\^{}</code>. A text body font backslash
+results from <code>\textbackslash{}</code>.
</p>
+<p>To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
+<code>\verb!!</code>, as below.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In that example the double backslash <code>\\</code> is only there to
+split the lines.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Upper-and-lower-case"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Symbols-by-font-position" accesskey="n" rel="next">Symbols by font position</a>, Previous: <a href="#Reserved-characters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Reserved characters</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Upper-and-lower-case-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.2 Upper and lower case</h3>
+
+<a name="index-Upper-case"></a>
+<a name="index-Lower-case"></a>
+<a name="index-characters_002c-case"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\uppercase{<var>text</var>}
+\lowercase{<var>text</var>}
+\MakeUppercase{<var>text</var>}
+\MakeLowercase{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Change the case of characters. The TeX primitives commands
+<code>\uppercase</code> and <code>\lowercase</code> only work for American
+characters. The LaTeX commands <code>\MakeUppercase</code> and
+<code>\MakeLowercase</code> commands also change characters accessed by
+commands such as <code>\ae</code> or <code>\aa</code>. The commands
+<code>\MakeUppercase</code> and <code>\MakeLowercase</code> are robust but they have
+moving arguments (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of a
+command within <var>text</var>. But they do change the case of every other
+latin character inside the argument <var>text</var>. Thus,
+<code>\MakeUppercase{Let $y=f(x)$</code>} produces “LET Y=F(X)”. Another
+example is that the name of an environment will be changed, so that
+<code>\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ... \end{tabular}</code> will
+produce an error because the first half is changed to
+<code>\begin{TABULAR}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
+document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
+works well with the standard TeX fonts for all Latin alphabets but
+will cause problems when using other alphabets.
+</p>
+<p>To change the case of text that results from a command inside <var>text</var>
+you need to do expansion. Here the <code>\Schoolname</code> produces
+“COLLEGE OF MATHEMATICS”.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\schoolname}{College of Mathematics}
+\newcommand{\Schoolname}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\expandafter{\schoolname}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To uppercase only the first letter of words use the package
+<samp>mfirstuc</samp>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Symbols-by-font-position"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="n" rel="next">Text symbols</a>, Previous: <a href="#Upper-and-lower-case" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Upper and lower case</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Symbols-by-font-position-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.3 Symbols by font position</h3>
+
<a name="index-_005csymbol"></a>
<a name="index-accessing-any-character-of-a-font"></a>
+<a name="index-font-symbols_002c-by-number"></a>
-<p>Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you
-know its number by using the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the
-visible space character used in the <code>\verb*</code> command has the code
-decimal 32, so it can be typed as <code>\symbol{32}</code>.
+<p>You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the visible space character
+used in the <code>\verb*</code> command has the code decimal 32, so it can be
+typed as <code>\symbol{32}</code>.
</p>
-<p>You can also specify octal numbers with <code>'</code> or hexadecimal numbers
-with <code>"</code>, so the previous example could also be written as
-<code>\symbol{'40}</code> or <code>\symbol{"20}</code>.
+<p>You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a <code>'</code>
+prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a <code>"</code> prefix, so the previous
+example could also be written as <code>\symbol{'40}</code> or
+<code>\symbol{"20}</code>.
</p>
<hr>
@@ -10980,10 +12434,10 @@
<a name="Text-symbols"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Accents" accesskey="n" rel="next">Accents</a>, Previous: <a href="#Reserved-characters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Reserved characters</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Accents" accesskey="n" rel="next">Accents</a>, Previous: <a href="#Symbols-by-font-position" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Symbols by font position</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="Text-symbols-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">21.2 Text symbols</h3>
+<h3 class="section">21.4 Text symbols</h3>
<a name="index-text-symbols"></a>
<a name="index-symbols_002c-text"></a>
@@ -11088,7 +12542,7 @@
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-paragraph-symbol"></a>
<a name="index-pilcrow"></a>
-<p>Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+<p>Paragraph sign (pilcrow): ¶.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\pounds</code>
@@ -11126,8 +12580,9 @@
<dt><code>\S</code>
<a name="index-_005cS"></a>
</dt>
-<dd><a name="index-section-symbol"></a>
-<p>Section symbol.
+<dd><p>\itemx \textsection
+<a name="index-section-symbol"></a>
+Section sign: §.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\TeX</code>
@@ -11163,7 +12618,7 @@
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\textbackslash</code>
-<a name="index-_005ctextbackslash"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbackslash-1"></a>
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-backslash_002c-in-text"></a>
<p>Backslash: \.
@@ -11227,11 +12682,11 @@
<dt><code>\textcompwordmark</code>
<a name="index-_005ctextcompwordmark"></a>
</dt>
-<dt><code>\textcapitalwordmark</code>
-<a name="index-_005ctextcapitalwordmark"></a>
+<dt><code>\textcapitalcompwordmark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcapitalcompwordmark"></a>
</dt>
-<dt><code>\textascenderwordmark</code>
-<a name="index-_005ctextascenderwordmark"></a>
+<dt><code>\textascendercompwordmark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextascendercompwordmark"></a>
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-composite-word-mark_002c-in-text"></a>
<a name="index-cap-height"></a>
@@ -11256,8 +12711,8 @@
<p>Double dagger: <em>\ddag</em>.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textdollar <span class="roman">(or <code>$</code>)</span></code>
-<a name="index-_005ctextdollar-_0028or-_0024_0029"></a>
+<dt><code>\textdollar <span class="roman">(or <code>\$</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextdollar-_0028or-_005c_0024_0029"></a>
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-dollar-sign"></a>
<a name="index-currency_002c-dollar"></a>
@@ -11333,7 +12788,7 @@
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-period_002c-centered_002c-in-text"></a>
<a name="index-centered-period_002c-in-text"></a>
-<p>Centered period: <em>\cdot</em>.
+<p>Centered period: ·.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\textquestiondown <span class="roman">(or <code>?`</code>)</span></code>
@@ -11351,8 +12806,8 @@
<p>Double left quote: “.
</p>
</dd>
-<dt><code>\textquotedblright <span class="roman">(or <code>'</code>)</span></code>
-<a name="index-_005ctextquotedblright-_0028or-_0027_0029"></a>
+<dt><code>\textquotedblright <span class="roman">(or <code>''</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotedblright-_0028or-_0027_0027_0029"></a>
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-right-quote_002c-double"></a>
<a name="index-double-right-quote"></a>
@@ -11375,6 +12830,15 @@
<p>Single right quote: ’.
</p>
</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquotesingle</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotesingle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-quote_002c-single-straight"></a>
+<a name="index-straight-single-quote"></a>
+<a name="index-single-quote_002c-straight"></a>
+<p>Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+</p>
+</dd>
<dt><code>\textquotestraightbase</code>
<a name="index-_005ctextquotestraightbase"></a>
</dt>
@@ -11415,7 +12879,7 @@
<a name="index-_005ctexttrademark"></a>
</dt>
<dd><a name="index-trademark-symbol"></a>
-<p>Trademark symbol: <em>^{\hbox{TM}}</em>.
+<p>Trademark symbol: ™.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\texttwelveudash</code>
@@ -11447,15 +12911,16 @@
<a name="Accents"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Non-English characters</a>, Previous: <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Text symbols</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#Additional-Latin-letters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Additional Latin letters</a>, Previous: <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Text symbols</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="Accents-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">21.3 Accents</h3>
+<h3 class="section">21.5 Accents</h3>
<a name="index-accents"></a>
<a name="index-characters_002c-accented"></a>
<a name="index-letters_002c-accented"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-babel"></a>
<a name="index-babel-package"></a>
<a name="index-multilingual-support"></a>
<p>LaTeX has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and
@@ -11635,21 +13100,24 @@
<hr>
-<a name="Non_002dEnglish-characters"></a>
+<a name="Additional-Latin-letters"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
Next: <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="n" rel="next">\rule</a>, Previous: <a href="#Accents" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Accents</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
-<a name="Non_002dEnglish-characters-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">21.4 Non-English characters</h3>
+<a name="Additional-Latin-letters-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.6 Additional Latin letters</h3>
-<a name="index-special-characters"></a>
+<a name="Non_002dEnglish-characters"></a><a name="index-Latin-letters_002c-additional"></a>
+<a name="index-letters_002c-additional-Latin"></a>
+<a name="index-extended-Latin"></a>
+<a name="index-special-characters-1"></a>
<a name="index-non_002dEnglish-characters"></a>
<a name="index-characters_002c-non_002dEnglish"></a>
-<a name="index-letters_002c-non_002dEnglish"></a>
-<p>Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting characters commonly
-used in languages other than English.
+<p>Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters (beyond
+A–Z) extending the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
+than English.
</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dt><code>\aa</code></dt>
@@ -11674,7 +13142,9 @@
<a name="index-_005cDH-_0028D_0029"></a>
<a name="index-Icelandic-eth"></a>
<a name="index-eth_002c-Icelandic-letter"></a>
-<p>Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð.
+<p>Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. Not available with <small>OT1</small>
+encoding, you need the <samp>fontenc</samp> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as <small>T1</small>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\dj</code></dt>
@@ -11681,7 +13151,9 @@
<dt><code>\DJ</code></dt>
<dd><a name="index-_005cdj"></a>
<a name="index-_005cDJ"></a>
-<p>Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke.
+<p>Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke. Not
+available with <small>OT1</small> encoding, you need the <samp>fontenc</samp> package to
+select an alternate font encoding, such as <small>T1</small>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\ij</code></dt>
@@ -11704,7 +13176,7 @@
<dt><code>\NG</code></dt>
<dd><a name="index-_005cng"></a>
<a name="index-_005cNG"></a>
-<p>Latin letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+<p>Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><code>\o</code></dt>
@@ -11738,7 +13210,9 @@
<a name="index-_005cTH-_0028TH_0029"></a>
<a name="index-Icelandic-thorn"></a>
<a name="index-thorn_002c-Icelandic-letter"></a>
-<p>Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ.
+<p>Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. Not available with <small>OT1</small>
+encoding, you need the <samp>fontenc</samp> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as <small>T1</small>.
</p>
</dd>
</dl>
@@ -11748,10 +13222,10 @@
<a name="g_t_005crule"></a>
<div class="header">
<p>
-Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctoday" accesskey="n" rel="next">\today</a>, Previous: <a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Non-English characters</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctoday" accesskey="n" rel="next">\today</a>, Previous: <a href="#Additional-Latin-letters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Additional Latin letters</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005crule-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">21.5 <code>\rule</code></h3>
+<h3 class="section">21.7 <code>\rule</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005crule"></a>
@@ -11786,17 +13260,31 @@
Previous: <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\rule</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005ctoday-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">21.6 <code>\today</code></h3>
+<h3 class="section">21.8 <code>\today</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005ctoday"></a>
<a name="index-date_002c-today_0027s"></a>
<p>The <code>\today</code> command produces today’s date, in the format
-‘<samp><var>month</var> <var>dd</var>, <var>yyyy</var></samp>’; for example, ‘July 4, 1976’.
+‘<samp><var>month</var> <var>dd</var>, <var>yyyy</var></samp>’; for example, ‘<samp>July 4, 1976</samp>’.
It uses the predefined counters <code>\day</code>, <code>\month</code>, and
<code>\year</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">\day \month \year</a>) to do this. It is not
updated as the program runs.
</p>
+<p>Multilingual packages like <samp>babel</samp> or classes like <samp>lettre</samp>,
+among others, will localize <code>\today</code>. For example, the following
+will output ‘<samp>4 juillet 1976</samp>’:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+\documentclass{minimal}
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\begin{document}
+\today
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-datetime"></a>
<a name="index-datetime-package"></a>
<p>The <code>datetime</code> package, among others, can produce a wide variety
of other date formats.
@@ -11817,7 +13305,10 @@
<p>A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole
input in a single large file, it’s more efficient to split it into
several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
+there is one that is the
+<a name="index-root-file"></a>
+<a name="index-file_002c-root"></a>
+<em>root file</em>; it is the one whose name you type
when you run LaTeX.
</p>
<p>See <a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a>, for an environment that allows bundling an
@@ -11857,7 +13348,7 @@
</p>
<p>Given an <code>\includeonly</code> command, the <code>\include</code> actions are
only run if <var>file</var> is listed as an argument to
-<code>\includeonly</code>. See the next section.
+<code>\includeonly</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>.
</p>
<a name="index-nested-_005cinclude_002c-not-allowed"></a>
<p>The <code>\include</code> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
@@ -11871,7 +13362,7 @@
Next: <a href="#g_t_005cinput" accesskey="n" rel="next">\input</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cinclude" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\include</a>, Up: <a href="#Splitting-the-input" accesskey="u" rel="up">Splitting the input</a> [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Concept-Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
</div>
<a name="g_t_005cincludeonly-1"></a>
-<h3 class="section">22.2 \<code>includeonly</code></h3>
+<h3 class="section">22.2 <code>\includeonly</code></h3>
<a name="index-_005cincludeonly"></a>
@@ -11883,9 +13374,9 @@
<p>The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls which files will be read by
subsequent <code>\include</code> commands. The list of filenames is
-comma-separated. Each <var>file</var> must exactly match a filename
-specified in a <code>\include</code> command for the selection to be
-effective.
+comma-separated. Each element <var>file1</var>, <var>file2</var>, … must
+exactly match a filename specified in a <code>\include</code> command for the
+selection to be effective.
</p>
<p>This command can only appear in the preamble.
</p>
@@ -11989,15 +13480,21 @@
<a name="g_t_005caddcontentsline-1"></a>
<h4 class="subsection">23.1.1 <code>\addcontentsline</code></h4>
-<a name="index-_005caddcontentsline_007bext_007d_007bunit_007d_007btext_007d"></a>
+<a name="index-_005caddcontentsline"></a>
<a name="index-table-of-contents-entry_002c-manually-adding"></a>
-<p>The <code>\addcontentsline</code>{<var>ext</var>}{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}
-command adds an entry to the specified list or table where:
+<p>Synopsis:
</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addcontentsline{<var>ext</var>}{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command adds an entry to the specified list
+or table where:
+</p>
<dl compact="compact">
<dt><var>ext</var></dt>
-<dd><p>The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
+<dd><p>The filename extension of the file on which information is to be written,
typically one of: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of
figures), or <code>lot</code> (list of tables).
</p>
@@ -12012,22 +13509,23 @@
<code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, <code>subsubsection</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><code>lof</code></dt>
-<dd><p>For the list of figures.
+<dd><p>For the list of figures: <code>figure</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><code>lot</code></dt>
-<dd><p>For the list of tables.
+<dd><p>For the list of tables: <code>table</code>.
</p></dd>
</dl>
</dd>
-<dt><var>entry</var></dt>
+<dt><var>text</var></dt>
<dd><p>The text of the entry.
</p></dd>
</dl>
<a name="index-_005ccontentsline"></a>
-<p>What is written to the <samp>.<var>ext</var></samp> file is the
-command <code>\contentsline{<var>unit</var>}{<var>name</var>}</code>.
+<p>What is written to the <samp>.<var>ext</var></samp> file is the command
+<code>\contentsline{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}{<var>num</var>}</code>, where
+<code><var>num</var></code> is the current value of counter <code><var>unit</var></code>.
</p>
@@ -12106,7 +13604,7 @@
<a name="index-_005cindex"></a>
<a name="index-_002eidx-file"></a>
<p>The command <code>\index{<var>text</var>}</code> writes an index entry for
-<var>text</var> to an auxiliary file with the <samp>.idx</samp> extension.
+<var>text</var> to an auxiliary file named with the <samp>.idx</samp> extension.
</p>
<a name="index-_005cindexentry"></a>
<p>Specifically, what gets written is the command
@@ -12135,22 +13633,25 @@
This results in a <samp>.ind</samp> file, which can then be read to typeset
the index.
</p>
-<a name="index-printindex"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cprintindex"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-makeidx"></a>
<a name="index-makeidx-package"></a>
<p>The index is usually generated with the <code>\printindex</code> command.
This is defined in the <code>makeidx</code> package, so
<code>\usepackage{makeidx}</code> needs to be in the preamble.
</p>
-<a name="index-indexspace"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cindexspace"></a>
<p>The rubber length <code>\indexspace</code> is inserted before each new
letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘<samp>10pt plus5pt
minus3pt</samp>’.
</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-showidx"></a>
<a name="index-showidx-package"></a>
<p>The <code>showidx</code> package causes each index entries to be shown in
the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in
preparing the index.
</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-multind"></a>
<a name="index-multind-package"></a>
<p>The <code>multind</code> package supports multiple indexes. See also the
TeX FAQ entry on this topic,
@@ -12181,7 +13682,7 @@
<var>letter body</var>
\closing{<var>closing text</var>}
\end{letter}
- ... more letters ...
+... more letters ...
\end{document}
</pre></div>
@@ -12210,13 +13711,13 @@
under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.
</p>
-<p>Each letter environment begins with a required <code>\opening</code> command
+<p>Each <code>letter</code> environment body begins with a required <code>\opening</code> command
such as <code>\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}</code>. The <var>letter body</var>
-text is ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from from
+text is ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from
enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands such as
<code>\chapter</code> that make no sense in a letter are turned off. Each
-letter environment typically ends with a <code>\closing</code> command such as
-<code>\closing{Yours,}</code>.
+<code>letter</code> environment body typically ends with a <code>\closing</code>
+command such as <code>\closing{Yours,}</code>.
</p>
<a name="index-_005c_005c-for-letters"></a>
<p>Additional material may come after the <code>\closing</code>. You can say who
@@ -12335,13 +13836,13 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\cc{<var>first name</var> \\
- .. }
+ ... }
</pre></div>
<p>Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent. This
command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
<code>\closing</code>. Separate multiple lines with a double
-backslash <code>\\</code>.
+backslash <code>\\</code>, as in:
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\cc{President \\
@@ -12365,7 +13866,7 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\closing{text}
+<pre class="example">\closing{<var>text</var>}
</pre></div>
<p>Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature, there
@@ -12392,7 +13893,7 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\encl{<var>first enclosed object</var> \\
- .. }
+ ... }
</pre></div>
<p>Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
@@ -12459,6 +13960,7 @@
in the argument to the <code>letter</code> environment. By default
<code>\mlabel</code> ignores the first argument, the <var>sender address</var>.
</p>
+
<hr>
<a name="g_t_005cname"></a>
<div class="header">
@@ -12499,7 +14001,7 @@
</pre></div>
<p>This command is required. It starts a letter, following the
-<code>\begin{letter}{..}</code>. The mandatory argument <var>text</var> is the
+<code>\begin{letter}{...}</code>. The mandatory argument <var>text</var> is the
text that starts your letter. For instance:
</p>
<div class="example">
@@ -12528,7 +14030,7 @@
<code>\closing</code>.
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
+<pre class="example">\ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
</pre></div>
@@ -12545,7 +14047,7 @@
</p>
<div class="example">
<pre class="example">\signature{<var>first line</var> \\
- .. }
+ ... }
</pre></div>
<a name="index-_005csignature"></a>
@@ -12637,14 +14139,14 @@
<p>Synopsis:
</p>
<div class="example">
-<pre class="example">\typein[<var>\cmd</var>]{<var>msg</var>}
+<pre class="example">\typein[\<var>cmd</var>]{<var>msg</var>}
</pre></div>
<p><code>\typein</code> prints <var>msg</var> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to
stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If
-the optional <var>\cmd</var> argument is omitted, the typed input is
+the optional <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> argument is omitted, the typed input is
processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the
-<code>\typein</code> command. If the <var>\cmd</var> argument is present, it
+<code>\typein</code> command. If the <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> argument is present, it
must be a command name. This command name is then defined or
redefined to be the typed input.
</p>
@@ -12829,6 +14331,7 @@
<a href="http://tug.org/TUGboat">http://tug.org/TUGboat</a>.
</p>
<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
\usepackage{graphicx}
\usepackage{ifpdf}
\ifpdf
@@ -12837,6 +14340,8 @@
\usepackage{url}
\fi
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
\title{Example \TUB\ article}
% repeat info for each author.
@@ -12845,6 +14350,8 @@
\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
\begin{document}
\maketitle
@@ -12851,36 +14358,34 @@
\begin{abstract}
This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
\end{abstract}
\section{Introduction}
-This is an example article for \TUB, from
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
-\texttt{hyperref} package for active urls in the \acro{PDF} output.
-Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
-The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more:
-
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
\begin{verbatim}[\small]
\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
-\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX
-\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
-\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
\TUB \TUG \tug
-\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
-\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
-\careof \thinskip
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
\cs{fred} -> \fred
-\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
\meta{fred} -> <fred>
\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
@@ -12887,10 +14392,15 @@
\booktitle{Book of Fred}
\end{verbatim}
-For more information, see the ltubguid document at:
-\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
-(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references).
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
Email \verb|tugboat at tug.org| if problems or questions.
\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
@@ -12971,7 +14481,9 @@
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_symbol-1">*</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a-prompt">‘<samp>*</samp>’ prompt</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line">Command line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a_002dform-of-environment-commands"><code>*</code>-form of environment commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a_002dform-of-sectioning-commands"><code>*</code>-form of sectioning commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a_002dform_002c-defining-new-commands">*-form, defining new commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_symbol-2">.</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002eglo-file"><samp>.glo</samp> file</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
@@ -12985,17 +14497,19 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-abstracts">abstracts</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-accents">accents</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-accents_002c-mathematical">accents, mathematical</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-accessing-any-character-of-a-font">accessing any character of a font</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-accessing-any-character-of-a-font">accessing any character of a font</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Symbols-by-font-position">Symbols by font position</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acute-accent">acute accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acute-accent_002c-math">acute accent, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-additional-packages_002c-loading">additional packages, loading</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ae-ligature">ae ligature</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-additional-packages_002c-loading">additional packages, loading</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ae-ligature">ae ligature</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-align-environment_002c-from-amsmath">align <span class="roman">environment, from <code>amsmath</code></span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-aligning-equations">aligning equations</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-alignment-via-tabbing">alignment via tabbing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-1"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package_002c-replacing-eqnarray">amsmath <span class="roman">package, replacing <code>eqnarray</code></span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-appendix_002c-creating">appendix, creating</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-aring">aring</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-aring">aring</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-arrays_002c-math">arrays, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-arrow_002c-left_002c-in-text">arrow, left, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-arrow_002c-right_002c-in-text">arrow, right, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13008,7 +14522,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-auxiliary-file">auxiliary file</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-B">B</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-babel-package"><code>babel</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-babel-package"><code>babel</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-backslash_002c-in-text">backslash, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bar_002c-double-vertical_002c-in-text">bar, double vertical, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bar_002c-vertical_002c-in-text">bar, vertical, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13045,6 +14559,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-calligraphic-letters-for-math">calligraphic letters for math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cap-height">cap height</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caron-accent">caron accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-catcode">catcode</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-category-code_002c-character">category code, character</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cc-list_002c-in-letters">cc list, in letters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccc">\cc</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cedilla-accent">cedilla accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centered-asterisk_002c-in-text">centered asterisk, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13053,9 +14569,12 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centering-text_002c-declaration-for">centering text, declaration for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centering-text_002c-environment-for">centering text, environment for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Centimeter">Centimeter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-character-category-code">character category code</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-accented">characters, accented</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-non_002dEnglish">characters, non-English</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-case">characters, case</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-non_002dEnglish">characters, non-English</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-reserved">characters, reserved</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-special">characters, special</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-check-accent">check accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-check-accent_002c-math">check accent, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Cicero">Cicero</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
@@ -13064,7 +14583,15 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circumflex-accent">circumflex accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circumflex-accent_002c-math">circumflex accent, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circumflex_002c-ASCII_002c-in-text">circumflex, ASCII, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-citation-key">citation key</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-and-package-commands">class and package commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-and-package-difference">class and package difference</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-and-package-structure">class and package structure</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-file-example">class file example</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-file-layout">class file layout</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-options">class options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-options-1">class options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-options-2">class options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-classes-of-documents">classes of documents</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-closing-letters">closing letters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclosing">\closing</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-closing-quote">closing quote</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13071,9 +14598,12 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-code_002c-typesetting">code, typesetting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-command-line">command line</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line">Command line</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-command-syntax">command syntax</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">LaTeX command syntax</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-class-and-package">commands, class and package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-defining-new-ones">commands, defining new ones</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-defining-new-ones-1">commands, defining new ones</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">\providecommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-document-class">commands, document class</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-redefining">commands, redefining</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-star_002dvariants">commands, star-variants</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">\@ifstar</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-composite-word-mark_002c-in-text">composite word mark, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-computer-programs_002c-typesetting">computer programs, typesetting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-contents-file">contents file</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
@@ -13099,7 +14629,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dagger_002c-in-text-1">dagger, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-date_002c-for-titlepage">date, for titlepage</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-date_002c-today_0027s">date, today’s</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-datetime-package"><code>datetime</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-datetime-package"><code>datetime</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-defining-a-new-command">defining a new command</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-defining-a-new-command-1">defining a new command</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">\providecommand</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-defining-new-environments">defining new environments</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
@@ -13110,9 +14640,12 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-design-size_002c-in-font-definitions">design size, in font definitions</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Didot-point">Didot point</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dieresis-accent">dieresis accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-difference-between-class-and-package">difference between class and package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-discretionary-hyphenation">discretionary hyphenation</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary">\discretionary</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-discretionary-multiplication">discretionary multiplication</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation">displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaying-quoted-text-without-paragraph-indentation">displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-class-commands">document class commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-class-options">document class options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-class_002c-defined">document class, defined</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-classes">document classes</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
@@ -13162,12 +14695,14 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equations_002c-aligning">equations, aligning</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equations_002c-environment-for">equations, environment for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equations_002c-flush-left-vs_002e-centered">equations, flush left vs. centered</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-es_002dzet-German-letter">es-zet German letter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eth_002c-Icelandic-letter">eth, Icelandic letter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-es_002dzet-German-letter">es-zet German letter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eth_002c-Icelandic-letter">eth, Icelandic letter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-etoolbox-package"><code>etoolbox</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-euro-symbol">euro symbol</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ex">ex</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-exclamation-point_002c-upside_002ddown">exclamation point, upside-down</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-exponent">exponent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">Subscripts & superscripts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-extended-Latin">extended Latin</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-external-files_002c-writing">external files, writing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-F">F</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
@@ -13176,8 +14711,10 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figure-number_002c-cross-referencing">figure number, cross referencing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figures_002c-footnotes-in">figures, footnotes in</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figures_002c-inserting">figures, inserting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-file_002c-root">file, root</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fixed_002dwidth-font">fixed-width font</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-float-package"><code>float</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flafter-package"><code>flafter</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-float-package"><code>float</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-float-page">float page</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flush-left-equations">flush left equations</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushing-floats-and-starting-a-page">flushing floats and starting a page</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></td></tr>
@@ -13186,10 +14723,12 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-size">font size</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-sizes">font sizes</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-styles">font styles</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-symbols_002c-by-number">font symbols, by number</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Symbols-by-font-position">Symbols by font position</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fonts">fonts</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Fonts">Fonts</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fonts_002c-new-commands-for">fonts, new commands for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footer-style">footer style</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footer_002c-parameters-for">footer, parameters for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footmisc-package"><code>footmisc</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">Footnotes in section headings</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnote-number_002c-cross-referencing">footnote number, cross referencing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnote-parameters">footnote parameters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnote-parameters">Footnote parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnotes-in-figures">footnotes in figures</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
@@ -13196,9 +14735,11 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnotes_002c-creating">footnotes, creating</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Footnotes_002c-in-a-minipage">Footnotes, in a minipage</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Footnotes_002c-in-a-table">Footnotes, in a table</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnotes_002c-in-section-headings">footnotes, in section headings</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">Footnotes in section headings</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnotes_002c-symbols-instead-of-numbers">footnotes, symbols instead of numbers</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-formulas_002c-environment-for">formulas, environment for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-formulas_002c-math">formulas, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-forward-reference">forward reference</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-forward-references_002c-resolving">forward references, resolving</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fragile-commands">fragile commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-French-quotation-marks">French quotation marks</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13205,9 +14746,9 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-functions_002c-math">functions, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-G">G</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-geometry-package"><code>geometry</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-geometry-package"><code>geometry</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-global-options">global options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-global-options-1">global options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-global-options-1">global options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glossaries">glossaries</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glossary-package">glossary <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glue-register_002c-plain-TeX">glue register, plain TeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
@@ -13216,6 +14757,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-grave-accent_002c-math">grave accent, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-greater-than-symbol_002c-in-text">greater than symbol, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-greek-letters">greek letters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-group_002c-and-environments">group, and environments</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Environments">Environments</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-H">H</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hacek-accent_002c-math">háček accent, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
@@ -13228,13 +14770,14 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-here_002c-putting-floats">here, putting floats</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hungarian-umlaut-accent">hungarian umlaut accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyphenation_002c-defining">hyphenation, defining</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyphenation_002c-discretionary">hyphenation, discretionary</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary">\discretionary</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyphenation_002c-forcing">hyphenation, forcing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyphenation_002c-preventing">hyphenation, preventing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox">\mbox</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-I">I</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Icelandic-eth">Icelandic eth</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Icelandic-thorn">Icelandic thorn</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ij-letter_002c-Dutch">ij letter, Dutch</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Icelandic-eth">Icelandic eth</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Icelandic-thorn">Icelandic thorn</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ij-letter_002c-Dutch">ij letter, Dutch</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-implementations-of-TeX">implementations of TeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-in_002dline-formulas">in-line formulas</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indent_002c-forcing">indent, forcing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent">\indent</a></td></tr>
@@ -13259,6 +14802,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Knuth_002c-Donald-E_002e">Knuth, Donald E.</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-L">L</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-label">label</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-labelled-lists_002c-creating">labelled lists, creating</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Lamport-TeX">Lamport TeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Lamport_002c-Leslie">Lamport, Leslie</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
@@ -13268,6 +14812,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX-Project-team">LaTeX Project team</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX-vs_002e-LaTeX2e">LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX2e-logo">LaTeX2e logo</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Latin-letters_002c-additional">Latin letters, additional</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-layout-commands">layout commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Layout">Layout</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-layout_002c-page-parameters-for">layout, page parameters for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left-angle-quotation-marks">left angle quotation marks</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13280,6 +14825,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left_002djustifying-text">left-justifying text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for">left-justifying text, environment for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left_002dto_002dright-mode">left-to-right mode</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-length-command">length command</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lengths_002c-adding-to">lengths, adding to</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lengths_002c-allocating-new">lengths, allocating new</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lengths_002c-defining-and-using">lengths, defining and using</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a></td></tr>
@@ -13287,8 +14833,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lengths_002c-setting">lengths, setting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-less-than-symbol_002c-in-text">less than symbol, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-accented">letters, accented</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-additional-Latin">letters, additional Latin</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-ending">letters, ending</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclosing">\closing</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-non_002dEnglish">letters, non-English</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-starting">letters, starting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005copening">\opening</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-writing">letters, writing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Letters">Letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-line-break_002c-forcing">line break, forcing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a></td></tr>
@@ -13305,13 +14851,15 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lists-of-items">lists of items</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lists-of-items_002c-generic">lists of items, generic</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lists-of-items_002c-numbered">lists of items, numbered</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-loading-additional-packages">loading additional packages</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-loading-additional-packages">loading additional packages</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-log-file">log file</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logo_002c-LaTeX">logo, LaTeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logo_002c-LaTeX2e">logo, LaTeX2e</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logo_002c-TeX">logo, TeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-long-command">long command</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-low_002d9-quotation-marks_002c-single-and-double">low-9 quotation marks, single and double</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-low_002dlevel-font-commands">low-level font commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Lower-case">Lower case</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LR-mode">LR mode</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ltugboat-class"><code>ltugboat</code> class</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tugboat-template">tugboat template</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LuaTeX">LuaTeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
@@ -13321,8 +14869,9 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-macro-package_002c-LaTeX-as">macro package, LaTeX as</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-macron-accent">macron accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-macron-accent_002c-math">macron accent, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-macros2e-package"><code>macros2e</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Madsen_002c-Lars">Madsen, Lars</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-makeidx-package"><code>makeidx</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-makeidx-package"><code>makeidx</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-makeindex-program"><code>makeindex</code> program</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-making-a-title-page">making a title page</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-making-paragraphs">making paragraphs</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a></td></tr>
@@ -13346,11 +14895,14 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mu_002c-math-unit">mu, math unit</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multicolumn-text">multicolumn text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multilingual-support">multilingual support</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multind-package"><code>multind</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multind-package"><code>multind</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multiplication-symbol_002c-discretionary-line-break">multiplication symbol, discretionary line break</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-N">N</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-nested-_005cinclude_002c-not-allowed">nested <code>\include</code>, not allowed</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinclude">\include</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-class-commands">new class commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-command_002c-check">new command, check</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-command_002c-definition">new command, definition</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-commands_002c-defining">new commands, defining</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-commands_002c-defining-1">new commands, defining</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">\providecommand</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-line_002c-output-as-input">new line, output as input</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">\obeycr & \restorecr</a></td></tr>
@@ -13357,7 +14909,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-line_002c-starting">new line, starting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029">new line, starting (paragraph mode)</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-page_002c-starting">new page, starting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-non_002dEnglish-characters">non-English characters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-non_002dEnglish-characters">non-English characters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-notes-in-the-margin">notes in the margin</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-null-delimiter">null delimiter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numbered-items_002c-specifying-counter">numbered items, specifying counter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></td></tr>
@@ -13365,22 +14917,46 @@
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-O">O</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oblique-font">oblique font</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oe-ligature">oe ligature</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oe-ligature">oe ligature</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ogonek">ogonek</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-old_002dstyle-numerals">old-style numerals</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-one_002dcolumn-output">one-column output</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opening-quote">opening quote</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-OpenType-fonts">OpenType fonts</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-class">options, class</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-document-class">options, document class</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-global">options, global</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-document-class-1">options, document class</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-global">options, global</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-package">options, package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-package-1">options, package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ordinals_002c-feminine-and-masculine">ordinals, feminine and masculine</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oslash">oslash</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oslash">oslash</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-overbar-accent">overbar accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-overdot-accent_002c-math">overdot accent, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-overview-of-LaTeX">overview of LaTeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Concept-Index_cp_letter-P">P</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-packages_002c-loading-additional">packages, loading additional</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package-file-layout">package file layout</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package-options">package options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package-options-1">package options</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-babel"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>babel</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-datetime"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>datetime</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-etoolbox"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>etoolbox</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-flafter"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>flafter</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-float"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>float</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-footmisc"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>footmisc</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">Footnotes in section headings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-geometry"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>geometry</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-macros2e"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>macros2e</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-and-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter and \makeatother</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-makeidx"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>makeidx</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-multind"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>multind</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-picture"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>picture</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-setspace"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>setspace</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-showidx"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>showidx</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-textcomp"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>textcomp</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-xspace"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>xspace</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence">\(SPACE) after control sequence</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-packages_002c-loading-additional">packages, loading additional</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-break_002c-forcing">page break, forcing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-break_002c-preventing">page break, preventing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-breaking">page breaking</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-breaking">Page breaking</a></td></tr>
@@ -13392,6 +14968,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-indentations-in-quoted-text">paragraph indentations in quoted text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-indentations-in-quoted-text_002c-omitting">paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-mode">paragraph mode</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-mode-1">paragraph mode</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-symbol">paragraph symbol</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraphs">paragraphs</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-parameters_002c-for-footnotes">parameters, for footnotes</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnote-parameters">Footnote parameters</a></td></tr>
@@ -13401,14 +14978,16 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-period_002c-centered_002c-in-text">period, centered, in text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pica">pica</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pict2e-package"><code>pict2e</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-picture-package"><code>picture</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pictures_002c-creating">pictures, creating</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pilcrow">pilcrow</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-placement-of-floats">placement of floats</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-poetry_002c-an-environment-for">poetry, an environment for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Point">Point</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-polish-l">polish l</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-polish-l">polish l</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-portrait-orientation">portrait orientation</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-position_002c-in-picture">position, in picture</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-positional-parameter">positional parameter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-postscript_002c-in-letters">postscript, in letters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cps">\ps</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pounds-symbol">pounds symbol</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-preamble_002c-defined">preamble, defined</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
@@ -13420,6 +14999,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quad">quad</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-question-mark_002c-upside_002ddown">question mark, upside-down</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quotation-marks_002c-French">quotation marks, French</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quote_002c-single-straight">quote, single straight</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quote_002c-straight-base">quote, straight base</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying">quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quoted-text-without-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying">quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
@@ -13430,6 +15010,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ragged-right-text">ragged right text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for">ragged right text, environment for</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-redefining-environments">redefining environments</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-reference_002c-forward">reference, forward</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-references_002c-resolving-forward">references, resolving forward</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-registered-symbol">registered symbol</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-remarks-in-the-margin">remarks in the margin</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
@@ -13448,6 +15029,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ring-accent_002c-math">ring accent, math</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-robust-commands">robust commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-roman-font">roman font</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-root-file">root file</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-rubber-lengths_002c-defining-new">rubber lengths, defining new</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-running-header-and-footer">running header and footer</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-running-header-and-footer-style">running header and footer style</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
@@ -13459,18 +15041,20 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section-number_002c-cross-referencing">section number, cross referencing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section-numbers_002c-printing">section numbers, printing</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section-symbol">section symbol</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section_002c-redefining">section, redefining</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sectioning-commands">sectioning commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-series_002c-of-fonts">series, of fonts</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-setspace-package"><code>setspace</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-setspace-package"><code>setspace</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-setting-counters">setting counters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-shapes_002c-of-fonts">shapes, of fonts</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sharp-S-letters">sharp S letters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-showidx-package"><code>showidx</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sharp-S-letters">sharp S letters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-showidx-package"><code>showidx</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simulating-typed-text">simulating typed text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-angle-quotation-marks">single angle quotation marks</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-guillemets">single guillemets</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-left-quote">single left quote</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-low_002d9-quotation-mark">single low-9 quotation mark</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-quote_002c-straight">single quote, straight</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-right-quote">single right quote</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sizes-of-text">sizes of text</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-skip-register_002c-plain-TeX">skip register, plain TeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
@@ -13480,12 +15064,16 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-space_002c-vertical">space, vertical</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spaces">spaces</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spaces">Spaces</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spacing-within-math-mode">spacing within math mode</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spacing_002c-intersentence">spacing, intersentence</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing">\frenchspacing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spacing_002c-inter_002dsentence">spacing, inter-sentence</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing">\frenchspacing</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Spanish-ordinals_002c-feminine-and-masculine">Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-special-characters">special characters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-special-characters">special characters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-special-characters-1">special characters</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-special-insertions">special insertions</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Special-insertions">Special insertions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-specifier_002c-float-placement">specifier, float placement</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-splitting-the-input-file">splitting the input file</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-stable-option-to-footmisc-package"><code>stable</code> option to <code>footmisc</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">Footnotes in section headings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-star_002dvariants_002c-commands">star-variants, commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">\@ifstar</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starred-form_002c-defining-new-commands">starred form, defining new commands</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starting-a-new-page">starting a new page</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starting-a-new-page-and-clearing-floats">starting a new page and clearing floats</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starting-and-ending">starting and ending</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
@@ -13493,6 +15081,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sterling-symbol">sterling symbol</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-straight-double-quote_002c-base">straight double quote, base</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-straight-quote_002c-base">straight quote, base</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-straight-single-quote">straight single quote</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-stretch_002c-infinite-horizontal">stretch, infinite horizontal</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-stretch_002c-infinite-vertical">stretch, infinite vertical</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-stretch_002c-omitting-vertical">stretch, omitting vertical</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></td></tr>
@@ -13507,6 +15096,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tab-stops_002c-using">tab stops, using</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents-entry_002c-manually-adding">table of contents entry, manually adding</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents-file">table of contents file</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents_002c-avoiding-footnotes">table of contents, avoiding footnotes</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">Footnotes in section headings</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents_002c-creating">table of contents, creating</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tables-of-contents">Tables of contents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tables_002c-creating">tables, creating</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-template_002c-beamer">template, <code>beamer</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#beamer-template">beamer template</a></td></tr>
@@ -13516,12 +15106,12 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-terminal-input_002foutput">terminal input/output</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Terminal-input_002foutput">Terminal input/output</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-TeX-logo">TeX logo</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-text-symbols">text symbols</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-textcomp-package"><code>textcomp</code> package</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-textcomp-package"><code>textcomp</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thanks_002c-for-titlepage">thanks, for titlepage</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorem_002dlike-environment">theorem-like environment</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorems_002c-defining">theorems, defining</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorems_002c-typesetting">theorems, typesetting</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thorn_002c-Icelandic-letter">thorn, Icelandic letter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thorn_002c-Icelandic-letter">thorn, Icelandic letter</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-three_002dquarters-em_002ddash">three-quarters em-dash</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tie_002dafter-accent">tie-after accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tilde-accent">tilde accent</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
@@ -13552,6 +15142,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-units_002c-of-length">units, of length</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-unofficial-nature-of-this-manual">unofficial nature of this manual</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-unordered-lists">unordered lists</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Upper-case">Upper case</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-using-BibTeX">using BibTeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-UTF_002d8">UTF-8</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
@@ -13581,6 +15172,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-x_002dheight">x-height</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-XeTeX">XeTeX</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xindy-program"><code>xindy</code> program</a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xspace-package"><code>xspace</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-after-control-sequence">\(SPACE) after control sequence</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
</table>
<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: </th><td><a class="summary-letter" href="#Concept-Index_cp_symbol-1"><b>*</b></a>
@@ -13776,25 +15368,27 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003e-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\> <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040"><code>\@</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040">\(SPACE) and \@</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040fnsymbol"><code>\@fnsymbol</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040ifstar"><code>\@ifstar</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">\@ifstar</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040startsection"><code>\@startsection</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\a <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_0027-_0028acute-accent-in-tabbing_0029"><code>\a' <span class="roman">(acute accent in tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_003d-_0028macron-accent-in-tabbing_0029"><code>\a= <span class="roman">(macron accent in tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caa-_0028aa_0029"><code>\aa (å)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAA-_0028AA_0029"><code>\AA (Å)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caa-_0028aa_0029"><code>\aa (å)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAA-_0028AA_0029"><code>\AA (Å)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cacute"><code>\acute</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddcontentsline_007bext_007d_007bunit_007d_007btext_007d"><code>\addcontentsline{<var>ext</var>}{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddcontentsline"><code>\addcontentsline</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddress"><code>\address</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddress">\address</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtocontents_007bext_007d_007btext_007d"><code>\addtocontents{<var>ext</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtocounter"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtolength"><code>\addtolength</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddvspace"><code>\addvspace</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cae-_0028ae_0029"><code>\ae (æ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAE-_0028AE_0029"><code>\AE (Æ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cae-_0028ae_0029"><code>\ae (æ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAE-_0028AE_0029"><code>\AE (Æ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caleph"><code>\aleph</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calph"><code>\alph</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAlph"><code>\Alph</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAlph-example"><code>\Alph <span class="roman">example</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calpha"><code>\alpha</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calph_007bcounter_007d"><code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAlph_007bcounter_007d"><code>\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calsoname"><code>\alsoname</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005camalg"><code>\amalg</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cand-for-_005cauthor"><code>\and <span class="roman">for <code>\author</code></span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
@@ -13801,7 +15395,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cangle"><code>\angle</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cappendix"><code>\appendix</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005capprox"><code>\approx</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carabic"><code>\arabic</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carabic_007bcounter_007d"><code>\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carccos"><code>\arccos</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carcsin"><code>\arcsin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carctan"><code>\arctan</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
@@ -13812,12 +15406,14 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cast"><code>\ast</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005casymp"><code>\asymp</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtBeginDocument"><code>\AtBeginDocument</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtBeginDvi"><code>\AtBeginDvi</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtEndDocument"><code>\AtEndDocument</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument">\AtEndDocument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtEndOfClass"><code>\AtEndOfClass</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtEndOfPackage"><code>\AtEndOfPackage</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cauthor_007bname-_005cand-name2_007d"><code>\author{<var>name</var> \and <var>name2</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_0060-_0028grave-accent-in-tabbing_0029"><code>\a` <span class="roman">(grave accent in tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cb-_0028bar_002dunder-accent_0029"><code>\b <span class="roman">(bar-under accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbackslash"><code>\backslash</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbackslash-1"><code>\backslash</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbar"><code>\bar</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbaselineskip"><code>\baselineskip</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbaselinestretch"><code>\baselinestretch</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
@@ -13877,10 +15473,17 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccentering"><code>\centering</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cchapter"><code>\chapter</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccheck"><code>\check</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cCheckCommand"><code>\CheckCommand</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cCheckCommand_002a"><code>\CheckCommand*</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cchi"><code>\chi</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccirc"><code>\circ</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccircle"><code>\circle</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccircle">\circle</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccite"><code>\cite</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccite">\cite</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassError"><code>\ClassError</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassInfo"><code>\ClassInfo</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassInfoNoLine"><code>\ClassInfoNoLine</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassWarning"><code>\ClassWarning</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassWarningNoLine"><code>\ClassWarningNoLine</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccleardoublepage"><code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cclearpage"><code>\clearpage</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccline"><code>\cline</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccline">\cline</a></td></tr>
@@ -13906,6 +15509,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccoth"><code>\coth</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccsc"><code>\csc</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccup"><code>\cup</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cCurrentOption"><code>\CurrentOption</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cd-_0028dot_002dunder-accent_0029"><code>\d <span class="roman">(dot-under accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdag"><code>\dag</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdagger"><code>\dagger</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13922,13 +15526,17 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddagger"><code>\ddagger</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddot"><code>\ddot</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddots"><code>\ddots</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareOption"><code>\DeclareOption</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareOption_002a"><code>\DeclareOption*</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand"><code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand_002a"><code>\DeclareRobustCommand*</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdeg"><code>\deg</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDelta"><code>\Delta</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdelta"><code>\delta</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdepth"><code>\depth</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdet"><code>\det</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdh-_0028d_0029"><code>\dh (ð)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDH-_0028D_0029"><code>\DH (Ð)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdh-_0028d_0029"><code>\dh (ð)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDH-_0028D_0029"><code>\DH (Ð)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDiamond"><code>\Diamond</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiamond"><code>\diamond</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiamondsuit"><code>\diamondsuit</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13935,8 +15543,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdim"><code>\dim</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdisplaystyle"><code>\displaystyle</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiv"><code>\div</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdj"><code>\dj</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDJ"><code>\DJ</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdj"><code>\dj</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDJ"><code>\DJ</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdocumentclass"><code>\documentclass</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdot"><code>\dot</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdoteq"><code>\doteq</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -13961,6 +15569,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cevensidemargin"><code>\evensidemargin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cevensidemargin-1"><code>\evensidemargin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cevensidemargin-2"><code>\evensidemargin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cExecuteOptions"><code>\ExecuteOptions</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cexists"><code>\exists</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cexp"><code>\exp</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cextracolsep"><code>\extracolsep</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
@@ -13976,8 +15585,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfloatsep"><code>\floatsep</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfloatsep-1"><code>\floatsep</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cflushbottom"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol"><code>\fnsymbol</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol_002c-and-footnotes"><code>\fnsymbol<span class="roman">, and footnotes</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol_007bcounter_007d"><code>\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontencoding"><code>\fontencoding</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontfamily"><code>\fontfamily</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontseries"><code>\fontseries</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
@@ -13993,7 +15602,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootskip-1"><code>\footskip</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cforall"><code>\forall</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrac"><code>\frac</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrac_007bnum_007d_007bden_007d"><code>\frac{num}{den}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrac_007bnum_007d_007bden_007d"><code>\frac{<var>num</var>}{<var>den</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframe"><code>\frame</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframe">\frame</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframebox"><code>\framebox</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframebox-1"><code>\framebox</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-and-_005cframebox">\fbox and \framebox</a></td></tr>
@@ -14037,8 +15646,9 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chyphenation"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ci-_0028dotless-i_0029"><code>\i <span class="roman">(dotless i)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ciff"><code>\iff</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cij-_0028ij_0029"><code>\ij (ij)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIJ-_0028IJ_0029"><code>\IJ (IJ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIfFileExists"><code>\IfFileExists</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cij-_0028ij_0029"><code>\ij (ij)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIJ-_0028IJ_0029"><code>\IJ (IJ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIm"><code>\Im</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cimath"><code>\imath</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cin"><code>\in</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14047,9 +15657,11 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindent"><code>\indent</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent">\indent</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindex"><code>\index</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindexentry"><code>\indexentry</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindexspace"><code>\indexspace</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinf"><code>\inf</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinfty"><code>\infty</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinput"><code>\input</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinput">\input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cInputIfFileExists"><code>\InputIfFileExists</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cint"><code>\int</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cintextsep"><code>\intextsep</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cintextsep-1"><code>\intextsep</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
@@ -14056,9 +15668,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ciota"><code>\iota</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cit"><code>\it</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-1"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-2"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-3"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-1"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-2"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citemindent"><code>\itemindent</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citemsep"><code>\itemsep</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citshape"><code>\itshape</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
@@ -14069,8 +15680,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ckappa"><code>\kappa</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cker"><code>\ker</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ckill"><code>\kill</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cl-_0028l_0029"><code>\l (ł)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cL-_0028L_0029"><code>\L (Ł)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cl-_0028l_0029"><code>\l (ł)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cL-_0028L_0029"><code>\L (Ł)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabel"><code>\label</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clabel">\label</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumi"><code>\labelenumi</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumii"><code>\labelenumii</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
@@ -14131,6 +15742,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cll"><code>\ll</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cln"><code>\ln</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clnot"><code>\lnot</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLoadClass"><code>\LoadClass</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLoadClassWithOptions"><code>\LoadClassWithOptions</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clocation"><code>\location</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clocation">\location</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clog"><code>\log</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongleftarrow"><code>\longleftarrow</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14160,11 +15773,17 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarkright_007bright_007d"><code>\markright{<var>right</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathbf"><code>\mathbf</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathcal"><code>\mathcal</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathdollar"><code>\mathdollar</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathellipsis"><code>\mathellipsis</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathnormal"><code>\mathnormal</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathparagraph"><code>\mathparagraph</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathring"><code>\mathring</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathrm"><code>\mathrm</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathsection"><code>\mathsection</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathsf"><code>\mathsf</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathsterling"><code>\mathsterling</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathtt"><code>\mathtt</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathunderscore"><code>\mathunderscore</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathversion"><code>\mathversion</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmax"><code>\max</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmbox"><code>\mbox</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox">\mbox</a></td></tr>
@@ -14187,6 +15806,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnatural"><code>\natural</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cne"><code>\ne</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnearrow"><code>\nearrow</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cNeedsTeXFormat"><code>\NeedsTeXFormat</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cneg"><code>\neg</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cneq"><code>\neq</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand & \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
@@ -14200,8 +15820,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewsavebox"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewtheorem"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewtie"><code>\newtie</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cng"><code>\ng</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cNG"><code>\NG</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cng"><code>\ng</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cNG"><code>\NG</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cni"><code>\ni</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnocite"><code>\nocite</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnocite">\nocite</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnocorr"><code>\nocorr</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
@@ -14219,15 +15839,15 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnotin"><code>\notin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnu"><code>\nu</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnwarrow"><code>\nwarrow</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005co-_0028o_0029"><code>\o (ø)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cO-_0028O_0029"><code>\O (Ø)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005co-_0028o_0029"><code>\o (ø)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cO-_0028O_0029"><code>\O (Ø)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cobeycr"><code>\obeycr</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">\obeycr & \restorecr</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coddsidemargin"><code>\oddsidemargin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coddsidemargin-1"><code>\oddsidemargin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coddsidemargin-2"><code>\oddsidemargin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005codot"><code>\odot</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coe-_0028oe_0029"><code>\oe (œ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOE-_0028OE_0029"><code>\OE (Œ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coe-_0028oe_0029"><code>\oe (œ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOE-_0028OE_0029"><code>\OE (Œ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coint"><code>\oint</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coldstylenums"><code>\oldstylenums</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOmega"><code>\Omega</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14236,13 +15856,19 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005conecolumn"><code>\onecolumn</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005copening"><code>\opening</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005copening">\opening</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coplus"><code>\oplus</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOptionNotUsed"><code>\OptionNotUsed</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coslash"><code>\oslash</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cotimes"><code>\otimes</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coval"><code>\oval</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005coval">\oval</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coverbrace_007btext_007d"><code>\overbrace{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coverbrace_007bmath_007d"><code>\overbrace{<var>math</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coverline_007btext_007d"><code>\overline{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cowns"><code>\owns</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cP"><code>\P</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageError"><code>\PackageError</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageInfo"><code>\PackageInfo</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageInfoNoLine"><code>\PackageInfoNoLine</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageWarning"><code>\PackageWarning</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageWarningNoLine"><code>\PackageWarningNoLine</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpagebreak"><code>\pagebreak</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak & \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpagenumbering"><code>\pagenumbering</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpageref"><code>\pageref</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpageref">\pageref</a></td></tr>
@@ -14262,6 +15888,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpart"><code>\part</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpartial"><code>\partial</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpartopsep"><code>\partopsep</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPassOptionsToClass"><code>\PassOptionsToClass</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPassOptionsToPackage"><code>\PassOptionsToPackage</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpdfpageheight"><code>\pdfpageheight</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpdfpagewidth"><code>\pdfpagewidth</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cperp"><code>\perp</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14277,10 +15905,16 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprec"><code>\prec</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpreceq"><code>\preceq</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprime"><code>\prime</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprintindex"><code>\printindex</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProcessOptions"><code>\ProcessOptions</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProcessOptions_002a"><code>\ProcessOptions*</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprod"><code>\prod</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpropto"><code>\propto</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprovidecommand"><code>\providecommand</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">\providecommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProvidesClass"><code>\ProvidesClass</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProvidesFile"><code>\ProvidesFile</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProvidesPackage"><code>\ProvidesPackage</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cps"><code>\ps</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cps">\ps</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPsi"><code>\Psi</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpsi"><code>\psi</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14303,8 +15937,11 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cref"><code>\ref</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crefstepcounter"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crenewenvironment"><code>\renewenvironment</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment & \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRequirePackage"><code>\RequirePackage</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRequirePackageWithOptions"><code>\RequirePackageWithOptions</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crestorecr"><code>\restorecr</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">\obeycr & \restorecr</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crestriction"><code>\restriction</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crevemptyset"><code>\revemptyset</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005creversemarginpar"><code>\reversemarginpar</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crfloor"><code>\rfloor</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crhd"><code>\rhd</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14318,8 +15955,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightmargin"><code>\rightmargin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crm"><code>\rm</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crmfamily"><code>\rmfamily</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005croman"><code>\roman</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRoman"><code>\Roman</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005croman_007bcounter_007d"><code>\roman{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRoman_007bcounter_007d"><code>\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crq"><code>\rq</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crule"><code>\rule</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crule">\rule</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cS"><code>\S</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14361,13 +15998,13 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cspadesuit"><code>\spadesuit</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqcap"><code>\sqcap</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqcup"><code>\sqcup</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqrt_005broot_005d_007barg_007d"><code>\sqrt[<var>root</var>]{arg}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqrt_005broot_005d_007barg_007d"><code>\sqrt[<var>root</var>]{<var>arg</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsubset"><code>\sqsubset</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsubseteq"><code>\sqsubseteq</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsupset"><code>\sqsupset</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsupseteq"><code>\sqsupseteq</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005css-_0028ss_0029"><code>\ss (ß)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cSS-_0028SS_0029"><code>\SS (SS)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005css-_0028ss_0029"><code>\ss (ß)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cSS-_0028SS_0029"><code>\SS (SS)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstackrel_007btext_007d_007brelation_007d"><code>\stackrel{<var>text</var>}{<var>relation</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstar"><code>\star</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstepcounter"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a></td></tr>
@@ -14386,7 +16023,7 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csupseteq"><code>\supseteq</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csurd"><code>\surd</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cswarrow"><code>\swarrow</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csymbol"><code>\symbol</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csymbol"><code>\symbol</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Symbols-by-font-position">Symbols by font position</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ct-_0028tie_002dafter-accent_0029"><code>\t <span class="roman">(tie-after accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTAB"><code>\TAB</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029-and-_005c_0040">\(SPACE) and \@</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctabbingsep"><code>\tabbingsep</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
@@ -14397,11 +16034,12 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctau"><code>\tau</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctelephone"><code>\telephone</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctelephone">\telephone</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTeX"><code>\TeX</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextascenderwordmark"><code>\textascenderwordmark</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextascendercompwordmark"><code>\textascendercompwordmark</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasciicircum"><code>\textasciicircum</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasciitilde"><code>\textasciitilde</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasteriskcentered"><code>\textasteriskcentered</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbackslash"><code>\textbackslash</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbackslash"><code>\textbackslash</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbackslash-1"><code>\textbackslash</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbar"><code>\textbar</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbardbl"><code>\textbardbl</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbf"><code>\textbf</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
@@ -14409,13 +16047,13 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbraceleft"><code>\textbraceleft</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbraceright"><code>\textbraceright</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbullet"><code>\textbullet</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcapitalwordmark"><code>\textcapitalwordmark</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcapitalcompwordmark"><code>\textcapitalcompwordmark</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcircled_007bletter_007d"><code>\textcircled{<var>letter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcompwordmark"><code>\textcompwordmark</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcopyright"><code>\textcopyright</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdagger"><code>\textdagger</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdaggerdbl"><code>\textdaggerdbl</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdollar-_0028or-_0024_0029"><code>\textdollar <span class="roman">(or <code>$</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdollar-_0028or-_005c_0024_0029"><code>\textdollar <span class="roman">(or <code>\$</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextellipsis"><code>\textellipsis</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextemdash-_0028or-_002d_002d_002d_0029"><code>\textemdash <span class="roman">(or <code>---</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextendash-_0028or-_002d_002d_0029"><code>\textendash <span class="roman">(or <code>--</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14439,9 +16077,10 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextperiodcentered"><code>\textperiodcentered</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquestiondown-_0028or-_003f_0060_0029"><code>\textquestiondown <span class="roman">(or <code>?`</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotedblleft-_0028or-_0060_0060_0029"><code>\textquotedblleft <span class="roman">(or <code>``</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotedblright-_0028or-_0027_0029"><code>\textquotedblright <span class="roman">(or <code>'</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotedblright-_0028or-_0027_0027_0029"><code>\textquotedblright <span class="roman">(or <code>''</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquoteleft-_0028or-_0060_0029"><code>\textquoteleft <span class="roman">(or <code>`</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquoteright-_0028or-_0027_0029"><code>\textquoteright <span class="roman">(or <code>'</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotesingle"><code>\textquotesingle</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotestraightbase"><code>\textquotestraightbase</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotestraightdblbase"><code>\textquotestraightdblbase</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextregistered"><code>\textregistered</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14460,8 +16099,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextvisiblespace"><code>\textvisiblespace</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextwidth"><code>\textwidth</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextwidth-1"><code>\textwidth</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cth-_0028th_0029"><code>\th (þ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTH-_0028TH_0029"><code>\TH (Þ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cth-_0028th_0029"><code>\th (þ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTH-_0028TH_0029"><code>\TH (Þ)</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthanks_007btext_007d"><code>\thanks{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctheta"><code>\theta</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthicklines"><code>\thicklines</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthicklines">\thicklines</a></td></tr>
@@ -14495,8 +16134,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cu-_0028breve-accent_0029"><code>\u <span class="roman">(breve accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunboldmath"><code>\unboldmath</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderbar"><code>\underbar</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderbrace_007bmath_007d"><code>\underbrace{math}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderline_007btext_007d"><code>\underline{text}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderbrace_007bmath_007d"><code>\underbrace{<var>math</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderline_007btext_007d"><code>\underline{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunitlength"><code>\unitlength</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunlhd"><code>\unlhd</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunrhd"><code>\unrhd</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14512,9 +16151,10 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusebox"><code>\usebox</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusebox">\usebox</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusecounter"><code>\usecounter</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusefont"><code>\usefont</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusepackage"><code>\usepackage</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusepackage"><code>\usepackage</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cv-_0028breve-accent_0029"><code>\v <span class="roman">(breve accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvalue"><code>\value</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvalue">\value</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvanothing"><code>\vanothing</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarepsilon"><code>\varepsilon</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarphi"><code>\varphi</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarpi"><code>\varpi</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14523,7 +16163,6 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvartheta"><code>\vartheta</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvdash"><code>\vdash</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvdots"><code>\vdots</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvdots-1"><code>\vdots</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvec"><code>\vec</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvector"><code>\vector</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvector">\vector</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvee"><code>\vee</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
@@ -14581,8 +16220,8 @@
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-A">A</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-a4paper-option"><code>a4paper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-a5paper-option"><code>a5paper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-abstract-environment"><code>abstract <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-array-environment"><code>array <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-abstract-environment"><code><code>abstract</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-array-environment"><code><code>array</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-article-class"><code>article <span class="roman">class</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-B">B</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
@@ -14594,7 +16233,7 @@
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-C">C</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cc"><code>cc</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-center-environment"><code>center <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-center-environment"><code><code>center</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clock-option-to-slides-class"><code>clock <span class="roman">option to <code>slides</code> class</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cm"><code>cm</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
@@ -14602,10 +16241,10 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dbltopnumber"><code>dbltopnumber</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dbltopnumber-1"><code>dbltopnumber</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dd"><code>dd</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-description-environment"><code>description <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaymath-environment"><code>displaymath <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaymath-environment-1"><code>displaymath <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-environment"><code>document <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#document">document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-description-environment"><code><code>description</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaymath-environment"><code><code>displaymath</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaymath-environment-1"><code><code>displaymath</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-environment"><code><code>document</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#document">document</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-draft-option"><code>draft <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dvipdfmx-command"><code>dvipdfmx <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dvips-command"><code>dvips <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
@@ -14613,43 +16252,76 @@
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-E">E</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em-1"><code>em</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-enumerate-environment"><code>enumerate <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eqnarray-environment"><code>eqnarray <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-environment"><code>equation <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-environment-1"><code>equation <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-enumerate-environment"><code><code>enumerate</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-abstract"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>abstract</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-array"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>array</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-center"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>center</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-description"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>description</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-displaymath"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>displaymath</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-displaymath-1"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>displaymath</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-document"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>document</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#document">document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-enumerate"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>enumerate</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-eqnarray"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>eqnarray</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-equation"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>equation</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-equation-1"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>equation</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-figure"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>figure</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-filecontents"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>filecontents</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-filecontents_002a"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>filecontents*</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-flushleft"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>flushleft</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-flushright"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>flushright</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-itemize"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>itemize</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-letter"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>letter</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#letter">letter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-list"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>list</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-math"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>math</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-math-1"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>math</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-minipage"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>minipage</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-picture"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>picture</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-quotation"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>quotation</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-quote"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>quote</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-tabbing"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>tabbing</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-table"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>table</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-tabular"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>tabular</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-thebibliography"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>thebibliography</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-theorem"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>theorem</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-titlepage"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>titlepage</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-verbatim"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>verbatim</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-verse"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>verse</code></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eqnarray-environment"><code><code>eqnarray</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-environment"><code><code>equation</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-environment-1"><code><code>equation</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-etex-command"><code>etex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ex-1"><code>ex</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-executivepaper-option"><code>executivepaper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-F">F</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figure"><code>figure</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-filecontents"><code>filecontents</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figure-environment"><code><code>figure</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-filecontents-environment"><code><code>filecontents</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-filecontents_002a-environment"><code><code>filecontents*</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-final-option"><code>final <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document"><code>first-latex-doc <span class="roman">document</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fleqn-option"><code>fleqn <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushleft-environment"><code>flushleft <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushright-environment"><code>flushright <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushleft-environment"><code><code>flushleft</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushright-environment"><code><code>flushright</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-H">H</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-http_003a_002f_002fhome_002egna_002eorg_002flatexrefman-home-page"><code><a href="http://home.gna.org/latexrefman">http://home.gna.org/latexrefman</a> <span class="roman">home page</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-http_003a_002f_002fpuszcza_002egnu_002eorg_002eua_002fsoftware_002flatexrefman_002f-home-page"><code><a href="http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/">http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</a> <span class="roman">home page</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-I">I</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-in"><code>in</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-inch"><code>inch</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indexspace"><code>indexspace</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-itemize-environment"><code>itemize <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-itemize-environment"><code><code>itemize</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-L">L</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-landscape-option"><code>landscape <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-latex-command"><code>latex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document"><code>latex-doc-ptr <span class="roman">document</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-latexrefman_002ddiscuss_0040gna_002eorg-email-address"><code><a href="mailto:latexrefman-discuss at gna.org">latexrefman-discuss at gna.org</a> <span class="roman">email address</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-latexrefman_0040tug_002eorg-email-address"><code><a href="mailto:latexrefman at tug.org">latexrefman at tug.org</a> <span class="roman">email address</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-legalpaper-option"><code>legalpaper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-leqno-option"><code>leqno <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letter-class"><code>letter <span class="roman">class</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letter-environment"><code>letter <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#letter">letter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letter-environment"><code><code>letter</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#letter">letter</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letterpaper-option"><code>letterpaper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-list"><code>list</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-list-environment"><code><code>list</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lR-box"><code>lR box</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lrbox"><code>lrbox</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lshort-document"><code>lshort <span class="roman">document</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
@@ -14656,9 +16328,9 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lualatex-command"><code>lualatex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-M">M</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-environment"><code>math <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-environment-1"><code>math <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minipage-environment"><code>minipage <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-environment"><code><code>math</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-environment-1"><code><code>math</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minipage-environment"><code><code>minipage</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mm"><code>mm</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mu"><code>mu</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
@@ -14675,13 +16347,12 @@
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-P">P</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pc"><code>pc</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pdflatex-command"><code>pdflatex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-picture"><code>picture</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-printindex"><code>printindex</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-picture-environment"><code><code>picture</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pt"><code>pt</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-Q">Q</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quotation"><code>quotation</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quote"><code>quote</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quotation-environment"><code><code>quotation</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quote-environment"><code><code>quote</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-and-quote">quotation and quote</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-R">R</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-report-class"><code>report <span class="roman">class</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
@@ -14692,13 +16363,13 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sp"><code>sp</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-T">T</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabbing-environment"><code>tabbing <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table"><code>table</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabular-environment"><code>tabular <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabbing-environment"><code><code>tabbing</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-environment"><code><code>table</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabular-environment"><code><code>tabular</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-textcomp-package-1"><code>textcomp <span class="roman">package</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thebibliography-environment"><code>thebibliography <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorem-environment"><code>theorem <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlepage-environment"><code>titlepage <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thebibliography-environment"><code><code>thebibliography</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorem-environment"><code><code>theorem</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlepage-environment"><code><code>titlepage</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlepage-option"><code>titlepage <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-topmargin"><code>topmargin</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-topnumber"><code>topnumber</code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
@@ -14712,8 +16383,8 @@
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-usrguide-official-documentation"><code>usrguide <span class="roman">official documentation</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-V">V</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verbatim-environment"><code>verbatim <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
-<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verse-environment"><code>verse <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verbatim-environment"><code><code>verbatim</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verse-environment"><code><code>verse</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
<tr><th><a name="Command-Index_fn_letter-X">X</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xdvi-command"><code>xdvi <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td> </td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi 2017-08-08 20:38:40 UTC (rev 44984)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi 2017-08-08 20:38:58 UTC (rev 44985)
@@ -1,8 +1,9 @@
\input texinfo
- at c $Id: latex2e.texi 459 2015-10-12 11:33:10Z jhefferon $
+ at c $Id: latex2e.texi 578 2017-08-06 00:04:43Z jimhefferon $
@comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.)
@setfilename latex2e.info
- at set UPDATED October 2015
+ at set UPDATED August 2017
+ at include common.texi
@settitle @LaTeX{}2e unofficial reference manual (@value{UPDATED})
@comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.)
@@ -10,12 +11,15 @@
@c xx but latex2e stuff is missing.
@c xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file
@c
+ at c xx misc commands from clsguide.pdf: \ignorespacesafterend,
+ at c \normalsfcodes
+ at c xx color (include info from clsguide.pdf)
@c xx ending a run with errors
@c xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX
@c xx classes and packages -- required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts
@c
- at c xx merge http://mirror.ctan.org/info/latex-info/ (alt-latex-info)
- at c xx merge http://mirror.ctan.org/latex2e-reference.tar.gz
+ at c xx merge http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-info (CTAN package latex-info)
+ at c xx merge http://ctan.org/pkg/latex2e-reference
@c xx merge permuted-index
@c xx merge latex-manual from savannah
@c xx merge display style math
@@ -43,10 +47,11 @@
text was directly copied).
Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
-2014, 2015 Karl Berry.@*
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017 Karl Berry.@*
Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.@*
Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+ at comment start of License
Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
are preserved on all copies.
@@ -65,6 +70,7 @@
Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+ at comment end of License
@end copying
@dircategory TeX
@@ -79,7 +85,7 @@
@titlepage
@title @LaTeX{}2e: An unofficial reference manual
@subtitle @value{UPDATED}
- at author @url{http://home.gna.org/latexrefman}
+ at author @url{@value{LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE}}
@page
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
@insertcopying
@@ -96,6 +102,9 @@
@macro BESU {utf8,math}
@code{@backslashchar{}\math\}
@end macro
+ at macro iftexthenelse {then,else}
+\then\@c
+ at end macro
@end iftex
@ifnottex
@macro BES {utf8,math}
@@ -104,8 +113,28 @@
@macro BESU {utf8,math}
@U{\utf8\}
@end macro
+ at macro iftexthenelse {then,else}
+\else\@c
+ at end macro
@end ifnottex
+ at macro EnvIndex {env}
+ at findex @r{environment}, @code{\env\}
+ at findex @code{\env\} @r{environment}
+ at end macro
+ at macro PkgIndex {pkg}
+ at cindex @r{package}, @code{\pkg\}
+ at cindex @code{\pkg\} @r{package}
+ at end macro
+ at set NotInPlainTeX Not available in plain @TeX{}.
+ at set NeedsAMSSymb @value{NotInPlainTeX} In @LaTeX{} you need to load the @file{amssymb} package.
+ at set NeedsSTIX @value{NotInPlainTeX} In @LaTeX{} you need to load the @file{stix} package.
+
+ at clear HAS-MATH
+ at iftex
+ at set HAS-MATH
+ at end iftex
+
@node Top
@top @LaTeX{}2e: An unofficial reference manual
@@ -148,13 +177,11 @@
@node About this document
@chapter About this document
- at cindex bug reporting
- at cindex reporting bugs
- at findex @url{http://home.gna.org/latexrefman} @r{home page}
+ at findex @url{@value{LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE}} @r{home page}
This is an unofficial reference manual for the @LaTeX{}2e document
preparation system, which is a macro package for the @TeX{}
typesetting program (@pxref{Overview}). This document's home page is
- at url{http://home.gna.org/latexrefman}. That page has links to the
+ at url{@value{LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE}}. That page has links to the
current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and
subscriptions, and other infrastructure.
@@ -161,18 +188,20 @@
@cindex @LaTeX{} vs.@: @LaTeX{}2e
In this document, we will mostly just use `@LaTeX{}' rather than
`@LaTeX{}2e', since the previous version of @LaTeX{}@tie{}(2.09) was
-retired many years ago.
+frozen decades ago.
@cindex unofficial nature of this manual
@cindex @LaTeX{} Project team
- at findex @email{latexrefman-discuss@@gna.org} @r{email address}
+ at findex @email{@value{LTXREFMAN_BUGS}} @r{email address}
@LaTeX{} is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
(@url{http://latex-project.org}). The official documentation written by
the @LaTeX{} project is available from their web site. This document is
completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the @LaTeX{}
-maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this
-document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
- at email{latexrefman-discuss@@gna.org}.
+maintainers.
+ at cindex bug reporting
+ at cindex reporting bugs
+Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them.
+Instead, please send all comments to @email{@value{LTXREFMAN_BUGS}}.
This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
of information about @LaTeX{}, at all levels. Here are a few
@@ -189,8 +218,9 @@
@item http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide
@findex usrguide @r{official documentation}
-The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of @LaTeX{};
-there are plenty of others available elsewhere.
+The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of @LaTeX{}.
+Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent
+of @LaTeX{} itself; one such is the next item:
@item http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort
@findex lshort @r{document}
@@ -307,7 +337,7 @@
Portable Document Format @code{.pdf} file with @command{dvipdfmx}.
The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with
@command{dvitype}. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
-available (@url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tex-archive/dviware}).
+available (@url{http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware}).
@item .pdf
@findex .pdf @r{file}
@@ -478,16 +508,18 @@
@menu
* Environment:: Area of the source with distinct behavior.
* Declaration:: Change the value or meaning of a command.
+* \makeatletter and \makeatother:: Change the status of the at-sign character.
@end menu
@node Environment
+ at subsection Environments
Synopsis:
@example
\begin@{@var{environment name}@}
- ..
+ ...
\end@{@var{environment name}@}
@end example
@@ -497,11 +529,13 @@
@example
\begin@{verse@}
- There once was a man from Nantucket \\
- ..
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
\end@{verse@}
@end example
+See at tie{}@ref{Environments} for a list of environments.
+
The @var{environment name} at the beginning must exactly match that at
the end. This includes the case where @var{environment name} ends in a
star at tie{}(@code{*}); both the @code{\begin} and @code{\end} texts must
@@ -514,12 +548,13 @@
@example
\begin@{tabular@}[t]@{r|l@}
- .. rows of table ..
+ ... rows of table ...
\end@{tabular@}
@end example
@node Declaration
+ at subsection Command declarations
A command that changes the value, or changes the meaning, of some other
command or parameter. For instance, the @code{\mainmatter} command
@@ -526,6 +561,140 @@
changes the setting of page numbers from roman numerals to arabic.
+ at node \makeatletter and \makeatother
+ at subsection @code{\makeatletter} and @code{\makeatother}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ at example
+\makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @@ in their name ..
+\makeatother
+ at end example
+
+Used to redefine internal @LaTeX{} commands. @code{\makeatletter} makes
+the at-sign character at tie{}@code{@@} have the category code of a letter,
+11. @code{\makeatother} sets the category code of at tie{}@code{@@} to 12,
+its original value.
+
+As each character is read by @TeX{} for @LaTeX{}, it is assigned a
+character category code, or
+ at cindex catcode
+ at cindex character category code
+ at cindex category code, character
+ at dfn{catcode} for short. For instance, the backslash at tie{}@code{\} is
+assigned the catcode 0, for characters that start a command. These two
+commands alter the catcode assigned to @code{@@}.
+
+The alteration is needed because many of @LaTeX{}'s commands use
+ at code{@@} in their name, to prevent users from accidentally defining a
+command that replaces one of @LaTeX{}'s own. Command names consist of a
+category at tie{}0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed by letters,
+category at tie{}11 characters (except that a command name can also consist
+of a category at tie{}0 character followed by a single non-letter symbol).
+So under the default category codes, user-defined commands cannot
+contain an @code{@@}. But @code{\makeatletter} and @code{\makeatother}
+allow users to define or redefine commands named with @code{@@}.
+
+Use these two commands inside a @file{.tex} file, in the preamble, when
+defining or redefining a command with @code{@@} in its name. Don't use
+them inside @file{.sty} or @file{.cls} files since the
+ at code{\usepackage} and @code{\documentclass} commands set the at sign to
+have the character code of a letter.
+
+ at PkgIndex{macros2e}
+For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign
+in their names see @url{http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e}. These macros are
+mainly intended to package or class authors.
+
+The example below is typical. In the user's class file is a command
+ at code{\thesis@@universityname}. The user wants to change the
+definition. These three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+ at code{\begin@{document@}}.
+
+ at example
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand@{\thesis@@universityname@}@{Saint Michael's College@}
+\makeatother
+ at end example
+
+ at menu
+* \@@ifstar:: Define your own commands with *-variants.
+ at end menu
+
+
+ at node \@@ifstar
+ at subsubsection @code{\@@ifstar}
+
+ at findex \@@ifstar
+ at cindex commands, star-variants
+ at cindex star-variants, commands
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ at example
+\newcommand@{\mycmd@}@{\@@ifstar@{\mycmd@@star@}@{\mycmd@@nostar@}@}
+\newcommand@{\mycmd@@nostar@}[@var{non-starred command number of args}]@{@var{body of non-starred command}@}
+\newcommand@{\mycmd@@star@}[@var{starred command number of args}]@{@var{body of starred command}@}
+ at end example
+
+Many standard @LaTeX{} environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character at tie{}@code{*}, an asterisk.
+Examples are the @code{table} and @code{table*} environments and the
+ at code{\section} and @code{\section*} commands.
+
+When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because @code{\newenvironment} and @code{\renewenvironment} allow the
+environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more
+complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command,
+given above as @code{\mycmd}, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed
+by a star. For instance, @LaTeX{} does not really have a
+ at code{\section*} command; instead, the @code{\section} command peeks
+ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to
+one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two
+are @code{\mycmd@@nostar} and @code{\mycmd@@star}. They could take the
+same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all.
+As always, in a @LaTeX{} document a command using at-sign at tie{}@code{@@}
+must be enclosed inside a @code{\makeatletter ... \makeatother} block
+(@pxref{\makeatletter and \makeatother}).
+
+This example of @code{\@@ifstar} defines the command @code{\ciel} and a
+variant @code{\ciel*}. Both have one required argument. A call to
+ at code{\ciel@{night@}} will return "starry night sky" while
+ at code{\ciel*@{blue@}} will return "starry not blue sky".
+
+ at example
+\newcommand*@{\ciel@@unstarred@}[1]@{starry #1 sky@}
+\newcommand*@{\ciel@@starred@}[1]@{starry not #1 sky@}
+\newcommand*@{\ciel@}@{\@@ifstar@{\ciel@@starred@}@{\ciel@@unstarred@}@}
+ at end example
+
+In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than does the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent
+007's @code{``My name is \agentsecret*@{Bond@},
+\agentsecret@{James@}@{Bond@}.''} is equivalent to @code{``My name is
+\textsc@{Bond@}, \textit@{James@} textsc@{Bond@}.''}
+
+ at example
+\newcommand*@{\agentsecret@@unstarred@}[2]@{\textit@{#1@} \textsc@{#2@}@}
+\newcommand*@{\agentsecret@@starred@}[1]@{\textsc@{#1@}@}
+\newcommand*@{\agentsecret@}@{\@@ifstar@{\agentsecret@@starred@}@{\agentsecret@@unstarred@}@}
+ at end example
+
+There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of
+ at code{\@@ifstar}. The @file{suffix} package allows the construct
+ at code{\newcommand\mycommand@{@var{unstarred version}@}} followed by
+ at code{\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*@{@var{starred version}@}}. And
+ at LaTeX{}3 has the @file{xparse} package that allows this code.
+
+ at example
+\NewDocumentCommand\foo@{s@}@{\IfBooleanTF#1
+ @{@var{starred version}@}%
+ @{@var{unstarred version}@}%
+ @}
+ at end example
+
+
@node Document classes
@chapter Document classes
@@ -577,6 +746,8 @@
@menu
* Document class options:: Global options.
+* Additional packages:: Bring in packages.
+* Class and package construction:: Create new classes and packages.
@end menu
@@ -619,24 +790,27 @@
@table @code
@item a4paper
-210 by 297 mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+210 by 297 at dmn{mm} (about 8.25 by 11.75 at tie{}inches)
+ at item a5paper
+148 by 210 at dmn{mm} (about 5.8 by 8.3 at tie{}inches)
+
@item b5paper
-176 by 250 mm (about 7 by 9.875 inches)
+176 by 250 at dmn{mm} (about 6.9 by 9.8 at tie{}inches)
@item executivepaper
-7.25 by 10.5 inches
+7.25 by 10.5 at tie{}inches
@item legalpaper
-8.5 by 14 inches
+8.5 by 14 at tie{}inches
@item letterpaper
-8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
+8.5 by 11 at tie{}inches (the default)
@end table
@findex \pdfpagewidth
@findex \pdfpageheight
- at cindex @code{geometry} package
+ at PkgIndex{geometry}
When using one of the engines pdf at LaTeX{}, Lua at LaTeX{}, or Xe at LaTeX{}
(@pxref{@TeX{} engines}), options other than @code{letterpaper} set
the print area but you must also set the physical paper size. One way
@@ -686,7 +860,10 @@
@item titlepage
@itemx notitlepage
@cindex title page, separate or run-in
-Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class.
+Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
+for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
+ at code{report} class is @code{titlepage}, for the other classes it is
+ at code{notitlepage}.
@end table
The following options are not available with the @code{slides} class.
@@ -726,17 +903,22 @@
The @code{slides} class offers the option @code{clock} for printing
the time at the bottom of each note.
+
+ at node Additional packages
+ at section Additional packages
+
@cindex loading additional packages
@cindex packages, loading additional
@cindex additional packages, loading
@findex \usepackage
-Additional packages are loaded like this:
+Load a package @var{pkg}, with the package options given in the comma-separated
+list @var{options}, as here.
@example
-\usepackage[@var{options}]@{@var{pkg}@}
+\usepackage[@var{options}]@{@var{pkg}@}.
@end example
-To specify more than one package, you can separate them with a comma,
+To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
as in @code{\usepackage@{@var{pkg1}, at var{pkg2},...@}}, or use multiple
@code{\usepackage} commands.
@@ -743,10 +925,516 @@
@cindex global options
@cindex options, global
Any options given in the @code{\documentclass} command that are unknown
-by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
@code{\usepackage}.
+ at node Class and package construction
+ at section Class and package construction
+
+ at cindex document class commands
+ at cindex commands, document class
+ at cindex new class commands
+
+You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a
+standard header for each page, then you could create a new class
+ at code{smcmemo.cls} and begin your documents with
+ at code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}}.
+
+What separates a package from a document class is that the commands in a
+package are useful across classes while those in a document class are
+specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for a
+package while a command to make the page headers say @code{Memo from the
+SMC Math Department} is for a class.
+ at cindex class and package difference
+ at cindex difference between class and package
+
+Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign @code{@@} as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with @code{\makeatletter} and
+ at code{\makeatother}. @xref{\makeatletter and \makeatother}. This allow
+you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
+Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
+some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
+others. For instance, the class @code{smcmemo} might have commands
+ at code{\smc@@tolist}, @code{\smc@@fromlist}, etc.
+
+
+ at menu
+* Class and package structure:: Layout of the file.
+* Class and package commands:: List of commands.
+ at end menu
+
+
+ at node Class and package structure
+ at subsection Class and package structure
+
+ at cindex class and package structure
+ at cindex class file layout
+ at cindex package file layout
+ at cindex options, document class
+ at cindex options, package
+ at cindex class options
+ at cindex package options
+
+A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+ at enumerate
+In the @dfn{identification part}, the file says that it is a @LaTeX{}
+package or class and describes itself, using the @code{\NeedsTeXFormat}
+and @code{\ProvidesClass} or @code{\ProvidesPackage} commands.
+ at item
+The @dfn{preliminary declarations part} declares some commands and
+can also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+for the code used in the next part. For example, an @code{smcmemo}
+class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list of
+people for the to-head, as @code{\documentclass[mathto]@{smcmemo@}}, and
+therefore needs to define a command
+ at code{\newcommand@{\setto@}[1]@{\def\@@tolist@{#1@}@}} used in that
+file.
+ at item
+In the @dfn{handle options part} the class or package declares
+and processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+document as @code{\documentclass[@var{option list}]@{@var{class
+name}@}}, to modify the behavior of the class. An example is when you
+declare @code{\documentclass[11pt]@{article@}} to set the default
+document font size.
+ at item
+Finally, in the @dfn{more declarations part} the class or package usually does
+most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and
+loading other files.
+ at end enumerate
+
+
+Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as @file{stub.cls}
+where @LaTeX{} can find it, for example in the same directory as the
+ at file{.tex} file.
+
+ at example
+\NeedsTeXFormat@{LaTeX2e@}
+\ProvidesClass@{stub@}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+\DeclareOption*@{\PassOptionsToClass@{\CurrentOption@}@{article@}@}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass@{article@}
+ at end example
+ at cindex class file example
+
+It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the @code{article} class, and then loads the
+ at code{article} class to provide the basis for this class's code.
+
+For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+ at url{http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf} (much
+of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+ at url{https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf}.
+
+ at node Class and package commands
+ at subsection Class and package commands
+ at cindex class and package commands
+ at cindex commands, class and package
+
+These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+
+ at table @code
+ at item \AtBeginDvi@{specials@}
+ at findex \AtBeginDvi
+Save in a box register things that are written to the @file{.dvi} file
+at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+
+ at item \AtEndOfClass@{@var{code}@}
+ at item \AtEndOfPackage@{@var{code}@}
+ at findex \AtEndOfClass
+ at findex \AtEndOfPackage
+Hook to insert @var{code} to be executed when @LaTeX{} finishes
+processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks
+multiple times; the @code{code} will be executed in the order that you
+called it. See also @ref{\AtBeginDocument}.
+
+ at item \CheckCommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{num}][@var{default}]@{@var{definition}@}
+ at item \CheckCommand*@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{num}][@var{default}]@{@var{definition}@}
+ at findex \CheckCommand
+ at findex \CheckCommand*
+ at cindex new command, check
+Like @code{\newcommand} (@pxref{\newcommand & \renewcommand}) but does
+not define @var{cmd}; instead it checks that the current definition of
+ at var{cmd} is exactly as given by @var{definition} and is or is not
+ at cindex long command
+ at dfn{long} as expected. A long command is a command that accepts
+ at code{\par} within an argument. The @var{cmd} command is expected to be
+long with the unstarred version of @code{\CheckCommand}. Raises an
+error when the check fails. This allows you to check before you start
+redefining @code{cmd} yourself that no other package has already
+redefined this command.
+
+ at item \ClassError@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{error text}@}@{@var{help text}@}
+ at item \PackageError@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{error text}@}@{@var{help text}@}
+ at item \ClassWarning@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{warning text}@}
+ at item \PackageWarning@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{warning text}@}
+ at item \ClassWarningNoLine@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{warning text}@}
+ at item \PackageWarningNoLine@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{warning text}@}
+ at item \ClassInfo@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{info text}@}
+ at item \PackageInfo@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{info text}@}
+ at item \ClassInfoNoLine@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{info text}@}
+ at item \PackageInfoNoLine@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{info text}@}
+ at findex \ClassError
+ at findex \PackageError
+ at findex \ClassWarning
+ at findex \PackageWarning
+ at findex \ClassWarningNoLine
+ at findex \PackageWarningNoLine
+ at findex \ClassInfo
+ at findex \PackageInfo
+ at findex \ClassInfoNoLine
+ at findex \PackageInfoNoLine
+Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+
+For @code{\ClassError} and @code{\PackageError} the message is
+ at var{error text}, followed by @TeX{}'s @code{?} error prompt. If the
+user then asks for help by typing @code{h}, they see the @var{help
+text}.
+
+The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+ at var{warning text} on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+commands write @var{info text} only in the transcript file. The
+ at code{NoLine} versions do not show the number of the line generating the
+message, while the other versions do show that number.
+
+To format the messages, including the @var{help text}: use
+ at code{\protect} to stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+ at code{\MessageBreak}, and get a space with @code{\space} when a space
+character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that @LaTeX{}
+appends a period to the messages.
+
+ at item \CurrentOption
+ at findex \CurrentOption
+Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
+be used within the @var{code} argument of either @code{\DeclareOption}
+or @code{\DeclareOption*}.
+
+ at item \DeclareOption@{@var{option}@}@{@var{code}@}
+ at item \DeclareOption*@{@var{code}@}
+ at findex \DeclareOption
+ at findex \DeclareOption*
+ at cindex class options
+ at cindex package options
+ at cindex options, class
+ at cindex options, package
+Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their
+ at code{\documentclass} command. For example, the @code{smcmemo} class
+could have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the
+first page with @code{\documentclass[logo]@{smcmemo@}}. The class file
+must contain @code{\DeclareOption@{logo@}@{@var{code}@}} (and later,
+ at code{\ProcessOptions}).
+
+If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this
+will produce a warning like @code{Unused global option(s): [badoption].}
+Change this behaviour with the starred version
+ at code{\DeclareOption*@{@var{code}@}}. For example, many classes extend
+an existing class, using a declaration such as
+ at code{\LoadClass@{article@}}, and for passing extra options to the
+underlying class use code such as this.
+
+ at example
+\DeclareOption*@{%
+\PassOptionsToClass@{\CurrentOption@}@{article@}%
+@}
+ at end example
+
+Another example is that the class @code{smcmemo} may allow users to keep
+lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could invoke
+ at code{\documentclass[math]@{smcmemo@}} and it will read the file
+ at code{math.memo}. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+passes the option to the @code{article} class.
+
+ at example
+\DeclareOption*@{\InputIfFileExists@{\CurrentOption.memo@}@{@}@{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass@{\CurrentOption@}@{article@}@}@}
+ at end example
+
+ at item \DeclareRobustCommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{num}][@var{default}]@{@var{definition}@}
+ at item \DeclareRobustCommand*@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{num}][@var{default}]@{@var{definition}@}
+ at findex \DeclareRobustCommand
+ at findex \DeclareRobustCommand*
+ at cindex new command, definition
+Like @code{\newcommand} and @code{\newcommand*} (@pxref{\newcommand &
+\renewcommand}) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
+within the @var{definition} is fragile. (For a discussion of robust and
+fragile commands @pxref{\protect}.) Use this command to define new
+robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+robust. Unlike @code{\newcommand} these do not give an error if macro
+ at var{cmd} already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+transcript file if a command is redefined.
+
+Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those defined
+using @code{\newcommand} so unless the command's data is fragile and the
+command is used within a moving argument, use @code{\newcommand}.
+
+ at PkgIndex{etoolbox}
+The @code{etoolbox} package offers commands @code{\newrobustcmd},
+ at code{\newrobustcmd*}, @code{\renewrobustcmd}, @code{\renewrobustcmd*},
+ at code{\providerobustcmd}, and @code{\providerobustcmd*} which are similar
+to @code{\newcommand}, @code{\newcommand*}, @code{\renewcommand},
+ at code{\renewcommand*}, @code{\providecommand}, and
+ at code{\providecommand*}, but define a robust @var{cmd} with two advantages
+as compared to @code{\DeclareRobustCommand}:
+ at enumerate
+ at item
+They use the low-level e- at TeX{} protection mechanism rather than the
+higher level @LaTeX{} @code{\protect} mechanism, so they do not incur
+the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+ at item
+They make the same distinction between @code{\new at dots{}},
+ at code{\renew at dots{}}, and @code{\provide at dots{}}, as the standard
+commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine
+ at var{cmd} that already exists, in that case you need to use either
+ at code{\renew at dots{}} or @code{\provide at dots{}} or you get an error.
+ at end enumerate
+
+
+ at item \IfFileExists@{@var{file name}@}@{@var{true code}@}@{@var{false code}@}
+ at item \InputIfFileExists@{@var{file name}@}@{@var{true code}@}@{@var{false code}@}
+ at findex \IfFileExists
+ at findex \InputIfFileExists
+Execute @var{true code} if @LaTeX{} can find the file @file{@var{file
+name}} and @var{false code} otherwise. In the second case it inputs the
+file immediately after executing @var{true code}. Thus
+ at code{\IfFileExists@{img.pdf@}@{\includegraphics@{img.pdf@}@}@{\typeout@{WARNING:
+img.pdf not found@}@}} will include the graphic @file{img.pdf} if it is
+found but otherwise just give a warning.
+
+This command looks for the file in all search paths that @LaTeX{} uses,
+not only in the current directory. To look only in the current
+directory do something like @code{\IfFileExists@{./filename@}@{@var{true
+code}@}@{@var{false code}@}}. If you ask for a filename without a
+ at code{.tex} extension then @LaTeX{} will first look for the file by
+appending the @code{.tex}; for more on how @LaTeX{} handles file
+extensions see @ref{\input}.
+
+ at item \LoadClass[@var{options list}]@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release date}]
+ at item \LoadClassWithOptions@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release date}]
+ at findex \LoadClass
+ at findex \LoadClassWithOptions
+Load a class, as with @code{\documentclass[@var{options
+list}]@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release info}]}. An example is
+ at code{\LoadClass[twoside]@{article@}}.
+
+The @var{options list}, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+ at var{release date} is optional. If present it must have the form
+ at var{YYYY/MM/DD}.
+ at c BTW, there are at-macros documented in macros2e.pdf to check the version
+ at c and do some actions conditionnally on version later or not to some
+ at c date.
+
+If you request a @var{release date} and the date of
+the package installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning
+on the screen and in the log like @code{You have requested, on input
+line 4, version `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version
+`2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available.}
+
+The command version @code{\LoadClassWithOptions} uses the list of
+options for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed
+to it via @code{\PassOptionsToClass}. This is a convenience command
+that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the standard
+ at code{article} class, without having to track which options were passed.
+
+ at item \ExecuteOptions@{@var{options-list}@}
+ at findex \ExecuteOptions
+For each option @var{option} in the @var{options-list}, in order, this command
+executes the command @code{\ds@@@var{option}}. If this command is not
+defined then that option is silently ignored.
+
+It can be used to provide a default option list before
+ at code{\ProcessOptions}. For example, if in a class file you want the
+default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+ at code{\ExecuteOptions@{11pt@}\ProcessOptions\relax}.
+
+ at item \NeedsTeXFormat@{@var{format}@}[@var{format date}]
+ at findex \NeedsTeXFormat
+Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
+as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+ at code{\NeedsTeXFormat@{LaTeX2e@}}. When a document using that class is
+processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+actually being run (including that the @var{format} string is case
+sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an error
+like @samp{This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.}
+
+To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+features, include the optional @var{format date} on which those features
+were implemented. If present it must be in the form @code{YYYY/MM/DD}.
+If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+ at var{format date} then you get a warning like @samp{You have requested
+release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is
+available.}
+
+ at item \OptionNotUsed
+ at findex \OptionNotUsed
+Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+within the @var{code} argument of either @code{\DeclareOption} or
+ at code{\DeclareOption*}.
+
+ at c I cannot reproduce this behavior as it is documented in clsguide.
+ at c In the absence of a @code{\DeclareOption*} declaration, @LaTeX{} issues
+ at c on the console a warning like @code{LaTeX Warning: Unused global
+ at c option(s): [unusedoption].} with the list of not-used options when it
+ at c reaches @code{\begin@{document@}}.
+
+ at item \PassOptionsToClass@{@var{option list}@}@{@var{class name}@}
+ at item \PassOptionsToPackage@{@var{option list}@}@{@var{package name}@}
+ at findex \PassOptionsToClass
+ at findex \PassOptionsToPackage
+Adds the options in the comma-separated list @var{option list} to the
+options used by any future @code{\RequirePackage} or @code{\usepackage}
+command for package @var{package name} or the class @var{class name}.
+
+The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number of
+times with no options but if you want options then you may only supply
+them when you first load the package. Loading a package with options
+more than once will get you an error like @code{Option clash for package
+foo.} (@LaTeX{} throws an error even if there is no conflict between the
+options.)
+
+If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse
+that to once, for example replacing the two
+ at code{\RequirePackage[landscape]@{geometry@}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]@{geometry@}}
+with the single
+ at code{\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]@{geometry@}}. But if you
+are loading a package that in turn loads another package then you need
+to queue up the options you desire for this other package. For
+instance, suppose the package @code{foo} loads the package
+ at code{geometry}. Instead of
+ at code{\RequirePackage@{foo@}\RequirePackage[draft]@{graphics@}} you must
+write @code{\PassOptionsToPackage@{draft@}@{graphics@}
+\RequirePackage@{foo@}}. (If @code{foo.sty} loads an option in conflict
+with what you want then you may have to look into altering its source.)
+
+These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
+writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the @code{graphicx}
+package with the option @code{draft} and also wants to use a class
+ at code{foo} that loads the @code{graphicx} package, but without that
+option. The user could start their @LaTeX{} file with
+ at code{\PassOptionsToPackage@{draft@}@{graphicx@}\documentclass@{foo@}}.
+
+ at item \ProcessOptions
+ at item \ProcessOptions*@var{\@@options}
+ at findex \ProcessOptions
+ at findex \ProcessOptions*
+Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
+in the class file as @code{\ProcessOptions\relax} (because of the
+existence of the starred command).
+
+Options come in two types. @dfn{Local options} have been specified for this
+particular package in the @var{options} argument of
+ at code{\PassOptionsToPackage@{@var{options}@}},
+ at code{\usepackage[@var{options}]}, or
+ at code{\RequirePackage[@var{options}]}. @dfn{Global options} are those given
+by the class user in @code{\documentclass[@var{options}]} (If an option
+is specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+
+When @code{\ProcessOptions} is called for a package @file{pkg.sty}, the
+following happens:
+ at enumerate
+ at item
+For each option @var{option} so far declared
+with @code{\DeclareOption}, it looks to see if that option is either a
+global or a local option for @code{pkg}. If so then it executes the
+declared code. This is done in the order in which these options were
+given in @file{pkg.sty}.
+ at item
+For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+ at code{\ds@@}@var{option} if it has been defined somewhere (other than by
+a @code{\DeclareOption}); otherwise, it executes the default option code
+given in @code{\DeclareOption*}. If no default option code has been
+declared then it gives an error message. This is done in the order in
+which these options were specified.
+ at end enumerate
+
+When @code{\ProcessOptions} is called for a class it works in the same
+way except that all options are local, and the default @var{code} for
+ at code{\DeclareOption*} is @code{\OptionNotUsed} rather than an error.
+
+The starred version @code{\ProcessOptions*} executes the
+options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in
+the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
+means that the global options are processed first.
+
+
+ at item \ProvidesClass@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release date} @var{brief additional information}]
+ at item \ProvidesClass@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release date}]
+ at item \ProvidesPackage@{@var{package name}@}[@var{release date} @var{brief additional information}]
+ at item \ProvidesPackage@{@var{package name}@}[@var{release date}]
+ at findex \ProvidesClass
+ at findex \ProvidesPackage
+Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and the log file.
+
+When a user writes @code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}} then @LaTeX{} loads
+the file @file{smcmemo.cls}. Similarly, a user writing
+ at code{\usepackage@{test@}} prompts @LaTeX{} to load the file
+ at code{test.sty}. If the name of the file does not match the declared
+class or package name then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+ at code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}}, and the file @file{smcmemo.cls} has
+the statement @code{\ProvidesClass@{xxx@}} then you get a warning like
+ at code{You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
+class provides 'xxx'.} This warning does not prevent @LaTeX{} from
+processing the rest of the class file normally.
+
+If you include the optional argument, then you must include the date, before
+the first space if any, and it must have the form @code{YYYY/MM/DD}. The rest
+of the optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies
+the class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the
+log file. Thus, if your file @file{smcmemo.cls} contains the line
+ at code{\ProvidesClass@{smcmemo@}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]} and your
+document's first line is @code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}} then you will
+see @code{Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class}.
+
+The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask
+to be warned if the version of the class or package installed on their
+system is earlier than @var{release date}, by using the optional arguments
+such as @code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}[2018/10/12]} or
+ at code{\usepackage@{foo@}[[2017/07/07]]}. (Note that package users only
+rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+
+ at item \ProvidesFile@{@var{file name}@}[@var{additional information}]
+ at findex \ProvidesFile
+Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that
+file and you get in the log a string like @code{File: test.config
+2017/10/12 config file for test.cls} for @var{file name} equal to
+ at samp{test.config} and @var{additional information} equal to
+ at samp{2017/10/12 config file for test.cls}.
+
+ at item \RequirePackage[@var{option list}]@{@var{package name}@}[@var{release date}]
+ at item \RequirePackageWithOptions@{@var{package name}@}[@var{release date}]
+ at findex \RequirePackage
+ at findex \RequirePackageWithOptions
+Load a package, like the document author command @code{\usepackage}.
+ at xref{Additional packages}. An example is
+ at code{\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]@{geometry@}}. Note that the
+ at LaTeX{} development team strongly recommends use of these commands over
+Plain at tie{}@TeX{}'s @code{\input}; see the Class Guide.
+
+The @var{option list}, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+ at var{release date}, if present, must have the form @var{YYYY/MM/DD}. If
+the release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+than @var{release date} then you get a warning like @code{You have
+requested, on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but
+only version `2000/01/01' is available}.
+
+The @code{\RequirePackageWithOptions} version uses the list of options
+for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it
+via @code{\PassOptionsToClass}. This is a convenience command to allow
+easily building classes on existing ones without having to track which
+options were passed.
+
+The difference between @code{\usepackage} and @code{\RequirePackage} is
+small. The @code{\usepackage} command is intended for the document file
+while @code{\RequirePackage} is intended for package and class files.
+Thus, using @code{\usepackage} before the @code{\documentclass} command
+causes @LaTeX{} to give error like @code{\usepackage before
+\documentclass}, but you can use @code{\RequirePackage} there.
+ at end table
+
+
@node Fonts
@chapter Fonts
@anchor{Typefaces}@c old name
@@ -962,7 +1650,7 @@
@cindex numerals, old-style
@cindex old-style numerals
@cindex lining numerals
- at cindex @code{textcomp} package
+ at PkgIndex{textcomp}
Finally, the command @code{\oldstylenums@{@var{numerals}@}} will typeset
so-called ``old-style'' numerals, which have differing heights and
depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard ``lining'' numerals,
@@ -1174,7 +1862,7 @@
make line skip changes happen for the entire document by doing
@code{\renewcommand@{\baselinestretch@}@{2.0@}} in the preamble.
- at cindex @code{setspace} package
+ at PkgIndex{setspace}
@cindex double spacing
However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
@file{setspace} package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
@@ -1235,10 +1923,9 @@
@findex \onecolumn
@cindex one-column output
-The @code{\onecolumn} declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output. If the document is given the class option
- at code{onecolumn} then this is the default behavior (@pxref{Document
-class options}).
+Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
+given the class option @code{onecolumn} then this is the default
+behavior (@pxref{Document class options}).
This command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
@@ -1250,16 +1937,16 @@
@cindex multicolumn text
@cindex two-column output
-Synopsis:
+Synopses:
@example
+\twocolumn
\twocolumn[@var{prelim one column text}]
@end example
-The @code{\twocolumn} declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the document is given the class option
- at code{twocolumn} then this is the default (@pxref{Document class
-options}).
+Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
+the class option @code{twocolumn} then this is the default
+(@pxref{Document class options}).
If the optional @var{prelim one column text} argument
is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
@@ -1303,7 +1990,7 @@
occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that
the height of a @code{table*} or @code{figure*} environment must not
exceed @code{0.7\textheight} . If the height of your starred float
-environment exceeeds this then you can take one of the following actions
+environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions
to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document:
@itemize @bullet
@@ -1348,8 +2035,8 @@
@end ftable
@c From egreg at http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/142232/339
-This example shows the use of the optional argument of @code{\twocolumn}
-to create a title that spans the two-column article:
+This example uses @code{\twocolumn}'s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
@example
\documentclass[twocolumn]@{article@}
@@ -1356,17 +2043,17 @@
\newcommand@{\authormark@}[1]@{\textsuperscript@{#1@}@}
\begin@{document@}
\twocolumn[@{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
- \centering
- \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
- \large Author One\authormark@{1@},
- Author Two\authormark@{2@},
- Author Three\authormark@{1@} \\[1em]
- \normalsize
- \begin@{tabular@}@{p@{.2\textwidth@}@@@{\hspace@{2em@}@}p@{.2\textwidth@}@}
- \authormark@{1@}Department one &\authormark@{2@}Department two \\
- School one &School two
- \end@{tabular@}\\[3em] % space below title part
-@}]
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark@{1@},
+ Author Two\authormark@{2@},
+ Author Three\authormark@{1@} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{p@{.2\textwidth@}@@@{\hspace@{2em@}@}p@{.2\textwidth@}@}
+ \authormark@{1@}Department one &\authormark@{2@}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end@{tabular@}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ @}]
Two column text here.
@end example
@@ -1377,22 +2064,23 @@
@findex \flushbottom
-The @code{\flushbottom} command can go at any point in the document
-body. It makes all later pages the same height, stretching the vertical
-space where necessary to fill out the page.
+Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
If @TeX{} cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
then you get a message like @samp{Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
-occurred while \output is active}. You can change to
- at code{\raggedbottom} (see below). Alternatively, you can try to adjust
-the @code{textheight} to be compatible, or you can add some vertical
-stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs, as in
- at code{\setlength@{\parskip@}@{0ex plus0.1ex@}}. In a final editing
-stage you can adjust the height of individual pages
+occurred while \output is active}. If you get that, one option is to
+change to @code{\raggedbottom} (@pxref{\raggedbottom}). Alternatively,
+you can adjust the @code{textheight} to make compatible pages, or you
+can add some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs,
+as in @code{\setlength@{\parskip@}@{0ex plus0.1ex@}}. Your last option
+is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages
(@pxref{\enlargethispage}).
-This is the default only if you select the @code{twoside} document class
-option (@pxref{Document class options}).
+The @code{\flushbottom} state is the default only if you select the
+ at code{twoside} document class option (@pxref{Document class options}).
@node \raggedbottom
@@ -1401,11 +2089,10 @@
@findex \raggedbottom
@cindex stretch, omitting vertical
-The @code{\raggedbottom} command can go at any point in the document
-body. It makes all later pages the natural height of the material on
-that page; no rubber lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
-document the facing pages may be different heights. See also
- at code{\flushbottom} above.
+Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See @ref{\flushbottom}.
This is the default unless you select the @code{twoside} document class
option (@pxref{Document class options}).
@@ -1597,14 +2284,14 @@
appears in the output after it.
The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
-limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
-bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued up that the limits prevent
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and
+the bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent
them all from fitting on a page then @LaTeX{} places what it can and
-defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may be typset far
-from their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big can
-migrate to the end of the document. But then because all floats in a
-class must appear in sequential order, every subsequent float in that
-class also appears at the end.
+defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up
+being typeset far from their place in the source. In particular, a
+float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which
+event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order,
+every following float in that class also appears at the end.
@cindex placement of floats
@cindex specifier, float placement
@@ -1631,7 +2318,7 @@
automatically added.
@cindex here, putting floats
- at cindex @code{float} package
+ at PkgIndex{float}
To absolutely force a float to appear ``here'', you can
@code{\usepackage@{float@}} and use the @code{H} specifier which it
defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
@@ -1666,12 +2353,13 @@
@code{\afterpage@{\clearpage@}}. This will wait until the current page
is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.
+ at PkgIndex{flafter}
@LaTeX{} can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
-(although on the same output page) if there is a @code{t} specifier in the
- at var{placement} paramater. If this is not desired, and deleting the
- at code{t} is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at
-the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using the
- at file{flafter} package or using the command
+(although on the same output page) if there is a @code{t} specifier in
+the @var{placement} parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
+the @code{t} is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
+at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
+the @file{flafter} package or using the command
@findex \suppressfloats
@code{\suppressfloats[t]}, which causes floats for the top position on
this page to moved to the next page.
@@ -1751,10 +2439,11 @@
The principal @TeX{}@tie{}FAQ entry relating to floats
@url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats} contains
suggestions for relaxing @LaTeX{}'s default parameters to reduce the
-problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explaination of the
-float placement algorithm is Frank Mittelbach's article ``How to
-infuence the position of float environments like figure and table in
- at LaTeX{}?'' @url{http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf}.
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach's article ``How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+ at LaTeX{}?''
+(@url{http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf}).
@node Sectioning
@@ -1821,6 +2510,7 @@
@findex secnumdepth @r{counter}
@cindex section numbers, printing
+ at anchor{Sectioning/secnumdepth}
The @code{secnumdepth} counter controls printing of section numbers.
The setting
@@ -1832,15 +2522,241 @@
suppresses heading numbers at any depth @math{> @var{level}}, where
@code{chapter} is level zero. (@xref{\setcounter}.)
+ at menu
+* \@@startsection:: Redefine layout of start of sections, subsections, etc.
+ at end menu
+
+ at node \@@startsection
+ at section @code{\@@startsection}
+
+ at findex \@@startsection
+ at cindex section, redefining
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ at example
+\@@startsection@{@var{name}@}@{@var{level}@}@{@var{indent}@}@{@var{beforeskip}@}@{@var{afterskip}@}@{@var{style}@}
+ at end example
+
+Redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning divisions such
+as @code{\section} or @code{\subsection}.
+
+Note that the @file{titlesec} package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with @code{\@@startsection}, some cannot. For instance, in
+the standard @LaTeX{} @code{book} and @code{report} classes the commands
+ at code{\chapter} and @code{\report} are not constructed in this way. To
+make such a command you may want to use the @code{\secdef} command.
+ at c xx define, and make a cross reference to, secdef.
+
+Technically, this command has the form:
+ at example
+\@@startsection@{@var{name}@}@{@var{level}@}@{@var{indent}@}@{@var{beforeskip}@}@{@var{afterskip}@}@{@var{style}@}
+ *[@var{toctitle}]@{@var{title}@}
+ at end example
+ at noindent so that issuing:
+ at example
+\renewcommand@{\section@}@{\@@startsection@{@var{name}@}@{@var{level}@}@{@var{indent}@}%
+ @{@var{beforeskip}@}@{@var{afterskip}@}@{@var{style}@}@}
+ at end example
+ at noindent redefine @code{\section} while keeping its standard calling form
+ at code{\section*[@var{toctitle}]@{@var{title}@}}. @xref{Sectioning} and
+the examples below.
+
+ at table @var
+
+ at item name
+ at anchor{\@@startsection/name} Name of the counter (which must be defined
+separately) used to number for the sectioning header. Most commonly
+either @code{section}, @code{subsection}, or @code{paragraph}. Although
+in those three cases the name of the counter is also the name of the
+sectioning command itself, using the same name is not required.
+
+Then @code{\the}@var{name} displays the title number and
+ at code{\}@var{name}@code{mark} is for the page headers.
+
+ at item level
+ at anchor{\@@startsection/level} An integer giving the depth of the
+sectioning command: 0 for @code{chapter} (only applies to the standard
+ at code{book} and @code{report} classes), 1 for @code{section}, 2 for
+ at code{subsection}, 3 for @code{subsubsection}, 4 for @code{paragraph},
+and 5 for @code{subparagraph}. In the @code{book} and @code{report}
+classes @code{part} has level -1, while in the @code{article} class
+ at code{part} has level 0.
+
+If @var{level} is less than or equal to the value of @code{secnumdepth}
+then the titles for this sectioning command will be numbered. For
+instance, in an @code{article}, if @code{secnumdepth} is 1 then a
+ at code{\section@{Introduction@}} command will produce output like @code{1
+Introduction} while @code{\subsection@{History@}} will produce output
+like @code{History}, without the number
+prefix. @xref{Sectioning/secnumdepth}.
+
+If @var{level} is less than or equal to the value of @var{tocdepth} then
+the table of contents will have an entrie for this sectioning unit.
+For instance, in an @code{article}, if @var{tocdepth} is 1 then the table of
+contents will list sections but not subsections.
+ at c xx add, and cross reference to, tocdepth
+
+ at item indent
+ at anchor{\@@startsection/indent} A length giving the indentation of all
+of the title lines with respect to the left margin. To have the
+title flush with the margin use @code{0pt}. A negative indentation
+such as @code{-1em} will move the title into the left margin.
+
+ at item beforeskip
+ at anchor{\@@startsection/beforeskip} The absolute value of this length is
+the amount of vertical space that is inserted before this sectioning
+unit's title. This space will be discarded if the sectioning unit
+happens to start at the top of a fresh page. If this number is negative
+then the first paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
+non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the
+negative of @code{1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt} is @code{-1pt plus -2pt minus
+-3pt}.)
+
+For example, if @var{beforeskip} is @code{-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex}
+then to start the new sectioning unit, @LaTeX{} will add about 3.5 times
+the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph in
+the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+ at code{plus} and @code{minus}, is good practice here since it gives
+ at LaTeX{} more flexibility in making up the page.
+
+The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of the
+line prior to this sectioning unit's header and the baseline of the
+header is that it is the sum of the @code{\parskip} of the text font,
+the @code{\baselineskip} of the title font, and the absolute value of
+the @var{beforeskip}. This space is typically rubber so it may stretch
+or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page so that the
+vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the header text will be
+where @LaTeX{} would put the baseline of the first text line on that
+page.)
+
+ at item afterskip
+ at anchor{\@@startsection/afterskip} This is a length. If @var{afterskip}
+is non-negative then this is the vertical space inserted after the
+sectioning unit's title header. If it is negative then the title header
+becomes a run-in header, so that it becomes part of the next paragraph.
+In this case the absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space
+between the end of the title and the beginning of the following
+paragraph. (Note that the negative of @code{1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt} is
+ at code{-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt}.)
+
+As with @var{beforeskip}, using a rubber length with @code{plus} and
+ at code{minus} components is good practice here since it gives @LaTeX{}
+more flexibility in putting the page together.
+
+If @code{afterskip} is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit's header and
+the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is that it is
+the sum of the @code{\parskip} of the title font, the
+ at code{\baselineskip} of the text font, and the value of @var{after}.
+That space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+because the sign of @code{afterskip} changes the sectioning unit
+header's from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+ at code{afterskip} to cancel part of the @code{\parskip}.)
+
+ at item style
+ at anchor{\@@startsection/style} Controls the styling of the title. See
+the examples below. Typical commands to use here are @code{\centering},
+ at code{\raggedright}, @code{\normalfont}, @code{\hrule}, or
+ at code{\newpage}. The last command in @var{style} may be one such as
+ at code{\MakeUppercase} or @code{\fbox} that takes one argument. The
+section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For
+instance, setting @var{style} to @code{\bfseries\MakeUppercase} would
+produce titles that are bold and upper case.
+ at end table
+
+Here are examples. To use them, either put them in a package or class
+file, or put them in the preamble of a @LaTeX{} document between a
+ at code{\makeatletter} command and a @code{\makeatother}. (Probably the
+error message @code{You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode.}
+means that you forgot this.) @xref{\makeatletter and \makeatother}.
+
+This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered.
+
+ at example
+\renewcommand\section@{%
+ \@@startsection@{section@}% @ref{\@@startsection/name, at var{name}, at var{name}}.
+ @{1@}% @ref{\@@startsection/level, at var{level}, at var{level}}.
+ @{0pt@}% @ref{\@@startsection/indent, at var{indent}, at var{indent}}.
+ @{-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex@}% @ref{\@@startsection/beforeskip, at var{beforeskip}, at var{beforeskip}}.
+ @{2.3ex plus.2ex@}% @ref{\@@startsection/afterskip, at var{afterskip}, at var{afterskip}}.
+ @{\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries@}% @ref{\@@startsection/style, at var{style}, at var{style}}.
+ @}
+ at end example
+
+This will put @code{subsection} titles in small caps type, inline with the paragraph.
+
+ at example
+\renewcommand\subsection@{%
+ \@@startsection@{subsection@}% @ref{\@@startsection/name, at var{name}, at var{name}}.
+ @{2@}% @ref{\@@startsection/level, at var{level}, at var{level}}.
+ @{0em@}% @ref{\@@startsection/indent, at var{indent}, at var{indent}}.
+ @{-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex@}% @ref{\@@startsection/beforeskip, at var{beforeskip}, at var{beforeskip}}.
+ @{-1em plus 0.2em@}% @ref{\@@startsection/afterskip, at var{afterskip}, at var{afterskip}}.
+ @{\scshape@}% @ref{\@@startsection/style, at var{style}, at var{style}}.
+ @}
+ at end example
+
+The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands. This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to display that counter.
+
+ at c From https://groups.google.com/forum/#!searchin/comp.text.tex/startsection%7Csort:relevance/comp.text.tex/sB-nTS-oL08/ZZeKYdG0llMJ
+ at example
+\setcounter@{secnumdepth@}@{6@}% show counters this far down
+\newcounter@{subsubparagraph@}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+\renewcommand@{\thesubsubparagraph@}% how to display
+ @{\thesubparagraph.\@@arabic\c@@subsubparagraph@}% numbering
+\newcommand@{\subsubparagraph@}@{\@@startsection
+ @{subsubparagraph@}%
+ @{6@}%
+ @{0em@}%
+ @{\baselineskip@}%
+ @{0.5\baselineskip@}%
+ @{\normalfont\normalsize@}@}
+\newcommand*\l@@subsubparagraph@{\@@dottedtocline@{6@}@{10em@}@{5em@}@}% for toc
+\newcommand@{\subsubparagraphmark@}[1]@{@}% for page headers
+ at end example
+
+
@node Cross references
@chapter Cross references
@cindex cross references
-One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
-the reader to them, as in ``See Figure 3 for more details.''
+One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to
+refer the reader to them, as in ``See Figure~3 for more details.''
+ at cindex label
+Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if that
+number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to update
+this reference by hand. Instead, @LaTeX{} has you write a @dfn{label}
+like @code{\label@{eq:GreensThm@}} and refer to it with @code{See
+equation~\ref@{eq:GreensThm@}}.
+
+ at LaTeX{} writes the information from the labels to a file with the same
+name as the file containing the @code{\label@{...@}} but with an
+ at file{.aux} extension. (The information has the format
+ at code{\newlabel@{@var{label}@}@{@{@var{currentlabel}@}@{@var{pagenumber}@}@}}
+where @var{currentlabel} is the current value of the macro
+ at code{\@@currentlabel} that is usually updated whenever you call
+ at code{\refstepcounter@{@var{counter}@}}.)
+
+ at cindex forward reference
+ at cindex reference, forward
+The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your
+document has a @dfn{forward reference}, a @code{\ref@{@var{key}@}} that
+appears earlier than the associated @code{\label@{@var{key}@}}; see the
+example in the @code{\pageref@{...@}} description. @LaTeX{} gets the
+information for references from the @file{.aux} file. If this is the
+first time you are compiling the document then you will get a message
+ at code{LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get
+cross references right.} and in the output the reference will appear as
+two question marks at tie{}@samp{??}, in boldface. Or, if you change some
+things so the references change then you get the same warning and the
+output contains the old reference information. The solution in either
+case is just to compile the document a second time.
+
@menu
* \label:: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
* \pageref:: Refer to a page number.
@@ -1859,37 +2775,22 @@
\label@{@var{key}@}
@end example
-A @code{\label} command appearing in ordinary text assigns to
- at var{key} the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
-inside a numbered environment assigns that number to @var{key}. The
-assigned number can be retrieved with the @code{\ref@{@var{key}@}}
-command (@pxref{\ref}).
+Assign a reference number to @var{key}. In ordinary text
+ at code{\label@{@var{key}@}} assigns to @var{key} the number of the
+current sectional unit. Inside an environment with numbering, such as a
+ at code{table} or @code{theorem} environment, @code{\label@{@var{key}@}}
+assigns to @var{key} the number of that environment. Retrieve the
+assigned number with the @code{\ref@{@var{key}@}} command
+(@pxref{\ref}).
-Thus, in the example below the key @code{sec:test} holds the number of
-the current section and the key @code{fig:test} that of the figure.
-(Incidentally, labels must appear after captions in figures and
-tables.)
-
- at example
-\section@{section name@}
-\label@{sec:test@}
-This is Section~\ref@{sec:test@}.
-\begin@{figure@}
- ...
- \caption@{caption text@}
- \label@{fig:test@}
-\end@{figure@}
-See Figure~\ref@{fig:test@}.
- at end example
-
A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
distinguished, as usual.
-Although the name can be more or less anything, a common convention is
-to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a colon
-or period. This helps to avoid accidentally creating two labels with
-the same name. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon or period. This helps to avoid accidentally
+creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more
+readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
@table @code
@item ch
@@ -1904,10 +2805,27 @@
for equations
@end table
-Thus, a label for a figure would look like @code{fig:test} or
- at code{fig.test}.
+Thus, @code{\label@{fig:Euler@}} is a label for a figure with a portrait
+of the great man.
+In this example below the key @code{sec:test} will get the number of the
+current section and the key @code{fig:test} will get the number of the
+figure. (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and
+tables.)
+ at example
+\section@{section name@}
+\label@{sec:test@}
+This is Section~\ref@{sec:test@}.
+\begin@{figure@}
+ ...
+ \caption@{caption text@}
+ \label@{fig:test@}
+\end@{figure@}
+See Figure~\ref@{fig:test@}.
+ at end example
+
+
@node \pageref
@section @code{\pageref@{@var{key}@}}
@@ -1921,11 +2839,23 @@
\pageref@{@var{key}@}
@end example
-The @code{\pageref}@{@var{key}@} command produces the page number of
-the place in the text where the corresponding
+Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
@code{\label}@{@var{key}@} command appears.
+In this example the @code{\label@{eq:main@}} is used both for the
+formula number and for the page number. (Note that the two references
+are forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice
+to resolve those.)
+ at example
+The main result is formula~\ref@{eq:main@} on page~\pageref@{eq:main@}.
+ ...
+\begin@{equation@} \label@{eq:main@}
+ \mathbf@{P@}=\mathbf@{NP@}
+\end@{equation@}
+ at end example
+
+
@node \ref
@section @code{\ref@{@var{key}@}}
@@ -1942,12 +2872,25 @@
\ref@{@var{key}@}
@end example
-The @code{\ref} command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+Produces the number of the sectional unit,
equation, footnote, figure, @dots{}, of the corresponding
@code{\label} command (@pxref{\label}). It does not produce any text,
such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself.
+In this example, the @code{\ref@{popular@}} produces @samp{2}. Note
+that it is a forward reference since it comes before
+ at code{\label@{popular@}}.
+ at example
+The most widely-used format is item number~\ref@{popular@}.
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+\item Plain \TeX
+\item \label@{popular@} \LaTeX
+\item Con\TeX t
+\end@{enumerate@}
+ at end example
+
+
@node Environments
@chapter Environments
@@ -1955,15 +2898,25 @@
@findex \begin
@findex \end
- at LaTeX{} provides many environments for marking off certain text.
-Each environment begins and ends in the same manner:
+ at LaTeX{} provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.
+An environment begins with @code{\begin} and ends with @code{\end},
+like this:
@example
-\begin@{@var{envname}@}
-...
-\end@{@var{envname}@}
+\begin@{@var{environment-name}@}
+ ...
+\end@{@var{environment-name}@}
@end example
+The @var{environment-name} at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. For instance, the input
+ at code{\begin@{table*@}...\end@{table@}} will cause an error like:
+ at samp{! LaTeX Error: \begin@{table*@} on input line 5 ended by
+\end@{table@}.}
+
+ at cindex group, and environments
+Environments are executed within a group.
+
@menu
* abstract:: Produce an abstract.
* array:: Math arrays.
@@ -1999,7 +2952,7 @@
@node abstract
@section @code{abstract}
- at findex abstract @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{abstract}
@cindex abstracts
Synopsis:
@@ -2010,13 +2963,53 @@
\end@{abstract@}
@end example
-Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs.
+Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This environment
+is only defined in the @code{article} and @code{report} document classes
+(@pxref{Document classes}).
+Using the example below in the @code{article} class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option @code{titlepage} causes the abstract
+to be on a separate page (@pxref{Document class options}); this is the
+default only in the @code{report} class.
+ at example
+\begin@{abstract@}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+\end@{abstract@}
+ at end example
+
+The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for
+a more flexible solution, use the package @file{abstract}).
+
+ at c Adopted from http://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-onecolabs.html
+ at example
+\documentclass[twocolumn]@{article@}
+ ...
+\begin@{document@}
+\title@{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach@}
+\author@{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks@{Railroad tracking grant.@}@}
+\twocolumn[
+ \begin@{@@twocolumnfalse@}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin@{abstract@}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end@{abstract@}
+ \end@{@@twocolumnfalse@}
+ ]
+@{ % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand@{\thefootnote@}@{\fnsymbol@{footnote@}@}
+ \footnotetext[1]@{Thanks for all the fish.@}
+@}
+ at end example
+
+
@node array
@section @code{array}
- at findex array @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{array}
@cindex arrays, math
Synopsis:
@@ -2023,8 +3016,8 @@
@example
\begin@{array@}@{@var{cols}@}
- at var{column 1 entry} &@var{column 2 entry} ... &@var{column n entry} \\
-...
+ @var{column 1 entry} &@var{column 2 entry} ... &@var{column n entry} \\
+ ...
\end@{array@}
@end example
@@ -2032,8 +3025,8 @@
@example
\begin@{array@}[@var{pos}]@{@var{cols}@}
- at var{column 1 entry} &@var{column 2 entry} ... &@var{column n entry} \\
-...
+ @var{column 1 entry} &@var{column 2 entry} ... &@var{column n entry} \\
+ ...
\end@{array@}
@end example
@@ -2041,7 +3034,7 @@
mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
such as @code{equation} (@pxref{equation}). Column entries are
separated by an ampersand at tie{}(@code{&}). Rows are terminated with
-double-backslashes at tie{}(@code{\\}) (@pxref{\\}).
+double-backslashes (@pxref{\\}).
The required argument @var{cols} describes the number of columns, their
alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. See
@@ -2050,24 +3043,25 @@
@var{pos} argument.
There are two ways that @code{array} diverges from @code{tabular}. The
-first is that @code{array} entries are typeset in mathematics mode, in
+first is that @code{array} entries are typeset in math mode, in
textstyle (except if the @var{cols} definition specifies the column with
- at code{@@p@{..@}}, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode).
+ at code{p@{...@}}, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode).
The second is that, instead of @code{tabular}'s parameter
- at code{\tabcolsep}, @LaTeX{}'s intercolumn space in an array is governed
+ at code{\tabcolsep}, @LaTeX{}'s intercolumn space in an @code{array} is governed
by
@findex \arraycolsep
- at code{\arraycolsep} which gives half the width between columns. The
+ at code{\arraycolsep}, which gives half the width between columns. The
default for this is @samp{5pt}.
+ at PkgIndex{amsmath}
To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the @file{amsmath}
package. It comes with environments @code{pmatrix} for an array
-surrounded by parentheses at tie{}@code{(..)}, @code{bmatrix} for an array
-surrounded by square brackets at tie{}@code{[..]}, @code{Bmatrix} for an
-array surrounded by curly braces at tie{}@code{@{..@}}, @code{vmatrix} for
-an array surrounded by vertical bars at tie{}@code{|..|}, and
+surrounded by parentheses at tie{}@code{(...)}, @code{bmatrix} for an array
+surrounded by square brackets at tie{}@code{[...]}, @code{Bmatrix} for an
+array surrounded by curly braces at tie{}@code{@{...@}}, @code{vmatrix} for
+an array surrounded by vertical bars at tie{}@code{|...|}, and
@code{Vmatrix} for an array surrounded by double vertical
-bars at tie{}@code{||..||}, along with a number of other array constructs.
+bars at tie{}@code{||...||}, along with a number of other array constructs.
Here is an example of an array:
@@ -2080,11 +3074,23 @@
\end@{equation@}
@end example
+The next example works if @code{\usepackage@{amsmath@}} is in the
+preamble:
+ at example
+\begin@{equation@}
+ \begin@{vmatrix@}@{cc@}
+ a &b \\
+ c &d
+ \end@{vmatrix@}=ad-bc
+\end@{equation@}
+ at end example
+
+
@node center
@section @code{center}
- at findex center @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{center}
@cindex centering text, environment for
Synopsis:
@@ -2091,28 +3097,41 @@
@example
\begin@{center@}
- .. text ..
+ ... text ...
\end@{center@}
@end example
-Environment to create a sequence of lines that are centered within the
-left and right margins on the current page. If the text in the
-environment body is too long to fit on a line, @LaTeX{} will insert line
-breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
-interword space. To force a line break at a particular spot use
-double-backslash at tie{}@code{\\} (@pxref{\\}).
+Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Use
+double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (@pxref{\\}).
@findex \\ @r{(for @code{center})}
+If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, @LaTeX{}
+will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or
+shrinking any interword space.
This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
@ref{\centering} to avoid such space, for example inside a @code{figure}
environment.
-In this example, depending on the line width, @LaTeX{} may choose a break
-for the part before the double backslash, will center the line or two,
-then will break at the double backslash, and will center the ending.
+This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
@example
\begin@{center@}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+\end@{center@}
+ at end example
+
+In this example, depending on the page's line width, @LaTeX{} may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then @LaTeX{} will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+
+ at example
+\begin@{center@}
My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
@@ -2132,7 +3151,7 @@
@findex \centering
@cindex centering text, declaration for
-Declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
+A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
most often used inside an environment such as @code{figure}, or in a
@code{parbox}.
@@ -2168,7 +3187,7 @@
@node description
@section @code{description}
- at findex description @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{description}
@cindex labelled lists, creating
@cindex description lists, creating
@@ -2182,7 +3201,6 @@
\end@{description@}
@end example
- at findex \item
Environment to make a labelled list of items. Each item's @var{label}
is typeset in bold, flush-left. Each item's text may contain multiple
paragraphs. Although the labels on the items are optional there is no
@@ -2189,19 +3207,20 @@
sensible default, so all items should have labels.
@findex \item
-The list consists of at least one item; see at tie{}@ref{\item} (having no
-items causes the @LaTeX{} error @samp{Something's wrong--perhaps a
-missing \item}). Each item is produced with an @code{\item} command.
+The list consists of at least one item, created with the @code{\item}
+command (@pxref{\item}). Having no items causes the @LaTeX{} error
+ at samp{Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item}).
@cindex bold typewriter, avoiding
@cindex typewriter labels in lists
Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font
-change given in argument style (see @ref{Font styles}) then it will come
-out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
- at code{\item[\texttt@{label text@}]} then it will appear in bold
-typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bolded
-typewriter is to use declaritive style @code{\item[@{\tt label text@}]}.
-Similarly, get normal text use @code{\item[@{\rm label text@}]}.
+change given in argument style (see @ref{Font styles}) then it will
+come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter
+with @code{\item[\texttt@{label text@}]} then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bold
+typewriter is to use declarative style: @code{\item[@{\tt label
+text@}]}. Similarly, to get the standard roman font, use
+ at code{\item[@{\rm label text@}]}.
For other major @LaTeX{} labelled list environments, see @ref{itemize}
and @ref{enumerate}. For information about customizing list layout, see
@@ -2221,13 +3240,13 @@
@section @code{displaymath}
@c http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/40492/what-are-the-differences-between-align-equation-and-displaymath
- at findex displaymath @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{displaymath}
Synopsis:
@example
\begin@{displaymath@}
- .. math text ..
+ at var{math text}
\end@{displaymath@}
@end example
@@ -2235,29 +3254,29 @@
and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option
@code{fleqn}; see @ref{Document class options}.
- at LaTeX{} will not break the math text across lines.
-
In the @code{displaymath} environment no equation number is added to the
math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the
@code{equation} environment (@pxref{equation}).
-Note that the @file{amsmath} package has extensive displayed equation
-facilities. Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
-new documents. For example, there are a number of options in that
-package for having math text broken across lines.
+ at LaTeX{} will not break the @var{math text} across lines.
-The construct @code{\[..math text..\]} is essentially a synonym for
- at code{\begin@{displaymath@}..math text..\end@{displaymath@}} but the
+ at PkgIndex{amsmath}
+Note that the @file{amsmath} package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of
+ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+
+The construct @code{\[@var{math text}\]} is essentially a synonym for
+ at code{\begin@{displaymath@}@var{math text}\end@{displaymath@}} but the
latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance,
searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word
- at code{displaymath} will likely be unique. (The construct @code{$$..math
-text..$$} from Plain at tie{}@TeX{} is sometimes mistakenly used as a
-synonym for @code{displaymath}. It is not a synonym, because the
- at code{displaymath} environment checks that it isn't started in math mode
-and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching environment start,
-because the @code{displaymath} environment has different vertical
-spacing, and because the @code{displaymath} environment honors the
- at code{fleqn} option.)
+ at code{displaymath} will likely be unique. (The construct
+ at code{$$@var{math text}$$} from Plain at tie{}@TeX{} is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for @code{displaymath}. It is not a
+synonym, because the @code{displaymath} environment checks that it isn't
+started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the @code{displaymath} environment has
+different vertical spacing, and because the @code{displaymath}
+environment honors the @code{fleqn} option.)
The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
@example
@@ -2272,7 +3291,7 @@
@node document
@section @code{document}
- at findex document @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{document}
The @code{document} environment encloses the entire body of a document.
It is required in every @LaTeX{} document. @xref{Starting and ending}.
@@ -2329,7 +3348,7 @@
@node enumerate
@section @code{enumerate}
- at findex enumerate @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{enumerate}
@cindex lists of items, numbered
Synopsis:
@@ -2414,7 +3433,7 @@
@node eqnarray
@section @code{eqnarray}
- at findex eqnarray @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{eqnarray}
@cindex equations, aligning
@cindex aligning equations
@@ -2488,7 +3507,7 @@
@node equation
@section @code{equation}
- at findex equation @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{equation}
@cindex equations, environment for
@cindex formulas, environment for
@@ -2513,7 +3532,7 @@
@node figure
@section @code{figure}
- at findex figure
+ at EnvIndex{figure}
@cindex inserting figures
@cindex figures, inserting
@@ -2554,7 +3573,7 @@
The figure body is typeset in a @code{parbox} of width @code{\textwidth}
and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
-The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (@pxref{Cross
+The label is optional; it is used for cross references (@pxref{Cross
references}).
@findex \caption
The optional @code{\caption} command specifies caption text for the
@@ -2579,7 +3598,8 @@
@node filecontents
@section @code{filecontents}: Write an external file
- at findex filecontents
+ at EnvIndex{filecontents}
+ at EnvIndex{filecontents*}
@cindex external files, writing
@cindex writing external files
@@ -2643,7 +3663,7 @@
@node flushleft
@section @code{flushleft}
- at findex flushleft @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{flushleft}
@cindex left-justifying text, environment for
@cindex ragged right text, environment for
@@ -2687,7 +3707,7 @@
@node flushright
@section @code{flushright}
- at findex flushright @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{flushright}
@cindex ragged left text, environment for
@cindex right-justifying text, environment for
@@ -2731,7 +3751,7 @@
@node itemize
@section @code{itemize}
- at findex itemize @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{itemize}
@findex \item
@cindex lists of items
@cindex unordered lists
@@ -2748,7 +3768,7 @@
@end example
The @code{itemize} environment produces an ``unordered'', ``bulleted''
-list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four
+list. Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four
levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
environments, such as @code{enumerate} (@pxref{enumerate}).
@@ -2876,7 +3896,7 @@
@node letter
@section @code{letter} environment: writing letters
- at findex letter @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{letter}
This environment is used for creating letters. @xref{Letters}.
@@ -2884,7 +3904,7 @@
@node list
@section @code{list}
- at findex list
+ at EnvIndex{list}
@cindex lists of items, generic
The @code{list} environment is a generic environment which is used for
@@ -2917,6 +3937,7 @@
@node \item
+ at subsection @code{\item}: An entry in a list.
Synopsis:
@@ -2960,7 +3981,7 @@
@node math
@section @code{math}
- at findex math @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{math}
@cindex in-line formulas
Synopsis:
@@ -2979,7 +4000,7 @@
@node minipage
@section @code{minipage}
- at findex minipage @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{minipage}
@cindex minipage, creating a
@example
@@ -3019,7 +4040,7 @@
@node picture
@section @code{picture}
- at findex picture
+ at EnvIndex{picture}
@cindex creating pictures
@cindex pictures, creating
@@ -3044,6 +4065,13 @@
@code{\setlength} command, outside of a @code{picture} environment.
The default value is @code{1pt}.
+ at PkgIndex{picture}
+The @code{picture} package redefine the @code{picture} environment so
+that everywhere a number is used in a @var{picture commands} to specify
+a coordinate, one can use alternatively a length. Be aware however that
+this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing @code{\unitlength}.
+
+
@cindex position, in picture
A @dfn{position} is a pair of coordinates, such as @code{(2.4,-5)}, specifying
the point with x-coordinate @code{2.4} and y-coordinate @code{-5}.
@@ -3400,11 +4428,11 @@
@node quotation and quote
@section @code{quotation} and @code{quote}
- at findex quotation
+ at EnvIndex{quotation}
@cindex quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying
@cindex displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation
@cindex paragraph indentations in quoted text
- at findex quote
+ at EnvIndex{quote}
@cindex quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying
@cindex displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation
@cindex paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting
@@ -3444,7 +4472,7 @@
@example
\begin@{quotation@}
\it Four score and seven years ago
- .. shall not perish from the earth.
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
\hspace@{1em plus 1fill@}---Abraham Lincoln
\end@{quotation@}
@end example
@@ -3453,7 +4481,7 @@
@node tabbing
@section @code{tabbing}
- at findex tabbing @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{tabbing}
@cindex tab stops, using
@cindex lining text up using tab stops
@cindex alignment via tabbing
@@ -3563,7 +4591,7 @@
@node table
@section @code{table}
- at findex table
+ at EnvIndex{table}
@cindex tables, creating
@cindex creating tables
@@ -3588,7 +4616,7 @@
The table body is typeset in a @code{parbox} of width @code{\textwidth}
and so it can contain text, commands, etc.
-The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (@pxref{Cross
+The label is optional; it is used for cross references (@pxref{Cross
references}).
@findex \caption
The optional @code{\caption} command specifies caption text for the
@@ -3616,7 +4644,7 @@
@node tabular
@section @code{tabular}
- at findex tabular @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{tabular}
@cindex lines in tables
@cindex lining text up in tables
@@ -3671,7 +4699,7 @@
should be rubber, as with @code{@@@{\extracolsep@{\fill@}@}}, to allow
the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
are likely to get the @code{Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
-..} warning.
+...} warning.
@item pos
Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is to
@@ -3707,14 +4735,14 @@
@var{text or space} material is typeset in LR mode. This text is
fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
-This specifier is optional: unless you put in your own @@-expression
-then @LaTeX{}'s book, article, and report classes will put on either
-side of each column a space of length @code{\tabcolsep}, which by
-default is @samp{6pt}. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+This specifier is optional: with no @@-expression, @LaTeX{}'s
+ at code{book}, @code{article}, and @code{report} classes will put on
+either side of each column a space of length @code{\tabcolsep}, which
+by default is @samp{6pt}. That is, by default adjacent columns are
separated by 12pt (so @code{\tabcolsep} is misleadingly-named since it
-is not the separation between tabular columns). Also by default a space
-of 6pt comes before the first column as well as after the final column,
-unless you put a @code{@@@{..@}} or @code{|} there.
+is not the separation between tabular columns). By implication, a
+space of 6pt also comes before the first column and after the final
+column, unless you put a @code{@@@{...@}} or @code{|} there.
If you override the default and use an @@-expression then you must
insert any desired space yourself, as in @code{@@@{\hspace@{1em@}@}}.
@@ -3726,7 +4754,7 @@
@example
\begin@{flushleft@}
\begin@{tabular@}@{@@@{@}l@}
- ..
+ ...
\end@{tabular@}
\end@{flushleft@}
@end example
@@ -3782,7 +4810,7 @@
positive integer and @var{cols} is a list of specifiers. Thus
@code{\begin@{tabular@}@{|*@{3@}@{l|r@}|@}} is equivalent to
@code{\begin@{tabular@}@{|l|rl|rl|r|@}}. Note that @var{cols} may
-contain another @code{*-expression}.
+contain another @code{*}-expression.
@end table
@end table
@@ -3849,7 +4877,7 @@
\begin@{tabular@}@{lccl@}
\textit@{ID@} &\multicolumn@{2@}@{c@}@{\textit@{Name@}@} &\textit@{Age@} \\ \hline % row one
978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\ % row two
- ..
+ ...
\end@{tabular@}
@end example
@@ -3863,7 +4891,7 @@
The @var{cols} argument overrides the @code{array} or @code{tabular}
environment's intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn
entry. To affect that area, this argument can contain vertical bars
- at code{|} indicating the placement of vertical rules, and @code{@@@{..@}}
+ at code{|} indicating the placement of vertical rules, and @code{@@@{...@}}
expressions. Thus if @var{cols} is @samp{|c|} then this multicolumn
entry will be centered and a vertical rule will come in the intercolumn
area before it and after it. This table details the exact behavior.
@@ -3876,6 +4904,7 @@
&z % entry four
\end@{tabular@}
@end example
+
Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
the @code{\multicolumn} has the @var{cols} specifier @samp{r} with no
initial vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a
@@ -3923,13 +4952,13 @@
@subsection @code{\vline}
@findex \vline
-
Draw a vertical line in a @code{tabular} or @code{array} environment
-extending the full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be used
-in an @@-expression, although its synonym vertical bar at tie{}@code{|} is
-more common. This command is rarely used; typically a table's vertical
-lines are specified in @code{tabular}'s @var{cols} argument and
-overriden as needed with @code{\multicolumn}.
+extending the full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be
+used in an @@-expression, although its synonym vertical
+bar at tie{}@code{|} is more common. This command is rarely used in the
+body of a table; typically a table's vertical lines are specified in
+ at code{tabular}'s @var{cols} argument and overridden as needed with
+ at code{\multicolumn}.
This example illustrates some pitfalls. In the first line's second
entry the @code{\hfill} moves the @code{\vline} to the left edge of the
@@ -4006,7 +5035,7 @@
@node thebibliography
@section @code{thebibliography}
- at findex thebibliography @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{thebibliography}
@cindex bibliography, creating (manually)
Synopsis:
@@ -4055,18 +5084,19 @@
\bibitem[@var{label}]@{@var{cite_key}@}
@end example
-The @code{\bibitem} command generates an entry labelled by
- at var{label}. If the @var{label} argument is missing, a number is
-automatically generated using the @code{enumi} counter. The
- at var{cite_key} is any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation
-symbols not containing a comma.
+The @code{\bibitem} command generates an entry labelled by @var{label}.
+If the @var{label} argument is missing, a number is automatically
+generated using the @code{enumi} counter. The @var{cite_key} is a
+ at cindex citation key
+ at dfn{citation key} consisting in any sequence of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
This command writes an entry to the @file{.aux} file containing the
-item's @var{cite_key} and label. When the @file{.aux} file is read by
-the @code{\begin@{document@}} command, the item's @code{label} is
+item's @var{cite_key} and @var{label}. When the @file{.aux} file is
+read by the @code{\begin@{document@}} command, the item's @var{label} is
associated with @code{cite_key}, causing references to @var{cite_key}
-with a @code{\cite} command (see next section) to produce the
-associated label.
+with a @code{\cite} command (@pxref{\cite}) to produce the associated
+ at var{label}.
@node \cite
@@ -4080,14 +5110,14 @@
\cite[@var{subcite}]@{@var{keys}@}
@end example
-The @var{keys} argument is a list of one or more citation keys,
-separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to
-the references associated with @var{keys} by entries in the
- at file{.aux} file.
+The @var{keys} argument is a list of one or more citation keys
+(@pxref{\bibitem}), separated by commas. This command generates an
+in-text citation to the references associated with @var{keys} by entries
+in the @file{.aux} file.
The text of the optional @var{subcite} argument appears after the
citation. For example, @code{\cite[p.~314]@{knuth@}} might produce
-`[Knuth, p. at tie{}314]'.
+ at samp{[Knuth, p. at tie{}314]}.
@node \nocite
@@ -4095,7 +5125,11 @@
@findex \nocite
+Synopsis:
+
+ at example
@code{\nocite@{@var{keys}@}}
+ at end example
The @code{\nocite} command produces no text, but writes @var{keys},
which is a list of one or more citation keys, to the @file{.aux} file.
@@ -4125,7 +5159,7 @@
its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will
be produced: @var{bibstyle} refers to a file
@var{bibstyle}@file{.bst}, which defines how your citations will look.
-The standard @var{style} names distributed with Bib at TeX{} are:
+The standard @var{bibstyle} names distributed with Bib at TeX{} are:
@table @code
@item alpha
@@ -4145,7 +5179,8 @@
The @code{\bibliography} command is what actually produces the
bibliography. The argument to @code{\bibliography} refers to files
-named @file{@var{bibfile}.bib}, which should contain your database in
+named @file{@var{bibfile1}.bib}, @file{@var{bibfile2}.bib}, @dots{},
+which should contain your database in
Bib at TeX{} format. Only the entries referred to via @code{\cite} and
@code{\nocite} will be listed in the bibliography.
@@ -4153,7 +5188,7 @@
@node theorem
@section @code{theorem}
- at findex theorem @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{theorem}
@cindex theorems, typesetting
Synopsis:
@@ -4173,7 +5208,7 @@
@node titlepage
@section @code{titlepage}
- at findex titlepage @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{titlepage}
@cindex making a title page
@cindex title pages, creating
@@ -4181,24 +5216,47 @@
@example
\begin@{titlepage@}
- at var{text}
+ ... text and spacing ...
\end@{titlepage@}
@end example
-The @code{titlepage} environment creates a title page, i.e., a page
-with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following
-page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to
-you. The @code{\today} command may be useful on title pages
-(@pxref{\today}).
+Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading. The
+following page will be numbered page one.
-You can use the @code{\maketitle} command (@pxref{\maketitle}) to
-produce a standard title page without a @code{titlepage} environment.
+To instead produce a standard title page without a @code{titlepage}
+environment you can use @code{\maketitle} (@pxref{\maketitle}).
+Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical spacing,
+is left to the author.
+ at example
+\begin@{titlepage@}
+\vspace*@{\stretch@{1@}@}
+\begin@{center@}
+ @{\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title@} \\[6.5ex]
+ @{\large\bfseries Author name@} \\
+ \vspace@{4ex@}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit@{University name@} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc@{\Large Doctor of Philosophy@} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc@{\large Mathematics@} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+\end@{center@}
+\vspace@{\stretch@{2@}@}
+\end@{titlepage@}
+ at end example
+
+
@node verbatim
@section @code{verbatim}
- at findex verbatim @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{verbatim}
@cindex verbatim text
@cindex simulating typed text
@cindex typed text, simulating
@@ -4255,7 +5313,7 @@
@node verse
@section @code{verse}
- at findex verse @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{verse}
@cindex poetry, an environment for
Synopsis:
@@ -4297,6 +5355,7 @@
* \obeycr & \restorecr:: Make each input line start a new output line.
* \newline:: Break the line
* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation.
+* \discretionary:: Insert explicit hyphenation with control of hyphen character.
* \fussy:: Be fussy about line breaking.
* \sloppy:: Be sloppy about line breaking.
* \hyphenation:: Tell @LaTeX{} how to hyphenate a word.
@@ -4333,7 +5392,7 @@
command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in
a @code{tabular} or @code{array} environment.
-Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a @code{p@{..@}} column
+Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a @code{p@{...@}} column
in a @code{tabular} environment) the @code{\newline} command is a synonym for
@code{\\} (@pxref{\newline}).
@@ -4372,7 +5431,7 @@
breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
Inside a @code{tabular} or @code{array} environment, in a column with a
-specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically @code{p@{..@}},
+specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically @code{p@{...@}},
@code{\newline} will insert a line break inside of the column, that is,
it does not break the entire row. To break the entire row use @code{\\}
or its equivalent @code{\tabularnewline}.
@@ -4405,7 +5464,19 @@
hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points
that @LaTeX{} might otherwise have chosen.
+ at node \discretionary
+ at section @code{\discretionary} (generalized hyphenation point)
+ at cindex hyphenation, discretionary
+ at cindex discretionary hyphenation
+Synopsis:
+
+ at example
+\discretionary@{@var{pre-break-text}@}@{@var{post-break-text}@}@{@var{no-break-text}@}
+ at end example
+
+ at c xxx TODO, complete this node, see LaTeX-fr
+
@node \fussy
@section @code{\fussy}
@@ -4416,7 +5487,7 @@
words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.
This command cancels the effect of a previous @code{\sloppy} command
-(@pxref{\sloppy}.
+(@pxref{\sloppy}).
@node \sloppy
@@ -4744,7 +5815,8 @@
\textit@{HMS Sophie@} &Master and Commander \\
\textit@{HMS Polychrest@} &Post Captain \\
\textit@{HMS Lively@} &Post Captain \\
- \textit@{HMS Surprise@} &A number of books\footnote@{Starting with HMS Surprise.@}
+ \textit@{HMS Surprise@} &A number of books\footnote@{Starting with
+ HMS Surprise.@}
\end@{tabular@}
\end@{center@}
@end example
@@ -4755,7 +5827,7 @@
@example
\begin@{center@}
\begin@{minipage@}@{.5\textwidth@}
- .. tabular material ..
+ ... tabular material ...
\end@{minipage@}
\end@{center@}
@end example
@@ -4784,26 +5856,32 @@
@node Footnotes in section headings
@section Footnotes in section headings
-Putting a footnote in a section heading
+ at cindex footnotes, in section headings
+ at cindex table of contents, avoiding footnotes
+Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
@example
-\section@{Full sets\protect\footnote@{This material is due to R~Jones.@}@}
+\section@{Full sets\protect\footnote@{This material due to ...@}@}
@end example
-causes the footnote to appear both at the bottom of the page where the
-section starts and at the bottom of the table of contents page. To have
-it not appear on the table of contents use the package @file{footmisc}
-with the @code{stable} option.
+ at PkgIndex{footmisc}
+ at cindex @code{stable} option to @code{footmisc} package
+ at noindent
+causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. To have it not appear
+on the table of contents use the package @file{footmisc} with the
+ at code{stable} option.
@example
\usepackage[stable]@{footmisc@}
- ..
+...
\begin@{document@}
- ..
-\section@{Full sets\footnote@{This material is due to R~Jones.@}@}
+...
+\section@{Full sets\footnote@{This material due to ...@}@}
@end example
-Note that the @code{\protect} is gone; putting it in causes the
+Note that the @code{\protect} is gone; including it would cause the
footnote to reappear on the table of contents.
@@ -4819,12 +5897,12 @@
\usepackage@{bigfoot@}
\DeclareNewFootnote@{Default@}
\DeclareNewFootnote@{from@}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom@{@}
- ..
+ ...
\begin@{document@}
- ..
+...
The third theorem is a partial converse of the
second.\footnotefrom@{First noted in Wilson.\footnote@{Second edition only.@}@}
- ..
+...
@end example
@@ -4838,13 +5916,13 @@
@example
\usepackage@{cleveref@}[2012/02/15] % this version of package or later
\crefformat@{footnote@}@{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3@}
- ..
+...
\begin@{document@}
- ..
+...
The theorem is from Evers.\footnote@{\label@{fn:TE@}Tinker and Evers, 1994.@}
The corollary is from Chance.\footnote@{Evers and Chance, 1990.@}
But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref@{fn:TE@}
- ..
+...
@end example
This solution will work with the package @file{hyperref}.
@@ -4883,6 +5961,7 @@
@LaTeX{} has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
@c xx everything in this chapter needs examples.
+ at c xx Add DeclareRobustCommand (see clsguide.pdf)
@menu
* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command.
@@ -4910,80 +5989,85 @@
command, respectively. Synopses:
@example
- \newcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
- \newcommand*@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
-\renewcommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
-\renewcommand*@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+ \newcommand@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+ \newcommand*@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\renewcommand@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\renewcommand*@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
@end example
-The @code{*}-form of these two commands requires that the arguments
-not contain multiple paragraphs of text (not @code{\long}, in plain
- at TeX{} terms).
+ at cindex starred form, defining new commands
+ at cindex *-form, defining new commands
+The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text (not @code{\long}, in plain @TeX{}
+terms).
@table @var
@item cmd
-Required; the command name. It must begin with @code{\}. For
- at code{\newcommand}, it must not be already defined and must not begin
-with @code{\end}. For @code{\renewcommand}, it must already be
-defined.
+Required; @code{\@var{cmd}} is the command name. For @code{\newcommand}, it
+must not be already defined and must not begin with @code{\end}. For
+ at code{\renewcommand}, it must already be defined.
@item nargs
Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
-that the command will take. If this argument is not present, the
-default is for the command to have no arguments. When redefining a
-command, the new version can have a different number of arguments than
-the old version.
+that the command can take, including any optional argument. If this
+argument is not present, the default is for the command to have no
+arguments. When redefining a command, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
@item optargdefault
Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of defined
-command @var{\cmd} is optional, with default value @var{optargdefault}
+command @code{\@var{cmd}} is optional, with default value @var{optargdefault}
(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
- at var{\cmd} does not take an optional argument.
+ at code{\@var{cmd}} does not take an optional argument.
-That is, if @var{\cmd} is used with square brackets following, as in
- at code{\@var{cmd}[@var{myval}]}, then within @var{defn} @code{#1} expands
- at var{myval}. While if @var{\cmd} is called without square brackets
-following, then within @var{defn} the @code{#1} expands to the default
- at var{optargdefault}. In either case, any required arguments will be
-referred to starting with @code{#2}.
+ at cindex positional parameter
+That is, if @code{\@var{cmd}} is used with square brackets following,
+as in @code{\@var{cmd}[@var{myval}]}, then within @var{defn} the first
+ at dfn{positional parameter} @code{#1} expands @var{myval}. On the
+other hand, if @code{\@var{cmd}} is called without square brackets
+following, then within @var{defn} the positional parameter @code{#1}
+expands to the default @var{optargdefault}. In either case, any
+required arguments will be referred to starting with @code{#2}.
-Omitting @code{[@var{myval}]} in the call is different from having the
+Omitting @code{[@var{myval}]} in a call is different from having the
square brackets with no contents, as in @code{[]}. The former results
in @code{#1} expanding to @var{optargdefault}; the latter results in
@code{#1} expanding to the empty string.
@item defn
-The text to be substituted for every occurrence of @code{cmd}; a
-construct of the form @code{#@var{n}} in @var{defn} is replaced by the
-text of the @var{n}th argument.
+The text to be substituted for every occurrence of @code{\@var{cmd}}; the
+positional parameter @code{#@var{n}} in @var{defn} is replaced by
+the text of the @var{n}th argument.
@end table
-A command with no arguments that is followed in the source by a space
-will swallow that space. The solution is to type @code{@{@}} after the
-command and before the space.
+ at TeX{} ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in @samp{\cmd }. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type @code{@{@}} after the command (@samp{\cmd@{@} };
+another solution is to use an explicit control space (@samp{\cmd\ }).
A simple example of defining a new command:
- at code{\newcommand@{\JH@}@{Jim Hef@{@}feron@}} causes the abbreviation
- at code{\JH} to be replaced by the longer text.
+ at code{\newcommand@{\RS@}@{Robin Smith@}} results in
+ at code{\RS} being replaced by the longer text.
-Redefining a command is basically the same:
+Redefining an existing command is similar:
@code{\renewcommand@{\qedsymbol@}@{@{\small QED@}@}}.
-Here's a command definition that uses arguments:
+Here's a command definition with one required argument:
@example
-\newcommand@{\defreference@}[1]@{Definition~\ref@{#1@}@}
+\newcommand@{\defref@}[1]@{Definition~\ref@{#1@}@}
@end example
- at noindent Then, @code{\defreference@{def:basis@}} will expand to
+ at noindent Then, @code{\defref@{def:basis@}} expands to
+ at code{Definition~\ref@{def:basis@}}, which will ultimately expand to
something like @samp{Definition~3.14}.
-An example with two arguments:
- at code{\newcommand@{\nbym@}[2]@{#1\!\times\!#2@}} is invoked as
+An example with two required arguments:
+ at code{\newcommand@{\nbym@}[2]@{$#1 \times #2$@}} is invoked as
@code{\nbym@{2@}@{k@}}.
-An example with optional arguments:
+An example with an optional argument:
@example
\newcommand@{\salutation@}[1][Sir or Madam]@{Dear #1:@}
@@ -4993,17 +6077,19 @@
@code{\salutation[John]} gives @samp{Dear John:}. And
@code{\salutation[]} gives @samp{Dear :}.
-The braces around @var{defn} do not delimit the scope of the result of
-expanding @var{defn}. So @code{\newcommand@{\shipname@}[1]@{\it #1@}}
-is wrong since in the sentence
+The braces around @var{defn} do not define a group, that is, they do
+not delimit the scope of the result of expanding @var{defn}. So
+ at code{\newcommand@{\shipname@}[1]@{\it #1@}} is problematic; in this
+sentence,
@example
-The \shipname@{Monitor@} met the \shipname@{Virginia@}.
+The \shipname@{Monitor@} met the \shipname@{Merrimac@}.
@end example
- at noindent the words @samp{met the} will incorrectly be in italics. An
-extra pair of braces @code{\newcommand@{\shipname@}[1]@{@{\it #1@}@}}
-fixes it.
+ at noindent the words @samp{met the} would incorrectly be in italics. Another
+pair of braces in the definition is needed, like this:
+ at code{\newcommand@{\shipname@}[1]@{@{\it #1@}@}}. Those braces are
+part of the definition and thus do define a group.
@node \providecommand
@@ -5035,21 +6121,24 @@
@findex \newcounter
@cindex counters, defining new
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
@example
+\newcounter@{@var{countername}@}
\newcounter@{@var{countername}@}[@var{supercounter}]
@end example
-The @code{\newcounter} command globally defines a new counter named
- at var{countername}. The name consists of letters only and does not begin
-with a backslash (@samp{\}). The name must not already be used by
-another counter. The new counter is initialized to zero.
+Globally defines a new counter named @var{countername} and initialize
+the new counter to zero.
-If the optional argument @code{[@var{supercounter}]} appears, then
+The name @var{countername} must consists of letters only, and does not
+begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+
+When you use the optional argument @code{[@var{supercounter}]} then
@var{countername} will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the
existing counter @var{supercounter}. For example, ordinarily
- at code{subsection} is numbered within @code{section}. Any time
+ at code{subsection} is numbered within @code{section} so that any time
@var{supercounter} is incremented with @code{\stepcounter}
(@pxref{\stepcounter}) or @code{\refstepcounter}
(@pxref{\refstepcounter}) then @var{countername} is reset to zero.
@@ -5114,22 +6203,24 @@
@cindex redefining environments
These commands define or redefine an environment @var{env}, that is,
- at code{\begin@{@var{env}@} @dots{} \end@{@var{env}@}}. Synopses:
+ at code{\begin@{@var{env}@} @var{body} \end@{@var{env}@}}. Synopses:
@example
- \newenvironment@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdefn}@}@{@var{enddefn}@}
+ \newenvironment@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdefn}@}@{@var{enddefn}@}
\newenvironment*@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdefn}@}@{@var{enddefn}@}
-\renewenvironment@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdefn}@}@{@var{enddefn}@}
+ \renewenvironment@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdefn}@}@{@var{enddefn}@}
\renewenvironment*@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdefn}@}@{@var{enddefn}@}
@end example
-Unlike @code{\newcommand} and @code{\renewcommand}, the @code{*}-forms
- at code{\newenvironment*} and @code{\renewcommand*} have the same effect
-as the forms with no @code{*}.
+ at cindex @code{*}-form of environment commands
+The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. The body of these environments can
+still contain multiple paragraphs.
@table @var
@item env
-Required; the environment name. It does not begin with backslash
+Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+ at code{*} character, and thus does not begin with backslash
(@code{\}). It must not begin with the string @code{end}. For
@code{\newenvironment}, the name @var{env} must not be the name of an
already existing environment, and also the command @code{\@var{env}}
@@ -5138,8 +6229,8 @@
@item nargs
Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
-that the environment will take. These arguments appear after the
- at code{\begin}, as in
+that the environment will take. When the environment is used these
+arguments appear after the @code{\begin}, as in
@code{\begin@{@var{env}@}@{@var{arg1}@}@dots{}@{@var{argn}@}}. If this
argument is not present then the default is for the environment to have
no arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have
@@ -5151,16 +6242,16 @@
(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
the environment does not take an optional argument.
-That is, when @code{[@var{optargdefault}]} is present in the environment
-definition, if @code{\begin@{@var{env}@}} is used with square brackets
-following, as in @code{\begin@{@var{env}@}[@var{myval}]}, then within
-the environment @code{#1} expands @var{myval}. If
- at code{\begin@{@var{env}@}} is called without square brackets following,
-then within the environment the @code{#1} expands to the default
- at var{optargdefault}. In either case, any required arguments will be
-referred to starting with @code{#2}.
+That is, when @code{[@var{optargdefault}]} is present in the
+environment definition, if @code{\begin@{@var{env}@}} is used with
+square brackets following, as in
+ at code{\begin@{@var{env}@}[@var{myval}]}, then, within @var{begdefn},
+the positional parameter @code{#1} expands to @var{myval}. If
+ at code{\begin@{@var{env}@}} is called without square brackets
+following, then, within within @var{begdefn}, the positional parameter
+ at code{#1} expands to the default @var{optargdefault}. In either case,
+any required arguments will be referred to starting with @code{#2}.
-
Omitting @code{[@var{myval}]} in the call is different from having the
square brackets with no contents, as in @code{[]}. The former results
in @code{#1} expanding to @var{optargdefault}; the latter results in
@@ -5168,23 +6259,25 @@
@item begdefn
Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
- at code{\begin@{@var{env}@}}; a construct of the form @code{#@var{n}} in
- at var{begdef} is replaced by the text of the @var{n}th argument.
+ at code{\begin@{@var{env}@}}. Within @var{begdef}, the @var{n}th
+positional parameter (i.e., @code{#@var{n}}) is replaced by the text
+of the @var{n}th argument.
@item enddefn
Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
- at code{\end@{@var{env}@}}. Note that it may not contain any argument
-parameters, so @code{#@var{n}} cannot be used here.
+ at code{\end@{@var{env}@}}. This may not contain any positional
+parameters, so @code{#@var{n}} cannot be used here (but see the final
+example below).
@end table
-The environment @var{env} delimits the scope of the result of expanding
- at var{begdefn} and @var{enddefn}. Thus, in the first example below, the
-effect of the @code{\small} is limited to the quote and does not extend
-to material following the environment.
+All environments, that is to say the @var{begdefn} code, the environment
+body and the @var{enddefn} code, are processed within a group. Thus, in
+the first example below, the effect of the @code{\small} is limited to
+the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
-This example gives an environment like @LaTeX{}'s @code{quotation} except that
-it will be set in smaller type.
+This example gives an environment like @LaTeX{}'s @code{quotation}
+except that it will be set in smaller type:
@example
\newenvironment@{smallquote@}@{%
@@ -5194,8 +6287,8 @@
@}
@end example
-This shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment that
-cites the author.
+This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
+that cites the author:
@example
\newenvironment@{citequote@}[1][Shakespeare]@{%
@@ -5206,17 +6299,17 @@
@}
@end example
- at noindent The author's name is optional, and defaults to Shakespeare.
-In the document, use the environment as here:
+ at noindent The author's name is optional, and defaults to @samp{Shakespeare}.
+In the document, use the environment like this:
@example
\begin@{citequote@}[Lincoln]
- ..
+ ...
\end@{citequote@}
@end example
The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in
- at var{enddefn}.
+ at var{enddefn}, in this case in a box (@pxref{\sbox}):
@example
\newsavebox@{\quoteauthor@}
@@ -5239,42 +6332,38 @@
@cindex theorem-like environment
@cindex environment, theorem-like
-Define a new @dfn{theorem-like environment}. Synopses:
+Define a new theorem-like environment. Synopses:
@example
+\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}
\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}[@var{numbered_within}]
\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}[@var{numbered_like}]@{@var{title}@}
@end example
-Both create a theorem-like environment @var{name}. Using the first
-form,
+Using the first form, @code{\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}}
+creates an environment that will be labelled with @var{title}. See the
+first example below.
- at example
-\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}[@var{numbered_within}]
- at end example
-
- at noindent with the optional argument after the second required argument,
+The second form
+ at code{\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}[@var{numbered_within}]}
creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
-counter @var{numbered_within}: it will be reset when
+counter @var{numbered_within} (its counter will be reset when
@var{numbered_within} is reset).
-Using the second form,
- at example
-\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}[@var{numbered_like}]@{@var{title}@}
- at end example
+The third form
+ at code{\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}[@var{numbered_like}]@{@var{title}@}},
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, will create
+an environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+ at var{numbered_like}.
- at noindent with the optional argument between the two required
-arguments, will create an environment whose counter will share the
-previously defined counter @var{numbered_like}.
-
You can specify one of @var{numbered_within} and @var{numbered_like},
or neither, but not both.
This command creates a counter named @var{name}. In addition, unless
-the optional argument @var{numbered_like} is used, the current
- at code{\ref} value will be that of @code{\the at var{numbered_within}}
-(@pxref{\ref}).
+the optional argument @var{numbered_like} is used, inside of the
+theorem-like environment the current @code{\ref} value will be that of
+ at code{\the at var{numbered_within}} (@pxref{\ref}).
This declaration is global. It is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
@@ -5306,8 +6395,9 @@
@end table
Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
-sequentially. This example has a declaration in the preamble that
-results in @samp{Definition at tie{}1} and @samp{Definition at tie{}2} in the output.
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in @samp{Definition at tie{}1} and @samp{Definition at tie{}2} in the
+output.
@example
\newtheorem@{defn@}@{Definition@}
@@ -5323,7 +6413,7 @@
\end@{defn@}
@end example
-Because this example specifies the optional argument
+Because the next example specifies the optional argument
@var{numbered_within} to @code{\newtheorem} as @code{section}, the
example, with the same document body, gives @samp{Definition at tie{}1.1}
and @samp{Definition at tie{}2.1}.
@@ -5342,8 +6432,8 @@
\end@{defn@}
@end example
-In this example there are two declarations in the preamble, the second
-of which calls for the new @code{thm} environment to use the same
+In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new @code{thm} environment to use the same
counter as @code{defn}. It gives @samp{Definition at tie{}1.1}, followed
by @samp{Theorem at tie{}2.1} and @samp{Definition at tie{}2.2}.
@@ -5410,7 +6500,7 @@
@example
\newfont@{\testfontat@}@{cmb10 at 11pt@}
-\newfont@{\testfontscaled@}@{cmb10 scaled 11pt@}
+\newfont@{\testfontscaled@}@{cmb10 scaled 1100@}
\testfontat abc
\testfontscaled abc
@end example
@@ -5422,13 +6512,16 @@
@findex \protect
@cindex fragile commands
@cindex robust commands
- at cindex moving arguments
-All @LaTeX{} commands are either @dfn{fragile} or @dfn{robust}.
-Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
-many more, are fragile. A fragile command can break when it is used in
-the argument to certain commands. To prevent such commands from
-breaking they must be preceded by the command @code{\protect}.
+All @LaTeX{} commands are either @dfn{fragile} or @dfn{robust}. A
+fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain
+other commands. Commands that contain data that @LaTeX{} writes to an
+auxiliary file and re-reads later are fragile. This includes material
+that goes into a table of contents, list of figures, list of tables,
+etc. Fragile commands also include line breaks, any command that has an
+optional argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from
+breaking, one solution is to preceded them with the command
+ at code{\protect}.
For example, when @LaTeX{} runs the @code{\section@{@var{section
name}@}} command it writes the @var{section name} text to the
@@ -5435,10 +6528,12 @@
@file{.aux} auxiliary file, moving it there for use elsewhere in the
document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is
internally expanded by @LaTeX{} without typesetting it directly is
-referred to as a @dfn{moving argument}. A command is fragile if it can
+referred to as a
+ at cindex moving arguments
+ at dfn{moving argument}. A command is fragile if it can
expand during this process into invalid @TeX{} code. Some examples of
-moving arguments are those that appear in the @code{\caption@{..@}}
-command (@pxref{figure}), in the @code{\thanks@{..@}} command
+moving arguments are those that appear in the @code{\caption@{...@}}
+command (@pxref{figure}), in the @code{\thanks@{...@}} command
(@pxref{\maketitle}), and in @@-expressions in the @code{tabular} and
@code{array} environments (@pxref{tabular}).
@@ -5451,13 +6546,13 @@
command. Nor can a @code{\protect} command be used in the argument to
@code{\addtocounter} or @code{\setcounter} command.
-In this example the @code{caption} command gives a mysterious error
+In this example the @code{\caption} command gives a mysterious error
about an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each
@code{\raisebox} command with @code{\protect}.
@example
\begin@{figure@}
- ..
+ ...
\caption@{Company headquarters of A\raisebox@{1pt@}@{B@}\raisebox@{-1pt@}@{C@}@}
\end@{figure@}
@end example
@@ -5470,9 +6565,9 @@
@example
\begin@{document@}
\tableofcontents
- ..
+...
\section@{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)@}
- ..
+...
@end example
@@ -5484,12 +6579,14 @@
Everything @LaTeX{} numbers for you has a counter associated with
it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the
-environment or command associated with the number, except with no
-backslash (@code{\}). Thus the @code{\chapter} command starts a
-chapter and the @code{chapter} counter keeps track of the chapter
-number. Below is a list of the counters used in @LaTeX{}'s standard
-document classes to control numbering.
+environment or command associated with the number, except that the
+counter's name has no backslash at tie{}@code{\}. Thus, associated with
+the @code{\chapter} command is the @code{chapter} counter that keeps
+track of the chapter number.
+Below is a list of the counters used in @LaTeX{}'s standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+
@example
part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
@@ -5499,24 +6596,22 @@
@end example
The @code{mpfootnote} counter is used by the @code{\footnote} command
-inside of a minipage (@pxref{minipage}).
+inside of a minipage (@pxref{minipage}). The counters @code{enumi}
+through @code{enumiv} are used in the @code{enumerate} environment, for
+up to four levels of nesting (@pxref{enumerate}).
-The @code{enumi} through @code{enumiv} counters are used in the
- at code{enumerate} environment, for up to four nested levels
-(@pxref{enumerate}).
-
New counters are created with @code{\newcounter}. @xref{\newcounter}.
@menu
-* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter.
-* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
-* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
-* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter.
-* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter.
-* \refstepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-* \stepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-* \day \month \year:: Numeric date values.
+* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter.
+* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter.
+* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter.
+* \refstepcounter:: Add to a counter.
+* \stepcounter:: Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+* \day \month \year:: Numeric date values.
@end menu
@@ -5525,38 +6620,59 @@
@cindex counters, printing
+Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter @var{counter} has the value 1 then a
+ at code{\alph@{@var{counter}@}} in your source will result in a lower case
+letter at tie{}a appearing in the output.
+
All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
instance, @code{\alph@{enumi@}}. Note that the counter name does not
start with a backslash.
@ftable @code
- at item \alph
-prints @var{counter} using lowercase letters: `a', `b', @enddots{}
+ at item \alph@{@var{counter}@}
+Print the value of @var{counter} in lowercase letters: `a', `b', @enddots{}
- at item \Alph
-uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', @enddots{}
+ at item \Alph@{@var{counter}@}
+Print in uppercase letters: `A', `B', @enddots{}
- at item \arabic
-uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', @enddots{}
+ at item \arabic@{@var{counter}@}
+Print in Arabic numbers: `1', `2', @enddots{}
- at item \roman
-uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', @enddots{}
+ at item \roman@{@var{counter}@}
+Print in lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', @enddots{}
- at item \Roman
-uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', @enddots{}
+ at item \Roman@{@var{counter}@}
+Print in uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', @enddots{}
- at item \fnsymbol
-prints the value of @var{counter} in a specific sequence of nine
+ at item \fnsymbol@{@var{counter}@}
+Prints the value of @var{counter} in a specific sequence of nine
symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of
@var{counter} must be between at tie{}1 and at tie{}9, inclusive.
-Here are the symbols (as Unicode code points in ASCII output):
+Here are the symbols:
- at display
-asterisk(*) dagger(@U{2021}) ddagger(@U{2021})
-section-sign(@U{00A7}) paragraph-sign(@U{00B6}) parallel(@U{2225})
-double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(@U{2020}@U{2020}) double-ddagger(@U{2021}@U{2021})
- at end display
+ at multitable @columnfractions .33 .33 .33
+ at headitem Name at tab Command at tab@iftexthenelse{Symbol,Equivalent Unicode symbol and/or numeric code point}
+ at item
+asterisk at tab@code{\ast}@tab at iftexthenelse{@math{@ast},*}
+ at item
+dagger at tab@code{\dagger}@tab at BES{2020,\dagger}
+ at item
+ddagger at tab@code{\ddagger}@tab at BES{2021,\ddagger}
+ at item
+section-sign at tab@code{\S}@tab at BES{00A7,\S}
+ at item
+paragraph-sign at tab@code{\P}@tab at BES{00B6,\P}
+ at item
+double-vert at tab@code{\parallel}@tab at BES{2016,\parallel}
+ at item
+double-asterisk at tab@code{\ast\ast}@tab at iftexthenelse{@math{@ast at ast},**}
+ at item
+double-dagger at tab@code{\dagger\dagger}@tab at BES{2020,\dagger}@BES{2020,\dagger}
+ at item
+double-ddagger at tab@code{\ddagger\ddagger}@tab at BES{2021,\ddagger}@BES{2021,\ddagger}
+ at end multitable
@end ftable
@@ -5653,7 +6769,14 @@
to the @var{value} argument. Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.
+In this example the section value appears as @samp{V}.
+ at example
+\setcounter@{section@}@{5@}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman@{section@}.
+ at end example
+
+
@node \addtocounter
@section @code{\addtocounter@{@var{counter}@}@{@var{value}@}}
@@ -5662,7 +6785,15 @@
The @code{\addtocounter} command globally increments @var{counter} by
the amount specified by the @var{value} argument, which may be negative.
+In this example the section value appears as @samp{VII}.
+ at example
+\setcounter@{section@}@{5@}
+\addtocounter@{section@}@{2@}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman@{section@}.
+ at end example
+
+
@node \refstepcounter
@section @code{\refstepcounter@{@var{counter}@}}
@@ -5835,47 +6966,69 @@
@node \setlength
- at section @code{\setlength@{\@var{len}@}@{@var{value}@}}
+ at section @code{\setlength}
@findex \setlength
@cindex lengths, setting
-The @code{\setlength} sets the value of @var{\len} to the @var{value}
-argument, which can be expressed in any units that @LaTeX{}
-understands, i.e., inches (@code{in}), millimeters (@code{mm}), points
-(@code{pt}), big points (@code{bp}, etc.
+Synopsis:
+ at example
+\setlength@{@var{\len}@}@{@var{amount}@}
+ at end example
+The @code{\setlength} sets the value of @dfn{length command}
+ at cindex length command
+ at code{\@var{len}} to the @var{value} argument which can be expressed in any
+units that @LaTeX{} understands, i.e., inches (@code{in}), millimeters
+(@code{mm}), points (@code{pt}), big points (@code{bp}), etc.
+
+
@node \addtolength
- at section @code{\addtolength@{@var{\len}@}@{@var{amount}@}}
+ at section @code{\addtolength}
@findex \addtolength
@cindex lengths, adding to
-The @code{\addtolength} command increments a ``length command''
- at var{\len} by the amount specified in the @var{amount} argument, which
-may be negative.
+Synopsis:
+ at example
+\addtolength@{@var{\len}@}@{@var{amount}@}
+ at end example
+
+The @code{\addtolength} command increments a length command @code{\@var{len}}
+by the amount specified in the @var{amount} argument, which may be
+negative.
+
+
@node \settodepth
@section @code{\settodepth}
@findex \settodepth
- at code{\settodepth@{\gnat@}@{text@}}
+Synopsis:
-The @code{\settodepth} command sets the value of a @code{length} command
-equal to the depth of the @code{text} argument.
+ at example
+\settodepth@{\@var{len}@}@{@var{text}@}
+ at end example
+The @code{\settodepth} command sets the value of a length command
+ at code{\@var{len}} equal to the depth of the @var{text} argument.
+
@node \settoheight
@section @code{\settoheight}
@findex \settoheight
- at code{\settoheight@{\gnat@}@{text@}}
+Synopsis:
-The @code{\settoheight} command sets the value of a @code{length} command
+ at example
+\settoheight@{\@var{len}@}@{text@}
+ at end example
+
+The @code{\settoheight} command sets the value of a length command @code{\@var{len}}
equal to the height of the @code{text} argument.
@@ -5885,6 +7038,12 @@
@findex \settowidth
+Synopsis:
+
+ at example
+\settowidth@{\@var{len}@}@{@var{text}@}
+ at end example
+
The @code{\settowidth} command sets the value of the command @var{\len}
to the width of the @var{text} argument.
@@ -5909,11 +7068,13 @@
These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
commands (@pxref{Boxes}). They specify the natural width, etc., of
-the text in the box. @code{\totalheight} equals @code{\height} +
- at code{\depth}. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
+the text in the box. @code{\totalheight} equals @math{@code{@backslashchar{}height} +
+ at code{@backslashchar{}depth}}. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
natural size, e.g., say
- at code{\makebox[2\width]@{Get a stretcher@}}
+ at example
+\makebox[2\width]@{Get a stretcher@}
+ at end example
@node Making paragraphs
@@ -5961,7 +7122,7 @@
paragraph indentation, as in this example.
@example
-.. end of the prior paragraph.
+... end of the prior paragraph.
\noindent This paragraph is not indented.
@end example
@@ -6056,9 +7217,9 @@
@cindex math formulas
@cindex formulas, math
@cindex math mode, entering
- at findex math @r{environment}
- at findex displaymath @r{environment}
- at findex equation @r{environment}
+ at EnvIndex{math}
+ at EnvIndex{displaymath}
+ at EnvIndex{equation}
There are three environments that put @LaTeX{} in math mode:
@@ -6133,7 +7294,7 @@
@findex ^
In math mode, use the caret character at tie{}@code{^} to make the
- at var{exp} appear as a superscript, ie.@: type @code{^@{@var{exp}@}}.
+ at var{exp} appear as a superscript: @code{^@{@var{exp}@}}.
Similarly, in math mode, underscore at tie{}@code{_@{@var{exp}@}} makes a
subscript out of @var{exp}.
@@ -6184,9 +7345,13 @@
Below is a list of commonly-available symbols. It is by no means an
exhaustive list. Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
-parenthesis. The commands for these symbols can be used only in math
-mode.
+parenthesis. Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
+be used only in math mode.
+To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current mode,
+see @ref{\ensuremath}.
+
+
@c xx Add Negation: @code{} for negations of relevant symbols
@c Useful: http://www.w3.org/TR/WD-math-970515/section6.html
@@ -6218,7 +7383,7 @@
sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.
@item \asymp
- at BES{224D,\asymp} Asymptomatically equivalent (relation).
+ at BES{224D,\asymp} Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
@item \backslash
\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus at tie{}@code{\setminus}, and
@@ -6270,16 +7435,15 @@
@BES{22C0,\bigwedge} Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
@item \bot
- at BESU{22A5,bot} Up tack, bottom, least element of a poset, or a contradiction
-(ordinary). See also at tie{}@code{\top}.
+ at BESU{22A5,bot} Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered
+set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also at tie{}@code{\top}.
@item \bowtie
@BES{22C8,\bowtie} Natural join of two relations (relation).
@item \Box
- at BESU{25A1,Box} Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary). This
-is not available in Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you need to load the
- at file{amssymb} package.
+ at BESU{25A1,Box} Modal operator for necessity; square open box
+(ordinary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
@c bb Best Unicode equivalent?
@item \bullet
@@ -6307,8 +7471,7 @@
@item \complement
@BESU{2201,complement} Set complement, used as a superscript as in
- at code{$S^\complement$} (ordinary). This is not available in Plain
- at TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you should load the @file{amssymb} package. Also
+ at code{$S^\complement$} (ordinary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb} Also
used: @code{$S^@{\mathsf@{c@}@}$} or at tie{}@code{$\bar@{S@}$}.
@item \cong
@@ -6338,8 +7501,7 @@
@BES{03B4,\delta} Greek lower case delta (ordinary).
@item \Diamond
- at BESU{25C7,Diamond} Large diamond operator (ordinary). This is not available in
-Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you must load the @file{amssymb} package.
+ at BESU{25C7,Diamond} Large diamond operator (ordinary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
@c bb Best Unicode equivalent?
@item \diamond
@@ -6368,15 +7530,15 @@
@BES{2113,\ell} Lower-case cursive letter l (ordinary).
@item \emptyset
- at BES{2205,\emptyset} Empty set symbol (ordinary). Similar: reversed empty
-set at tie{}@code{\varnothing}.
+ at BES{2205,\emptyset} Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+ at code{\varnothing}.
@c bb Why Unicode has \revemptyset but no \emptyset?
-
+
@item \epsilon
- at BES{03F5,\epsilon} Lower case Greek-text letter (ordinary). More widely used in
-mathematics is the curly epsilon
- at code{\varepsilon}@tie{}@BES{03B5,\varepsilon}. Related: the set membership relation
- at code{\in}@tie{}@BES{2208,\in}.
+ at BES{03F5,\epsilon} Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
+letter epsilon @code{\varepsilon}@tie{}@BES{03B5,\varepsilon}. Related:
+the set membership relation @code{\in}@tie{}@BES{2208,\in}.
@c src: David Carlisle http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/98018/339 and
@c Unicode referenced there asserts varepsilon is much more widely used.
@@ -6440,8 +7602,8 @@
@BES{2111,\Im} Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part at tie{}@code{\Re}.
@item \in
- at BES{2208,\in} Set element (relation). See also: lower case Greek letter
-epsilon at tie{}@code{\epsilon}@BES{03F5,\epsilon} and rounded small
+ at BES{2208,\in} Set element (relation). See also: lower case lunate
+epsilon at tie{}@code{\epsilon}@BES{03F5,\epsilon} and small letter script
epsilon at tie{}@code{\varepsilon}.
@item \infty
@@ -6491,8 +7653,7 @@
for at tie{}@code{\leq}.
@item \leadsto
- at BESU{21DD,leadsto} Squiggly right arrow (relation). This is not available in
-Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you should load the @file{amssymb} package.
+ at BESU{21DD,leadsto} Squiggly right arrow (relation). @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put
@code{\newcommand*@{\Leadsto@}@{\ensuremath@{\leadsto@}@}} in the
preamble and then use @code{\Leadsto} instead.
@@ -6526,12 +7687,11 @@
for at tie{}@code{\le}.
@item \lfloor
- at BES{230A,\lfloor} Left floor bracket (opening).
+ at BES{230A,\lfloor} Left floor bracket (opening). Matches:@tie{}@code{\floor}.
@item \lhd
- at BESU{25C1,lhd} Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). This is
-not available in Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you should load the
- at file{amssymb} package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+ at BESU{25C1,lhd} Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
+ at value{NeedsAMSSymb} For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
@file{amssymb} and use at tie{}@code{\vartriangleleft} (which is a relation
and so gives better spacing).
@@ -6567,8 +7727,7 @@
@item \mho
@BESU{2127,mho} Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
-This is not available in Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you should load the
- at file{amssymb} package.
+ at value{NeedsAMSSymb}
@item \mid
@BES{2223,\mid} Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
@@ -6692,21 +7851,21 @@
@BES{00B1,\pm} Plus or minus (binary).
@item \prec
- at BES{227A,\prec} Preceeds (relation). Similar: less than at tie{}@code{<}.
+ at BES{227A,\prec} Precedes (relation). Similar: less than at tie{}@code{<}.
@item \preceq
- at BES{2AAF,\preceq} Preceeds or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+ at BES{2AAF,\preceq} Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
equals at tie{}@code{\leq}.
@item \prime
- at BES{2032,\prime} Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
-used as a superscript @code{$A^\prime$}. Note that @code{$f^\prime$}
-and @code{$f'$} produce the same result. An advantage of the second is
-that @code{$f'''$} produces the the desired symbol, that is, the same
-result as @code{$f^@{\prime\prime\prime@}$}, but uses somewhat less
-typing. Note that you can only use @code{\prime} in math mode but you
-can type right single quote at tie{}@code{'} in text mode also, although it
-resuts in a different look than in math mode.
+ at BES{2032,\prime} Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).
+Typically used as a superscript: @code{$f^\prime$}; @code{$f^\prime$}
+and @code{$f'$} produce the same result. An advantage of the second
+is that @code{$f'''$} produces the desired symbol, that is, the same
+result as @code{$f^@{\prime\prime\prime@}$}, but uses rather less
+typing. You can only use @code{\prime} in math mode. Using the right
+single quote at tie{}@code{'} in text mode produces a different character
+(apostrophe).
@item \prod
@BES{220F,\prod} Product (operator).
@@ -6721,7 +7880,7 @@
@BES{03C8,\psi} Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
@item \rangle
- at BES{27B9,\rangle} Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
+ at BES{27E9,\rangle} Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
than at tie{}@code{>}. Matches:@code{\langle}.
@item \rbrace
@@ -6742,18 +7901,20 @@
@item \restriction
@BESU{21BE,restriction} Restriction of a function
-(relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\upharpoonright}. Not available in
-Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you should load the @file{amssymb} package.
+(relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\upharpoonright}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+ at item \revemptyset
+ at BESU{29B0,revemptyset} Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+ at code{\varnothing}. @value{NeedsSTIX}
+
@item \rfloor
@BES{230B,\rfloor} Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
off (closing). Matches at tie{}@code{\lfloor}.
@item \rhd
- at BESU{25C1,rhd} Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). This is
-not available in Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you should load the
- at file{amssymb} package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should
-instead load @file{amssymb} and use at tie{}@code{\vartriangleright} (which
+ at BESU{25C1,rhd} Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
+ at value{NeedsAMSSymb} For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
+load @file{amssymb} and use at tie{}@code{\vartriangleright} (which
is a relation and so gives better spacing).
@item \rho
@@ -6805,7 +7966,7 @@
display (operator).
@item \smile
- at BES{2323,\smile} Upward curving arc (ordinary).
+ at BES{2323,\smile} Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
@item \spadesuit
@BES{2660,\spadesuit} Spade card suit (ordinary).
@@ -6821,8 +7982,7 @@
@item \sqsubset
@BESU{228F,sqsubset} Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
-subset at tie{}@code{\subset}. This is not available in Plain @TeX{}. In
- at LaTeX{} you should load the @file{amssymb} package.
+subset at tie{}@code{\subset}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
@item \sqsubseteq
@BES{2291,\sqsubseteq} Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
@@ -6830,8 +7990,7 @@
@item \sqsupset
@BESU{2290,sqsupset} Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
-superset at tie{}@code{\supset}. This is not available in Plain @TeX{}. In
- at LaTeX{} you should load the @file{amssymb} package.
+superset at tie{}@code{\supset}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
@item \sqsupseteq
@BES{2292,\sqsupseteq} Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or
@@ -6870,7 +8029,7 @@
@item \surd
@BES{221A,\surd} Radical symbol (ordinary). The @LaTeX{} command
- at code{\sqrt@{..@}} typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
+ at code{\sqrt@{...@}} typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
that extends to cover the argument.
@item \swarrow
@@ -6892,8 +8051,8 @@
Synonym:@tie{}@code{\rightarrow}.
@item \top
- at BESU{22A4,top} Top, greatest element of a poset (ordinary). See
-also at tie{}@code{\bot}.
+ at BESU{22A4,top} Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set
+(ordinary). See also at tie{}@code{\bot}.
@item \triangle
@BES{25B3,\triangle} Triangle (ordinary).
@@ -6905,36 +8064,39 @@
is a relation and so gives better spacing).
@item \triangleright
- at BES{25B7,\triangleright} Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
-subgroup symbol you should instead load @file{amssymb} and
-use at tie{}@code{\vartriangleright} (which is a relation and so gives
-better spacing).
+ at BES{25B7,\triangleright} Not-filled triangle pointing right
+(binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+ at file{amssymb} and use at tie{}@code{\vartriangleright} (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
@item \unlhd
- at BESU{22B4,unlhd} Left-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with a
-line under (binary). This is not available in Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{}
-you should load the @file{amssymb} package. For the normal subgroup
-symbol load @file{amssymb} and use at tie{}@code{\vartrianglelefteq} (which
-is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+ at BESU{22B4,unlhd} Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
+is, triangle, with a line under (binary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb} For
+the normal subgroup symbol load @file{amssymb} and
+use at tie{}@code{\vartrianglelefteq} (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
@item \unrhd
- at BESU{22B5,unrhd} Right-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with a
-line under (binary). This is not available in Plain @TeX{}. In @LaTeX{}
-you should load the @file{amssymb} package. For the normal subgroup
-symbol load @file{amssymb} and use at tie{}@code{\vartrianglerighteq}
-(which is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+ at BESU{22B5,unrhd} Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that
+is, triangle, with a line under (binary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb} For
+the normal subgroup symbol load @file{amssymb} and
+use at tie{}@code{\vartrianglerighteq} (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
@item \Uparrow
- at BES{21D1,\Uparrow} Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
-single-line up-pointing arrow at tie{}@code{\uparrow}.
+ at BES{21D1,\Uparrow} Double-line upward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing
+arrow at tie{}@code{\uparrow}.
@item \uparrow
- at BES{2191,\uparrow} Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation). Similar:
-double-line up-pointing arrow at tie{}@code{\Uparrow}.
+ at BES{2191,\uparrow} Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges
+(relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing
+arrow at tie{}@code{\Uparrow}.
@item \Updownarrow
- at BES{21D5,\Updownarrow} Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
-single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow at tie{}@code{\updownarrow}.
+ at BES{21D5,\Updownarrow} Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow at tie{}@code{\updownarrow}.
@item \updownarrow
@BES{2195,\updownarrow} Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
@@ -6942,13 +8104,12 @@
@item \upharpoonright
@BESU{21BE,upharpoonright} Up harpoon, with barb on right side
-(relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{@backslashchar{}restriction}. Not available in Plain
- at TeX{}. In @LaTeX{} you should load the @file{amssymb} package.
+(relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{@backslashchar{}restriction}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
@item \uplus
- at BES{228E,\uplus} Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the middle
-(binary). Similar: union at tie{}@code{\cup}. Related: variable-sized
-operator at tie{}@code{\biguplus}.
+ at BES{228E,\uplus} Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
+the middle (binary). Similar: union at tie{}@code{\cup}. Related:
+variable-sized operator at tie{}@code{\biguplus}.
@item \Upsilon
@BES{03A5,\Upsilon} Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
@@ -6957,37 +8118,45 @@
@BES{03C5,\upsilon} Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
@item \varepsilon
- at BES{03B5,\varepsilon} Rounded small epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used in
-mathematics than the non-variant lower case Greek-text letter form
- at code{\epsilon}@tie{}@BES{03F5,\epsilon}. Related: set membership at tie{}@code{\in}.
+ at BES{03B5,\varepsilon} Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is
+more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+ at code{\epsilon}@tie{}@BES{03F5,\epsilon}. Related: set
+membership at tie{}@code{\in}.
+ at item \vanothing
+ at BESU{2205,varnothing} Empty set symbol. Similar:
+ at code{\emptyset}. Related: @code{\revemptyset}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+
@item \varphi
- at BES{03C6,\varphi} Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is @code{\phi}@tie{}@BES{03D5,\phi}.
+ at BES{03C6,\varphi} Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is @code{\phi}@tie{}@BES{03D5,\phi}.
@item \varpi
- at BES{03D6,\varpi} Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is @code{\pi}@tie{}@BES{03C0,\pi}.
+ at BES{03D6,\varpi} Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is @code{\pi}@tie{}@BES{03C0,\pi}.
@item \varrho
- at BES{03F1,\varrho} Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is @code{\rho}@tie{}@BES{03C1,\rho}.
+ at BES{03F1,\varrho} Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is @code{\rho}@tie{}@BES{03C1,\rho}.
@item \varsigma
- at BES{03C2,\varsigma} Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is @code{\sigma}@tie{}@BES{03C3,\sigma}.
+ at BES{03C2,\varsigma} Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+ at code{\sigma}@tie{}@BES{03C3,\sigma}.
@item \vartheta
- at BES{03D1,\vartheta} Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
-non-variant form is @code{\theta}@tie{}@BES{03B8,\theta}.
+ at BES{03D1,\vartheta} Variant on the lower case Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+ at code{\theta}@tie{}@BES{03B8,\theta}.
@item \vdash
- at BES{22A2,\vdash} Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation). Similar:
-turnstile rotated a half-circle at tie{}@code{\dashv}.
+ at BES{22A2,\vdash} Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash
+(relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a
+half-circle at tie{}@code{\dashv}.
@item \vee
- at BES{2228,\vee} Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
-and at tie{}@code{\wedge}. Similar: variable-sized
+ at BES{2228,\vee} Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related:
+logical and at tie{}@code{\wedge}. Similar: variable-sized
operator at tie{}@code{\bigvee}.
@item \Vert
@@ -6994,16 +8163,17 @@
@BES{2016,\Vert} Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
bar at tie{}@code{\vert}.
-For a norm you can use the @file{mathtools} package and add
+For a norm symbol, you can use the @file{mathtools} package and add
@code{\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm@{\lVert@}@{\rVert@}} to your
-preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line vertical
-bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
-write the starred version @code{$\norm*@{M^\perp@}$} then the height of
-the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
- at code{\norm@{M^\perp@}} the bars do not grow with the height of the
-argument but instead are the default height, and @code{\norm[@var{size
-command}]@{M^\perp@}} also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
-the size given in the @var{size command}, e.g., @code{\Bigg}.
+preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line
+vertical bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the
+document body you write the starred version @code{$\norm*@{M^\perp@}$}
+then the height of the vertical bars will match the height of the
+argument, whereas with @code{\norm@{M^\perp@}} the bars do not grow
+with the height of the argument but instead are the default height,
+and @code{\norm[@var{size command}]@{M^\perp@}} also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the @var{size command},
+e.g., @code{\Bigg}.
@item \vert
@BES{007C,\vert} Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
@@ -7149,10 +8319,15 @@
@math{\sinh}
@item \sup
-sup
- at c don't try to use \sup since that turned into a Texinfo command
- at c and it's not worth hassling with different versions when it's
- at c just three roman letters anyway.
+ at iftex
+ at math{\mathop {\rm sup}}
+ at end iftex
+ at ifnottex
+ at math{\sup}
+ at end ifnottex
+ at c don't try to use \sup with dvi/pdf output since that turned into a
+ at c Texinfo command and it's not worth hassling with different versions
+ at c when it's just three roman letters anyway.
@item \tan
@math{\tan}
@@ -7275,7 +8450,7 @@
@findex \,
@findex \thinspace
Normally @code{3mu}. The longer name is @code{\thinspace}. This can
-be used in both math mode and text mode.
+be used in both math mode and text mode. @xref{\thinspace}.
@item \!
@findex \!
@@ -7312,9 +8487,40 @@
@item \*
@cindex discretionary multiplication
@cindex multiplication symbol, discretionary line break
-A ``discretionary'' multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
-allowed.
+A @dfn{discretionary} multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
+allowed. Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated by a
+space, while in the case of a break a @BES{00D7,\times} symbol is
+printed immediately before the break. So
+ at example
+\documentclass@{article@}
+\begin@{document@}
+Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\)
+through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is
+equal to zero.
+\end@{document@}
+ at end example
+
+will make that sort of output at c
+ at ifnottex
+ at w{ }(the ellipsis @samp{[@dots{}]} is here to show the line break at
+the same place as in a @TeX{} output)@c
+ at end ifnottex
+:
+
+ at indentedblock
+Now @math{A_3 = 0},
+ at iftex
+hence the product of all terms
+ at end iftex
+ at ifnottex
+[@dots{}]
+ at end ifnottex
+ at math{A_1}
+through @math{A_4}, that is @math{A_1 A_2 \times}@*@math{A_3 A_4}, is
+equal to zero.
+ at end indentedblock
+
@item \cdots
A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line.
@tex
@@ -7324,73 +8530,88 @@
@item \ddots
A diagonal ellipsis: @math{\ddots}.
- at item \frac@{num@}@{den@}
+ at item \frac@{@var{num}@}@{@var{den}@}
@findex \frac
-Produces the fraction @code{num} divided by @code{den}.
+Produces the fraction @var{num} divided by @var{den}.
- at iftex
-eg.
- at tex
-${1}\over{4}$
- at end tex
- at end iftex
+ at ifset HAS-MATH
+eg. @math{{1}\over{4}}
+ at end ifset
@item \left @var{delim1} ... \right @var{delim2}
@findex \right
@cindex null delimiter
-The two delimiters need not match; @samp{.} acts as a null delimiter,
+The two delimiters need not match; @samp{.} acts as a @dfn{null delimiter},
producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math
-in between. Example: @code{\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]}.
+in between. Example: @code{\left( \sum_@{i=1@}^@{10@} a_i \right]}.
- at item \overbrace@{@var{text}@}
-Generates a brace over @var{text}.
-For example, @math{\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}}.
+ at item \mathdollar
+Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+ at item \mathellipsis
+Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: @dots{}.
+
+ at item \mathparagraph
+Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: @BES{00B6,\P}.
+
+ at item \mathsection
+Section sign in math mode.
+
+ at item \mathsterling
+Sterling sign in math mode: @pounds{}.
+
+ at item \mathunderscore
+Underscore in math mode: _.
+
+ at item \overbrace@{@var{math}@}
+Generates a brace over @var{math}.
+For example, @code{\overbrace@{x+\cdots+x@}^@{k \;\textrm@{times@}@}}.
+ at ifset HAS-MATH
+The result looks like: @math{\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}}
+ at end ifset
+
@item \overline@{@var{text}@}
Generates a horizontal line over @var{tex}.
-For example, @math{\overline{x+y}}.
+For example, @code{\overline@{x+y@}}.
+ at ifset HAS-MATH
+The result looks like: @math{\overline{x+y}}.
+ at end ifset
- at item \sqrt[@var{root}]@{arg@}
+ at item \sqrt[@var{root}]@{@var{arg}@}
Produces the representation of the square root of @var{arg}. The
optional argument @var{root} determines what root to produce. For
example, the cube root of @code{x+y} would be typed as
- at code{$\sqrt[3]@{x+y@}$}.
- at tex
-In @TeX{}, the result looks like this:
-$\root 3 \of x+y$.
- at end tex
+ at code{\sqrt[3]@{x+y@}}.
+ at ifset HAS-MATH
+The result looks like this: @math{\root 3 \of {x+y}}.
+ at end ifset
@item \stackrel@{@var{text}@}@{@var{relation}@}
Puts @var{text} above @var{relation}. For example,
@code{\stackrel@{f@}@{\longrightarrow@}}.
- at tex
-In @TeX{}, the result looks like this:
-$\buildrel f \over \longrightarrow$.
- at end tex
+ at ifset HAS-MATH
+ The result looks like this: @math{\buildrel f \over \longrightarrow}.
+ at end ifset
- at item \underbrace@{math@}
-Generates @var{math} with a brace underneath.
- at tex
-In @TeX{}, the result looks like this:
-$\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}$.
- at end tex
+ at item \underbrace@{@var{math}@}
+Generates @var{math} with a brace underneath. For example, @code{\underbrace@{x+y+z@}_@{>\,0@}}
+ at ifset HAS-MATH
+The result looks like this: @math{\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}}.
+ at end ifset
- at item \underline@{text@}
+ at item \underline@{@var{text}@}
Causes @var{text}, which may be either math mode or not, to be
underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of
descenders.
- at tex
-In @TeX{}, the result looks like this:
-$\underline{xyz}$
- at end tex
+ at ifset HAS-MATH
+The result looks like this: @math{\underline{xyz}}
+ at end ifset
@item \vdots
- at findex \vdots
Produces a vertical ellipsis.
- at tex
-In @TeX{}, the result looks like this:
-$\vdots$.
- at end tex
+ at ifset HAS-MATH
+The result looks like this: @math{\vdots}.
+ at end ifset
@end ftable
@@ -7446,7 +8667,51 @@
be in ``inner paragraph mode'' (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph
mode, which it starts out in, is called ``outer paragraph mode''.
+ at menu
+* \ensuremath:: Ensure that math mode is active
+ at end menu
+ at node \ensuremath
+ at section @code{\ensuremath}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ at example
+\ensuremath@{@var{formula}@}
+ at end example
+
+The @code{\ensuremath} command ensures that @var{formula} is typeset in
+math mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used.
+
+For instance:
+
+ at example
+\documentclass@{report@}
+\newcommand@{\ab@}@{\ensuremath@{(\delta, \varepsilon)@}@}
+\begin@{document@}
+Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac@{1@}@{\pi@}, 0)\), ...
+\end@{document@}
+ at end example
+
+One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that
+they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for
+ at code{\leadsto}:
+
+ at c Vincent 2 Karl : "Tous les chemins m\xE8nent \xE0 Rome" is a French saying
+ at c meaning that there are many different ways to get the same result. I
+ at c am not sure whether in English the given example is also funny.
+ at example
+\documentclass@{report@}
+\usepackage@{amssymb@}
+\newcommand@{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo@}@{@}
+\let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto
+\renewcommand\leadsto@{\ensuremath@{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo@}@}
+\begin@{document@}
+All roads \leadsto\ Rome.
+\end@{document@}
+ at end example
+
+
@node Page styles
@chapter Page styles
@@ -7613,11 +8878,11 @@
Horizontal space
* \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space.
* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space.
-* \(SPACE) and \@@:: Space after a period.
-* \(SPACE) after CS:: Controlling space gobbling after a control sequence.
-* \frenchspacing:: Make interword and intersentence space equal.
+* \(SPACE) and \@@:: Space after a period.
+* \(SPACE) after control sequence:: Space (gobbling) after a control sequence.
+* \frenchspacing:: Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
* \thinspace:: One-sixth of an em.
-* \/:: Insert italic correction.
+* \/:: Insert italic correction.
* \hrulefill \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
Vertical space
@@ -7650,7 +8915,7 @@
Normally when @TeX{} breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both. This
-command's starred version @code{\hspace*@{..@}} puts a non-discardable
+command's starred version @code{\hspace*@{...@}} puts a non-discardable
invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
output.
@@ -7698,7 +8963,7 @@
sentence unless it is preceded by a capital letter, in which case it
takes that period for part of an abbreviation. Note that if a
sentence-ending period is immediately followed by a right parenthesis or
-bracket, or right single or double quote, then the intersentence space
+bracket, or right single or double quote, then the inter-sentence space
follows that parenthesis or quote.
If you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not a
@@ -7707,32 +8972,33 @@
a tie (@code{~}). Examples are @code{Nat.\ Acad.\ Science}, and
@code{Mr.~Bean}, and @code{(manure, etc.)\ for sale}.
-For other use of @code{\ }, see also @ref{\(SPACE) after CS}.
+For another use of @code{\ }, @pxref{\(SPACE) after control sequence}.
In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
-period that ends the sentence, then put @code{\@@} on the left of that
-period. For example, @code{book by the MAA\@@.} will have intersentence
+period that ends the sentence, then put @code{\@@} before that period.
+For example, @code{book by the MAA\@@.} will have inter-sentence
spacing after the period.
-In contrast, putting @code{\@@} on the right of a period tells @TeX{}
-that the period does not end the sentence. In the example
- at code{reserved words (if, then, etc.\@@) are different}, @TeX{} will put
-interword space after the closing parenthesis (note that @code{\@@} is
-before the parenthesis).
+In contrast, putting @code{\@@} after a period tells @TeX{} that the
+period does not end the sentence. In the example @code{reserved words
+(if, then, etc.\@@) are different}, @TeX{} will put interword space
+after the closing parenthesis (note that @code{\@@} is before the
+parenthesis).
- at node \(SPACE) after CS
- at section @code{\ } after a control sequence
-The @code{\ } command is often used after control sequences to keep them
-from gobbling the space that follows, as in @code{\TeX\ is a nice
-system.} And, under normal circumstances @code{\}@key{tab} and
- at code{\}@key{newline} are equivalent to @code{\ }. For other use of
+ at node \(SPACE) after control sequence
+ at section @code{\ } after control sequence
+
+The @code{\ } command is often used after control sequences to keep
+them from gobbling the space that follows, as in @samp{\TeX\ is nice}.
+And, under normal circumstances, @code{\}@key{tab} and
+ at code{\}@key{newline} are equivalent to @code{\ }. For another use of
@code{\ }, see also @ref{\(SPACE) and \@@}.
Some people prefer to use @code{@{@}} for the same purpose, as in
- at code{\TeX@{@} is a nice system.} This has the advantage that you can
-always write it the same way, like @code{\TeX@{@}}, whether it is
-followed by a space or by a punctuation mark. Please compare:
@@ Diff output truncated at 1234567 characters. @@
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list